PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS – Volume 3

University of Colorado at Boulder JILA Laboratory Addition PR 002650 PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS – Volume 3

Design Development Technical Review

January 19, 2010

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review Table of Contents - 1

Table of Contents – DD Package - Volume 3

Divisions 26 thru 33 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 13 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 26 GROUNDING 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 34 CABINETS, BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 35 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 12 00 MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 14 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATOR 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 26 43 13 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 26 51 00 LIGHTING 26 51 01 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 26 56 00 POLES AND STANDARDS

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 05 00 COMMUNICATIONS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 27 05 26 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING 27 05 36 CABLE TRAYS 27 08 00 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM WORK 27 13 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 23 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 27 15 00 HORIZONTAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION 27 18 00 INTERIOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 00 00 SECURITY SYSTEMS - GENERAL 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROLS 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 31 23 19 DEWATERING

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review Table of Contents - 2

31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 25 00 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 63 29 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVMENTS

32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 14 00 UNIT PAVING 32 84 00 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 91 16 LANDSCAPE GRADING 32 93 00 PLANTS

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 11 00 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 31 00 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00-1

SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL:

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section and all subsequent Division 26 sections.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 26. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1 through 22.

1.3 ACCESSIBILITY:

A. Install equipment and materials to provide required code clearances and access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location with piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades to insure proper access for all trades. Coordinate locations of concealed equipment, disconnects, and boxes with access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of parts, fuses, lamps, etc. that require replacement or servicing.

B. Extend all conduits so that junction and pull boxes are in accessible locations.

C. Provide access panel or doors where equipment or boxes are concealed behind finished surfaces.

1.4 ROUGH-IN:

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 22 for rough-in requirements.

1.5 PROJECT SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS:

A. All electrical and fire alarm systems shall be installed to meet NFPA and IBC Seismic requirements.

1. Where any conflicts arise the more stringent requirements shall be applicable. 2. The design of the seismic requirements shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:

A. Execute and inspect all work in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and all local and state codes, rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans and/or specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the more stringent requirement shall be followed. Follow application sections and requirements and testing procedures of NFPA, IEEE, NEMA, CBM, ANSI, NECA, ICEA and NETA.

B. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a standard or specific date or edition is indicated.



C. All material used on this project shall be UL listed and labeled and be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the use intended.

D. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner.

1.7 REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES:

A. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

1.8 PERMITS AND FEES:

A. Contractor shall pay all fees required for connection to municipal and public utility facilities.

B. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all inspections, licenses and certificates required in connection with the work.

1.9 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS:

A. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required conduit, box, fitting, etc.

B. Drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as though called for in both.

C. Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as shop drawings. Where drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurement, take the necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.

D. Before any work is begun, determine that equipment will properly fit the space and that conduit can be run as contemplated without interferences between systems, with structural elements or with the work of other trades.

E. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above and below ceilings with suspension system, luminaires and other building components. Ductwork and piping shall not be installed above electrical panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and transformers.

1. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, space for mechanical and electric systems within the cavity shall be allocated in the following order:

a. Plumbing waste, vent piping and roof drain mains and leaders. b. Supply, return and exhaust ductwork. c. Fire sprinkler mains and leaders. d. Electrical conduit. e. Domestic hot and cold water. f. Pneumatic control piping. g. Fire sprinkler branch piping and sprinkler runouts.

F. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

G. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to accommodate electrical installations.



H. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

I. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring an access path for positioning prior to closing-in the building or space.

J. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials.

K. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical conduits, boxes, and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. In general, keep installations tight to structure.

L. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting and removal with minimum of interference with other installations.

M. Installation shall comply with the local seismic requirements for the area of installation. Provide restraints, bracing, anchors, vibration isolation, seismic snubbers, and all other components required for the installation.

1.10 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS:

A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare 24”x36” drawings to an accurate scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.

B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate and integrate all installations. Indicate locations where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Electric equipment room layouts

2. Mechanical equipment room layouts

C. Prepare coordination drawings for specific equipment installations, including, but not limited to the following:

1. Switchgear 2. Generators and automatic transfer switches 3. Dry type transformers 4. Switchboards and panelboards 5. Equipment connections 6. Control panels 7. Circuit and motor disconnects 8. Feeder conduits

D. Wiring Diagrams: Provide wiring diagrams indicating field installed electrical power and control wiring and cabling layouts, overcurrent protective devices, equipment, and equipment connections.



1.11 EQUIPMENT HOUSEKEEPING PADS:

A. Provide 4" concrete housekeeping pad for all floor mounted equipment including, but not limited to: switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, floor mounted distribution panelboards, floor mounted branch panelboards, and floor mounted dry type transformers. Fabricate pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Fabricate base 4" larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit.

2. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad.

3. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland cement that conforms to ASTM C 150, 4000-psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate.

4. Anchor housekeeping pads to slab using #3 rebar bent in “L” or “Z” shape 12 inch on center on each side of slab.

1.12 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING:

A. General:

1. Provide all necessary excavation and backfill for installation of electrical work in accordance with Division 2.

2. In general, follow all regulations of OSHA as specified in Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations, Trenching and Shoring." Follow specifications of Division 16 as they refer specifically to the electrical work.

B. Contact Owners of all underground utilities to have them located and marked, at least 2 business days before excavation is to begin. Prior to starting excavation, brief employees on marking and color codes and train employees on excavation and safety procedures for natural gas lines. When excavation approaches gas lines, expose lines by carefully probing and hand digging.

C. Backfilling shall not be started until all work has been inspected, tested and accepted. All backfill material shall be accepted by the soils engineer. In no case shall lumber, metal or other debris be buried in with backfill.

D. Trench Backfill

1. Backfill to 4 inches above top of conduits with sand, the same as used for conduit bed, compact properly.

2. Continue backfill to finish grade, using friable material free of rock and other debris. Install in 6 inch layers, each properly moistened and mechanically compacted prior to installation of ensuing layer. Compaction by hydraulic jetting is not permissible.

E. After backfilling and compacting, any settling shall be refilled, tamped, and refinished at contractor's expense.

F. This contractor shall repair and pay for any damage to finished surfaces.

G. Backfill near manholes or hand holes using sand, installing it in 6 inch layers to 4 inches above the shallowest conduit. Use suitable excavated material to complete the backfill, installed in 6 inch layers



and mechanically compacted to seal against water infiltration. Compact to 95% below paving and slabs and 90% elsewhere.

1.13 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS:

A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and Division 1 Section covering shop drawings, product data, and samples for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures.

B. The manufacturer's material or equipment listed first in the specifications or on the drawings are the types to be provided for the establishment of size, capacity, grade and quality. If alternates are used in lieu of the first names, the cost of any changes in construction required by their use shall be borne by this Contractor.

C. All equipment shall conform to the State and/or local Energy Conservation Standards.

D. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when submitted by the Contractor. Each submittal shall be reviewed for general conformance with contract requirements and stamped by the respective contractor prior to submittal to the Architect/Engineer. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Architect/Engineer will not be processed unless written prior approval is obtained by the Contractor.

E. Before starting work, prepare and submit to the Architect/Engineer two (2) sets of all shop drawings, descriptive product data, and samples required for the project. Continue to submit two (2) sets, after each Architect/Engineer's action, until a "No Exception Taken" or "Make Correction Noted" action is received. Submittals shall include the following specified materials and, in addition, any materials not listed below but which are specified in the individual sections of Division 26 which follow:

1. Raceways 2. Cabinets, boxes, fittings, etc. 3. Wiring devices 4. Electrical equipment signs and labels. 5. Switchboards 6. Grounding 7. Transformers 8. Panelboards 9. Disconnect Switches 10. Circuit breakers and fused switches for installation in existing panelboards or distribution

centers. 11. Automatic and manual transfer switches including all ancillary equipment. 12. Poles and Standards. 13. Lighting 14. Emergency power supplies including unit type equipment. 15. Engine generator including transfer switches and all ancillary equipment. 16. Fire alarm and detection system. 17. Uninterruptible Power Supplies 18. Lighting control system including individual wall dimmers.

F. Submit letters certifying compliance with ANSI standards for medium or high voltage gear. These letters shall be signed by a corporate officer and shall list applicable standards. Letters signed by local representatives will not be acceptable.

G. Submit proposed changes to electrical room or other equipment room layouts when revised from contract documents prior to installation.



H. Mark submittals with designations as shown on the drawings and identify as required by Specification Sections. Identification shall contain the information as required in details and each label shall be submitted in list form with disconnects, panelboards, switchboards, overcurrent protection devices and utilization equipment.

I. All electrical submittals shall be assembled into a single package after approval of all sections.

1. Submittals shall be provided in expandable, three-ring, hard back binders.

2. Each submittal shall be tabbed by the electrical specification section it is specified in.

3. An index shall be provided which includes:

a. Product b. Plan Code (if applicable) c. Specification Section d. Manufacturer and Model Number

4. Submittals shall be provided for review within four (4) working weeks from award of contract to successful bidder.

1.14 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. The burden of proof that proposed equipment is equal in size, capacity, performance, and other pertinent criteria for this specific installation, or superior to that specified is up to the Contractor. Substituted equipment will only be allowed where specifically listed in a written addendum. If substitutions are not granted, the specified materials and equipment must be installed. Where substituted equipment is allowed, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify all related trades of the accepted substitution and to assume full responsibility for all costs caused as a result of the substitution.

B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) manufacture.

1.15 PRODUCT LISTING:

A. Prepare a list of major electrical equipment and materials for the project. A sample schedule is included at the end of this Section to complete this requirement.

B. Provide a product listing within one (1) week from award of contract to successful bidder.

C. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in the Division 1 Section on Products and Substitutions.

D. When two or more items of same material or equipment are required they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, sheet metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners and similar items used in Work, except as otherwise indicated.

E. For conduit, wire and fittings, the Contractor shall select a prime and alternate manufacturer from the list of acceptable manufacturers provided in the appropriate sections of this Division. The prime and alternate manufacturers shall be identified in the product listing. The contractor shall make every effort to use the prime manufacturer for the entire project. If products from this manufacturer are unavailable, the Contractor shall use the listed alternate with the following provisions.



1. Wire: All wire placed in a single conduit or installed in multiple conduits making up parallel feeders shall be of the same manufacturer.

2. Conduit and Fittings: All conduits and fittings installed exposed within the same room or immediate area shall be of the same manufacturer.

F. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items.

1.16 SCHEDULE OF VALUES:

A. Provide Preliminary Schedule of Values to Engineer with product data submittal within three (3) weeks from award of contract to successful bidder. Provide according to the following descriptions:

1. Service/Distribution 2. Lighting - Interior 3. Lighting - Exterior 4. Basic Materials/Devices/Equipment Connections (Mechanical) 5. Emergency Generator 6. Fire Alarm (Material/Installation) 7. Uninterruptible Power Supplies 8. Miscellaneous

1.17 NAMEPLATE DATA:

A. Provide equipment with permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Install equipment so that nameplate is readily visible.

1.18 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Refer to the Division 1, Sections on Transportation and Handling and Storage and Protection.

B. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.

C. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage and weather.

D. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.

1.19 RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Refer to the Division 1 Section on Project Closeout or Project Record Documents for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.

B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location both exterior and interior; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support and hanger details; Change Orders; concealed control system devices, and any other relevant deviations from the Contract Documents.



C. Mark shop drawings to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials used.

D. Mark luminaire schedule on drawings to indicate manufacturer and complete catalog numbers of installed equipment.

E. Mark schedules including panelboard, switchboard, motor control center, mechanical, kitchen and similar equipment schedules on drawings to indicate installed equipment and materials used, and any deviations or revisions to electrical load data and calculations.

F. During construction, the contractor shall maintain at the job site a set of updated construction documents for the singular purpose of recording the above information. All record drawings shall be completed in erasable pencil. These changes shall be updated weekly.

G. Revisions to the Contract Documents shall be legible and shall be prepared using the following color scheme.

1. Red shall indicate new items, deviations and routing. 2. Green shall indicate items removed or deleted. 3. Blue shall be used for relevant notes and descriptions.

H. At the completion of the project, submit these documents to the Architect/Engineer. This contract will not be considered completed until these record documents have been received and reviewed by the Architect/Engineer.

1.20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:

A. Refer to the Division 1 Section on project closeout or operation and maintenance data for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals.

B. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for Maintenance Data, include the following information:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, fuse curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 5. Complete list of parts and wiring diagrams. 6. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor, Sub-contractors and local company

responsible for maintenance of each system or piece of equipment. 7. All information shall be permanently bound in a 3-ring binder. The job name and address and

contractor's name and address shall be placed on the cover and spine of each binder in a permanent manner. Dymo-tape is not acceptable.

8. Copies of all test reports shall be included in the manuals. 9. Provide manuals with dividers for major sections and special equipment. Mark neatly in ink the

individual equipment when more than one model or make is listed on a page. Provide detailed table of contents.



10. Final Schedule of Values with all Electrical (and Information Technology) change order costs included and identified.

C. This contract will not be considered completed nor will final payment be made until all specified material, including test reports, and final Schedule of Values with all Electrical change order costs included and identified is provided and the manual is reviewed by the Architect/Engineer.

1.21 TESTING:

A. Submit test reports as outlined in Division 1 Sections on Quality Control Services and each Division 16 Section.

B. Testing as required by these specifications shall pertain to all equipment, wiring, devices, etc. installed under this contract and being reused.

C. General Scope:

1. Perform all tests and operational checks to assure that all electrical equipment, both Contractor and Owner-supplied, is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and is installed in accordance with design specifications.

2. The tests and operational checks shall determine the suitability for energization.

3. Schedule tests and give a minimum of two weeks advance notice to the Architect. Reschedule testing for Owner convenience if required.

D. Test Report: Submit three copies of the completed report to the Architect no later than fifteen (15) days after completion of test unless directed otherwise. The test report shall be bound and its contents certified.

The test report shall include the following:

1. Project information including: Building, name, address, date, and other pertinent information.

2. List of equipment tested.

3. Description of test.

4. List of test equipment used and calibration date.

5. Baseline, acceptable, or published target value for test with code or standard reference indicating where value was derived.

6. Test results that summarize all measured values with baseline values.

7. Conclusions and recommendations.

8. Appendix, including appropriate test forms that show all measured values.

E. Failure to Meet Test:

1. Any system material or workmanship which is found defective on the basis of performance tests shall be reported directly to the Architect.



2. All failed tests shall be sent immediately by fax to Engineer with proposed corrective action and proposed re-test date and time.

3. Contractor shall replace the defective material or equipment as necessary, and have test repeated until test proves satisfactory without additional cost to the Owner.

4. The Contractor or testing agency shall have a calibration program which maintains all applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy. The accuracy shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) in an unbroken chain. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule:

a. Field Instruments: 6 months b. Laboratory Instruments: 12 months c. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months. (Where accuracy is guaranteed by lessor, i.e.,

Doble).

Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

1.22 WARRANTIES:

A. Refer to the Division 1 Section on Warranties and Bonds for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. In no case shall the warranty for the total electrical system be less than one year from date of acceptance by the Owner.

B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 26, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.

C. Provide complete warranty information for each item. Information to include product or equipment description, date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.

1.23 CLEANING:

A. Refer to the Division 1 Section on project closeout or final cleaning for general requirements for final cleaning.

B. Clean all luminairs, lamps and lenses per manufacturer’s recommendations prior to final acceptance. Replace all inoperative lamps.

1.24 PROJECT CLOSEOUT LIST:

A. The contractor shall be responsible for providing the items listed on the checklist prior to final observation. Required test reports shall be included in the O & M manuals. (Checklist is located at the end of this section.)

1.25 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:

A. The contractor shall maintain and have available at the jobsite current information on the following at all times:

1. Up to date record drawings. 2. Submittals 3. Site observation reports with current status of all action items. 4. Test results; including recorded values, procedures, and other findings.



5. Outage information. Division 16

SPEC

SECTION

ITEM

REQUIREMENTS

REPORT/ DATA

TEST

FA

CTO

RY

TES

T

REP

OR

T

FAC

TOR

Y R

EP

SUPE

RV

ISIO

N

AT

SITE

TRA

ININ

G

REQ

D A

T SI

TE

EX

TRA

M

ATE

RIA

L

O &

M

SHO

P D

RA

WIN

G

LIST

ING

PR

OD

UC

T D

ATA

26 05 00

PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE OF VALUES

X

FINAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES

X

X

ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS

X

CONTRACTOR/EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES

X

O&M MANUALS X X X X

26 05 13 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES X X X X X

26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRIC POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

X X X X

26 05 26 GROUNDING X X X X X

26 05 29 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

X X X

26 05 33 RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

X

ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING X X

FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT X X

INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT

X X

LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

X X

NON-METALLIC CONDUIT PVC X X

RIGID METAL CONDUIT X X

26 05 34 CABINETS, BOXES & FITTINGS X X X

26 05 35 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT

X X

26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION X X



SPEC

SECTION

ITEM

REQUIREMENTS

REPORT/ DATA

TEST

FA

CTO

RY

TES

T

REP

OR

T

FAC

TOR

Y R

EP

SUPE

RV

ISIO

N

AT

SITE

TRA

ININ

G

REQ

D A

T SI

TE

EX

TRA

M

ATE

RIA

L

O &

M

SHO

P D

RA

WIN

G

LIST

ING

PR

OD

UC

T D

ATA

26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

X X X X

26 12 00 MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

X X X X X X

26 22 00 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS X X X X X

26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS X X X X X X X X X

26 24 14 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEMS

X X X X X X X

26 24 16 PANELBOARDS X X X X X X

26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES X X X

26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

X X X X X X X

26 32 13 ENEGINE GENERATOR -NATURAL GAS

X X X X X X X X X

26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES X X X X X X X X

26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

X X X X X X X X

26 43 13 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR

X X X X X X

26 51 00 LIGHTING X X X X X

BALLASTS X X X X

26 51 01 EMERGENCY LIGHTING X X X X

26 56 00 POLES & STANDARDS X X

28 31 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS X X X X X X X



ELECTRICAL PRODUCT LISTING

Page_____of_____ Project Name_____________________________________________________ Date_____________________________________________________________ Contractor_______________________________________________________ The following is a listing of equipment and materials which will be used on the above-referenced project. This product listing does not remove the requirement for submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples as may be called for elsewhere in these specifications. Provide this list to Architect/Engineer within 2 weeks of contract award.

SPEC SECTION

ITEM MANUFACTURER PROPOSED

LEAD TIME (WKS)

END SECTION


MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 26 05 13 - 1

SECTION 26 05 13 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This section includes single and multiple conductor cables and splices, terminations, and accessories for 2,001- to 35,000-volt electrical distribution systems.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer of medium- voltage electrical cable to perform

the installation specified in this section. In addition, for the specific work of cable splicing and terminating, engage Installers who are experienced in cable splices for the specific types of cable and cable accessories specified in this Section. Refer to Division 1 Section "Definitions and Standards" for definition of experienced Installer. Contractor doing splices shall be certified by UCB High Voltage Shop per UCB Standard 16010, 3.01.D.3.

B. Field Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing

organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.

C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Cables and components

shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on cables and cable accessories including

descriptions and detailed specifications.

B. Submit shop drawings for cables and cable accessories, including splices and terminations.

C. Product Certificate: Submit product certificate signed by manufacturer that its products comply with the specified requirements.

D. Installer Certificates: Submit installer certificates signed by Contractor that Installers of cable splices

and terminations meet the experience qualifications specified under "Quality Assurance."

E. Product Test Reports: Submit certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance of cable and accessories with referenced standards.

F. Report of Field Tests: Certified copies of field test records. Reports to indicate and interpret test results

relative to compliance with performance requirements specified.

G. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for cables and accessories for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and in Division 16, Section "Basic Electrical Requirements." In addition to the requirements specified there, include:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of cables in service.

2. Operating instructions for fault indicators and separable insulated connectors and their

accessories.



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver medium-voltage cable on factory reels conforming to NEMA Standard WC 26.

B. Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in a clean, dry location.

1.5 WARRANTY:

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, mutually executed by manufacturer and the principal Installer, agreeing to repair or replace medium-voltage cables, splices, and terminations that fail in materials or workmanship within the special project warranty period specified below. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and remedies the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

B. Special Project Warranty Period: 2 years beginning on the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Cable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. The Okonite Co. 2. Kerite.

B. Cable Terminating Products and Accessories:

1. Elastimold. 2. Cooper Power.

C. Test Point Fault Indicator, Cooper Power STAR type or equivalent.

1. Cooper Power Systems STAR

a. S-STAR FCI Line b. T-Test Point Reset c. L-Trip Rating 400 amps d. 0-Trip Rating 400 amps e. A-Options standard indicator with auxiliary contacts

D. Cable Splices:

1. Raychem 2. Canusa

2.2 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLE:

A. General: Cable shall be copper, compact, Class B stranded, size as indicated, and conforming to UL

Standard 1072 "Medium Voltage Power Cables." Minimum size: #2/0 AWG.

B. Extruded semi-conducting strand screen meeting ICEA S-94-649, AEIC CS8-00 and UL 1072 (type MV-105).

C. Insulation: 15kV rating, ungrounded, UL listed. Insulation shall meet ICEA S-94-649, AEIC CS8-00,

and UL 1072 (type MV-105). Insulation shall be ethylene propylene rubber (EPF) 133%, 220 mil (minimum). The ethylene content of the elastomer used in the insulation compound shall not exceed



72% by weight nor shall the insulation compound contain polyethylene. Insulation compound must be manufactured in house.

D. Insulating Screen: Extruded semi-conducting insulation screen directly over insulation meeting ICEA

S-94-649, AEIC CS8-00 and UL 1072 (type MV-105).

E. Shield shall be bare copper round wire, 1/3 neutral.

F. Jacket shall be low density polyethylene with three red stripes, meeting ICEA S-94-649, UL 1072 and UL listed type MV-105.

2.3 TERMINATING PRODUCTS:

A. General: Comply with the following standards:

1. IEEE 48: "IEEE Standard Test Procedures and Requirements For High-Voltage Alternating

Current Cable Terminations."

2. IEEE 400: "Guide For Making High-Direct-Voltage Tests on Power Cable Systems in the Field."

3. IEEE 404: "Standard For Power Cable Joints."

4. IEEE 592: "Standard For Exposed Semiconducting Shields on Premolded High-Voltage Cable

Joints and Separable Insulated Connectors."

5. UL 486A: "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors."

6. UL 486B: "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Aluminum Conductors."

B. Modular Live Front Rubber Terminations:

1. Kit form, heat shrink type, suitable for use with cable specified, including stress cone, ground clamp, non-tracking rubber skirts, connector, rubber cap and appropriate lug.

C. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Molded rubber load-break separable elbow-type connector with

200-ampere load make/break and continuous current rating. Thermoset arc quenching material. Provide test for voltage indication and fault indicator point in elbow. Elbow shall be compatible with cable, fault current rating, and current rating.

1. Electrical Ratings:

a. Voltage ratings:

15 kV 25 kV

1) Phase to ground: kV maximum 8.3 15.2 2) Phase to phase: kV 14.4 26.3 3) BIL: kV for 1.2 x 50 wave 95 125 4) Withstand: a. AC: kV at 60 Hz for 1 minute 34 40

b. DC: kV for 15 minutes 53 78

5) Corona: kV 11 19



b. Switching ratings:

1) Loadmake: 10 make operations at 200 amperes, 70-80% power factor, at phase to phase voltage rating.

2) Loadbreak: 10 break operations at 200 amperes, 70-80% power factor, at phase to

phase voltage rating.

c. Fault Change Rating:

1) 10,000 amperes, RMS, symmetrical, 3 cycles, at 14.4kV after 10 rated make and 10 rated break operations.

D. Dead Break Elbow: Molded rubber separable elbow-type connectors conforming to IEEE standard 386.

Provide test point on T-body for fault current indicator.

2.4 ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS

A. Tape for first course on metal objects shall be 10-mil-thick, corrosion-protective, moisture-resistant PVC pipe-wrapping tape.

B. Arc-proofing tape shall consist of a UL-listed fireproofing tape. Tape shall be flexible, conformable,

intumescent to 0.3-inches thick, and compatible with the cable jacket on which used. Tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion.

C. Glass cloth tape shall be pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1/2-inch wide.

2.5 FAULT INDICATORS:

A. Indicators: Manual reset, fault indicator, arranged to clamp to cable sheath and provide a display after

the cable has faulted. Instrument shall be immune to heat, moisture, and corrosive conditions and shall be recommended by the manufacturer for the installation conditions. Indicators shall have current trip ratings and quantities as indicated.

B. Tool Set: Shot-gun-type hot stick with energized terminal indicator and fault indicator test tool.

Furnish a moisture-resistant storage carrying case. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine raceways, cable trays, pull boxes, manholes, junction boxes, and other cable installation locations for cleanliness of raceways, minimum bending radii of cables, and conditions affecting performance of cable. Pull a mandrel through raceways to check for suitable conditions. Do not proceed with cable installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:

A. General: Install cable accessory items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and as

indicated.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES:

A. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one cable is indicated in same raceway. Use UL-listed

and manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

B. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will not

damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable.

C. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible.

D. Install direct buried cable on a leveled and tamped 3-inch bed of clean sand at bottom of trench. Install

"buried cable" warning tape 12 inches above cable. Separate cables crossing other cables or piping from those items by a minimum of 4 inches of tamped earth. Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in direction, and buried splices.

E. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes and cable vaults, train cables around walls (full

looped) by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag.

F. Cable and conductor lengths shall be continuous, unspliced from outlet of conduits or ducts.

G. Minimum inside bending radius for primary cable furnished shall be twelve (12) times the overall diameter of the cable as measured to the inside of the cable jacket. Cables that have been bent by the contractor to a lesser radius may be rejected and shall be replaced at contractor's expense.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SPLICES:

A. All cable splices shall be made in manhole or handhole at pull points and elsewhere as indicated using

standard kit. Conform to cable and kit manufacturer's written instructions. All cable splices shall be installed by certified cable splicer with UCB certification. Provide stress cones at all splices.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF TERMINATIONS:

A. Install terminations at ends of conductors and seal multiconductor cable ends with standard kits.

Conform to cable and kit manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with classes of terminations indicated. All cable terminations shall be installed by certified cable splicer with UCB certification. Provide stress cones at all terminations.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque

tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for the correct phasing-out of the conductors of each circuit at

terminations and/or splices.

D. As cables are installed, all cut ends shall immediately be either sealed, connected to potheads or approved terminating devices, or joined to the next cable section. Cut ends of cable shall not be left open.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CABLE ACCESSORIES:

A. Arc-Proofing: Arc-proof medium-voltage cable at locations not protected by conduit, cable tray, direct

burial, or termination materials except where indicated. Apply as recommended by the manufacturer of the arc-proofing tape and the following:



1. Clean cable sheath.

2. Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil-pipe wrapping tape.

3. Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty.

4. Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with the coated side toward the cable.

5. Band the arc-proofing tape with 1-inch-wide bands of half-lapped adhesive glass-cloth tape 2

inches on center.

B. Fault Indicators: Install fault indicators on each phase where indicated.

3.7 GROUNDING:

A. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated connector fittings, and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Connect the primary cable grounding conductors to the ground lug at the transformers and in turn to the

ground rod.

C. The shields of all primary cable terminations shall be bonded to the local ground.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Identify cable in accordance with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." Identification tags with phase and circuit number at each junction or pull point.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. General: Comply with applicable standards of The InterNational Electrical Testing Association

(INETA) including Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems."

B. Preparation: Perform the following preparations in advance of independent tests:

1. Test cables' insulation resistance.

2. Test circuits' continuity.

3. Furnish a set of Contract Documents and manufacturer's recommendations to test organization.

4. Make power available at test locations.

C. Schedule tests and notify Architect at least one week in advance of schedule for test commencement.

All tests shall be witnessed by CU Facilities Department.

D. Test procedure shall conform to the following:

1. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an independent electrical testing organization in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 Section "Quality Control Services" to perform tests on medium-voltage cable.



2. Test Objectives: To assure cable installation is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is installed in accordance with Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing.

3. Procedures: Comply with the INETA standard and IEEE 400. Upon satisfactory completion of

tests, attach a label to tested components.

4. Tests shall include high-potential test of cable and accessories and such tests and examinations required to achieve specified objectives. Where new cables are spliced to existing cables, the high-potential test shall be performed on the new cable prior to splicing. After test results for new cables are approved and splice is made, an insulation resistance test and continuity test on the length of cable including the splice with the existing cables being tested to the nearest disconnect point.

E. Reports: The testing organization shall maintain a written record of observations and tests, report

defective materials and workmanship, and retest corrected defective items. Testing organization shall submit written reports to the Architect and Contractor.

END OF SECTION


LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control, and related systems rated 600 volts and less.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable products of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience with projects

utilizing electrical wiring and cabling work similar to that required for this project.

C. Conform to applicable code regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory- fabricated type containers, or wound on NEMA-specified type wire and cable reels.

B. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect products from weather, damaging

fumes, construction debris and traffic.

C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is maintained.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following (for each type of wire, cable, and connector):

1. Wire and Cable:

a. Triangle - PWC b. American Insulated Wire c. Anaconda-Ericsson Inc; Wire and Cable Div. d. Belden Div; Cooper Industries. e. Brand-Rex Div; Pyle National Co. f. General Cable Corporation. g. Hitemp Wires, Inc. h. Phelps Dodge Cable and Wire Co. i. Rome Cable Corp. j. Southwire Company

2. Connectors:

a. O-Z/Gedney Co. b. AMP, Inc.



c. Burndy Corporation. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. 3M Company f. Thomas and Betts Corp.

2.2 WIRES AND CABLES:

A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions, and location where installed. Building wire shall be insulated with THW/THHN/THWN/RH/RHW/RHH/XHHW insulation, rated 600 volt.

B. Conductors: Provide solid conductors for power and lighting circuits 12 AWG and smaller. Provide stranded

conductors for 10 AWG and larger.

C. Conductor Material: Provide copper for all wires and cables. 2.3 CONNECTORS:

A. General: Provide UL-type factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperatures equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE:

A. Building Wire: Install all building wire in raceway regardless of location. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES:

A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate wire/cable installation work, including electrical raceway and equipment connection work, with

other work.

C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Conduits shall be swabbed clean before wire is pulled.

D. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not damage

cables or raceway. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.

E. Keep conductor splices to minimum. Splice only in accessible junction boxes. No splices are allowed in feeder, control or fire alarm wiring. Connect unspliced wire to numbered terminal strips at each end.

F. Install splices and taps which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than

conductors being spliced.

G. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.

H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A for copper and 486B for aluminum.



I. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than No. 10 AWG cabled to individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.

J. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps, 8 AWG and larger.

For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps.

K. Use copper compression connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 1/0 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of the conductor.

L. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.

M. Thoroughly tape the ends of spare conductors in boxes and cabinets.

N. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural members, and follow

surface contours, where possible.

O. Make all ground, neutral and line connections to receptacle and wiring device terminals as recommended by manufacturer. Provide ground jumper from outlet box to individual ground terminal of devices.

P. Branch circuits whose length from panel to first outlet exceeds 75 feet for 120 volt circuits shall be #10 or

larger, as required to comply with the National Electrical Code.

Q. Parallel conductors shall be cut to the same length.

R. All splices in control panels, terminal junction boxes, low voltage control circuits and fire alarm conductors shall be on numbered terminal strip.

S. Each branch circuit serving receptacles or multi-outlet assemblies shall be furnished with a dedicated neutral

conductor. Neutrals common to more than one circuit shall only be permitted for non-receptacle circuits and where specifically noted.

T. At least 6" of free conductor shall be left at each outlet, junction box and switch for splices or connection of

fixtures and devices.

U. In a multi-wire branch circuit where a circuit extends through a receptacle, all conductors shall be pigtailed so downstream load does not go through receptacles.


A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. The megger values obtained shall be compared to the minimum values listed in NETA. All phase conductors and cables shall be meggered after installation, and prior to termination.

B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.

C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with

requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. 3.4 COLOR CODING SCHEDULE:

A. Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors as follows: 120/208 Volts Phase 277/480 Volts



Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green

B. Conductors 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid color for entire length.

C. Conductors 8 AWG and larger shall be black with color coding at each termination and in each box or

enclosure. For a distance of 6 inches use half-lapped 3/4" plastic tape in the specified color. Do not cover cable identification markings. Adjust tape locations to prevent covering of markings.

END OF SECTION


GROUNDING 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product data for ground rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings.

B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for electrical grounding and bonding work which indicates

layout of ground rings, location of system grounding electrode connection, routing of grounding electrode conductors, also include diagrams for circuits and equipment grounding connections.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The terms

"listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

C. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects

with electrical grounding work similar to that required for project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Burndy Corporation 2. Cadweld Div.; Erico Products Inc. 3. Ideal Industries 4. OZ Gedney Div. 5. Thermoweld 6. Thomas and Betts Corp. 7. A.B. Chance Co.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS:

A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings,

and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.

B. Conductor Materials: Copper.



2.3 WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS:

A. General: Comply with Division 16 Section on Wires and Cables. Conform to NEC, except as

otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Stranded cable.

D. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B-3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B-8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B-33.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS:

A. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section.

B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 gage bare copper wire, terminated with copper

ferrules.

C. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, except as indicated.

2.5 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS:

A. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used.

B. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.

C. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application.

D. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, and

combinations of conductors and other items to be connected.

2.6 GROUNDING ELECTRODES:

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to core.

1. Size: 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION:

A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Application: Comply with NEC for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated.

1. Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with circuit conductors for the

following in addition to those locations where required by Code:

a. Feeders and branch circuits.



b. Provide individual grounding and neutral conductors for each isolated ground receptacle.

When individual or groups of isolated ground receptacles are on dedicated circuits, individual ground and neutral conductors for each circuit is acceptable.

2. Busway Circuits: Install separate insulated equipment ground conductor from the ground bus in

the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to the equipment ground bar terminal on the busway.

3. Laboratory Panel Circuits: Install separate insulated equipment ground wire in branch circuits

from laboratory area power panels.

4. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an insulated equipment ground conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.

5. Air Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to

duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120-V and above including air cleaners and heaters. Bond the conductor to each such unit and to the air duct.

6. Water Heater, Heat Tracing, and Anti-Frost Heater Circuits: Install separate insulated

equipment ground conductor to each electric water heater, heat tracing, and surface anti-frost heating cable. Bond this conductor to heater units, piping, and connected equipment and components.

B. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded copper except as otherwise indicted.

C. Signal and Communications: For telephone, alarm, and communication systems, provide a #6 AWG

minimum green insulated copper conductor in raceway from the grounding electrode system to each terminal cabinet or central equipment location.

D. Separately derived systems required by NEC to be grounded shall be grounded in accordance with NEC

paragraph 250-26.

E. Connections to Lightning Protection System: Bond grounding conductors or grounding conductor conduits to lightning protection down conductors or grounding conductors in compliance with NFPA 780 "Lightning Protection Systems."

F. Common Ground Bonding With Lightning Protection System: Bond electric power system ground

directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electric service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system ground conductor and installed in conduit.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment in accordance with NEC requirements except where

the Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems.

B. Electrical Room Ground Bus: Size, location, and arrangement as indicated. Space 1 inch from wall

and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Ground Rods: Locate a minimum of two-rod lengths from each other and at least the same distance from any other grounding electrode. Interconnect ground rods with bare conductors buried at least 24 inches below grade. Connect bare-cable ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic



welds except as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging the copper coating or exposing the steel. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final grade except as otherwise indicated.

D. Metallic Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper ground conductors, sized as indicated, in

conduit from the building main service equipment, or the ground bus, to main metallic water service entrances to the building. Connect ground conductors to the main metallic water service pipes by means of ground clamps. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect the ground conductor to the street side of the fitting. Do not install a grounding jumper around dielectric fittings. Bond the ground conductor conduit to the conductor at each end.

E. Braided-Type Bonding Jumpers: Install to connect ground clamps on water meter piping to bypass

water meters electrically. Use elsewhere for flexible bonding and grounding connections.

F. Route grounding conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage, except as indicated.

G. UFER Ground: Fabricate grounding electrode conductor by installing lengthwise in form for

foundation or footings. Install so conductor is within 2 inches of the bottom of the concrete. Extend conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid, grounding electrode, or ground bar as required and as shown on plan drawings and details.

H. Labeling: Provide a phenolic tag for all C.O. and grounding electrode conductors as described in

section on Electrical Identification.

I. Where C.O. grounding conductors, grounding electrode conductors, or bonding conductors are non-exposed, identify each with a 6-inch band of green tape at each end and at 10 foot intervals. When run in conduits, provide color banding on conduit per section on Electrical Identification.

3.3 CONNECTIONS:

A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or

electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points

closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.

3. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Exothermic Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground

connections except those at test wells. Install at connections to ground rods and plate electrodes. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with pressure-type

grounding lugs. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings without mechanical and electrical connection to the housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors. Terminate each conductor on an individual ground lug terminal.



D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A.

E. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct

circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor.

F. Moisture Protection: Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods or ground buses,

insulate the entire area of the connection and seal against moisture penetration of the insulation and cable.

3.4 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING:

A. Pad Mounted Gear: Install a 3/4-inch by 10-ft. driven ground rod inside the cable access blockout of

the pad and set the rod depth such that 4 inches will extend above the finished pad. Where necessary, install ground rod before the equipment is placed. Protect ground rods passing through concrete with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below the concrete.

B. Grounding System: Ground non-current-carrying metallic items associated with pad-mounted

equipment by connecting them to grounding electrodes arranged as indicated.


A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance-to-ground is over 5 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance. Tests shall be witnessed by UCB Facilities Representative.

B. Ground Resistance Test:

1. Grounding electrode resistance testing shall be accomplished with a ground resistance direct-

reading single test meter utilizing the fall-of-potential method and two reference electrodes. Perform test prior to interconnection to other grounding systems. Orient the ground electrode to be tested and the two reference electrodes in a straight line spaced fifty (50) feet apart. Drive the two reference electrodes five (5) feet deep.

2. Test results shall be in writing, and shall show temperature, humidity and condition of the soil at

the time of the tests. In the case where the ground resistance exceeds 5 ohms, drive additional ground rods and retest.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING:

A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as

otherwise indicated. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other Work to their original condition. Include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. Restore vegetation and disturbed paving to original condition.

END OF SECTION

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010

JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 29 - 1

SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product data for each type of product specified.

1. Hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, spacing, features, and application for each required type of hanger, support, sleeve, seal, and fastener to be used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS:


1. Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. B-Line Systems, Inc. c. GS Metals Corp. d. Unistrut Diversified Products

2. Conduit Sealing Bushings:

a. O-Z/Gedney b. Cooper Industries, Inc. c. GS Metals Corp. d. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. e. Madison Equipment Co. f. Raco, Inc. g. Spring City Electrical Mgf. Co. h. Thomas & Betts Corp.

2.2 COATINGS:

A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized.

2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES:

A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps.

B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows:



26 05 29 - 2

1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.

2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.

3. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the intended service.

C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating

wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

E. U-Channel Systems: 12-gage steel channels, with 9/16-inch-diameter holes, at a minimum of 8 inches on

center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacture.

F. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following

construction features:

1. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" and smaller rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel.

2. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 1" and larger rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; 3/4" strap width; and 2-1/8" between center of screw holes.

2.4 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES:

A. General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.

B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

2.5 FIRE SEALS:

A. Material: Firestopping material shall be asbestos free, 100% intumescent, have code approval under BOCA, ICBO, SSBC, NFPA 101, NFPA 70, and be capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame and gases in compliance with the following requirements.

B. Flame Spread: 25 or less, ASTM E84

C. Fire Resistance and Hose Stream Tests: Firestopping materials shall be rated "F" and "T" in accordance with

ASTM E 814 or UL 1479. Rating periods shall conform to the following:

1. (F) 3 (T) 3 Time-rated floor or wall assemblies. 2. (F) 3 (T) 3 Openings between floor slabs and curtain wall.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire seals of the following:

1. 3M Company

2. Tremco



26 05 29 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements.

B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.

C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:

1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports.

2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor

of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support.

3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support

raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. Use 3/8" diameter or

larger threaded steel rods for support.

5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. For hanger rods supporting 1-1/2" or larger conduits provide 3/8" minimum threaded steel rods with pipe hangers.

6. Space supports for raceways in accordance with NEC. When there are 4 or more 2" conduits in a

trapeze, supports shall be spaced 5' O.C.

7. In all runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals.

8. Threaded rod supports to have bottoms cut off at a maximum length equal to rod diameter below bottom

nut.

D. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components separately and as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices.

E. In open overhead spaces, support metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where

bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.

F. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the

building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following:



26 05 29 - 4

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws, where authorized by the Owner and structural engineer. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.

a. Anchoring methods as follows:

1) Hollow Masonry: Toggle Bolts. 2) Solid Masonry: Lead expansion anchors or preset inserts. 3) Metal Surfaces: Machine screws, bolts or welded studs. 4) Wood Surfaces: Wood screws. 5) Concrete Surfaces: Lead expansion or self-drilling anchors. 6) Metal Studs: Sheet metal screws.

b. Raceways shall be supported every 10 feet and within 36 inches of each outlet, ell, fitting, panel,

etc.

c. Conduit shall not be supported or attached from ceiling support wires. d. Raceways or equipment shall not be suspended from piping or ductwork.

e. Drilling of structural steel members is prohibited.

2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4

inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.

3.2 PERSONNEL PROTECTION:

A. Where U-channel systems, angles, brackets or other standard structural metal shapes are readily accessible and exposed to personnel, provide plastic or rubber end caps.

B. Where threaded rod supports are readily accessible and exposed to personnel, provide plastic or rubber end

caps. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING LOCATIONS:

A. Preparation:

1. Coordination: Coordinate the work with other trades. Firestopping materials at penetrations of insulated pipes and ducts can be applied after insulation is in place. If insulation is composed of combustible material, the thickness of firestopping materials must be equivalent to that of the insulation. If the insulation is composed of non-combustible material, it may be considered as part of the penetrating item.

2. Surface Preparation: Surface Preparation to be in contact with firestopping materials shall be free of

dirt, grease, oil, loose material or other substances that may affect proper fitting or the required fire resistance.

B. Installation: Install firestopping materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the

requirements of Division 7 Section AFirestopping@.



26 05 29 - 5

C. Cleaning: After completion of firestopping work in any area, equipment shall be reviewed and walls, ceilings and all other surfaces not to receive firestopping shall be cleaned of deposits of firestop materials.

D. Inspection: The architect may select and the Owner will pay an independent testing laboratory to examine

firestopped areas to ensure proper installation prior to concealing or enclosing the firestopped areas.

END OF SECTION


RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Provide complete conduit systems for all conductors unless otherwise specified.

B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following:

1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. 5. Non-metallic Conduit and Ducts. 6. Rigid metal conduit (RGC). 7. Rigid Aluminum Conduit.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical raceway work similar to that required for this project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and installation instructions, for each type of raceway system required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of surface metal raceway systems showing layout of raceways and fittings, spatial relationships to associated equipment, and adjoining raceways, if any. Show connections to electrical power panels and feeders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Rigid Metal Conduit:

a. Allied b. Wheatland c. Triangle d. Western Tube & Conduit

2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC):

a. Allied



b. Triangle c. Western Tube & Conduit

3. PVC Coated:

a. Rob Roy b. Perma Cote c. OCAL

4. EMT Conduit:

a. Allied b. Republic c. Triangle d. LTV e. Western Tube & Conduit

5. Non-Metallic Conduit:

a. Carlon b. MPF c. Can-Tex d. PW

6. Steel Fittings:

a. O/Z Gedney b. Raco c. Appleton d. EPT e. Midwest f. Picoma g. Steel City

7. Conduit Bodies:

a. O/Z Gedney b. Killark c. Regal d. Appleton e. Crouse Hinds

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING:

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGC):

1. Conduit: Rigid steel, zinc-coated inside and outside, threaded ends. 2. Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC):

1. Conduit: Rigid intermediate grade galvanized inside and outside, threaded ends. 2. Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat.

C. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit:



1. Conduit: Rigid steel zinc-coated with external coating of PVC. 2. Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel with external PVC coating, bushings shall have nylon

insulated throat.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):

1. Conduit: Galvanized steel tubing. 2. Fittings: Steel compression fittings for rain-tight and concrete-tight applications. Steel set-

screw for all other connections. Set-screw quick fit type for 2-1/2 inches and larger may be used. Bushings shall be threaded and have nylon insulated throat or nylon bushing.

E. Rigid Aluminum Conduit:

1. Not allowed unless otherwise noted.

F. Flexible Metal Conduit:

1. Conduit: Continuous spiral wound, interlocked, zinc-coated steel, approved for grounding.

2. Fittings: Cadmium plated, malleable iron. Straight connector shall be one-piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and threaded male end provided with a locknut. Angle connectors shall be two piece body with removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and threaded male end provided with a locknut. All fittings shall be terminated with threaded bushings having nylon insulated throats.

G. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:

1. Conduit: Continuous spiral wound, interlocked zinc-coated steel with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket, approved for grounding.

2. Fittings: Cadmium plated malleable iron. Straight and angle connectors shall be the same as used with flexible metal conduit but shall be provided with a compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings.

2.3 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS:

A. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC):

1. Conduit: Schedule 40 or 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 90°C for direct burial or concrete encasement.

2. Fittings: Mate and match conduit type and material. Cement as recommended by manufacturer.

B. PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct:

1. Conduit: Type 2 (EB) for encased burial in concrete; Type II (DB) for direct burial. 2. Fittings: Mate and match conduit type and material. Cement as recommended by manufacturer.

2.4 CONDUIT BODIES:

A. General: Types, shapes and sizes, as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use malleable iron conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for threaded raceways and in hazardous locations.



C. Nonmetallic Conduit: Use nonmetallic conduit bodies.

2.5 CONDUIT SIZES:

A. Conduit sizes shall be as shown on the drawings. If the conduit size is not given on the drawings, the conduit shall be sized in accordance with NEC based on the number of conductors enclosed plus a parity sized equipment ground conductor and be subject to the following minimum sizes:

1. Rigid, Intermediate, and EMT Conduit: 3/4 inch for all runs except lighting switch legs, 277 volt lighting branch circuits, temperature control and fire alarm which may be 1/2inch.

2. Flexible and Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit: 1/2inch for all runs. 3. MC Cable: 3/8 inch to undercounter luminaires, 1/2inch for all other runs. 4. Underground or Concrete Encased Nonmetallic Conduit: 3/4inch for all runs. 5. Conduits used for home runs shall contain only the conductors for the circuits indicated on the

drawings. Combining multiple home runs into a single conduit will not be permitted.

2.6 RACEWAY SEALING COMPOUND:

A. Nonhardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to cable insulation, workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (1 deg C), withstands temperature of 300 deg F (149 deg C) without slump, and adheres to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials and the common metals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which raceways are to be installed, and substrate which will support raceways. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 CONDUIT SCHEDULE:

A. Buried Raceways: PVC Coated rigid steel galvanized conduit or Schedule 40 OR 80, rigid PVC plastic conduit.

B. Raceways embedded in concrete slabs or walls in contact with earth: Schedule 40, PVC plastic conduit. PVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduit, OR PVC coated intermediate metal conduit.

C. Raceways embedded in concrete slabs above grade level: Rigid steel galvanized conduit or Schedule 40 OR 80 rigid PVC plastic conduit in slab.

D. Raceways Through Foundation Walls Below Grade: One 10 foot section of PVC coated rigid steel galvanized, extending from 1 foot inside the foundation wall.

E. Hazardous areas: Rigid steel galvanized conduit.

F. Raceways in locations subject to mechanical injury: Rigid steel galvanized conduit OR intermediate metal conduit. Locations subject to mechanical injury include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Exposed conduits outdoors. 2. Exposed conduits in dock areas and high/medium bay locations up to 25 feet above finished

floor. 3. Exposed conduits in parking garages.



4. Exposed conduits in a Fire Pump Room. 5. Exposed feeder and control conduits from engine generators to distribution equipment. 6. Exposed service entrance feeders.

G. Motor and equipment connections: Flexible metal conduit OR PVC jacketed liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit with liquid tight connectors.

H. Raceways in all other areas shall be electrical metallic tubing unless otherwise noted.

I. Use flexible metal conduit inside movable partition wireways, from junction boxes to devices and between devices in casework, from outlet boxes to recessed luminaires, and for "fishing" of existing walls.

J. Emergency Circuits: All emergency circuits shall be run totally in metal conduit and shall be in a completely separate raceway system from non-emergency circuits.

K. UPS Circuits: All UPS circuits shall be run in metal conduit and shall be a completely separate raceway system from all other circuits.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS:

A. General: Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instruction, applicable requirements of NEC, and as follows:

1. Conceal all conduit unless indicated otherwise, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations.

2. Elevation of Raceway:

a. Where horizontal raceway is installed near water and steam piping, route raceway above piping and as close to structure as possible and practical.

b. Route raceway as close to structure as possible.

3. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within raceways.

4. Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Division 16.

5. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection.

6. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bend is not visible above the finished slab.

7. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. Bends in conduit larger than 1-1/4 inch shall be factory-made elbows unless otherwise specifically approved. Bends in 1-1/4inch and 1inch runs shall be made in an approved bending machine or factory made. Hickey bends will not be permitted in conduits larger than 3/4inch.

8. Use raceway fittings that are types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and location. Install expansion fittings across all structural construction joints and expansion/deflection couplings across all structural expansion joints and in every 200 foot of



linear conduit run. A flexible bonding jumper at least three-times the nominal width of the joint shall be installed.

9. Run raceways parallel and perpendicular to building elements and other equipment with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions except as otherwise indicated.

10. Raceways embedded in slabs: Not allowed

11. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical.

12. Install vertical feeder conduits in exterior walls, core walls, or chase spaces. Do not install in interior wall partition areas.

13. Run exposed and parallel raceways together. Make bends in parallel runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used only where they can be installed parallel. In other cases provide field bends for parallel raceways.

14. Make raceway joints tight. Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors. Joints in non-metallic conduits shall be made with solvent cement in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

15. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool.

16. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. RGC and IMC shall be secured with double locknuts and an insulated metallic bushing. EMT shall be secured with one locknut and shall have nylon insulated throats or threaded nylon bushings from 1/2" to 1". 1-1/4" and above shall be metal with nylon insulated throats. Use grounding type bushings for feeder conduits at switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes, transformers, motor control centers, VFD's, etc.

17. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

18. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators having not less than 200 pounds tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull string. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit and indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as-built drawings.

19. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:

a. Where conduits enter through a foundation wall or stub-up through a slab on grade floor.

b. Where required by the NEC.



20. Install raceway/duct sealing compound inside of all underground stub into a building through a foundation wall or through a slab on grade floor.

21. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this contract, install screwdriver-operated threaded plugs flush with floor.

22. Flexible Connections: Use short length (maximum of 6 feet) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit in wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

23. PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit: Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit.

24. Where conduits are to be installed through structural framing members, the Contractor shall provide sleeves. The Architect/Engineer's written approval must be obtained prior to cutting, notching or drilling of structural framing members.

25. Ream the ends of all cut and/or threaded conduit. Ends shall be cut square.

26. Use of running threads for rigid or intermediate metallic conduit are not permitted. When threaded couplings cannot be used, provide 3 piece union or solid coupling.

27. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, rout through jack with pitch pocket.

28. Conduit stub-ups from below grade or thru the slab shall be PVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduit and shall extend 6 inches above grade.

29. Wherever conduits enter a structure through a foundation or basement wall below grade, grout around the conduit with water-proof grout or install entrance seals. Seals shall be OZ Type WS or approved equivalent for new construction and OZ type CSM Series for existing structures.

30. Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts or ventilation duct openings. Where conduits must penetrate air-tight spaces or plenums, seal around the conduit with a mastic acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.

31. Install an insulated ground conductor in all conduits.

32. Where individual conduits penetrate existing fire-rated walls and floors, pack void around conduit with fire rated insulation and seal opening around conduit with UL listed forma silicone elastomer compound. Where conduits penetrate exterior walls, new floors, or roof, provide pipe sleeve one size larger than conduit, pack void around conduit with fire rated insulation, and seal opening around conduit with UL listed foam silicone elastomer compound. Conduits on trapeze type support system shall require fire taping only.

33. Where conduit sleeves penetrate fire rated floors or walls for installation of system cables, AC or MC cables, or modular wiring cables pack void around cables or empty sleeve with fire rated insulation and fill ends with fire-resistive compound. Seal opening around sleeve with UL listed foam silicone elastomer compound.



34. Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer than 100 feet, or in plastic conduit runs which have more than two bends regardless of length. Use long sweep bends for wiring larger than 350 mcm.

35. Wipe plastic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for 20 minutes minimum.

36. No PVC conduit shall be run exposed or inside stud or masonry walls unless specifically called for on the drawings. Transition from PVC to metal conduit shall be made below grade.

37. Provide separate raceway systems for each of the following:

a. Lighting b. Power Distribution c. Communications and Data d. Emergency (Essential)

1) Lighting 2) Power Distribution

e. UPS f. Fire Alarm g. Temperature Control h. Paint new exposed conduits to match existing exposed conduits where installed in areas

with existing painted conduits or where otherwise indicated.

38. Provide rebar and tie downs for all conduits and conduit racks to be installed with concrete or slurry to prevent conduit “float”.

B. Install buried electrical line warnings per Division 26 section - “Electrical identification”.

C. Install labeling as required in Division 26 section - “Electrical Identification”.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS:

A. Surface Raceways and Wireways: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures and raceways to form continuous electrical conductor and connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly.

1. Where practicable, avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.

2. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion joints are crossed.

3. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings, supplied by raceway manufacturer. Field bends of raceway sections are not permitted.

4. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by structural materials. Raceways are not to span any space unsupported.

5. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull or device boxes are required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc., are not permitted for use with surface raceway installations.



6. Install an insulated grounding conductor in all wireways and surface raceways. Bond grounding conductor to all wireways and surface raceways.

7. Paint new exposed surface metal raceway to match adjacent surfaces where raceway is installed in finished areas such as lobbies, corridors, and normally occupied spaces.

8. Surface raceways and wireways are acceptable only where specifically indicated on the drawings. The proposed use of surface raceways and wireways shall be submitted for review by the Engineer prior to installation.

9. Common wireways are not acceptable for convergence of multiple circuits unless specifically indicated on the drawings. The proposed use of a common wireway shall be submitted for review by the Engineer prior to installation.

10. The proposed use of wireways above or below panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and other electrical equipment shall be submitted along with a layout drawing for review by the Engineer prior to installation.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and remove burrs, dirt and construction debris.

END OF SECTION


CABINETS, BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 34 - 1

SECTION 26 05 34 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This section includes cabinets, boxes, and fittings for electrical installations and certain types of electrical fittings not covered in other sections. Types of products specified in this Section include:

1. Outlet and device boxes. 2. Pull and junction boxes. 3. Floor boxes and service fittings. 4. Cabinets. 5. Hinged door enclosures.

B. Conduit-body-type electrical enclosures and wiring fittings are specified in the Division 16 Section on

Raceways.

1.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. Cabinets: An enclosure designed either for surface or for flush mounting and having a frame, or trim in which a door or doors may be mounted.

B. Device Box: An outlet box designed to house a receptacle device or a wiring box designed to house a

switch.

C. Enclosure: A box, case, cabinet, or housing for electrical wiring or components.

D. Hinged Door Enclosure: An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the box.

E. Outlet Box: A wiring enclosure where current is taken from a wiring system to supply utilization

equipment.

F. Wiring Box: An enclosure designed to provide access to wiring systems or for the mounting of indicating devices or of switches for controlling electrical circuits.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit product data for cabinets and enclosures with classification higher than NEMA 1.

B. Shop drawings for floor boxes and boxes, enclosures and cabinets that are to be shop fabricated,

(nonstock items). For shop fabricated junction and pull boxes, show accurately scaled views and spatial relationships to adjacent equipment. Show box types, dimensions, and finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:


1. Floor Boxes:

a. American Electric.



b. Butler Mfg. Co. c. Cooper Industries, Inc. d. Raco, Inc. e. Thomas & Betts Corp.

2. Cabinets:

a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. c. Electric Panelboard, Inc. d. Parker Electrical Mfg. Co. e. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. f. Square D Co. g. Circle AW

3. Boxes and Fittings for Hazardous Locations:

a. OZ/Gedney. b. Cooper Industries, Inc. c. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. d. Adalet-PLM. e. Robroy Industries, Inc. f. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. g. Appleton

2.2 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS, GENERAL:

A. Electrical Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings: Of indicated types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes.

Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes, and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. Cabinets over 12" in any dimension shall also have 1/4 turn latches.

2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES:

A. Sheet Steel: Flat-rolled, code-gage, galvanized steel.

B. Fasteners for General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated

items.

C. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware. D. Cast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures, and Covers; Copper-free aluminum except as otherwise specified.

E. Exterior Finish: Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise

indicated.

F. Painted Interior Finish: Where indicated, white baked enamel. Emergency system cabinets and boxes shall be red.

G. Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel

for conduit hubs, bushings and box connecters.



2.4 METAL OUTLET, DEVICE, AND SMALL WIRING BOXES:

A. General: Conform to UL 514A, "Metallic Outlet Boxes, Electrical," and UL 514B, "Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes." Boxes shall be of type, shape, size, and depth to suit each location and application.

B. Steel Boxes: Conform to NEMA OS 1, "Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box

Supports." Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps, exterior rings and fixture studs. Minimum size box shall be 4" square by 2" deep with plaster ring. Gang boxes for number of outlets or switches shown.

C. Steel Floor Boxes: Sheet steel, concrete tight, fully adjustable, with stamped knockouts, adjusting

rings, and brass floor plates. Where indicated, provide multi-section boxes with concealed individual section covers under a common flush floor plate. Provide for power, data, and communication outlets as indicated on the drawings.

D. Service Fittings for Floor Outlet Boxes: Surface mounted horizontal, cast aluminum type 3-inches

high, suitable for finished spaces and finished in satin aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. Provide duplex receptacle or 1-inch bushed opening for telephone or other communications service as indicated. Equip fitting for attaching flat to floor box cover.

2.5 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:

A. General: Comply with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes", for boxes over 100 cubic inches

volume. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted on covers of material same as box and shall be of size and shape to suit application.

B. Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct

with internal structural steel bracing.

C. Hot-Dipped Galvanized Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed.

D. Boxes Approved for Classified Locations: Cast metal boxes conforming to UL 886, "Outlet Boxes and

Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations," listed and labeled for use in the specific location classification, and with the specific hazardous material encountered. Conduit entrances shall be integral threaded type.

2.6 CABINETS:

A. Comply with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes." B. Construction: Sheet steel, NEMA 1 class except as otherwise indicated. Cabinet shall consist of a box

and a front consisting of a one piece frame and a hinged door. Arrange door to close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the frame, with a uniformly close fit between door and frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not over 24-inches apart, to hold fronts to cabinet boxes and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not over 24-inches apart and not over 6-inches from top and bottom of door. For flush cabinets, make the front approximately 3/4 inch larger than the box all around. For surface mounted cabinets make front same height and width as box. For television, telephone and other communication cabinets provide 3/4" thick plywood backboard painted matte white.

C. Doors: Double doors for cabinets wider than 24-inches. Telephone cabinets wider than 48-inches may

have sliding or removable doors.



D. Locks: Combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same system keyed

alike. Locks may be omitted on signal, power, and lighting cabinets located within wire closets and mechanical-electrical rooms. Locks shall be of a type to permit doors to latch closed without locking.

2.7 STEEL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS:

A. Comply with UL 50, "Cabinets and Enclosures" and NEMA ICS 6, "Enclosures for Industrial Controls

and Systems."

B. Construction: Sheet steel, 16 gage, minimum, with continuous welded seams. NEMA class as indicated; arranged for surface mounting.

C. Doors: Hinged directly to cabinet and removable, with approximately 3/4-inch flange around all edges,

shaped to cover edge of box. Provide handle operated, key locking latch. Individual door width shall be no greater than 24-inches. Provide multiple doors where required.

D. Mounting Panel: Provide painted removable internal mounting panel for component installation.

E. Enclosure: NEMA 1 except as indicated. Where door gasketing is required, provide neoprene gasket

attached with oil-resistant adhesive, and held in place with steel retaining strips. For all enclosures of class higher than NEMA 1, use hubbed raceway entrances.

2.8 CAST METAL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS:

A. Copper free aluminum with bolted, hinged doors. Where used at hazardous (classified) locations,

enclosures shall conform to UL and shall be listed and labeled for the classification of hazard involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:

A. Locations: Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and installation conditions.

B. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs.

C. Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Division 16 Section on Supporting Devices.

D. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes indicated.

E. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel.

F. Provide blank cover plates on unused boxes.

3.2 APPLICATIONS:

A. Cabinets: Flush mounted, NEMA enclosure type 1 except as otherwise indicated.

B. Hinged Door Enclosures Indoor: NEMA type 1 enclosure except as indicated.

C. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of

materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following requirements:



1. Interior Dry Locations: Sheet steel, NEMA Type 1.

2. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Cast metal, NEMA type 3R.

3. Wet Locations: NEMA Type 4 enclosures.

D. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location except as otherwise indicated.

E. Floor Boxes: In slabs on grade and wet locations use NEMA type 4 boxes. At other locations in slabs,

use concrete-tight NEMA 1 boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES:

A. Outlets at Windows and Doors: Locate close to window trim. For outlets indicated above doors center outlets above the door opening except as otherwise indicated.

B. Column and Pilaster Locations: Locate outlet boxes for switches and receptacles on columns or

pilasters so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions.

C. Locations in Special Finish Materials: For outlet boxes for receptacles and switches mounted in desks or furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick, stone or wood walls, use rectangular shaped boxes with square corners and straight sides. Install such boxes without plaster rings. Saw cut all recesses for outlet boxes in exposed masonry walls.

D. Gasketed Boxes: At the following locations use malleable or cast metal, threaded hub type boxes with

gasketed weatherproof covers:

1. Exterior locations. 2. Where surface mounted on unfinished walls, columns or pilasters. (Cover gaskets may be

omitted in dry locations). 3. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere. 4. At food preparation equipment within four ft. of steam connections. 5. Where indicated.

E. Mounting: Mount outlet boxes for switches with the long axis vertical or as indicated. Mount boxes for

receptacles vertically, except above counter receptacles to be mounted horizontally. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal. Locate box covers or device plates so they will not span different types of building finishes either vertically or horizontally. Locate boxes for switches near doors on the side opposite the hinges and close to door trim, even though electrical floor plans may show them on hinge side. Provide far side box supports for electrical boxes installed on metal studs.

F. Ceiling Outlets: For fixtures, where wiring is concealed, use outlet boxes 4-inches square by 2-inches

deep, minimum.

G. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: Use plates sized to box front without overlap.

H. Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of plaster, and debris. Thoroughly clean foreign material from boxes before conductors are installed.

I. Floor Boxes: Install in concrete floor slabs so they are completely enveloped in concrete except for the

top. Where normal slab thickness will not envelop box as specified above, provide increased thickness of the slab. Provide each compartment of each floor box with grounding terminal consisting of a washer-in-head machine screw, not smaller than no. 10-32, screwed into a tapped hole in the box. Adjust covers of floor boxes flush with finished floor.



J. Extension rings are prohibited on new construction.

K. Existing Outlet Boxes: One extension ring is permitted on remodel work to extend existing installations.

Where more than one box is needed to flush out installation, provide a large (i.e. 6"x6") box to flush out the existing box and nipple over to a new box.

L. Existing Outlet Boxes: Where extension rings are required to be installed, drill new mounting holes in

the rings to align with the mounting holes on the existing boxes where existing holes are not aligned.

M. Back to back outlet boxes are not permitted. Separate boxes a minimum of 6" in standard walls and 24" in acoustical walls.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:

A. Box Selection: For boxes in main feeder conduit runs, use sizes not smaller than 8-inches square by

4-inches deep. Do not exceed 6 entering and 6 leaving raceways in a single box. Quantities of conductors (including equipment grounding conductors) in pull or junction box shall not exceed the following:

Size of Maximum no. of Largest Conductors Conductors in in Box Box No. 4/0 AWG 30 250 MCM 20 500 MCM 15 Over 500 MCM 10

B. Cable Supports: Install clamps, grids, or devices to which cables may be secured. Arrange cables so they may be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30-inches inside boxes.

C. Mount pull boxes in inaccessible ceilings with the covers flush with the finished ceiling. D. Size: Provide pull and junction boxes for telephone, signal, and other systems at least 50 percent larger

than would be required by Article 370 of NEC, or as indicated. Locate boxes strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of future wires or cables of types normal for such systems.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND HINGED DOOR ENCLOSURES:

A. Mount with fronts straight and plumb.

B. Install with tops 78-inches above floor.

C. Set cabinets in finished spaces flush with walls.

D. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram and layout

drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure.

E. Provide recessed cabinets in all finished areas.

3.6 GROUNDING:

A. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a grounding conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or enclosure.



3.7 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR:

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions and weld marks.

B. Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the tray manufacturer.

C. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating. Pull and junction

box covers shall be painted as follows:

1. Fire Alarm Red

2. Emergency Yellow

3. Telephone Green

4. Television Violet

5. Computer/Data Blue

6. 277/480V Systems Orange

END OF SECTION


ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 26 05 35 - 1

SECTION 26 05 35 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT


A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment.

B. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following:

1. To lighting equipment.

2. Other connections as shown.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes, and cable ties, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 2 years of successful installation experience with projects

utilizing electrical connections for equipment similar to that required for this project. 1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Load voltage wiring shall be defined as:

Conduit and wiring required to carry power to motors and other equipment or devices. Wiring from control devices to equipment that carry power to drive that equipment such as line voltage thermostats, etc., shall be included as load voltage wiring. Wiring that provides power to control panels, control transformers, control relays, time clocks, etc., shall also be included as load voltage wiring.


A. Deliver electrical connection products wrapped in proper factory-fabricated type containers.

B. Store electrical connection products in original cartons and protect from weather, construction traffic and debris.

C. Handle electrical connection products carefully to prevent breakage, denting, and scoring finish.


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide circuit and motor disconnects by one of the following:

1. Square D Company 2. Cutler-Hammer Inc. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5. Westinghouse Electric Corp.



2.2 GENERAL:

A. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as indicated. Comply with Division 16 Section on Overcurrent Protective Devices, with OCPDs adapted to equipment connection installation. Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multiple breakers shall have common trip.

2.3 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:

A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire-nuts, disconnect, starter, contactor, relays, etc., and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated.

B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings: 1. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall

thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Provide products complying with Division-16 section on Raceways.

C. Wires, Cables, and Connectors:

1. General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with Division-16 section on Wires and

Cables. 2. Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for electrical connections

which match, including sizes, ratings, and material of wires/cables which are supplying electrical power.

3. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and match,

including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications.

4. Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing

and boots, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, wirenuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS:

A. Furnish, set in place, and wire (except as may be otherwise indicated) all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing and fire protection, elevator, etc., motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule and in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these Specifications.



B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation, as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work.

C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.

D. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to equipment serving occupied areas and operational facilities,

unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by Owner, or Architect/Engineer. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing facilities. When necessary, schedule momentary outages for replacing existing wiring systems with new wiring systems. When that "cutting-over" has been successfully accomplished, remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated.

E. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity rating, than

electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced.

F. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire.

G. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and

maintenance.

H. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A.


A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION


A. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following:

1. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors.

2. Operational instruction signs.

3. Equipment labels and signs.


A. ANSI Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable labels.



1. Ideal Industries, Inc. 2. LEM Products, Inc. 3. Markal Corp. 4. Panduit Corp. 5. W.H.Brady, Co. 6. 3M Company

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS:

A. Adhesive Marking Labels for Raceway and Busway: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive labels with legend indicating voltage and service (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Power d.c., HVAC, Communications, Control, Fire).

1. Label Size: as follows:

a. Raceways: Kroy or Brother labels 1" high by 12 inches long. (minimum)

2. Color: As specified for various systems.

B. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for banding Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less

than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width.

C. Pretensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Cable Identification: Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit the cable diameter and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when coiled around the cable.

D. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor

markers with preprinted numbers and letter.



E. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate,

1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white face for normal and white letters on red face for emergency and punched for mechanical fasteners. Where required for ground connections, provide engraved legend in white letters on green face. Identification shall be the name of the device, panelboards, etc. in 2" high letters. The Avoltage, load served@ line also shall include the name of the feeding panel, switchboard, etc. in 1/4" high letters.

F. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32

stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

G. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50NF to 350NF. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding.

H. Adhesive Marking Tape for Device Cover Plates: Kroy tape or Brother labels with 3/16 inch minimum height

letters. Kroy tape shall have black letters for normal and red letters for emergency. Brother labels shall be white letters on black background for normal and on red background for emergency. Embossed Dymo-Type labels are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.

B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.

C. Secure nameplates to equipment using screws or rivets. Locate nameplates on outside face of panelboard doors in finished locations.

D. Electronic labels will be permitted only for identification of disconnects, individual wall switches (in

unfinished areas), control station devices and starters, and on outside face of receptacles and wall switch plates.

E. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical

identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code.

F. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.

G. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification

after completion of finish work.

H. Conduit Identification: Use adhesive marking tape labels at 10 foot intervals to identify all conduits run exposed or located above accessible ceilings. Conduits located above non-accessible ceiling or in floors and walls shall be labeled within 3 feet of becoming accessible. Labels for multiple conduits shall be aligned. Use the following colors:

1. 600 Volt and Below Normal: White letters on black background indicating feeder identification and

voltage.

2. 600 Volt and Below Emergency: White or black letters on red background indicating feeder identification and voltage.



3. Fire Alarm: Red letters on white background indicating "FIRE ALARM".

4. Temperature Control: White or black letters on blue background indicating "TEMP. CONTROL."

5. Other Systems: Provide color banding as specified in item (I) below.

Where conduits enter or exit a panelboard, pull or junction box, switchboard, or other distribution equipment, conduit labels shall include circuit number in addition to feeder identification and voltage.

I. Identify System Raceways with Color Banding: Band exposed or accessible raceways, cables and bare

conductors of the following systems for identification. Bands shall be pretensioned, snap-around colored plastic sleeves, colored adhesive marking tape, or a combination of the two. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at each junction box and at 20-foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors:

Computer and Data System: Green and Blue Telephone System: Green and Yellow Ground: Green

J. Identify Junction, Pull and Connection Boxes: Identification of systems and circuits shall indicate system

voltage and identity of contained circuits on outside of box cover. Color code shall be same as conduits for pressure sensitive labels. Use self adhesive marking tape labels at exposed locations and indelible black marker at concealed boxes. Junction box covers shall be color coded according to the following schedule:

1. Fire Alarm - Red

2. Emergency circuitry - Yellow

3. Computer Data - Blue

K. Circuit Identification: Tag or label conductors as follows:

1. Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another

contract with identification indicating source and circuit numbers.

2. Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits, control wiring or communications/signal conductors are terminated or spliced in a box or enclosure, label each conductor or cable with circuit number. For control and communications/signal wiring, use wire/cable marking tape at terminations in wiring boxes, troughs and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tapes.

3. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract

Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility's electrical installations.

L. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules (label all spares and spaces in pencil) with explicit

description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.

M. Install labels at locations as required and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

N. Provide tape labels for identification of individual receptacle wallplates. Locate tape on front of plate and

identify branch circuit serving the receptacle.



END OF SECTION


LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 09 23 - 1

SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Extent of lighting control equipment work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, programmable controllers, communication links including telephone data sets, transceivers with power supplies, relays, switches, and ancillary equipment.

B. Types of lighting control equipment specified in this section include the following:

1. Programmable lighting control equipment. 2. Occupancy Sensors. 3. Time controlled switches. 4. Photoelectric Relays.

C. Refer to other Division-16 sections for wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings and wiring devices which are required in conjunction with lighting control equipment work; not work of this section.

D. Refer to another Division-16 section for telephone interface data equipment capable of interfacing lighting system controller with building's telephone operating system; not work of this section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control equipment and components.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of lighting control equipment and components including, but not necessarily limited to, programmable controllers, transceivers, printers, relays and switches. In addition, show spatial relationship of lighting control equipment to other electrical equipment in proximity.

C. Submit lists of ballast and lamp combinations compatible with dimmer systems, by manufacturer and catalog number.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for lighting control equipment and components showing control and interconnection wiring, including connections to equipment components and electrical power feeders. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer-installed and portions that are field-installed.

E. Agreement to Maintain: Prior to time of final acceptance, the Installer shall submit 4 copies of an agreement for continued service and maintenance of lighting control equipment, for Owner's possible acceptance. Offer terms and conditions for furnishing parts and providing continued testing and servicing, including replacement of materials and equipment, for one year period with option for renewal of Agreement by Owner.

F. Maintenance Manuals: Furnish maintenance manuals which contain equipment cuts, operating instructions, troubleshooting procedures, and spare parts list for equipment. Ensure manual includes operating instructions in addition to instructions for maintenance of the system's software package.




A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with lighting control equipment work similar to that required for this project.

C. Agreement to Maintain: Engage Installer who is willing to execute with the Owner, required agreement for continued maintenance of lighting control equipment.

D. FCC Compliance: Comply with Part 68 of Federal Communications Commission Rules pertaining to telephone equipment registration by manufacturer.

1. Provide telephone equipment with FCC labels indicating applicable FCC registration and numbering of equipment.

E. Codes and Standards:

1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as applicable to construction, installation of lighting control and communications equipment.

2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide lighting control equipment and components which are UL-listed and labeled.

3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA's Stds Pub No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000-Volts Maximum)."

4. EIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Electronic Industries Association standards pertaining to telephone and electronic systems.


A. Deliver lighting control equipment and components in factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings, which properly protect equipment from damage.

B. Store lighting control equipment in original packaging and protect from weather and construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping.

C. Handle lighting control equipment carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lighting control equipment of one of the following (for each type and rating of equipment):

1. Encelium 2. Sensor Switch



3. Wattstopper

2.2 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT:

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated lighting control equipment and ancillary components of sizes, types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; consisting of programmable controllers, telephone interface data equipment, transceivers, relays, switches, and control wiring, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials and components; and construct in accordance with published product information for duty indicated, and as required for a complete installation.

B. General: Provide modular component system, with central controller and transceiver capable of activating 16 mechanically latching positive ON-OFF single-pole relays with 115/277-volts ratings. Transmit information by multiplexing over single pairs of wires, including control data from controller to transceiver; control wires to be NEC Class 2 type. Provide expandable system with up to 8,000 relays which is controller programmable on-site and capable of being updated to reflect changes without wiring changes. Provide an alarm with indicator for operator when transceiver fails to operate as programmed. Store user program information on tape which will automatically reload controller after power outages experienced which are of longer duration than battery backup time; no loss of memory should be experienced in the event of power failure of less than 6 hours. Construct with self-diagnostic routine to indicate malfunctions. Provide system with the following control functions:

1. Automatic Control: System capable of activating building areas into user dictated pattern of ON-OFF array of relays, according to either weekly schedule divided into one-minute increments, or two one-day schedules.

2. Manual Controls: System capable of activating single groups of relays ON-OFF with either a maintained or momentary switch; or groups of relays to one of 10 user determined patterns by pushbutton phase, or controller keyboard. Provide prioritization of manual controls.

3. Manual Lockout: System capable of selecting, activating and locking-in any lighting pattern from central controller, and locking-out manual and automatic commands.

C. Programmable Lighting Controller:

1. Provide microprocessor-based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit with output circuits individually programmable controls in response to programmed time signals or analog or digital signals from external sources. System to automatically adjust for leap year and daylight saving time and provide weekly routine and annual holiday scheduling. The system output circuits to be external pilot duty relay circuits or external power circuits rated for 20 amperes at 277 V as indicated. System to be keyboard programmable. Provide locked cover and security access code to protect keyboard use. Programming to be viewed on an alphanumeric display. For single-pole-relay control of power circuits use relays in control panel or in a separate enclosure. System includes the following features:

a. Astronomic control for automatic adjustment of dawn and dusk switching.

b. Demand control to monitor demand through pulses from a remote meter. System capability shall include sliding window averaging and programming of load priorities and characteristics. A minimum of 2 different time-of-day demand schedules shall execute load management control actions.

c. Confirmation: Relays, contactors, and other control devices shall have auxiliary contacts connected to provide confirmation signals to the system of the on or off status of the equipment controlled. Software shall interpret such signals and display equipment status and initiate failure signals.



d. Remote communications will allow programming, data-gathering interrogation, and controlled command override from an IBM-compatible microcomputer at a remote location over telephone lines. System to include modem, communications software, and remote computer compatibility verification for this purpose. Microcomputer not in this Contract. Override of lighting shutdown commands to be accomplished by telephoning the computer and entering an override code specific to the zone to be controlled.

e. Override Capability: Remote pushbuttons to override programmed shutdown of lighting and other programmed control.

f. Automatic battery backup shall provide power to maintain program and system clock operation for 3 days' minimum duration when power is off.

g. Flick Warning: Programmable momentary turnoff of lights will warn that programmed shutoff will occur in 5 minutes.

h. Diagnostics: When system operates improperly, software to initiate a factory-programmed diagnosis of the failure and display messages identifying the problem and possible cause.

D. Telephone Interface Data Set: Provide telephone interface data set with data coupling unit, capable of connecting and interfacing with controller, and with data unit which is FCC, Part 68 registered, and is capable of connecting and interfacing with controller. Select set constructed with plug-in cable and male plug connectors for modular telephone jacks. Construct interface equipment that controller, with telephone interface extension numbers, can connect into standard pushbutton telephone system and handle calls on three units simultaneously.

E. Transceivers: Provide transceivers with both power supply and relays, consisting of microprocessor-based control module; rated 277-volts, 50 to 60 Hz. Construct with line power terminal strips; and with NEMA Type 1, surface mounted, steel enclosures. Provide power supply and 32 relays factory-wired to transceiver board.

F. Relays: Provide relays for control of inductive loads of 20 amperes at 120-volts, 50 to 60 Hz, as recommended by lighting systems manufacturer for services indicated.

G. Switches: Provide momentary toggle type ON-OFF switches with spring return to center position; and as recommended by lighting systems manufacturer for services indicated.

H. Photo Relays: Provide photo relays for controlling perimeter lighting circuits through transceiver switch inputs as recommended by lighting systems manufacturer for services indicated.

I. Sensors/Detectors: Provide sensors/detectors for controlling building lighting circuits through switch inputs; and as recommended by the lighting control systems manufacturer for occupancy sensing and light-level balancing of the following types for services indicated:

1. Ultra-sonic sensors. 2. Passive infrared detectors. 3. Photo sensors.

2.3 TIME CONTROLLED SWITCHES:

A. Time Controlled Switches: Provide solid state programmable unit with alphanumeric display OR electro-mechanical dial type capable of periodically and automatically switching indoor and outdoor lamps both ON and OFF. Select switches which permit selection of from 1 to 12 ON-OFF operations each day and allows timing durations of 1 to 23 hours; with ratings of 125-volts, 50 Hz, and with SPST



switch of 40-amperes per pole. Provide indoor-outdoor mount enclosure, NEMA Type 3, with side hinged door and lock, mounting holes and knockouts; construct enclosure of 0.036" drawn steel. Provide timing switch with manual circuit by-pass switch and separate grounding terminal. Finish enclosure with manufacturer's standard gray finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting control equipment is to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT:

A. Install lighting control system components and ancillary equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that lighting control equipment complies with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to general electrical installation practices.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings, as necessary to interface installation of lighting control equipment work with other work.

C. Interconnect lighting control equipment with building's operating telephone system, after lighting equipment installation work has been completed and is operating properly.

1. Installer shall notify local telephone operating company in writing of telephone interface connection requirements to ensure proper interfacing of system.

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B.

3.3 GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting control equipment as indicated. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.


A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of system with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. Testing and retesting at no cost to Owner.

3.5 PERSONNEL TRAINING:

A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for starting-up, testing and operating lighting control system equipment.

END OF SECTION


JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

26 12 00 - 1

SECTION 26 12 00 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This section includes distribution and power transformers with medium-voltage primaries. Types of transformers specified in this section include the following:

1. Liquid-Filled Pad-Mounted Type.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification

Sections.

B. Product data for each product specified.

C. Shop drawings for each transformer, including dimensional plans, sections, connection and support points, weight, specified ratings, and elevations showing minimum clearances, installed devices, and materials lists.

D. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

E. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

F. Product certificates signed by manufacturer of transformers certifying that their products comply with the specified requirements.

G. Installer certificates signed by the Contractor certifying that Installers comply with the requirements

specified under "Quality Assurance" below.

H. Product Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests required by the referenced standards.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer of medium- voltage electrical distribution

equipment to perform the installation specified in this section. Refer to Division 1 Section "Definitions and Standards" for definition of experienced Installer. Submit certified evidence of such qualifications to the Architect.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member firm of NEMA who is regularly engaged in manufacturing

transformers that comply with the requirements of these Specifications and that have been used on at least five projects of similar size and scope as this Project.

C. Field Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing

organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.

D. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National

Electrical Code."



26 12 00 - 2

1. ANSI/IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/IEEE Standards

including C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper/RTE 2. ABB 3. Square D Co.

2.2 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL:

A. Medium-Voltage Transformers: Factory assembled and tested, general purpose, self-cooled, liquid

filled, and having characteristics and capacities as indicated. B. Transformer shall be FM Labeled and UL Listed.

C. Windings: 2-winding type, designed for operation with high-voltage windings connected to a 3-phase,

3-wire, 60 Hz, grounded neutral system.

D. Sound Level: Sound level of transformers for this project shall meet NEMA TR 1 standard sound levels for transformer type and size indicated when factory tested in accordance with applicable ANSI standard.

2.3 LIQUID-FILLED PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS:

A. General: Comply with IEEE C57.12.22 and C57.12.28 and with the following features and ratings:

1. Insulating Liquid: Dielectric fluid shall be non-toxic, non-bioaccumulating and be readily and

completely biodegradable per EPA OPPTS 835.3100. The fluid shall have a minimum open cup fire point (ASTM D92) or 350 degree C and be FM Labeled, UL Listed less-flammable Envirotemp FR3 fluid, all in accordance with current NEC section 450-23.

2. Five leg design with 13,800 volt, 3-phase Delta primary and 208/120 volt, 3-phase Wye

secondary, and impedance as follows:

75-500 KVA, 3.5% 750-1,000 KVA, 5.75%

3. Insulation Temperature Rise: 65 deg C, self cooled

4. Basic Impulse Insulation Level: 95 kV.

5. Aluminum core/windings.

6. NEMA TP-1 design.

7. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5 percent taps, two above and two below rated

high voltage, with externally operable, no load tap changer for de-energized use, with position indicator.



26 12 00 - 3

8. High-Voltage Switching, Terminations and Equipment: Provide (6) ANSI/IEEE 386 200-amp

dead break bushings for loop feed application. Arranged for loop feed with (3) 200-amp, 3-phase, 4-position, gang-operated load-break switch, oil immersed in transformer tank, with hook-stick-operated handle in the primary compartment to allow alternate circuit service and isolation of transformer. The feeder feed through switches shall be 200-amp. The cabinet shall be sized to accommodate 600-amp bushings.

a. Bushing Well Inserts: One for each high-voltage bushing well.

b. Lightning Arrestors: Dead-front elbow-type MOV units.

c. Parking Stands: One for each high-voltage bushing well.

d. Portable Insulated Bushings: Arranged for parking elbow terminators. One for each

primary feeder conductor terminating at transformer.

9. Primary Overcurrent Protection: Two fuse system consisting of Bayonet-type, oil immersed expulsion fuse in series with current limiting backup fuse mounted inside the transformer under oil. The current limiting fuse should be located as near as practical to the incoming primary bushing, on the source side of the expulsion fuse. The two fuses shall be coordinated so that the expulsion fuse clears low energy faults on the secondary system and the current limiting fuse clears only high energy includes overload protection, can be provided as an alternate with approval from the University electrical engineer. All transformer fusing shall be coordinated with upstream phase overcurrent devices.

10. Surge Arresters: Comply with NEMA Standard LA 1, Distribution Class, supported from tank

wall within high-voltage compartment, one for each primary phase. Cabinet shall be sized to accommodate 600-amp surge arresters.

11. Secondary Feeder Breaker: For circuits over 25 feet, molded case type, mounted in secondary

compartment; frame, trip, and interrupting ratings as indicated; complying with UL Standard 489, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures." For circuits less than 25 feet, provide spade lugs.

12. Accessories: Provide the following accessories:

a. One-inch drain plug with sampling valve. b. One-inch filling plug mounted in the cover.

c. Dial-type thermometer.

d. Liquid level gage.

e. Liquid temperature gage.

f. Pressure relief device, self-sealing with indicator.

g. Mounting provision for low-voltage current transformers transformers.

h. Meter can with ten-pole test switch and #9S meter socket mounted to outside of the

transformer enclosure. Refer to Specification Section 16430.



26 12 00 - 4

i. ANSI tank ground pad.

j. Tap changer handle.

k. 1/4" NPT with vacuum/pressure gauge.

2.4 FINISHES:

A. Enclosure Coating System For Outdoor Units: Comply with IEEE Standard C57.12.28 "Pad-Mounted Equipment-Enclosure Integrity," regardless of transformer type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install transformers and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions, and IEEE Standard C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

B. Identify transformers and install warning signs in accordance with Division 16 Section "Electrical

Identification."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque valves are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

D. Transformers shall be protected at all times until Owner occupancy.

E. Transformer start-up: The on-site test shall be completed after the transformer is set on the permanent

pad and grounded. The transformer will not be started until all tests are complete and turned over to Owner and engineer (2 sets) for review and approval.

F. Provide safety labels per NEMA, and provide non-PCB label.

3.2 EQUIPMENT BASES:

A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4 inches

larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit.

2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36, size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab.

3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing

units.

4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate.

5. Clean exposed steel form in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2 or

SP 3 and apply two coats of rust-preventative metal primer.

3.3 GROUNDING:



26 12 00 - 5

A. Ground transformers and tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.

B. Provide 3/4" x 10' copper clad steel grooved rod driven in the pad opening under the primary

compartment. Leave 6" of exposed rod to allow for connections. Use exothermic welded grounding connections for wire-to-wire and wire-to-rod grounding connections. Make exothermic welds in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations. Welds that puff up or show convex surfaces are not acceptable. No mechanical connectors are required at exothermic weldments.


A. Field Services: Perform factory and field testing under the provisions of Section 01400. All tests shall

be witnessed by the University. All test reports shall be provided to the University for review.

B. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following preparations for tests:

1. Make insulation resistance tests for transformers.

2. Make continuity test for windings and remote alarm circuits.

3. Furnish a set of Contract Drawings to test organization.

4. Provide manufacturer's installation and testing instructions to test organization.

C. Tests: Conform to InterNational Electrical Testing Association (INETA) Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems," ANSI/IEEE standard C57.90 and the following:

1. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an independent electrical

testing organization in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 Section "Quality Control Services" to perform tests on medium-voltage transformer installation.

2. Test Objectives: To assure transformer installation is operational within industry and

manufacturer's tolerances, is installed in accordance with Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing.

3. Procedures: Upon satisfactory completion of tests, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test"

label to tested components.

4. Schedule tests and notify Engineer at least one week in advance of schedule and of test commencement. All tests shall be witnessed by the Owner.

5. Reports: The testing organization shall maintain a written report of observations and tests.

Report defective materials and workmanship and retest corrected defective items.

6. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to the manufacturer's instructions. For test method and data correction factors, conform to IEEE Standard Test Codes C57.12.90 for liquid-filled units, and IEEE C57.12.91 for dry-type units.

a. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity, for

presence of damage or deterioration, and to ensure removal of temporary shipping bracing. Do not proceed with tests until deficiencies are corrected.



26 12 00 - 6

b. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published torque values or, where not available, those of UL Standards 486A and 486B.

c. Insulation Resistance: Perform megohmmeter test of primary and secondary winding-to-

winding and winding-to-ground according to the following:

WINDING RATING (VOLTS)

MIN. TEST VOLTS(D.C.)

MIN INSULATION RESISTANCE (MEGOHMS)

DRY TYPE LIQUID FILLED

0-600 1,000 500 100

601-5,000 2,500 5,000 1,000

5,000-35,000 5,000 25,000 5,000

Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes

Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation for 20-degree C standard.

d. Turns Ratio: Measure between windings at each tap setting. Measured ratios deviating

more than 0.5% from the calculated ratio or the measured ratio for adjacent coil are not acceptable.

e. Winding Resistance: Measure for winding at nominal tap setting. Measured resistance

deviating more than 1% from that of adjacent winding is not acceptable.

f. Overpotential Tests: Apply between high and low voltage and ground at not over 85% of factory test value for 1 minute.

g. Liquid-Filled Transformer Insulation Power Factor Test: Determine overall dielectric

loss and power factor for winding insulation. Limit test voltage to the line-to-ground voltage of the winding being tested. Measured values exceeding the following are unacceptable:

Oil-Filled Units: 1.0% Silicone-Filled Units: 0.5% High-Fire-Point Hydrocarbon-Filled Units: 1.0%

h. Provide insulating liquid test within 48-hours after energization. Sample insulating liquid

in accordance with ASTM D3612 and manufacturer’s guidelines. “FR3 Envirotemp” shall be noted on the sample for the testing lab. Submit test reports to the University of Colorad, Utilities Generation and Distribution Division for review. 1) ASTM D-1533B Moisture in oil 2) ASTM D-971 Inter Facial Tension 3) ASTM D-974 Acid Number 4) ASTM D-1500 Color Number 5) ASTM D-1524 Visual Exam



26 12 00 - 7

6) ASTM D-1816 Dielectric Breakdown 7) ASTM D-924 Power Factor 25C

i. Remove a sample of insulating liquid in accordance with ASTM and perform

comprehensive testing by a certified testing lab.

j. Factory test transformer to ANSI/IEEE C57.12.91 and provide University the test results prior to setting the transformer.

k. Field test transformer to ANSI/IEEE C57.12.91 All field tests to be witnessed by Owner.

All test reports shall be turned over to Owner.

D. Test Failures: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and make ready for retest. Verify that the total system meets the specified requirements.


A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interiors and exteriors of accessible components. Remove

paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and construction debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment.

C. Adjust primary taps so that secondary voltage is within 1.5% of rated voltage and load.

3.6 PROTECTION:

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner that ensures protection of transformers

from damage or deterioration until Substantial Completion.

B. Provide safety labels per NEMA.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representatives to demonstrate transformers and accessories and training of Owner's staff.

B. Training: Train Owner's staff in operation and maintenance for at least one day. Include both

classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and maintenance procedures. Training shall include:

1. Safety precautions.

2. Features and construction of project transformers and accessories.

3. Routine inspection and test procedures.

4. Routine cleaning.

5. Features and operation and maintenance of integral disconnect and protective devices.

6. Interpretation of readings of indicating and alarm devices.

7. Fuse selection.



26 12 00 - 8

8. Protective relay setting considerations.

9. Features, operation, and maintenance of separable insulated connector system.

10. Tap changing procedures.

C. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION


LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 1

SECTION 26 22 00 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This section includes general purpose and specialty dry type transformers and voltage regulators with windings rated 600 V or less.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including dimensions, weight, rated kVA,

frequency, primary and secondary voltages, percent taps, polarity, impedance and certification of transformer performance efficiency at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent rated loads, percentage regulation at 100% and 80% power factor, no-load and full-load losses in watts, % impedance at 75 deg. C, hot-spot and average temperature rise above 40 deg. C ambient temperature, sound level in decibels, insulation type, and standard published data.

B. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

C. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer of transformers certifying that their products comply with the specified requirements.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of transformers of types and ratings required

for this project, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing electrical power and distribution transformers similar to those required for this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:


1. General Electric Co. 2. Westinghouse/Cutler Hammer 3. Hevi-Duty 4. ITE Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5. Square D Co.

2.2 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL:

A. Transformers: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled units of types specified, having characteristics

and ratings as indicated. Units shall be designed for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain oriented, nonaging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

D. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or welded type.



2.3 GENERAL PURPOSE, DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS:

A. Comply with NEMA Standard ST 20 "Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications."

B. Windings:

1. 2-winding type, three phase transformers shall use one coil per phase in primary and secondary. Conductors shall be individually insulated, as small in size as possible, and transposed when necessary to minimize eddy current losses. The primary winding shall be of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to its rated value even with circulating 3rd harmonic current.

2. Provide copper or aluminum windings.

3. Windings shall be delta-wye with 30o lagging phase shift to match ANSI standard, unless noted

otherwise.

C. Sound Level:

kVA RATING SOUND LEVEL

0-9 40 dB

10-50 45 dB

51-150 50 dB

151-300 55 dB

301-500 60 dB

D. Transformers shall have the following features and ratings:

1. Enclosure: Indoor, ventilated.

2. Insulation Class: 185 deg C class for transformers 15 kVA or smaller; 220 deg C class for

transformers larger than 15 kVA.

3. Insulation Temperature Rise: 80 deg C maximum rise above 40 deg C.

4. Taps: For transformers 3 kVA and larger, full capacity taps in high-voltage winding as follows:

a. Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent taps below rated high voltage.

b. 15 kVA and larger: Six 2-1/2 percent taps, 2 above and 4 below rated high-voltage.

5. BIL: 10kV for all windings.

6. Secondary Neutral: Twice the ampacity of the secondary phase conductors.

7. Core Flux Density: Maintained below saturation point to prevent core saturation caused by harmonics even with a 10% primary overvoltage.

8. K-Factor: Transformers shall be specifically designed to supply 100% of the 60 hertz

fundamental rated current and

33% of the fundamental current as third harmonic,



20% of the fundamental current as fifth harmonic, 14% of the fundamental current as seventh harmonic, 11% of the fundamental current as ninth harmonic,

and lower proportional percentages of the fundamental current thru the 25th harmonic. The transformers shall be marked with a label stating "Suitable for Non-Sinusoidal Current Load with K factor not to exceed 13" per UL Guide Specifications.

E. Accessories: The following accessory items are required where indicated:

1. Surge Arresters: Low voltage type, factory-installed and connected to high-voltage terminal;

complying with NEMA Standard LA 1.

2. Surge Arresters: Low-voltage type, factory-installed and connected to low-voltage terminals; complying with NEMA Standard LA 1.

3. Electrostatic shielding (where indicated): Insulated metallic shield between primary and

secondary windings. Connect to terminal marked "shield" for grounding connection.

4. Wall mounting brackets: Manufacturers standard brackets for transformers sized up to 75 kVA where wall mounting is indicated.

5. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil core.

2.4 BUCK-BOOST TRANSFORMERS:

A. Comply with NEMA Standard ST 1 "Specialty Transformers", and UL Standard 506, "Specialty Transformers."

B. Ratings: As indicated, and for continuous duty.

C. Type: Self-cooled, dry type, connected as autotransformers to provide the percentage of buck or boost

indicated.

D. Enclosure: Suitable for the location indicated.

E. Sound Level: Minimum of 3 dB less than NEMA St 1 standard for transformer of type and size indicated when factory tested in accordance with that standard.

2.5 CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS:

A. Comply with NEMA Standard ST 1 "Specialty Transformers", and UL Standard 506, "Specialty

Transformers."

B. Ratings: As indicated and for continuous duty. Where ratings is not indicated, provide capacity in excess of load.

C. Type: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type.

D. Enclosure: Indoor, except as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for cooling air circulation.



B. Identify transformers in accordance with Division 16 Section on Electrical Identification.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A for copper and UL 486B for aluminum.

D. Install transformers as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable

requirements of NEC, NESC, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

E. Install units on vibration mounts; comply with manufacturer's indicated installation method, if any.

F. Provide minimum 2' and maximum 3' flexible conduit for transformer connections.

G. Where indicated, suspend transformer from structure using transformer mounting detail as shown on the

drawings.

H. Only totally enclosed nonventilated transformers are allowed to be installed in ceiling air plenum spaces.

I. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows, if required:

1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4-inches



3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing

units.

4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate.

J. Mounting:

1. Transformers 75 kVA and less may be suspended or wall mounted and should be suitable for

that possibility.

2. Transformers over 75 kVA shall be floor mounted.

3.2 GROUNDING:

A. Ground transformers and tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.


A. Tests shall conform to National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Standard ATS, "Acceptance

Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems," and the following:

1. Test Objectives: To assure transformer installation is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is installed in accordance with Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing.



2. Procedures: Upon satisfactory completion of tests, attach a label to tested components.

3. Schedule tests and notify Engineer/Architect at least one week in advance of schedule and of test commencement.

4. Reports: Provide a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and

workmanship and retest corrected defective items.

5. Submit written test reports to the Engineer/Architect and UCB Facilities.

6. Testing for transformers shall include insulation resistance test, taps verification, excitation test, and audible sound level tests.


A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interiors and exteriors of accessible components. Remove

paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and construction debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment.

3.5 PROTECTION:

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations within

enclosure of each transformer throughout periods during which equipment is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

END OF SECTION


SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 1

SECTION 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes low-voltage power service and distribution switchboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V or less.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product data for each product and component specified.

B. Shop drawings for each switchboard including dimensioned plans and elevations, component and

device lists, and a single-line diagram showing main and branch bus current ratings and continuous and short-circuit ratings of switchboard.

C. Shop drawings or other descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation

and isolation. Show front and side views of enclosures with dimensions.

D. Shop drawings of utility company metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.

E. Shop drawings of spare fuse cabinet showing material, dimensions, and features including storage provisions for fuse cartons.

F. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices.

G. Manufacturer's Schematic Wiring Diagram.

H. Point-to-Point Control Wiring Diagram: Differentiating between manufacturer-installed and

field-installed wiring (may be submitted upon delivery of switchboard).

I. Mimic bus diagram: Submit updated version of diagram reflecting field changes after final switchboard load connections have been made.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide switchboard assemblies that are listed and labeled.

1. The terms "listed" and "labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: The Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboard

equipment including clearances between switchboard and adjacent surfaces and items. Switchboards having equal performance characteristics and complying with indicated maximum dimensions may be considered.

C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchboards, of types,

sizes and capacities required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

D. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on project

utilizing switchboard units similar to that required for this project.




A. Deliver switchboards and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids to facilitate handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrapping for switchboards and components which protect equipment from damage. Install gravity measuring meters in containers which indicates whether container has been bumped or dropped. Return G-meters to manufacturer for reuse upon delivery of switchboards. Inspect equipment to ensure that no damage has occurred during shipment.

B. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated.

C. Store switchboard equipment in original packaging and protect from weather and construction traffic.

Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping. Store so condensation will not occur on or in switchboards. Provide temporary heaters as required to assure avoiding condensation.

D. Handle switchboard equipment carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components.

Remove packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment contained therein. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS:

A. Spare Fuses: Six spares of each type and rating of fuse and fusible devices used. Include spares for:

1. Potential transformer fuses. 2. Control power fuses. 3. Fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers. 4. Fuses for fusible switches. 5. Fuses for fused power circuit devices.

B. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.

C. Touch-Up Paint: Three half-pint containers.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A. Schedule delivery of switchboard equipment which permits ready building ingress for large equipment components to their designated installation spaces. Coordinate delivery of equipment with the installation of other building components.

B. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.

C. Coordinate with other electrical work including raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and

cabling/wiring, as necessary to interface installation of switchboards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:


1. General Electric Co. 2. Westinghouse/Cutler Hammer 3. Siemens-ITE



4. Square D Co.

B. Metering Equipment:

1. General Electric 2. Westinghouse/Cutler Hammer 3. Sangamo 4. TESCO or States

C. Watt-hour meter:

1. Landis & Gyr - Type AXS4, Form 9S class 20 TA-2.5, 120-480 volt. 2. Others only as pre-approved by the University.

D. Gear mounted metering equipment:

1. Square D power logic CM2250 2. CH equal 3. GE equal 4. Others as pre-approved by the University.

2.2 SWITCHBOARDS, GENERAL:

A. Description: Front-connected, front-accessible, with fixed, individually mounted main device,

panel-mounted branches, and sections rear aligned. Dead front, metal enclosed, self supporting and conforming to NEMA PB2.

B. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

2.3 FABRICATION AND FEATURES:

A. Enclosure: Steel. NEMA 1.

B. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Manufacture standard gray finish over a rust inhibiting primer on

phosphatizing treated metal surface. Provide painted surfaces that conform to IEEE C37.20.1, "Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear."

C. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated compartment and section meeting utility company

requirements. Where separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard.

D. Bus Transition and Incoming Line Pull Sections: Where required, match and align with basic

switchboard.

E. Hinged Front Panels: Provide to allow access to breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

F. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard: Provide where indicated or where required by installation conditions, and include the following features:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain air temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.

G. Buses and Connections: Three-phase, four-wire except as otherwise indicated. Features as follows:

1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity with feeder

circuit-breaker line connections. Horizontal cross busses throughout shall be non-tapered - 100% rated.



H. Ground Bus: 1/4-inch by 2-inch minimum size, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, and

equipped with pressure connector terminations for feeder- and branch-circuit ground conductors.

I. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents. Busses shall be bolted with access for future torque maintenance.

J. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated.

K. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Bus, and Equipment Ground Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of the

switchboard main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from either end by means of bolt holes or other approved method and connecting links. Provide for any outgoing or incoming bus or cabling as indicated.

L. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses except as indicated and equipped with

approved pressure connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral cables.

M. Provide 4 spare lugs for #4/0 AWG on load side of main circuit breakers.

N. Provide lugs on load side of distribution device (breakers, switches, etc.), including neutral and ground lugs, as shown on the drawings and as necessary to meet or exceed ampacity of OCPD.

2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDS):

A. Comply with requirements of Division 16 Section on Overcurrent Protective Devices for types of

OCPDs indicated. Provide indicated features, ratings, characteristics, and settings.

B. Future Devices: Where provision for future overcurrent protective devices or space is indicated, equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, designed for the OCPD types and ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.

2.5 OTHER CIRCUIT CONTROL AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES:

A. General: Factory-installed and -tested devices of types listed below, with indicated ratings, settings,

and features.

B. Surge Arresters: As specified in IEEE C62.1.1, "Standards for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits," or IEEE C62.1 "Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits."

1. Description: Coordinate impulse sparkover voltage with system circuit voltage, and provide

factory mounting and connection.

C. TVSS: Provide transient voltage surge suppression for switchboard. See Specification Section 16675 for requirements.

2.6 INSTRUMENTATION:

A. Provide space in utility metering compartment for installation of items specified below.

B. Instrument Transformers: NEMA Standard EI 21.1, “Instrument Transformers for Revenue Metering

110 kV BIL and Less,” IEEE Standard C57.13, “Requirements for Instrument Transformers,” and the following:

1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3

with burdens of W, X, and Y.



2. Provide in Face of Meter Panel: TESCO 1092 panel mounted test block, flush mounted for portable test equipment used by Department of Facilities management. Current transformers shall have shorting auxiliary contacts.

3. Current Transformers (ANSI C57:13):

a. Five (5) ampere secondary, with dual or tapped secondary winding. Transformers to have shorting devices. Require ratio to match rating of service and ½ rating of service.

b. Dual rated shorting terminal strip on C.T. wiring in meter compartment.

4. Provide metering per metering detail.

C. Ammeters and Voltmeters: ANSI C39.1, “Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments.”

1. Ammeters and Voltmeters: 4.5-inch square, flush or semiflush, with antiparallax 250-degree

scales and external zero adjustment, white dial with black figures and pointer, 5 amp, 60 Hz movement, 1% accuracy.

2. Voltmeters: Cover an expanded scale range of normal voltage plus or minus ten percent.

D. Instrument Switches: Rotary type, multi-stage snap action type with 600V AC/DC silver plated contacts

engraved escutcheon plate, four position and with “off” position.

1. Voltmeter switches: Permit reading all phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral voltages where a neutral is indicated.

2. Ammeter switches: Permit reading current in each phgase, and shall maintain current

transformer secondaries in a closed-circuit condition at all times.

E. Watt-Hour Meter:

1. Three phase electronic type with three stators, rated 5 amperes and 120V at 60 Hertz. Meter suitable for 3 and 4 wire systems. Adjustments for light and full load, phase balance and power factor. Provide programmable demand indicator and KYZ pulse initiator in meter.

2. Potential transformers to be used on all kWh meters above 120/208 volt systems. Ratio of 2.4:1

for 9S meters, 3 phase 4 wire wye configuration.

F. Ground Fault Relay and Sensor: Zero sequence sensor with adjustable ground fault relay. Adjustment from 200 to 1200 amperes, time delay adjustable from 0 to 15 seconds. Provide with monitor panel and lamp to indicate relay operation, “TEST” AND “RESET” control switches.

2.7 RATINGS:

A. Provide nominal system voltage, continuous main bus amperage, and short-circuit-current ratings as

indicated on the drawings.

2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES:

A. Spare Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall-mounted, lockable, compartmented, steel box or cabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION:

A. General: Refer to Division 16 Section on Electrical Identification. Identify units, devices, controls,

and wiring with factory-applied labels and signs.



B. Compartment Nameplates: Engraved laminated plastic or metal nameplate for each compartment,

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

C. UL nameplates shall be provided for all switchboards. Information shall include, but not be limited to, manufacturer, model number, serial number, plant or manufacturing location, ampere rating, voltage rating, wire and phase identification and bus short circuit bracing rating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install switchboards and accessory items in accordance with manufacturers' written installation instructions and the following specifications:

B. Anchor each switchboard assembly to the levelled concrete base in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. Attach by bolting using minimum of 3/8" bolts.

C. Strength, Spacing, and Placement of Equipment Housekeeping Pads: Provide a concrete housekeeping pad for all switchboards. Provide 4-inch channel sills specified above in the pad. Fabricate pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Fabricate base 4 inches



3. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland cement that conforms

to ASTM C 150, 4000-psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate.

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount printed, basic operating instructions for switchboards,

including control and key interlocking sequences, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on the front of the switchboards.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 16

Section on Electrical Identification.

B. Mimic Bus: Apply continuously integrated mimic bus to front of switchboard. Arrange in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with the approved final mimic bus diagram. Coordinate mimic bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of the principal switchboard components and connections.

1. Medium: Painted graphics in approved color contrasting with the equipment factory-finish

background to represent the bus and components, complete with lettered designations.



3.3 GROUNDING:

A. Connections: As indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL

486A and 486B.

B. Ground equipment to main electrical ground bus indicated. Provide minimum 5-ohm ground resistance at switchboard location.

3.4 CONNECTIONS:

A. Tighten switchboard bus joint bolts and electrical connector and terminal bolts in accordance with

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not stated, use those specified in UL 486A for copper and UL 486B for aluminum.


A. General: Comply with applicable standards of the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA)

including Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems."

B. Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following tests:

1. Make insulation resistance tests of switchboard buses, components, and connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuits.

2. Make continuity tests of circuits.

C. Visual and Mechanical Inspections: Include the following inspections and related work:

1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory, labels, and nameplate compliance with up-to-date circuit connections.

2. Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and other operable devices in

accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.

3. Check switchboard anchorage, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components.

4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.

5. Clean switchboard interior and exterior using manufacturer's approved methods and materials.

D. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instruction:

1. Insulation resistance test of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnect from solid state

devices through normal disconnecting features. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.

2. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections.

3. Check phasing of alternate supply sources to the same bus.

4. Provide current transformer, ratio and polarity tests.



E. Retesting: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest switchboards. Verify by the retests that switchboards meet specified requirements.

3.6 CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint splatters

and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

3.7 PROTECTION:

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation within each section of switchboards throughout periods during which the switchboard is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service representatives to demonstrate

and test switchboards and train Owner's maintenance personnel. Conduct a minimum of one day of training in operation and maintenance as required under Division 1 Section on Project Closeout. Include both classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and maintenance procedures.

B. Schedule training with at least seven days advance notification.

END OF SECTION


GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEMS 26 24 14 - 1

SECTION 26 24 14 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Extent of ground-fault protection work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Applications of ground-fault protection units required for project include the following:

1. Single service disconnect. 2. Feeder and branch circuits.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on ground-fault protection devices and associated components including, but not limited to, types, sizes, basic ampere ratings, and control voltages.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of installed ground-fault protection devices and accessories including sensors, current monitors, and test panels.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ground-fault protection systems wiring diagrams showing, but not limited to, splices, connectors, and interconnections to equipment. Include routing and spatial relationships to adjacent electrical power and signal wiring.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ground-fault protection units of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing ground-fault protection work similar to that required for this project.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors", and Std 1053, "Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment." Provide ground-fault protection systems and components which are UL-listed and labeled.

2. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable recommended practice of IEEE Standards 142, 241 and 242 pertaining to ground-fault protection devices.

3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds Pub No.'s PB 2.2 and AB 1, pertaining to construction and installation of ground-fault protection devices and molded-case circuit-breakers.

4. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NFPA No.'s 70 and 70B, pertaining to construction and installation of ground-fault protection devices.




A. Deliver ground-fault protection units properly packaged in factory-fabricated containers.

B. Store ground-fault protection units indoors in clean, dry space. Retain units, until installed, in original cartons and protect from dirt, weather, construction debris and traffic.

C. Handle ground-fault protection units properly to avoid abrasing, cracking, and breaking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ground-fault protection units of one of the following (for each type of unit):

1. Allen-Bradley Co. 2. ASEA/Brown Boveri Electric Inc. 3. Federal Pacific Electric Co. 4. General Electric Co. 5. Gould Inc. 6. Square D Co. 7. Westinghouse Electric Corp. 8. Siemens

2.2 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEMS AND DEVICES:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide ground-fault protection systems, including devices and components, of types, sizes, characteristics, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for applications indicated.

B. Circuit Interrupters/Circuit Breakers: Provide 1 inch wide module bolt-on panelboard circuit breakers, with integral ground-fault circuit interrupters, UL-rated Class A, Group 1; 20-amperes ratings, 2-pole construction, 120/240-volts, 60 Hz, 10,000 AIC. Provide units with solid-state ground-fault sensing and signaling, with 5 milliamperes ground-fault sensitivity trip level, with accuracy of plus or minus 1 milliampere. Equip with PUSH-TO-TEST capability. Provide modules which mate and match panelboards in which they are located.

C. Ground-Fault Protection Systems:

1. General: Provide ground-fault protection systems for grounded electrical systems, 600-volts, 60Hz, comprised of current monitor, shunt trip relaying equipment, including solid-state relays, and static ground-fault current sensors of sufficient size to encircle phase conductors and neutral conductor of circuit to be monitored. Select GFP systems with monitor panels, and low-voltage power circuit-breakers; select units which function properly in conjunction with other elements of GFP system. Provide ground-fault current sensitivity and time-current response characteristics as indicated. Construct system components and devices with the following features:

2. Current Sensors: Provide zero-sequence current sensors with rectangular windows for feeder and branch devices and ground return sensors for main service device; inputs compatible to relay. Construct sensor of split-core construction which can be opened to expedite its installation or removal without disturbing the electrical conductors being encompassed. Provide



test windings in sensor for testing the operation of ground-fault protection unit including sensor pick-up, relay and circuit protection devices.

3. Ground-Fault Relay: Provide solid-state ground-fault signaling relay with silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) output, to be used with electric or shunt trip, which requires no external source of electrical power, drawing its energy to operate ground-fault protection system directly from output of current sensor. Select relays capable of sensing ground currents which causes the interrupter to open after current reaches a magnitude value for time period indicated. Provide relay with adjustable pick-up current sensitivity range from 10 mA to 200 mA for ground-fault currents from 100 to 1200 amperes, with calibrated dial to show pick-up point settings. Provide factory-set time delay which is adjustable from instantaneous to 15-seconds and which also prevents tampering with setting after installation.

4. Circuit Breakers: Provide molded-case circuit breakers of sizes and ratings indicated. Construct with thermal and magnetic elements for conventional overload and fault-current protection; and with ground-fault trip mechanism capable of being activated by ground-fault relay which causes opening of circuit when ground-fault occurs of the magnitude indicated.

5. Monitor Panels: Provide monitor panels with ground-fault indicators, control power indicators and TEST and RESET buttons, and with control circuitry capable of providing means for testing system with, or without interruption of service. Construct ground-fault system which can not be left in an INACTIVE, or OFF state.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which ground-fault protection systems and devices are to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION DEVICES:

A. Install ground-fault protection devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that ground-fault protection devices comply with requirements. Comply with applicable requirements of NEC and NEMA standards for installation of ground-fault protection devices to ensure that devices fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including electrical wiring work, as appropriate to properly interface installation of ground-fault protection devices with other work.

C. Install ground-fault protection devices complying with electrical winding polarities indicated.

D. Fasten ground-fault sensing devices without mechanical stresses, twisting, or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, bus bars or cables.

E. Install ground-fault sensing windows symmetrically encircling power conductor bus bars or cables. Maintain clearances between conductors and ground-fault sensor body as recommended by device manufacturer.

3.3 GROUNDING:

A. Provide grounding connections for ground-fault systems and units as indicated. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque



tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.

3.4 ADJUSTING:

A. Set field-adjustable GFP devices for pickup and time sensitivity ranges as indicated by shunt circuit and overcurrent study, subsequent to installation of devices.

B. Perform Ground fault coordination study. Set field-adjustable pick-up and time-sensitivity ranges accordingly.


A. Upon completion of installation of ground-fault protection devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability, and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

END OF SECTION


PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1

SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V or less.

1.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): A device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product data for each type panelboard, accessory item, and component specified.

B. Shop drawings from manufacturers of panelboards including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include the following:

1. Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1. 2. Bus configuration and current ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and

auxiliary components.

C. Wiring diagrams detailing schematic diagram including control wiring, and differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

D. Report of field tests and observations.

E. Panel schedules for installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of panelboards and enclosures, of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

C. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing panelboards similar to those required for this project.


A. Keys: Furnish six spares of each type for panelboard cabinet locks.



B. Touch-up Paint for panelboards: One half-pint container.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:


1. Square D Co. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.

2.2 PANELBOARDS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as indicated. Comply with Division 16 Section on Overcurrent Protective Devices, with OCPDs adapted to panelboard installation. Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multiple breakers shall have common trip.

B. Enclosures: Cabinets, flush or surface mounted as indicated. NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except where the following enclosure requirements are indicated. Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and NEMA types as indicated, code-gauge, minimum 16-gauge thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed mounting. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed.

C. Front: Hinged trim type, secured to box with 1/4-20-large head slotted captive screws except as indicated. Front for surface-mounted panels shall be same dimensions as box. Fronts for flush panels shall overlap box except as otherwise specified. Provide fronts with hinged trim construction and door with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed door hinges on inner door, piano hinge on outer trim door, and door swings as indicated.

D. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panel door with card and clear plastic cover. Directory shall match panelboard configuration, i.e. top to bottom, left to right. Provide permanent panelboard labels for each circuit number.

E. Bus Material: Provide tin plated hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity.

1. Provide an add/alternate to provide tin-plated, high-strength, electrical grade aluminum alloy bus in lieu of copper.

F. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors. Bonded to box.

G. Provide copper lugs for incoming feeders and grounds.

H. Provide minimum short circuit current ratings as indicated.

I. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the OCPD ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices.

J. Special Features: Provide the following features for panelboards as indicated.

1. Provide two bolt compression lugs for incoming feeders on main lug only (MLO) panelboards, and ground connections.



2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS:

A. Branch OCPDs: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION:

A. General: Refer to Division 16 Section on electrical identification for labeling materials.

B. UL nameplates shall be provided for all panelboards. Information shall include, but not be limited to, manufacturer, model number, serial number, plant or manufacturing location, ampere rating, voltage rating, wire and phase identification and bus short circuit bracing rating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install panelboards and accessory items in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1, "General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less" and manufacturers' written installation instructions.

B. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish.

C. Circuit Directory: Typed and reflective of final circuit changes required to balance panel loads. Obtain approval before installing.

D. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs in accordance with Division 16 Section on electrical identification.

3.3 GROUNDING:

A. Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as indicated. B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus indicated.

3.4 CONNECTIONS:

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following tests:

1. Make insulation resistance tests of panelboard buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits.

2. Make continuity tests of circuits.

B. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections and prepare panelboard for satisfactory operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.



C. Schedule tests with at least one week in advance notification.

D. Reports: Provide report written reports of tests and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include records of repairs and adjustments made.

E. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested components indicating results of tests and inspections, responsible organization and person, and date.

F. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work:

1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules.

2. Exercise and perform of operational tests of all mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.

3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components.

4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.

5. Verify that proper grounding bushings/bonding/ and panel enclosure bonding is complete.

6. Verify isolated neutral bar and neutral connections.

G. Electrical tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instruction:

1. Insulation resistance test of buses. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.

2. Ground resistance test on system and equipment ground connections.

3. Test main overcurrent protective devices in accordance with Section "Overcurrent Protective Devices."

H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting of panelboards by testing organization. Verify by the system tests that the total assembly meets specified requirements.

3.6 CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marks of finish to match original finish.

END OF SECTION


WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES


A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.

B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:

1. Receptacles. 2. Switches. 3. Wallplates.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wiring devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 2 years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing

wiring devices similar to those required for this project.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products that are listed and labeled for their applications and installation conditions and for the environments in which installed.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code", Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as

defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices. B. Operation and maintenance data for materials and products specified in this Section to include in the

"Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1. 1.4 COORDINATION:

A. Wiring Devices for Owner Furnished Equipment: Match devices to plug connectors for Owner-furnished equipment.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wiring devices of one of the following: 1. Devices:

a. Harvey Hubbell Inc. b. Leviton Mfg Co. c. Arrow-Hart Div, Crouse-Hinds Co.

d. Daniel Woodhead e. Eagle f. Pass and Seymour Inc.



2.2 WIRING DEVICES:

A. Receptacles:

1. All duplex, single, and special receptacles shall be heavy duty, specification grade listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, and have a metal mounting strap with self-grounding and have a hex-head green grounding screw and be side and back wired. Each device shall bear the UL/FS (W-C-596E) Label.

2. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1; Type 5-20R, specification grade with ivory

nylon face. All receptacles connected to emergency circuits shall have a red face. Color selection shall be verified with Architect/Engineer prior to ordering. Dedicated outlets shall be gray.

3. Specific-use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1 straight blade OR WD 5 locking; as indicated

on drawings, black face.

B. Switches:

1. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits: NEMA WD1; FS W-S-896E; AC quiet type specification grade listed by Underwriter's Laboratories with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC, unless noted otherwise. Mounting straps shall be metal and be equipped with a green hex-head ground screw. Each switch shall bear the UL/FS Label.

2. Handle: Ivory for normal power circuits, red for emergency power circuits. Verify color with

Architect/Engineer prior to ordering.

3. Switches shall have color coded bodies as follows: 20A – Red; 30A - Green 2.3 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:

A. Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Identify all wall plates used for receptacles with branch circuit number per requirements of section on Electrical Identification. Provide blank wall plates for all cable, data, telephone and junction and outlet boxes. Where cables are routed through the wallplate, provide grommets in wallplate openings to protect cables. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:

1. Material and Finish:

a. Smooth Metal: 0.04" thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel in laboratories. b. Smooth Lexan: Ivory in color, in all other locations unless otherwise directed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES:

A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring work, as necessary to interface

installation of wiring devices with other work.

C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris.



D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.

E. Install wallplates after painting work is completed.

F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's

published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A.

G. Provide GFCI type outlets for each above counter duplex receptacle shown within 6'-0" of sinks/lavatories.

For above counter multi-outlet assemblies which do not contain duplex receptacles that can be replaced with GFCI devices, provide GFI circuit breakers on the branch circuit(s) feeding the assembly.

H. Provide circuit and panelboard identification on the outside of all wall plates with electronic label maker.

3.2 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES:

A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.

3.3 GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

3.4 CLEANING:

A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices.

3.5 TESTING:

A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Operate each operable device at least six (6) times.

B. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with

manufacturer recommendations.

C. Replace damaged or defective components.

END OF SECTION


ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 1

SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A. This Section includes overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs) rated 600 V and below and switching devices commonly used with them.

B. Panelboards: Application, installation, and other related requirements for overcurrent protective device

installations in distribution equipment are specified in other Division 16 sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): A device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.

B. Ampere-Squared-Seconds: An expression of available thermal energy resulting from current flow. With

regard to current-limiting fuses and circuit breakers, the ampere-squared-seconds during fault current interruption represents the energy allowed to flow before the fuse or breaker interrupts the fault current within its current limiting range.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product data for fuses, circuit breakers, and OCPD accessories specified in this Section, including descriptive data and time-current curves for all protective devices and let-through current curves for those with current limiting characteristics. Include coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of overcurrent protective devices of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Each type of OCPD shall be the product of a single manufacturer.



1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:

a. Square D Co. b. General Electric Co. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Westinghouse Electric Corp.

2. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters:

a. Square D Co. b. General Electric Co. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Westinghouse Electric Corp.



3. When Mounting overcurrent protective devices in panelboards, provide equipment of same

manufacturer as equipment into which they are being mounted. 2.2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDs), GENERAL:

A. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards and other related equipment; and also as individually enclosed and mounted single units.

B. Enclosures: NEMA 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)."

C. Where OCPD's are to be installed in existing panelboards they shall be of the same manufacture and type as

those existing in the equipment. If this is not possible, provide devices which are compatible with the existing equipment and when installed will not void the U.L. label or reduce the short circuit rating of the equipment.

D. Provide 100% rated equipment and feeder breakers unless otherwise noted.

E. Provide standard rated branch circuit breakers unless otherwise noted.

F. All overcurrent devices shall be individually rated for the available fault current unless otherwise noted.

Series ratings of equipment will only be allowed where specifically called out. 2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

A. General: UL 489, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures," and NEMA AB 1, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers."

B. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type if held in

place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal.

C. Characteristics: Indicated frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and a short-circuit interrupting capacity rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical for 120 and 208 volt devices, unless a greater rating is indicated or required to match existing devices or equipment.

D. Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay and instantaneous

overcurrent trip protection for each pole.

E. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in panelboards where indicated.

F. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as otherwise indicated or required to

suit environment where located. 2.4 COMBINATION CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS:

A. General: UL 943 "Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters," arranged for sensing and tripping for ground fault current in addition to overcurrent and short-circuit current. Provide features as follows:

1. Match features and module size of panelboard breakers and provide clear identification of ground fault

trip function.

2. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as a class A, type 1 device.



2.5 OCPD ACCESSORIES:

A. Lock-Out Devices: Provide padlocking provisions on each overcurrent protective device, lockable in the open or closed position. Provide 3 sets of lockout/tagout devices for each type of breaker or switch provided. Include tags, locks and all accessories necessary.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Independently Mounted OCPDs: Locate as indicated and install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install OCPDs level and plumb.

B. Install fuses in fusible devices as indicated. Arrange fuses so that fuse ratings are readable without removing

fuse. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Identify components in accordance with Division 16 Section on electrical identification. 3.3 CONNECTIONS:

A. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.4 GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as indicated and as required by NEC. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.


A. Reports: Prepare written reports on tests and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made. Tests shall be made on all new and existing OCPD's provided and/or connected under this project in accordance with this section.

B. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested components

indicating test results, date, and responsible organization and person.

C. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week's advance notification.

D. Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following tests:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:

a. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current single line diagram.

b. Exercise and perform operational tests of all mechanical components and other operable devices in

accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.



c. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPDs with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.

d. Clean OCPDs using manufacturer's approved methods and materials.

2. Electrical Tests: Perform the following tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions:

a. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and

control circuits.

b. Make continuity tests of circuits.

E. Activate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or undervoltage relays, to verify operation of shunt-trip devices.

F. Check stored-energy charging motors for proper operation of motor, mechanism, and limit switches.

G. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting of OCPDs by testing

organization. Verify by the system tests that specified requirements are met. 3.6 CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPDs. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

END OF SECTION


ENGINE GENERATOR 26 32 13 - 1

SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATOR

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Extent of diesel generator set work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, diesel engine, electrical generator, engine starting system including batteries, instrument control panel, weather-protective housing, transfer switches, day tank(s), annunciator panel, exhaust silencer, wall thimble, and accessories.

B. System Description:

1. Diesel engine-driven generator to provide source of stand-by and emergency power.

C. Concrete and grout work for engine-driven generator pads, foundations, frames and bedplates are specified in Division-3 "Concrete" sections; not work of this section.

D. Main fuel tanks, piping, ductwork, controls and associated accessories required for installation of diesel engine-driven generator units are specified in Division-15 sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on diesel engine- driven generator sets and components and include a copy of the manufacturer's standard product warranty.

B. Checklist: Submit a detailed checklist which acknowledges compliance or a reason for non-compliance to each of the specification requirements. Arrange the checklist according to the headings of each item identified in this specification (i.e. Shop Drawings, Wiring Diagrams individual line items, etc.) Mark items as "N/A" where the item is not applicable.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit ½ inch scale layout drawings of diesel engine-driven generator units and accessories being supplied, including, but not limited to, generator, engine control panel, master control panel, fuel line piping, fuel tanks and related equipment, batteries, battery racks, battery chargers, remote start-stop stations, instrumentation, and transfer switches or breakers. In addition, show diesel generator set unit and its spatial relationship to associated equipment. Allow adequate clearance space for removal of engine generator elements for maintenance purposes. The drawings shall be for the particular unit to be supplied, with all other information removed.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for diesel engine-driven generator unit showing connections to generator output breaker, control panels, transfer switches or breakers, alarms, remote alarms and ancillary equipment. Show and differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer-installed and portions that are field-installed. The unit diagrams shall be for the particular unit to be supplied with all other information removed.

1. All interconnection and wiring diagrams shall include the following information as a minimum:

a. Complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each of the items of equipment.

b. The diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation and maintenance.

2. In addition to paper copies of the interconnecting and wiring diagrams, an AUTOCAD, v.2000, electronic file shall be submitted for each diagram.



E. Certifications:

1. Provide diesel engine-driven generator set's manufacturer certified test record of the final production testing prior to shipping the unit from the factory to the project site. Include the following tests:

a. Single-step load pickup. b. Transient and steady-state governing. c. Safety shutdown device testing. d. Voltage regulation. e. Rated power. f. Maximum power.

F. Factory Testing: Submit a factory test log of diesel engine-alternator set showing a minimum of four (4) hours testing at 100 percent rated load to the Owner prior to shipment of the generator set. Load testing shall have a 0.8 power factor lagging continuously.

1. Normal preliminary diesel engine and generator tests shall be performed before unit assembly. 2. All engine safety features shall be tested for operation and calibrated prior to the load test. 3. All control and relay functions shall be tested for proper operation. 4. A high potential test of the alternator shall be performed. 5. All tests shall be conducted at 110°F. The actual radiators to be installed shall be used. 6. The following engine run data shall be recorded at 15 minute intervals:

a. Time b. kW output c. Output Voltage d. Amperes e. RPM f. Input water temperature g. Output water temperature h. Input oil temperature i. Fuel pressure j. Oil pressure k. Ambient temperature l. Radiator inlet air temperature if different than ambient.

7. All test sheets will be submitted at the completion of the test. The vendor shall contact the Owner for scheduling and coordination of the factory test. Owner personnel or an Owner representative shall have the opportunity to witness the test.

G. Submit engine horsepower curves indicating manufacturer's approval of the engine rating for standby power application based on actual testing of a similar package. Special ratings or "maximum" ratings are not acceptable.

H. Provide information on the content and capacity of exhaust gases emitted by the engine at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load. The exhaust gas omission shall comply with all Federal, State and Local Codes in force at the site location.

I. Submit de-rating data, calculations, and final unit rating for the specified operating conditions at the site, where they differ from the vendor’s stated standard operating conditions.

J. Submit the generator harmonic analysis report for the 3rd, 5th and 7th harmonics that shows compliance with this specification.




A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of diesel engine-driven generator units and ancillary equipment, of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

1. The engine-generator shall be assembled, thoroughly tested and warranted, as the product of a single manufacturer. Sets which are assembled components by a service type facility are not acceptable.

2. The engine-generator set supplier shall be fully capable of providing all site service work on the engine-generator set and all accessories including:

a. Repair or replacement of any component including large assemblies such as generator rotors, drive shafts, etc.

b. Testing and trouble shooting.

c. General maintenance.

3. The engine generator set supplier shall have in local stock, all customary parts required for service of the unit including engine parts and electrical assemblies.

4. The engine generator set supplier shall maintain a service shop located within two/four hours drive from the job site and shall have fully equipped service trucks with mechanic/technicians available and on-call 24 hours per day.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with diesel engine-driven generator units similar to that required for this project.

1. Agreement to Maintain: The Installer must be willing to execute with the Owner, an agreement for continued maintenance of diesel engine-driven generator units.


A. Deliver diesel engine-driven generators properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids to facilitate handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings for engine-generator and components which protect equipment from damage.

B. Store diesel engine-driven generator equipment in original packaging and protect from weather and construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping.

C. Handle diesel engine-driven generator equipment carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diesel generator sets of one of the following:

1. Cummins/Onan Engine Co.



2. Caterpillar Tractor Co. 3. Kohler Corp; 4. Waukesha Engine Div. Natural gas only 5. Detroit Diesel 6. Generac 100KW and lower

2.2 RATINGS:

A. The engine-generator set shall have the following minimum measured ratings when installed at the specified site and all derating factors including those for temperature, altitude, fan, charging generator, water pump, etc. are considered.

1. Duty :Standby Prime 2. Kilowatts:_______KW 3. Power Factor:0.8 4. Frequency:60 Hz Nominal 5. Voltage:120/240 120/208 277/480 6. Phase:1 3 7. Wire:3 4 8. Synchronous Speed:1200/1800 RPM

2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:

A. The equipment specified is intended for application in an environment as described below:

EDIT NOTE: THESE ARE STANDARD PARAMETERS FOR MOST SITES

1. Altitude:5500 feet above sea level. 2. Maximum Temperature:100 degrees F 120 degrees F 3. Minimum Temperature:40 degrees F -20 degrees F 4. Location: Indoor/Outdoor

2.4 ENGINE:

A. Type: direct fuel injected, liquid cooled with unit mounted radiator and engine driven water pump, multi-cylinder inline or v-type, two/four stroke cycle, compression ignition diesel, internal combustion engine. Diesel engine shall comply with the requirements of SAE 1349, ISO 8528 (Part 2), EGSA 101P and IEEE Standard 446 as they apply to standby application.

B. Fuel System: Appropriate for use of No. 1 or 2 fuel oil.

C. Governor: Isochronous type to maintain governed speed at rated frequency regardless of the kW load and shall meet the following requirements:

1. Stability: 0.25 percent maximum frequency variation at any constant load from no load to full load.

2. Regulation; 0.25 percent maximum frequency deviation at steady state. Provide a separate overspeed device, independent of the governor, to prevent runaway in the event of any failure which may render the governor inoperable.

D. Engine Accessories: Provide the following engine accessories.

1. Fuel filter. 2. Lube oil filter.



3. Intake air filter. 4. Lube oil cooler. 5. Fuel transfer pump. 6. Fuel priming pump. 7. Gear-driven water pump.

E. The engine shall be designed to develop rated speed and torque capable of developing full load within 8 seconds from the time the engine starts. Engine cranking period shall not exceed 30 seconds.

F. The lubrication system shall incorporate a threaded, spin-on or canister type, full flow, duplex filtration system with a spring loaded, pressure calibrated, bypass valve to allow lubrication to continue in the event of unusually high filter restriction. The bypass valve must be an integral part of the engine filters or filter housings. Locate filters for easy servicing. A local alarm shall be generated if bypass occurs.

1. A prelube oil system shall be used only when recommended by the manufacturer to reduce engine wear and improve starting time.

2. Provide engine with an initial fill (including oil makeup tank) of manufacturer’s recommended multi-viscosity lubricating oil.

G. Provide a valved oil drain extended past the engine frame with braided stainless steel hose and reusable fittings.

H. Provide an automatic lube oil make-up system (REN or equivalent) to automatically maintain proper oil level in the engine crank case. Equip the system with a reserve oil supply tank sized for the engine provided, and based on the manufacturer’s recommendation for oil consumption during a 72 hour engine run. Provide a shut-off valve between the tank and float valve and a shut-off valve between the float valve and oil pan. All flexible hoses shall be of the braided stainless steel type.

I. The engine shall be equipped with protective devices to meet control requirements specified elsewhere in this specification. The control devices shall be tied into the engine generator control. All protective devices shall be wired into a master engine terminal box with terminal strips for remote connections and connections to annunciators or controls as required.

J. All equipment shall operate with minimum vibration throughout the operating range as assembled units. The equipment supplier shall assume all additional shop, shipping and transportation expense, and/or cost at the job site necessary to reduce excessive vibration attributable to unbalance of the equipment.

2.5 GENERATOR CHARACTERISTICS:

A. The generator shall be provided in accordance with the following:

1. The generator shall be of the single-bearing type, dripproof construction, externally regulated, directly connected to the engine flywheel through a semi-flexible coupling. The generator shall be complete with inboard brushless exciter. The generator rotor shall be dynamically balanced to withstand overspeeds up to 125 percent rated speed.

2. The generator shall comply with NEMA Standard MG-1, latest revision. Insulation shall be Class F. Rotor and stator temperature rise shall not exceed 105 degrees C. over a 40 degree C. ambient temperature at specified site altitude. Generator must be derated in accordance with NEMA MG-1.

3. The generator shall be capable of continuously delivering its rated output at any power factor from 1.0 to 0.8 lagging at ±5 percent of rated voltage and at 60Hz, in the environmental conditions as specified.



4. Insulation shall be 100 percent epoxy material, pressure impregnated.

5. Stator winding pitch shall be optimized for best waveshape.

OR

Stator winding shall be of a 5/6 2/3 pitch design to parallel with existing generators, which are (manufacturer) - (cat. no.). Total harmonic distortion of output waveform shall not exceed 5 percent total RMS voltage measured line to line at rated load.

EDIT NOTE: 2/3 pitch is typical for Marathon and Cummins. 5/6 pitch is specific to Caterpillar. Pitch should be coordinated for paralleling applications. Include data on the generators to be paralleled.

6. The generator voltage regulator shall be solid state, with external voltage adjust rheostat. Provide a setscrew stability adjustment. Voltage regulation shall be +1.0 percent. Steady state voltage stability shall remain within a 0.5 percent band of rated voltage.

7. The engine alternator shall be capable of accepting a one-step application of 100% of nameplate kW load at 0.8 power factor and recover to steady state conditions without disruption of power to the load. When the alternator is sequentially loaded with rated full load in three equal steps, the transient voltage drop at any step shall be limited such that the alternator voltage is not less than 75% of nominal voltage, and frequency is not less than 91% of nominal. In addition, the voltage at the alternator shall recover to within 90% of nominal voltage and the frequency to within 97% of nominal within 4 seconds after each sequential load application, or 60% of each step time interval (whichever is less).

8. During recovery from transients caused by step-load increases, step-load decreases, or resulting from 100% load rejection, the speed of the diesel alternator set shall not reach the overspeed shutdown setpoint.

9. The generator shall be capable of providing 300 percent of rated current for ten seconds during a short circuit condition.

10. The generator shall be of four/ten/twelve lead design connected in three phase, 4 wire/wye single phase, 3 wire/wye configuration. Neutral capacity shall be 100 percent of each phase.

11. Telephone influence factor (TIF) shall not exceed 50.

12. Generator bearing shall be designed for a minimum B-10 bearing life of 40,000 hours. The bearing shall be of the shielded type with provisions for lubricating without opening terminal compartment.

13. For multiple engine/generator applications, coordinate generator pitch/impedance, and other factors of each new and existing system for proper paralleling characteristics.

14. All generator leads (including neutral) shall be extended un-spliced from windings to generator connection junction box external to generator.



2.6 STARTING EQUIPMENT:

A. General: The engine shall be equipped with a 12/24 volt electric starting system of sufficient capacity to crank the engine at a speed which will allow starting of the engine.

1. Starting system shall be capable of starting the engine either manually or automatically.

B. Batteries:

1. The batteries shall be dedicated to the engine.

2. Provide lead acid batteries having sufficient capacity for cranking the engine for at least 40 seconds at firing speed in the minimum ambient temperature specified.

OR

Edit Note: For AT&T projects, use the following section on nicad (nickel cadmium) batteries in lieu of lead acid.

Provide Nife, nickel cadmium batteries, type SPH as provided by SAFT America, Inc. according to AT&T National Contract #GPA 3177, having sufficient capacity for cranking the engine for at least 60 seconds at firing speed in the minimum ambient temperature specified without lowering the terminal voltage of any cell below 1.0 volts. The battery shall be a wet cell type, with explosion resistant vent caps. Vent caps shall be flame arresting bayonet type with flip top for ease in maintenance.

3. The cell container shall be made of high impact translucent polypropylene with clearly marked maximum and minimum electrolyte levels. All cell data such as battery type, manufacturer’s name, electrolyte level marks shall be displayed clearly. Each cell shall have terminal voltage of 1.2 volts DC nominal voltage. The lid shall be thermally welded onto the cell container to eliminate any risk of electrolyte leakage. Gluing or chemical bonding is not acceptable.

4. The battery shall be suitable for continuous operation, within the temperature range of -20 degrees C and +40 degrees C and able to operate adequately with occasional temperature excursions of up to +60 degrees C.

5. The battery electrolyte shall be an aqueous solution of potassium hydroxide with a specific gravity of approximately 1.20. Lithium hydroxide may be used as an additive. There shall be no need to change the electrolyte over the life of the battery.

6. The battery positive and negative terminals shall be of threaded type. The positive terminal shall be identified by a red plastic disc at the base.

7. Rigid connections shall be manufactured of nickel plated high quality copper bar. Flexible intercell connections shall be made out of copper cable with appropriate insulation. Nickel plated lead, or nickel plated steel are not acceptable for flexible or rigid connections. The battery cables shall be welding type cable using compression connectors and shall have physical protection. Provide corrosion inhibiting compound on all cable terminations.

C. Accessories:

1. Provide a battery rack and necessary cables and clamps.



EDIT NOTE: Add the following paragraph on battery racks to the item above for AT&T projects.

Each battery shall be mounted on a free standing steel rack protected with an alkaline resistant epoxy paint. Each cell row shall be elevated in steps so that the minimum electrolyte level mark is clearly visible on all cells from the front of the battery. Battery rack shall be grounded and anchored to the floor. Verify rack dimensions with field conditions indicated on plans to ensure rack will fit in location specified. Battery rack shall be designed and secured to match the specified seismic zone.

2. A suitable battery charging alternator shall be provided with sufficient capacity to recharge the batteries back to normal starting requirements within 90 minutes.

EDIT NOTE: Use battery blanket for outdoor batteries only.

3. Provide battery blanket for 120 volt a.c. supply.

4. Provide continuous clear non-conductive covers for each row of terminals in rack.

D. Battery Charger:

1. Provide a battery charger specifically designed for engine starting batteries which shall maintain the starting batteries at full charge. The charger shall be capable of restoring the batteries to a fully-charged state within eight hours after a complete duty cycle discharge.

2. The charging system shall permit charging from either a normal or emergency 120 volt AC power source.

3. The charger shall be so designed that it will not be damaged during the engine cranking.

4. The charger shall be a static, dual rate float/equalize type (10 ampere capacity minimum) with automatic and manual charge control to charge at high rate or float the battery and maintain it fully charged. The actual size of the charger to be provided shall be a function of engine cranking requirements and continuous DC control requirements.

5. The charger shall be properly treated for NEMA 1 with chemical resistant epoxy coating.

6. The charger shall be equipped with the following accessories, as a minimum:

a. Ammeter b. Voltmeter c. Fused AC input and fused DC output

EDIT NOTE: The following are AT&T additional requirements:

d. AC input failure contacts for alarms e. DC output failure contacts for alarms f. High Volts (red) g. Low Volts (red) h. Rectifier fail (red) i. AC fail (red) j. Float mode status (green) k. High rate status (amber)



2.7 COOLING SYSTEM:

A. Provide the engine with a liquid cooled unit mounted radiator. Radiator fan shall be of the pusher type. Radiator shall be rated for the specified ambient temperature and shall be of the de-aeration type.

EDIT NOTE: Delete the paragraph above for remote mounted radiator.

Provide a remote mounted radiator, set at the location as shown on the drawings. Radiator shall be rated for the specified ambient temperature and altitude and shall be of the de-aeration type, with expansion tank.

1. Provide each engine with a dedicated system of radiator, pumps, piping controls and alarms.

2. Provide a radiator auxiliary pump (if required) with starter.

3. Provide radiator fan, motor and starter. The fan shall be direct drive and have guards to OSHA Standards.

4. Where the radiator is located above the engine, provide heat exchanger if the hydraulic head will be greater than the manufacturer’s recommendation for the engine.

a. Provide heat exchanger capacity 15 percent greater than the engine heat rejection.

5. Noise level shall be a maximum of 75 db at 23 feet.(7m.).

B. All coolant system hoses shall be braided stainless steel. Hoses shall be rated for the maximum pressure that can be experienced under normal conditions, with system blockages, and shall not collapse under the most severe suction conditions. Coolant hoses shall not be painted. Provide a coolant recovery system that will prevent coolant overflow and spillage. The system shall have a capacity of 20 percent of the total coolant capacity of the unit.

C. Provide spin-on type water filters with anti-scale agent.

D. The engine cooling system shall be filled with anti-freeze with a minimum of 50 percent ethylene glycol antifreeze in water. Provide glycol for complete piping and radiator system.

E. Provide a valved radiator drain with pipe extension and threaded connection at a location easily accessible to maintenance personnel.

F. Provide OSHA guards on all belts, pulleys and fans.

G. Provide necessary pipe fittings . Provide necessary valves for ease of access and maintenance.

H. Provide minimum of two belts to radiator fan drive

2.8 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM AND EXHAUST SYSTEM:

A. Provide a dry type air intake filter and silencer. Mount on the engine in an accessible location.

B. Provide a stainless steel, corrugated, flexible exhaust pipe in between the engine exhaust flange and silencer to prevent the transmission of vibration. Minimum length shall be 18 inches.

C. Provide a critical type exhaust silencer. The silencer shall be compact type.(For confined indoor spaces.)



1. Provide exhaust silencer mounting bands and brackets.

D. Provide a closed crankcase ventilation (CCV) filtration system mounted with the engine per manufacturer’s instructions. Provide piping from the engine to the CCV unit, from the CCV unit to the silencer and from the CCV unit drain back to the engine, sized and installed per manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Where ambient temperature around the engine may allow the CCV unit to get below freezing temperature, provide a CCV heater kit. Heater kits are only required for severe conditions. Consult the generator manufacturer to determine if the heater will be necessary.

E. Provide flanges, non-slip type connectors and gaskets. Exhaust lines shall be gas tight. Connections are to be welded and/or flange type.

2.9 FUEL SYSTEM:

A. Provide a double walled day tank OR sub base mounted fuel tank and fuel system designed for #2 /#1 fuel oil.

B. Tank shall meet the following requirements:

NFPA 30 and 30A

Colorado Department of Labor and Employment-Division of Oil and Public Safety Storage Tank Regulations 7 C.C.R.1101-14

UL142 requirements for Above Ground Double Wall Steel Storage Tanks

OR

UL2085 requirements for Above Ground Double Wall Concrete Storage Tanks

EDIT NOTE: USE 72 HOUR RUN TIME FOR AT&T PROJECTS

C. Provide fuel tank with sufficient capacity to operate the system at 100 percent kW load for 4/8/24/36/48/72 hours continuously.

D. Provide necessary pumps, floats, piping and connections including connections to external fuel fill via a drop tube. Plumbing and wiring shall be pre-connected and supplied integral with the generator package.

E. Provide full fuel tank at the end of this project. Fuel tanks shall have initial fill for testing and be refilled when testing is complete with specified diesel fuel.

F. Provide the following accessories:

1. Two 3 inch fuel ports in tank for fuel stirring. Each port shall have gas cap. Locate ports at remote and opposite ends of tank.

2. Calibrated fuel level stick. 3. Tank drain. 4. Provide interstitial monitoring and alarm to detect a fuel leak between tank walls.



EDIT NOTE: For day tank, include the following:

5. Normal vent piping with a spark arrestor at the end of the vent line. Spark arrestor must be located “in the clear” and at least 12 feet above ground level.

6. A check valve and a shutoff valve with a quick-connect coupling or a dry-break valve which is installed in the piping at a point where connection and disconnection is made for delivery fuel.

7. Overfill protection – the equipment shall automatically stop the delivery of liquid to the tank when the liquid level in the tank reaches 95 percent of capacity or sound an audible alarm when the liquid level in the tank reaches 90 percent of capacity.

8. Weatherproof signage as required by NFPA 704. 9. Integral electric fuel transfer pumps. 10. Manual fuel transfer pump. 11. Fuel level gauge. 12. “Press to test” switch. 13. Heavy duty float switch. 14. “Pump running“ indicator. 15. Bronze gear pump with stainless steel shaft.

G. Controls shall cycle transfer pump to maintain fuel level in day tank.

H. An application for tanks larger than 660gallons must be submitted to and approved by the Director of the Colorado Division of Oil and Public Safety, before beginning construction on any new petroleum AST system at a particular facility; or before beginning construction on any existing petroleum AST system at a facility that is being upgraded to the standards 7 C.C.R 1101-14.

I. Submit a visual inspection record of the tank at the conclusion of the project as required by 7 C.C.R.1101-14. Forms recommended by the State can be found at the following website:

http://oil.cdle.state.co.us/OIL/Inspectors/Inspections/Registration.asp

2.10 STARTING AIDS:

A. Provide 120/208/240/277 volt AC single phase engine jacket water heaters installed on the engine. The heaters shall be sized to provide an engine jacket temperature of 90 degrees F. in the minimum ambient temperature specified.

2.11 MOUNTING:

A. Provide a suitable full length sub-base for mounting the engine generator unit on a concrete foundation.

B. Provide assembly with spring type vibration isolators for use between the sub-base and the concrete foundation. A pin shall be installed through the spring isolators, subbase and bolted into concrete inserts for lateral movement limitation.

OR

Provide vibration isolation between engine-generator and sub-base fuel tank. Fuel tank shall be bolted to floor.

C. Mounting shall be designed, constructed, and installed to meet applicable seismic zone requirements.



2.12 ENGINE GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL:

EDIT NOTE: For general case and AT&T 250 kW or lower.

A. Provide a NEMA 1 automatic starting control panel, powered via engine start batteries.

1. The control panel shall be installed on the generator facing the rear of the unit.

OR

EDIT NOTE: For AT&T above 250 kW, use floor mounted panel.

The control panel shall be designed for floor mounting.

B. The engine generator control panel shall be equipped with the following items:

EDIT NOTE:

*CRA and AT&T Standard is analog metering. Verify with Owner for digital.

*Use 2-1/2 inch meter for engine mounted control panel.

*Use 4-1/2 inch meter for floor mounted control panel.

1. Provide the following analog/digital meters with 2% accuracy, minimum size 2-1/2"/4-1/2 “:

a. Generator ammeter b. Generator voltmeter c. Generator frequency meter d. Generator kilowatt meter

EDIT NOTE: For AT&T Projects, provide the following meter:

e. Power factor meter, 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead.

2. Manual/Off/Reset/Automatic selector switch. 3. Ammeter-Voltmeter phase selector switch. 4. Voltage level adjustment rheostat. 5. Accessory output contact which closes when the generator starts, for interlocking with remote

items. 6. Fuel level status. 7. CT test block with shorting CT contacts and insertion tool, mounted on the front of the control

panel. 8. Lube oil pressure gauge. 9. Alarm silence. 10. Parallel relays from each pre-alarm and alarm condition with dry contacts wired to alarm

terminal strip. 11. Elapsed time meter. 12. Alarm lamp test pushbutton.

EDIT NOTE: For AT&T Projects, provide the following:

13. Adjustable Start/Stop time delay.



14. Fuel pressure gauge.

C. Control Start Sequence: Upon a remote contact closure, the auto-start panel shall automatically provide up to four cranking periods of ten seconds each with up to three rest periods of ten seconds in between. Should the engine fail to start, an over-crank timer shall lock out the engine from further attempts, sound an alarm, and provide an output contact closer for a remote alarm.

D. Provide a local and remote alarm annunciator with audible and visual indications as listed below and to comply with NFPA 110 Level 1.

1. Provide with test/cancel pushbuttons, audible alarm silencing switch, contacts for local and remote alarms.

2. Locate the alarm panel in the engine generator control panel.

3. The annunciator shall alarm the following conditions:

EDIT NOTE: AT&T requires all NFPA 110 items except where noted.

Colors are an AT&T requirement only.

Required by:

Alarm

Type

Control Panel Annun.

Remote Annunciator

AT&T Generator running Indicator White White

NFPA,AT&T Low lube oil pressure Pre-alarm Amber Amber

NFPA,AT&T Low lube oil pressure Alarm/shutdown Red Red

AT&T High lub oil pressure Alarm/shutdown Red Red

NFPA,AT&T High coolant temperature Pre-alarm Amber Amber

NFPA,AT&T High coolant temperature Alarm/shutdown Red Red

AT&T Low coolant level Pre-alarm Amber Amber

AT&T Low coolant level Alarm/shutdown Red Red

NFPA,AT&T Low coolant temperature

(<70 degree F/20 degree C)

Alarm Amber Amber

NFPA,AT&T Overcrank Alarm/shutdown Red Red

NFPA,AT&T Overspeed Alarm/shutdown Red Red



AT&T Overvoltage Alarm/shutdown Red Red

AT&T Underfrequency Alarm/shutdown Red Red

NFPA,AT&T Control switch off normal Alarm Flashing red Flashing red

AT&T Engine breaker open Alarm Red Red

NFPA,AT&T Battery charger low DC voltage/output failure

Alarm Amber Amber

NFPA Battery charger AC failure Alarm Amber Amber

NFPA High battery voltage Alarm Amber Amber

NFPA,AT&T Low fuel level-day tank Alarm Amber Amber

AT&T High fuel level-day tank Alarm Amber Amber

NFPA,AT&T Emergency stop Alarm/shutdown Red Red

AT&T Fuel in interstitial space/containment basin

Alarm Amber Amber

Water in fuel Alarm Red Red

Ground fault Alarm Red Red

NFPA Low fuel- main tank Alarm Red Red

NFPA Emergency power system (EPS) supplying load

Alarm Red Red

AT&T High starting air pressure

(when used)

Alarm Red Red

NFPA,AT&T Low starting air pressure

(when used)

Alarm Red Red

NFPA Low starting hydraulic pressure Alarm Red Red

NFPA Air shutdown damper (when used) Alarm/shutdown Red Red

NFPA Low cranking voltage Alarm Red Red

EDIT NOTE: For AT&T Projects only, provide the following:

(EDIT FOR EACH SITE)



4. Provide the following additional alarm outputs with Form C contacts (normally closed, open on alarm). The contacts shall be connected to a terminal strip in an enclosure set adjacent to the generator, for connection by AT&T to the AT&T remote monitoring system. Provide 10 spare pairs of conductors and terminals:

a. Standby engine run b. Standby engine failure (To originate from the alarm annunciator) c. Standby engine start system failure (To originate from the alarm annunciator) d. Low fuel main tank e. Low fuel day tank

OR

5. Provide the following additional alarm outputs with Form C contacts (normally closed, open on alarm). The contacts shall be connected to the facility Building Alarm Cabinet. Coordinate this work with the Controls contractor. Provide 10 spare pairs of conductors and terminals.

a. Standby engine run b. Standby engine failure (To originate from the alarm annunciator) c. Standby engine start system failure (To originate from the alarm annunciator) d. Low fuel main tank e. Low fuel day tank

E. Provide auxiliary engine run contacts for control of auxiliary systems required for operation of engine, such as ventilation, fuel system, electric start, regulator, governor, remote mounted fan, etc. Provide normally closed contacts for operation of intake and exhaust air dampers. In addition, provide a minimum of four (4) spare SPDT contacts.

2.13 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER:

A. Provide output main line circuit breaker which shall operate both manually as an isolation switch and automatically during overload and short circuit conditions.

B. The trip unit for each pole shall have elements providing inverse time delay during overload conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short circuit protection. The circuit breaker shall meet standards established by UL, NEMA and the NEC.

OR

EDIT NOTE: For AT&T Projects with generators less than 250kW, use the paragraph below. For AT&T Projects with generators 250kW and above, or for parallel operations, refer to AT&T standard practice 760-400-102.

Generator breakers shall be molded-case, solid-state trip, rated for the appropriate voltage and symmetrical interrupting capacity. Provide adjustable solid-state/digital long-time-delay (LTD), short-time-delay (STD), ground fault (GRD), and instantaneous (INST) trip elements with each breaker. Pickup/delay adjustments and ranges associated with these trips will be as follows: LTD pickup - (0.5-1.0) x sensor, four time delay bands; STD pickup - (2-9) x LTD pickup, three time bands (0.1-0.35) second with I2t ramp; (GRD) pickup - (0.2-0.6) x sensor, three time bands (0.1-0.35) second with I2t ramp; INST pickup - (2-10) x sensor. Ground fault trip may be omitted when ground fault alarm is provided by a time overcurrent relay across the generator neutral current transformer. Provide trip indicators to show “overload”, “short-circuit”, and “ground-fault” trip.

C. Provide generator circuit breaker in a NEMA 1 enclosure adjacent to the generator terminal compartment. Provide sufficient space for conduit and cable termination in and around the circuit breaker enclosure.



D. Provide circuit breaker with auxiliary contacts which provide contact closure upon breaker automatic trip or manual opening. The alarm contact is to be used for remote annunciation of circuit breaker tripped or open.

2.14 STATE OF ASSEMBLY:

A. The engine generator system shall be factory assembled. Clean and paint all components per manufacturer's standards.

B. Accessory items shall be mounted directly on engine generator skid except where freestanding or remotely mounted. Provide all wiring and conduit fully installed and include termination points for remote or freestanding items.

1. Connections between generator and remote or freestanding items are excluded from this specification.


A. Provide spare parts for one year's maintenance of the engine generator system. Parts shall be labeled with the equipment identification which they are associated with and packed for storage. Spare parts shall include but not be limited to:

1. Belts: Provide 2 of each type. 2. Hoses: Provide 2 of each type. 3. Fuses for voltage regulator and controls: Provide 3 of each type. 4. Filters: Provide 2 of each type, (fuel, air, water, oil, etc.) 5. Lamps: Provide 2 of each type.

2.16 SOUND ATTENUATING WEATHERPROOF HOUSING:

A. General: Provide a complete and operational generator enclosure, including all devices and equipment specified herein, as shown on the drawings, or as required for service. Enclosure shall be new and delivered ready for installation. Enclosure shall be a manufacturers catalog item, with product information to be submitted.

B. The enclosure shall conform with local building codes for the specified location and to withstand the highest level of winds as listed by the ANSI Basic Wind Speed Map for the contiguous United States.

C. Fabrication and Features:

1. Enclosure shall be constructed of all welded, formed sheet steel.

OR

EDIT NOTE: Use aluminum for AT&T projects.

Enclosure shall be constructed of aluminum sections. The strength of the sections shall be equivalent to that of a steel construction.

a. The enclosure shall be skintight/walk-in type

b. Mount enclosure to concrete pad/sub-base fuel tank/integrated sub-base floor.



c. The base and top frame sections shall be constructed of 2"x2"x1/4" and 1/8" structural steel angle erected continuously on the inside perimeter of the enclosure, with corner gussets and floor mounting brackets to secure to foundation.

EDIT NOTE: Use 14 gauge for generator sets under 350 kW.

Use 12 gauge for generator sets 350 kW and above.

d. Wall panels shall be 12/14 gauge sheet steel or aluminum of equivalent strength.

e. Provide corner hold down brackets with ¼ inch steel plate interior corner gussets for enclosures that are transported separately.

f. Walk-in enclosure shall have a minimum 2 feet clearance around all engine-generator parts.

EDIT NOTE: Use lift-off type for skintight enclosures.

2. Provide lift-off type access doors to enclosure. Walk-in enclosures shall have a minimum of four access doors. Doors shall have the following features:

a. The door over the control panel shall be left lift-up type, with two struts.

b. The doors shall be the same thickness as the wall panels, including 1 inch interior support flange.

c. All doors shall be crossed braced, including corner gussets for rigidity.

d. The doors shall be mounted using heavy duty weld-on hinges with brass inserts, and shall include a lift-off feature for easy door removal and hinge lubrication.

e. Provide a 30 degree rain gutter flange over the top of each door assembly and seal all doors using a neoprene bulb gasket.

f. The door hardware shall be stainless steel, and keyed alike. Provide an interior hat channel over the locking assembly for protection.

3. The enclosure roof shall be constructed of 12 gauge roof trusses, 24 inches on center, welded to a 2" x 2" x 1/8" structural steel frame. The frame shall be welded to the top wall panel angle assembly. Provide the roof with the following features:

a. Pitch roof 1 inch in height for every 12 inches in width.

b. The roof panels shall be the same gauge as the walls.

c. Provide a roof exhaust duct opening and collar with rain cover.

d. Provide a roof radiator access opening with cover.

e. All cover fasteners shall be stainless steel.

f. Provide corner lifting eyes for enclosure installation and removal.

g. The enclosure shall be capable of withstanding a rain test equal to 4 inches per hour.



4. The entire enclosure shall be finished as follows:

a. The enclosure shall be hot steam or pressure cleaned, sanded and prepared to remove oils and debris.

b. Metal surfaces and all seams shall be sealed with a high quality sealant.

c. The enclosure shall be primed, coated, and finished with a high grade automotive acrylic enamel.

d. The enclosure shall be color/the manufacturer’s standard color.

EDIT NOTE: Use fixed intake louvers for AT&T projects.

5. Provide louvers sized to properly cool the generator set at site conditions as specified. Louvers shall be fixed/gravity/motor operated discharge and fixed/motor operated intake.

6. Provide sound attenuation on all four sides and top of enclosure to _____ dbA at 25 feet per local code requirements.

7. Enclosure Accessories:

a. Provide exhaust silencer mounting bands and brackets for internal/external silencer.

EDIT NOTE: Use the following for walk-in enclosures:

b. Provide 100 amp distribution panel, 5 circuit breakers and 2 receptacles.

c. Provide 4-two lamp, 4 ft. fluorescent lights and switch on 120 VAC source. In addition, provide lights and switch from engine DC voltage source.

OR

FOR SKINTIGHT ENCLOSURE:

Provide 2 internal engine voltage DC lights and 2 control panel DC lights. Provide separate switches for internal lights and control panel lights.

d. Provide floor mounted battery racks.

e. Provide wall mounted battery charger.

OR

Provide battery charger and mount to distribution panel. Provide wiring to distribution panel, generator batteries and alarms.

f. Extend coolant and oil drains to outside of enclosure.

g. Extend fuel tank vents through roof of enclosure.



PART 3 EXECUTION:

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which diesel engine-driven generator units are to be installed and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DIESEL ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS:

A. Install diesel engine-driven generator units in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that engine-generator units fulfill requirements. Comply with NFPA and NEMA standards pertaining to installation of engine-generator sets and accessories.

B. Coordinate with other work, including raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, fuel tanks, piping and accessories, as necessary to interface installation of engine-generator equipment work with other work.

C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A, B and the National Electrical Code.

D. Install units on vibration isolators in accordance with manufacturer's indicated method of installation.

E. Connect fuel oil piping to generator equipment as indicated, and comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.3 GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for diesel engine- driven generator units as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.


A. Start-up Testing: Engage local equipment manufacturer's representative to perform start-up and load tests upon completion of installation, with the Engineer in attendance; provide certified test record.

B. The Contractor shall provide qualified personnel, load bank, cables, test equipment and all other necessary materials required and perform the following tests:

1. Check fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze in liquid cooled models for conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations under environmental conditions present.

2. Test accessories that normally function while the set is in a standby mode for proper operation, prior to cranking engine. Accessories include but are not limited to: engine heaters, battery charger, generator strip heater, remote annunciator, etc.

3. Check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage and phase rotation during start-up test mode.



4. Test automatic start-up by remote-automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown, by simulating a power outage. Prior to auto-start test, adjust transfer switch timers for proper system coordination. Monitor engine temperature, oil pressure, battery charge level, generator voltage, amperes, and frequency throughout the test, in accordance with NFPA 110 requirements/AT&T Standard Practice Checklist.

5. Test the complete system using a combination reactive/resistive load bank to 0.8 P.F.:

a. 2 hours at 50 percent rated load b. 2 hours at 100 percent rated load(NFPA)

OR

EDIT NOTE: For AT&T Projects, provide the following load bank tests.

c. One half-hour at 50 percent rated load d. One half-hour at 75 percent rated load e. Seven hours at 100 percent rated load f. If for any reason, the 8-hour load test is terminated, the entire 8-hour test shall be

restarted until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. During load bank tests, record the following data on 15 minute intervals:

a. Generator kW b. Generator amps on each phase c. Generator volts on each phase and phase to neutral d. Generator frequency e. Jacket input water temperature f. Jacket output water temperature g. Lube oil pressure h. Lube oil temperature i. Fuel pressure j. Exhaust back-pressure k. Ambient temperature l. Radiator inlet air temperature m. Oil, coolant or fuel leakage n. Generator stator temperature o. Battery charge rate (at 5 minute intervals for first 15 minutes then 15 minute intervals

thereafter.

7. Provide additional data for the following:

a. Time to recover stable rated frequency and voltage after step addition of 50 percent, 75 percent AND 100 percent rated load.

b. Voltage dip when applying the above step loads.

C. Upon completion of installation, demonstrate capability and compliance of system with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. Initial testing and retesting to be at no cost to Owner.

EDIT NOTE: For AT&T projects, include the following paragraph:



D. Complete all items relating to the Contractor’s scope of work included within the AT&T test and acceptance forms as furnished in Appendix A at the end of this section. Provide additional tests, which are not identified above as necessary to complete the test and acceptance forms.

3.5 ADJUSTING:

A. Adjust battery charger output.

B. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed.

3.6 CLEANING:

A. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters.

3.7 DEMONSTRATIONS:

A. Generator supplier shall provide Owner with a minimum of (4) hours field training and instruction.

B. Describe system operation under emergency conditions and restrictions for future load additions.

C. Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate that system operates to provide emergency power.

D. Field training and instruction shall be video taped and the tape shall be turned over to maintenance personnel.

3.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE:

A. Documentation:

1. Upon completion of the project, provide two complete operational and maintenance manuals to the owner. The manuals shall contain the following information:

a. Emergency instructions including addresses and telephone numbers for service sources.

b. Troubleshooting guidelines.

c. Complete operating instructions. All operating instructions shall include the following information as a minimum:

1) Manufacturer's operating instructions for each piece of equipment furnished.

2) Specific operating instructions for each portion of the system which involves multiple items of equipment.

3) Instructions for charging, start-up, control or sequencing of operation, phase or seasonal variations, shut-down, safety and similar operations.

d. Recommended maintenance procedures and intervals for all equipment.

e. Complete shop drawings related to the entire system.

f. Technical data sheets for all equipment.



g. Complete interconnection diagrams which indicate all components of the system, including control systems and alarm interface.

h. Manufacturer's maintenance data including complete parts lists, partial detailed parts drawings, etc. for each operational item in each system.

i. Ordering information for spare parts.

j. Manufacturer's product warranties and guarantee relating to the system and equipment items in the system.

B. Each maintenance manual shall be bound in vinyl-covered, 3-ring binders, with pocket-folders for folded drawings. The manual shall have an index with tabs for each section.

C. Provide the following additional operating documents:

1. A safety shutdown list provided on the generator set and in the generator maintenance manual. Verify that the appropriate safety controls have been provided based on the shutdown list.

2. Satisfactory engine/alternator test records, lubrication, fuel and start battery maintenance records with space for continued entries.

3. "Engine operating instructions" posted near the unit that provide clearly defined, step-by-step procedures for starting, running and stopping the engine.

4. Lockout-tagout procedures in place for the AC switchgear and distribution during normal operation, manual operation and testing.

EDIT NOTE: For AT&T projects include the following paragraph:

D. Provide a copy of the completed test and acceptance forms as included in Appendix A.

3.9 WARRANTY:

A. Provide manufacturer's warranty for a duration of not less than two (2) years from the date of substantial completion of the project. The warranty shall include, but not be limited to, the replacement of materials and equipment used in diesel generator systems.

B. Extended Warranty Agreement: Offer terms and conditions for furnishing parts and providing continued testing and servicing, beyond the warranty period, including replacement of materials and equipment, for a one-year period with an option for renewal of the Agreement by the Owner.

C. Maintenance Agreement: Prior to time of final acceptance, the supplier shall submit 4 copies of an agreement for continued service and maintenance of the diesel engine-driven generator sets, for the Owner's review and possible acceptance.

EDIT NOTE: Be sure to include AT&T Test and Acceptance Forms in Appendix A. These are comprised of the entire Section 15 of AT&T Standard Practice 760-400-102.

END OF SECTION



APPENDIX A


TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 36 00 - 1

SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less. It includes the following items:

1. Automatic transfer switch (ATS). 2. Bypass/isolation switch (BP/IS). 3. Nonautomatic transfer switch (NATS). 4. Remote annunciation system

1.2 REMOTE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

A. Functional Description: A remote annunciator panel annunciates conditions at indicated transfer

switches including:

1. Sources available (as defined by actual pick-up and drop-out settings of transfer switch controls).

2. Switch position.

3. Switch in test mode.

4. Failure of digital communications link.

5. Malfunction of the annunciator unit or communication link does not affect functions of the ATS. In the event of a failure of the communication link, the ATS automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-contained operation. No ATS sensing, controlling, or operating function depends on the remote panel for proper operation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification

Sections.

B. Shop drawings or published product data for each transfer switch, including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances; conductor entry provisions; gutter space; installed features and devices; and materials lists.

C. Wiring diagrams, elementary or schematic, differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-

installed wiring.

D. Single-line diagrams of transfer switch units showing connections between automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power source, and load, plus interlocking provisions.

E. Operation and maintenance data for each type of product, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance

Manual specified in Division 1 and Section 16010 on Basic Electrical Requirements. Include all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List all factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions.

F. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance to the referenced standards and tested short-circuit closing and

withstand ratings applicable to the protective devices and current ratings used in this Project, as indicated and as specified in paragraph "Tested Fault Current Ratings."




A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical power transfer switches, of types, ratings, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects

utilizing electrical power transfer switches similar to that required for this project.

C. Emergency Service: Manufacturer maintains a service center capable of providing emergency maintenance and repairs at the Project site with an 8-hour maximum response time.

D. Comply with NFPA 99, "Standard for Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities," and

NFPA 110, "Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems."

E. UL Listing and Labeling: Items furnished under this Section shall be listed and labeled by UL for emergency service under UL Standard 1008.

F. National Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing (NRTL) and Labeling: Items furnished under this

Section shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL for emergency service under UL Standard 1008.

1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

G. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain ATSs, BP/ISs, remote annunciators, and remote annunciator and

control panels from a single manufacturer that assumes responsibility for all system components furnished.

H. Source Quality Control: Factory test components, assembled switches, and associated equipment to

ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for conformance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test conforming to NEMA ICS 1.


A. Deliver transfer switches and associated devices in factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings,

which properly protect equipment from damage.

B. Store transfer switches and associated devices in original packaging, and protect from weather and construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping.

C. Handle transfer switches and associated devices carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment. Do

not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new equipment at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:


1. Caterpillar, Inc. 2. Cummins/Onan



3. Russelectric, Inc. 4. Zenith Controls, Inc. 5. Automatic Switch Company. (ASCO)

2.2 TRANSFER SWITCH PRODUCTS, GENERAL:

A. Number of Poles and Current and Voltage Ratings: As indicated

1. Units smaller than 600 amperes shall not have different current ratings for different classes or

mixtures of loads, including 100 percent tungsten filament lamp or 100 percent inductive load.

2. Units 600 amperes and larger shall have current ratings that apply to mixtures of loads including 30-percent-maximum tungsten filament lamp load.

B. Tested Fault-Current Ratings: Closing and withstand ratings exceed the indicated available rms

symmetrical fault current at the equipment terminals based on testing according to UL Standard 1008, conducted at full-rated system voltage and 20 percent power factor. Rate each product for withstand duration time as follows when tested for rated short-circuit current correlated with the actual type of circuit protective device indicated for transfer switches for this Project.

1. 150 Amperes or Smaller: 1.5 closing and withstand duration cycles.

2. Larger than 150 Amperes: 3 closing and withstand duration cycles.

3. Power Circuit Breakers: 10 closing and withstand duration cycles.

4. Current-Limiting Fuses: 0.5 (nominal) closing and withstand duration cycles.

C. Annunciation and Control Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with

remote annunciators or annunciator/control panels have communications capability matched with the remote device.

D. Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings is plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating

temperature range of minus 20 deg. C. to 70 deg C.

E. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components meet or exceed voltage surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to ANSI C37.90.1, IEEE Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests. Components meet or exceed voltage impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

F. Neutral Terminal: Where 2- or 3-pole switches are indicated, provide fully rated, solid, unswitched

neutral terminal except as indicated.

G. Four-Pole Switches: Where 4-pole switches are indicated, provide full-capacity and neutral switching.

H. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 1, conforming to UL Standard 508, "Electrical Industrial Control Equipment," except as otherwise indicated.

I. Heater: Within enclosure of units exposed to outdoor temperature and humidity conditions, connect

thermostat within enclosure to control heater.

J. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and identify consistently with shop drawings, either by color code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.

1. Designated terminals accommodate field wiring.



2. Power Terminal Arrangement and Field Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Terminals: Pressure-type, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors of sizes indicated.

4. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

K. Electrical Operation: Where indicated, accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or

electric motor-operated mechanism, mechanically held, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions. Switches using components of molded-case circuit breakers or contactors not designed for continuous-duty, repetitive switching between active power sources are not acceptable.

L. Switch Action: Mechanically held in both directions for double-throw switches.

M. Switch Contacts: Use silver composition for switching load current. Units rated 225 amperes and more

have separate arcing contacts.

N. Overcurrent devices are not part of switch products.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATSS):

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110, "Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems."

B. Comply with NFPA 20, "Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps," for ATSs serving fire

pumps.

C. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning except as indicated.

D. Manual Switch Operation: Manually operated under load with the door closed with either or both

sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

E. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in

advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

F. Digital Communications Interface: Full-duplex RS 422 type, matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator and control panel.

G. ATS for Motor Loads: Switch Operator has a programmed neutral position arranged to provide a

midpoint between the 2 working switch positions with an intentional, controlled, timed pause during transfer at the midpoint. The midpoint pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 10 seconds minimum, and factory set at 0.5 second, except as indicated. Time delay occurs for both transfer directions.

2.4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH FEATURES:

A. Close Differential Voltage Sensing: Provide for each phase of normal source. Pick-up voltage is

adjustable from 85 percent to 100 percent nominal, and drop-out voltage is adjustable from 75 percent to 98 percent pick-up value. Factory set for pick-up at 95 percent and drop-out at 85 percent.

B. Time-Delay Override: To override normal source voltage-sensing delays transfer and engine start

signals. Adjustable 0 to 6 seconds, and factory set at 3 seconds.



C. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer. Voltage pick-up is adjustable from 85 percent to 100 percent nominal. Factory set to pick-up at 90 percent. Pick-up frequency is adjustable from 90 percent to 100 percent nominal. Factory set to pick-up at 95 percent.

D. Retransfer Time Delay: Adjustable from 0 to 10 minutes and factory set at 10 minutes. Provides

automatic defeat of the delay upon loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of the emergency source, provided the normal supply has been restored.

E. Test Switch: Momentary type, simulates normal source failure.

F. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which the load is connected.

G. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via the transfer switch normal and emergency

source-sensing circuits.

1. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

2. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

H. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open and two normally closed SPDT contacts for each

switch position.

1. Rating: 10 amperes at 240 V a.c.

I. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so the ATS will remain connected to the emergency power source regardless of the condition of the normal source. A pilot light indicates the override status.

J. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated normally closed and one isolated normally open. Contacts are

gold flashed or gold plated and rated 10 amperes at 32 V d.c. minimum.

K. Engine Shut-Down Contacts: Time delay adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes; factory set at 5 minutes.

L. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state programmable time switch starts engine-generator set and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiate exercise cycle at present intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory-set periods are for 7 days and 20 minutes, respectively. An unloaded running time delay for emergency generator cool-down shall be provided, the time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes and be factory set at 5 minutes. Exerciser features include:

1. Exerciser transfer selector switch, which permits selection between exercise with and without

load transfer.

2. Push button programming controls with digital display of settings.

3. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available.

M. Auxiliary Relays 1. Emergency Position 2. Normal Position

N. Elevator Pre-Signal: Auxiliary relay to provide pre-signal to elevator equipment that re-transfer to

utility (normal) source is eminent and to shutdown SCR controller and startup after re-transfer.



2.5 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH FEATURES:

A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment per NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.

B. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly to the load,

isolating the transfer switch from the load and from both power sources. Include the following features:

1. Means to lock the BP/IS in the position that isolates the transfer switch, with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of the transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer switch operation except for testing or maintenance.

2. Draw-Out Arrangement for the Transfer Switch: Provides physical separation from live parts

for testing and maintenance operations.

3. Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit Withstand Ratings: Equal to, or greater than, that of the associated ATS, with the same phase arrangement and number of poles.

4. Contact temperatures of BP/IS do not exceed those of ATS contacts when they are carrying rated

load.

5. Operability: Constructed so that load bypass and transfer switch isolation can be performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.

6. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs give detailed

operating instructions.

7. Maintainability: Fabricate BP/IS to allow convenient removal of major components from the front without removal of other parts or main power conductors.

C. Interconnect BP/IS and ATS with copper bus bars plated at connection points and braced for the

indicated available short circuit current.

2.6 NON-AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES FEATURES:

A. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 100, "Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems."

B. Operation: Electrically actuated by push buttons designated "Normal Source" and "Alternate Source."

In addition, removable external manual handle, operable only with door closed, provides quick-make, quick-break switching action. The switch is capable of electrically or manually transferring the load in either direction, with 1 or both sources energized. The control circuit disconnects from the electrical operator during manual operation.

C. Double-Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during

switching sequence.

D. NATS Accessories

1. Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which the load is connected.

2. Source Availability Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via the transfer switch normal and alternate source sensing circuits, respectively.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source

Available."



b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Alternate Source

Available."

3. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two sets of normally closed and normally open SPDT contacts for each switch position, rated 10 amperes at 240 V a.c.

4. Provide double lugs at alternate source connection (one set for receptacle/tap box wiring and one

set for possible hardwire connection) and adequate knockouts in enclosure for additional wiring.

2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL:

A. Description: Hard-wired lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch. Indicating lights are grouped for each transfer switch monitored. Label each group indicating the transfer switch it monitors, the location of the switch, and the identity of the load it serves.

B. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet except as indicated.

C. Lamp Test: Push-to-test or "lamp test" switch on front panel.

2.8 FINISHES:

A. Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which transfer switches are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES:

A. Install transfer switches, including associated control devices as indicated, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that transfer switches comply with requirements. Comply with applicable requirements of NEC and NFPA pertaining to wiring practices and installation of electrical power transfer switches.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings, as

necessary to interface installation of transfer switch work with other work.

C. Tighten factory-made connections, including connectors, terminals, bus joints, mountings, and grounding. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values using a calibrated torque wrench. When manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and 486B.

3.3 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS:

A. Match the type and number of cables and conductors to the control and communications requirements

of the transfer switches used. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to the Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.



3.4 GROUNDING:

A. Make equipment grounding connections for transfer switch units as indicated and as required by the

NEC.


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise field tests.

B. Preliminary Tests: Perform electrical tests as recommended by the manufacturer and as follows:

1. Measure phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels with insulation

resistance tester, including external annunciator and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by the manufacturer. Meet manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

2. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

C. Field Tests: Give 7-day advance notice of the tests and perform tests in presence of Owner's

representative.

D. Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.

E. Tests: As recommended by the manufacturer and as follows:

1. Contact Resistance Test: Measure resistance of power contacts for ATSs, NATSs, and BP/ISs. Resolve values in excess of 500 micro-ohms and differences between adjacent poles exceeding 50 percent.

2. Ground Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing specified in Division 16 Section on Overcurrent

Protective Devices to ensure sensors are properly selected and located to optimize ground-fault protection where power is being delivered from either source.

a. Verify grounding points and sensor ratings and locations.

b. Apply simulated fault current at the sensors and observe reaction of circuit interrupting

devices.

3. Operational Tests: Demonstrate interlock, sequence, and operational function for each switch at least 3 times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to ATSs and of emergency source with normal

source available.

b. Simulate low phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source of ATSs.

c. Verify time-delay settings and pick-up and drop-out voltages.

F. Test Failures: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and prepare for retest. Verify that equipment meets the specified requirements.

G. Reports: Maintain a written record of observations and tests. Report defective materials and

workmanship and retest corrected items. Record adjustable relay settings and measure insulation and



contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.6 CLEANING:

A. Inspect interior and exterior of ATS. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch of

scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Training: Furnish the services of a factory-authorized service representative to instruct Owner's personnel in the operation, maintenance, and adjustment of transfer switches and related equipment. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction scheduled 7 days in advance.

END OF SECTION


LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 26 41 13 - 1

SECTION 26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Furnish and install all materials and labor required to provide a complete functional lightning protection and common ground system for the building as shown and detailed on the plans, in accordance with these specifications.

B. Types of lightning protection system material and components specified in this section include the following:

1. Air terminals. 2. Bonding plates. 3. Conductors. 4. Connectors. 5. Grounding plates. 6. Grounding rods. 7. Lightning (surge) arresters. 8. Rod connections. 9. Splicers.

C. The detailed design of the lightning protection system shall be by the Contractor.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lightning protection system components, of types, sizes, and ratings required, and who are Class I manufacturer- members of Lightning Protection Institute.

B. Designer/Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 2 years of successful design/installation experience with projects utilizing lightning protection systems similar to that required for this project, and who are certified by the Lightning Protection Institute as a Master Installer/Designer.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to lightning (surge) arresters, grounding, grounding electrodes, and down conductor clearances.

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with requirements of NFPA No. 780, "Lightning Protection Systems", as applicable to lightning protection systems for building projects.

OR

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL96 and UL96A as well as the Master Label provisions of UL 96A, "Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Components". Provide components which are UL-listed and labeled.

F. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Stds C2, C62.1, C62.2, and C114.1.

G. LPI Installation Standard 175.

H. Obtain building plans from the Architect for use in designing the lightning protection system.



I. It is recommended the Contractor perform a soils analysis prior to submitting shop drawings to determine appropriate grounding system layout.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 specification sections.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lightning protection system and all associated components. Include data for roof adhesive when used. Submit accurate pictorial views of decorative air terminal components.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of lightning protection system equipment and components including, but not limited to, conductor routing, connections, mounting details, air terminal locations, bonds to equipment and miscellaneous connections, and grounding. Use roof plan(s) from the Architect as the background for the shop drawings. Review architectural drawings to determine types of materials the lightning protection system will be bonded/attached to. Provide components to avoid dissimilar metal reaction.

D. UL Certification: Provide Owner with UL Master Label Certification for overall system. Provide certificate with warranty/operations and maintenance manual. Comply with UL 96A, "Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems".

OR

UL Certification: Provide Owner with “Letter of Findings” for overall system. Provide “Letter of Findings” with warranty/operations and maintenance manual.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering lightning protection components which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Conductors and Air Terminals:

a. American Lightning Rod Co. b. Approved Lightning Protection Co., Inc c. Capital Lightning Protection Co., Inc. d. Independent Protection Co., Inc. e. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. f. Lightning and Grounding Systems, Inc. g. A-C Lightning Security, Inc. h. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. i. National Lightning Protection Corporation

2. Protective Devices for Communication and TV (Surge Arresters):

a. Current Technology b. Approved Lightning Protection Co., Inc. c. General Electric Co. d. Josyln Electronic System Co. e. Square D Co.



3. Electrical Service Entrance Surge Arrester: Refer to16425 (Switchboards) [or] 16426 (Low Voltage Switchgear) [or] 16481 (Motor Control Centers) specification section.

OR

Surge Arresters (UL 5A-Category OWXH): Provide distribution class, metal oxide Varistro as specified in IEEE C62.11 “Standards for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits”, or IEEE C62.1 “Gapped Silicon-Carbide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits”. Install in the service entrance cable termination compartment and connect in each phase of each incoming circuit. Coordinate rating with circuit voltage. Coordinate impulse sparkover voltage with system circuit voltage and provide factory mounting and connection.

2.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

A. General: Provide lightning protection system materials and components, of types, sizes, ratings, for the Class of service indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. Where type of components or materials are not otherwise indicated, comply with U.L., NFPA 780 and LPI (Lightning Protection Institute) standards.

B. Class 1 Installation Materials:

1. Air Terminals: Solid copper; minimum diameter 3/8 inches (9.5mm), cast bronze base with bolted pressure cable connection.

2. Main Conductors: Copper cable; minimum size strand diameter, 0.045 inches (1.150mm - 17 AWG); 0.187#/ft (278 g/m); 57,400 circular mils (29 sq mm).

OR

Main Conductors: Copper solid strip; 0.051 inches (1.291mm - 16 AWG) thick; 1 inch (25.4mm) wide.

OR

Main Conductors: Copper solid rod; 0.187#/ft (278 g/m).

3. Secondary Conductors: Copper cable; minimum size strand diameter 0.045 inches (1.150mm - 17 AWG); number of wires 14.

OR

Secondary Conductors: Copper solid strip; 0.051" (1.29mm - 16 AWG) thick; ½ inch (12.7mm) wide.

C. Class 2 Installation Materials:

1. Air Terminals: Solid copper; minimum diameter ½ inch (12.7mm), cast bronze base with bolted pressure cable connection.

2. Main Conductors: Copper cable; minimum size strand diameter, 0.057 inches (1.450mm - 15 AWG); 0.375#/feet (558 g/m); cross sectional area 115,000 circular mils (58 sq mm).

3. Secondary Conductors: Copper cable; minimum size strand diameter 0.045 inches (1.150 - 17 AWG); number of wires 14.



OR

Secondary Conductors: Copper solid strip; 0.051 (1.291mm - 16 AWG) thick; ½ inch (12.7mm) wide.

2.3 ANCILLARY COMPONENTS:

A. Air Terminals: Bronze beam type, with clamp to fit 4inches to 8 inches beam with 8 sq in of surface contact; with 10 inches x ½ inch solid copper point with polished nickel plated tip.

B. Air Terminals: Copper for chimney mounting; 5/8 inch x 3 feet lead-coated copper point, bronze base with clamp type cable and masonry fastener.

C. Air Terminals: Copper for concealed installation; 10 inches exposed with blunt point, ½ inch x 12 inches long solid copper stem, lead washer, support bracket and adjustable clamp type cable connector.

D. Connectors: Bronze right-angle thru-roof cable connector; bronze and lead seal flashing washer, ½ inch threaded stem, to fit roof thickness.

E. Connectors: 4 inch bronze parallel bonding clamp for connecting 1/0 or 2/0 cables where exothermic is not allowed by this specification.

F. Splicer: Where exothermic welding is not allowed, bronze straight cable splicer for splicing No. 4 and No. 6 cables.

G. Splicer: Where exothermic welding is not allowed, bronze pressure type "T" cable splicer for clamping standard cables through 2/0, with hex bolts and washers.

H. Splicer: Where exothermic welding is not allowed, bimetal straight splicer of cast aluminum and bronze for 2/0 cable with moisture tight sealing capability.

I. Coordinate with roofing system installer for all penetrations through the roof.

J. Ground Rod: Solid copper clad steel ¾ inch diameter x 10'.

K. Ground Rod Connection: Exothermic weld.

L. Ground Plate: Sheet copper plate, 36 inches x 36 inches x 20 AWG, with 2 cable attachments.

M. Adhesive Point Base: Cast bronze base plate with stainless steel bolt and washer, pressure type cable connector. Base shall be fastened using manufacturer approved adhesive or plastic roof cement.

N. Adhesive Flat Cable Holder: Copper cable fastener plate, up to and including 2/0. Plate shall be fastened using manufacturers approved adhesive or plastic roof cement.

O. Bonding Plate: 8 sq in steel plate with 1 inch diameter bolt-hole for bonding cable to structural steel, with vice-grip type cable connector with 2 inches of cable contact.

P. TV Surge Arrester: TV type arrester for tubular lead; for indoor/outdoor installation, usage shall not unbalance TV line impedance. TV arrester for flat lead; for indoor/outdoor installation, usage shall not unbalance TV line impedance.

Q. Equipment and Miscellaneous Bonds: Two hole bolted pressure clamps secured with stainless steel hardware.



R. Cable Fasteners: Copper compatible with the cable and mounting surface.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS:

A. Install lightning protection systems as required, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, UL96A and NFPA 780 to ensure that lightning protection systems comply with requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring and roofing work, as necessary to interface installation of lightning protection system with other work.

C. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections avoiding sharp bends and narrow loops.

D. Install surge arresters as close as practical to equipment which they are to protect.

E. Engage an LPI-certified inspector to perform periodic inspections during installation of the lightning protection system.

F. Conceal all system conductors as viewed from exterior grade level within 200 feet of building. Notify Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours before concealing lightning protection system components.

G. Secure conductors to structure every 2 feet minimum, using cable fasteners screwed to the structure.

H. Provide locator survey done to identify all utility piping, ducts, all underground obstructions, piping from building, etc., prior to driving new ground rods. Ground rod location shall be adjusted to avoid all obstructions. Do not install new ground rods outside property line.

I. Coordinate with roofing system installer for all penetrations through the roof.

J. Provide anti-oxidation compound (Penetrox, etc.) between all surfaces of mechanical connections. Wipe off excess compound.

3.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding and bonding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective grounds and bonds.

1. Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components, except those above single-ply membrane roofing.

2. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Roofing: Use adhesive recommended by manufacturer of air terminals and approved by manufacturer of roofing material. Comply with adhesive manufacturer's installation instructions.

3. Bond all metallic objects and systems at roof levels and elsewhere on the structure. Primary bonds for metal bodies of conductance shall be bonded with appropriate fittings and full-size conductor; and shall consist of; but not be limited to the following: roof exhaust fans, HVAC units with related piping and ductwork, exhaust vents and any other roof piping systems, cooling towers, elevator hoist machinery supports and rails systems, window washing tracks, antenna mast for TV, radio or microwave antennas, flag poles, roof handrails and/or decorative screens, roof ladders, skylights, metal stacks, etc. Exterior architectural metal fascia and/or curtain walls



or mullions, which extend the full height of the structure shall also be bonded, if not inherently bonded through the building frame.

4. Bond all metal bodies of inductance located within six feet of a primary conductor or objects with primary bonds, using secondary cable and fittings. Typical of these are: plumbing vent stacks, roof flashings, parapet coping caps, gravel guards, isolated metal building panels or siding, roof drains, down spouts, roof ventilators, exterior balcony handrails, any other sizeable miscellaneous metal masses, etc.

5. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet (18 m) in length to the lightning protection system.

6. Bond ground rods together with loop conductor located 24 inches below grade. Provide “main” size copper conductor. Exothermic weld conductor to ground rods.

7. Bond grounded media on building that is within 6 feet of the ground to the lightning protection system.

8. Bond grounded media on building that is within 6 feet of the roof to the lightning protection downlead conductors.

9. Bond lightning protection system to grounded media on building at every 60 feet (18 m) with intermediate level interconnection loop conductors.

10. Bond downlead conductors to ground rods on top of rods utilizing an exothermic weld.

3.3 TESTING:

A. Ground Resistance Test:

1. Grounding electrode resistance testing shall be accomplished with a ground resistance direct-reading single test meter utilizing the fall-of-potential method and two reference electrodes. Perform test prior to interconnection to other grounding systems. Orient the ground electrode to be tested and the two reference electrodes in a straight line. Refer to fall of potential test methods/procedures to determine electrode spacing based on the dimensions of the grounding electrode system.. Drive the two reference electrodes three (3) feet deep.

2. Test results shall be in writing, and shall show temperature, humidity and condition of the soil at the time of the tests. Provide a diagram (site plan) identifying where the reference electrodes were driven and distances from the lightning protection system to the electrodes. In the case where the ground resistance exceeds 5 ohms, drive additional ground rods and retest.

3.4 PERSONNEL TRAINING:

A. Building Maintenance Personnel Training: Train Owner's building maintenance personnel in procedures for testing and determining resistance-to-ground values of lightning protection system. Also instruct maintenance personnel in preparation and application of chemical solution for earth surrounding grounding rods for reducing ohmic resistance to required levels.

3.5 RECORD DRAWINGS/O&M SUBMITTAL:

A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of approved shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the lightning protection system from the original approved shop drawings. This shall not be construed as authorization to



deviate from or make changes to the shop drawings without written instruction from the Owner in each case. This set of drawings shall be used as a record set.

B. Upon completion of the work, the record set of prints shall be used to prepare clear, complete, accurate final record drawings reflecting any and all changes and deviations made to the system. Include this drawing and a clean copy of all components used for the project in a three ring binder for Owner operation and maintenance manual. Include ground resistance test results and site plan.

END OF SECTION

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA LABORATORY ADDITION – DESIGN DEVELOPMENT TECHNICAL REVIEW

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 26 43 13 - 1

SECTION 26 43 13 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of SPD work is indicated by drawings and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of SPD equipment required for this project include the following:

1. Category b or c for distribution panelboards.


A. Manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of SPD equipment of types, ratings,

capacities and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's qualifications: firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience with projects

utilizing rectifier and invertor work similar to that required for this project.

C. The specified system shall be factory-tested before shipment. Testing of each system shall include but shall not be limited to quality control checks, "hi-pot" tests at twice rated voltage plus 1000 volts per UL requirements, IEEE c62.41 category b surge tests, UL ground leakage test, and operation and calibration tests.

D. The project shall be life cycle tested following suggested wait times as defined by ANSI/IEEE

C62.45 (1987) and shall be capable of surviving 1000 sequential category C surges of 10,000 amps without failure.

E. The system shall be UL listed as a complete system under UL 1449 (rev 7/2/87) standard for surge

protective device (SPD) and the rating shall be permanently affixed to the SPD. 1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product data: submit manufacturer's data on SPD equipment.

B. Shop drawings: submit drawings of SPD equipment indicating unit dimensions, weights, component

and connection locations, mounting provisions, connection details and wiring diagrams.

C. Operation and maintenance manual: the manufacturer shall provide an operation and maintenance manual containing installation, start-up, and operating instructions and a list of recommended spare parts for each system specified.

D. Test reports: documentation of specified system's UL 1449 listing and clamping voltage ratings

shall be provided. This shall include computer generated graphs and oscillograms. Tests shall follow procedures outlined in ANSI/IEEE C62.45 (1987) for installation category and applicable protection modes of SPD.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver SPD equipment and accessories individually packaged in factory-fabricated containers.

Mount units on shipping skids.



B. Handle equipment carefully to prevent internal component damage, impact, breakage, denting, and scoring enclosure finishes. Do not install damaged equipment; replace and return damaged units to equipment manufacturer.

C. Store equipment in clean dry space. Protect units from dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and

traffic. 1.5 WARRANTY:

A. The manufacturer shall provide a full five year warranty from date of shipment against any part

failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, UL listing requirements, and any applicable national or local electrical codes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturer: subject to compliance with requirements, provide SPD products of the following:

1. Current technology 2. GE/Liebert

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Storage Temperature: -67 degrees F to +185 degrees F (-55 degrees C to +85 degrees C). 2. Operating Temperature: -40 degrees F to +122 degrees F (-40 degrees C to +50 degrees C). 3. Relative Humidity: Operation shall be reliable in an environment with 5 percent to 95

percent non-condensing relative humidity. 4. Audible Noise: The audible noise level of the specified system shall be less than 45 dBA at

5 feet. 5. Operating Altitude: The system shall be capable of operating up to an altitude of 12,000

feet above sea level. 6. Magnetic Fields: Unit shall not generate appreciable magnetic field, and shall be capable of

use directly in computer rooms in any location without danger to data storage systems or devices.

B. Electrical Requirements:

1. System Operation Voltage: The nominal system operating voltage shall be 277/480 V 3 WYE, 4 wire plus ground, or as indicated on drawings.

2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The SPD maximum continuous operating voltage shall not be less than 115 percent of the nominal system operating voltage to ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary RMS overvoltage conditions. Each system shall be factory tested at the MCOV for at least one (1) hour.

3. Operating Frequency: The operating frequency range of the system shall be at least 47 to 63 Hertz.

4. Protection Modes: The SPD shall provide protection as follows:

a. Line to line (Delta Configured System) b. Line to ground c. Neutral to ground (Wye Configured System) d. Line to neutral (Wye Configured System)



5. Performance Ratings: Provide SPD surge current capacity based on an 1.2x50 mircrosecond 20KV open circuit voltage, 8x20 microsecond short circuit current Category C3 Bi-wave per ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 and C62.45-1995 standards as follows: (A balanced surge current capacity shall also be applied Neutral to Ground and Line to Neutral where neutrals are present in the system).

[Note: Pick high, medium or low suppression based on owner’s preference and type of facility] [High] Service Entrance Per Phase 400 kAmps Line to Neutral 200 kAmps Line to Ground 200 kAmps Line to Line 200 kAmps Subdistribution Per Phase 300 kAmps Line to Neutral 150 kAmps Line to Ground 150 kAmps Line to Line 150 kAmps Panelboards Per Phase 120 kAmps Line to Neutral 60 kAmps Line to Ground 60 kAmps Line to Line 60 kAmps [Medium] Service Entrance Per Phase 300 kAmps Line to Neutral 150 kAmps Line to Ground 150 kAmps Line to Line 150 kAmps Subdistribution Per Phase 300 kAmps Line to Neutral 150 kAmps Line to Ground 150 kAmps Line to Line 150 kAmps Panelboards Per Phase 120 kAmps Line to Neutral 60 kAmps Line to Ground 60 kAmps Line to Line 60 kAmps [Low] Service Entrance Per Phase 300 kAmps Line to Neutral 150 kAmps Line to Ground 150 kAmps Line to Line 150 kAmps



2.3 SPD EQUIPMENT:

A. Components: The system shall be a symmetrically balanced, metal oxide varistor (MOV) array system, constructed using surge current diversion modules. Each module shall be capable of withstanding over 1000 pulses of the 10 kAmps IEEE C62.41 Category C surge current without degradation of clamping voltage. The module shall consist of multiple gap-less metal oxide varistors, with each MOV individually fused. The modules shall be designed and constructed in a manner which ensures reasonable MOV surge current sharing. No gas tubes or silicon avalanche diodes shall be used. The status of each varistor shall be monitored and green LED shall be illuminated if the module is in full working order. When module performance is degraded, such as if one or more fuses or varistors have failed, the LED shall indicate a failed module.

B. High Frequency Tracking Filter: The unit shall include a UL 1238 high-frequency extended range

tracking filter. The filter shall provide for high frequency transient filtering of up to 5 dB attenuation (per MIL-STD E220A) for the band width extending from 100 KHZ to 100 MHZ. This filtering must remove low level surges and sharp wavefronts associated with fast rise-time transients, thus eliminating disturbances which may lead to "system upset".

C. Connections: Terminals shall be provided for all of the necessary power and ground connections.

The terminals shall accommodate wire sizes of #14 to #2/0 AWG for two conductors per required connection. The units shall use standard parallel wiring techniques.

D. Internal Connections: All surge current diversion module intra-unit connections shall be by way

of low impedance busbars or wiring. Surge current diversion modules shall use low impedance connections. All module mounting hardware and power wiring shall be captive or remain in place when a module is removed or replaced.

E. Enclosure: The specified system shall be provided in a heavy duty NEMA 12 dustight, driptight

enclosure with no ventilation openings. The cover of the enclosure shall be hinged and require a tool for access to internal components. A drawing pocket shall be provided inside the door for storage of unit drawings and installation/operation manual. Indication of surge current module status shall be visible without opening the door.

F. Integral Test Point: The unit shall incorporate an integral test point allowing easy off-line

diagnostic testing which verifies the operational integrity of the unit's suppression/filter system. 2.4 ACCESSORIES:

A. LED indicators shall be provided on the hinged front cover to redundantly indicate unit module status. Additionally, a Form C (one N.O. and one N.C.) summary alarm contact rated for at least 120 VAC and 1 ampere shall be provided for remote annunciation of unit status. The summary alarm contact shall change state if any one or more of the surge current diversion modules has failed.

B. Integral Fused Disconnect Switch: The unit shall include an integral fused and safety interlocked

disconnect switch located in the unit enclosure with an externally mounted manual operator. The switch shall disconnect all ungrounded circuit conductors from the distribution system to enable testing and maintenance without interruption of power to the facility's distribution system. The switch shall be rated for 600 Vac. Each current-carrying ungrounded circuit conductor connected to the facility's distribution system shall be individually fused with 200,000 AIC rated fuses in order to provide maximum fault current protection. The unit shall be UL 1449 Listed with the integral fused disconnect switch and the UL 1449 Suppression Rating for this configuration shall be provided. (1.4.6 Performance Ratings.) Specify Integral Fused Disconnect Switch by adding a "DF" suffix to the model number.



C. Diagnostic Test Set: A Diagnostic Test Set shall be provided which verifies the operational integrity of the unit's suppression system. The Diagnostic Test Set shall be self-contained and portable, and shall provide complete assurance of the unit's installation and capability without stressing the suppression system or posing detriment to continued operation. Specify Diagnostic Test Set as model number DTS 1000.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which SPD equipment is to be installed, and notify contractor in writing of those conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SPD EQUIPMENT:

A. Install SPD as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that SPD installation complies with requirements of NEMA standards and NEC, and applicable portions of NECA’s "standard of installation," for installation of units.

B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation

of SPD with other work. C. Install electrical protective devices, if any, for each SPD unit. D. The installing contractor shall install the parallel SPD with short and straight conductors as

practically as possible. The contractor shall twist the SPD input conductors together to reduce input conductor inductance.

E. Field installation: the unit shall be installed as close as practical to the facility's wiring system in

accordance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Connection shall be with #2 awg copper conductor or larger and not be any longer than necessary, avoiding unnecessary bends. Notify engineer prior to installation if unit cannot be installed within manufacturer's required distances.


A. Touch-up scratched and marred surfaces of equipment to match original finishes; remove dirt and construction debris.


A. Upon completion of installation of SPD equipment and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source. Verify that the equipment is operating properly. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site; otherwise remove and replace with new units and re-verify operation.

END OF SECTION


LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 1

SECTION 265100 LIGHTING


A. Extent, location, and details of lighting work are indicated on drawings and in schedules.

B. Types of lighting in this section include the following:

1. Fluorescent. 1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions on each type of luminaire and component.

B. Shop Drawings: In addition, submit shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each luminaire,

assembled by "luminaire type" with proposed luminaire and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. Submit details indicating compatibility with ceiling grid system. Submit shop drawings from manufacturers detailing luminaire dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features and accessories.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each luminaire and accessory; including

"trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include that data, product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with general requirements of Division 1.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting of sizes, types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with

lighting work similar to that required for this project. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver lighting in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect luminaires from damage.

B. Store lighting in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture,

soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground.

C. Handle lighting carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of lighting with other work.

B. Sequence lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder

of construction.


LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 2


A. Luminaire Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide luminaires as listed in the luminaire schedule or elsewhere on the drawings or specification.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Fluorescent Lamps:

a. General Electric b. Phillips c. OSRAM/Sylvania d. Others only by approval of University

2. Electronic Ballasts:

a. Advance b. Motorola c. Magnetek

2.2 EQUIPMENT:

A. General: Provide lighting of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not limited to, housings, energy-efficient lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters and wiring. Ship luminaires factory-assembled, with those components required for a complete installation. Design luminaire with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated noise.

B. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within luminaire suitable for connecting to branch circuit wiring as follows:

1. NEC Type TFN for 120 volt and shall be minimum No. 18 AWG.

C. Lamps:

1. Fluorescent: Provide T-8 Energy Saving fluorescent lamp types or as specified in the luminaire

schedule and types compatible with luminaires. Lamps shall be low mercury type. Provide 3500K color temperature lamps unless otherwise noted in schedules or on drawings. Lamps shall have a color rendering index (CRI) or 73 or greater.

D. Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts:

1. Provide electronic ballasts for all fluorescent lamps with voltage as indicated on the plans and luminaire

schedule. The ballast shall deliver normal lamp life and must be interchangeable with electromagnetic ballasts. The light output shall not vary in response to an input voltage variance of less than 10% rated voltage. Drive output shall be greater than 25 KHz with lamp flicker less than 2%.

2. The ballast total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10% with the third harmonic (180 Hz) distortion

less than 8%).

3. The ballast shall have a crest factor of less than 1.5 and shall have transient protection which meets IEEE 587, Category A (ANSI C62.41) requirements.


LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 3

4. The ballast shall have a power factor of 0.98 or higher, and shall have a ballast efficiency of 90% or higher.

5. The ballast shall be UL listed Class P and shall have a sound rating better than A.

6. The ballast electromagnetic interference shall be less than 54 db from 450 KHz to 30 MHz (FCC CFR

47, Part 18 requirements).

7. The ballasts shall be Electronic/Motorola or Advance. All other manufacturers shall request prior approval and supply test data from an independent testing laboratory and comparison report to substantiate compliance with specifications and specified equipment.

8. The ballast shall contain no PCB's.

9. The manufacturer shall provide a full three year warranty beginning at time of substantial completion.

The manufacturer shall replace any and all failed ballasts within 48 hours of notification. The manufacturer shall provide the labor for warranty replacements, phone and fax number to report these outages and updates of those numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting is to be installed, and substrate for supporting lighting. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Install lighting at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fulfills requirements.

B. Provide luminaires and/or outlet boxes with hangers to properly support luminaire weight. Submit design of

hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or specified herein, for review by Architect.

1. Luminaires shall be positively attached to the suspended ceiling system. The attachment device shall have a capacity of 100% of the luminaire weight acting in any direction.

2. When intermediate systems are used, No. 12 gauge hangers shall be attached to the grid members within

3" of each corner of each luminaire.

3. When heavy-duty systems are used, supplemental hangers are not required if a 48" modular hanger pattern is followed. When cross runners are used without supplemental hangers to support luminaires, these cross runners shall provide the same carrying capacity as the main runner.

4. Luminaires weighing less than 56 pounds shall have, in addition to the requirements above, two No. 12

gauge hangers connected from the luminaire housing to the structure above. These wires may be slack.

5. Luminaires weighing 56 pounds or more shall be supported directly from the structure above by four No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the luminaire housing to the structure above. These wires may be slack.

C. Install flush mounted luminaires properly to eliminate light leakage between frame and finished surface.


LIGHTING 26 51 00 - 4

D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.

E. Set units plumb, square, level and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and shop drawings.


A. At Date of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect.

1. Refer to Division-1 sections for the replacement/ restoration of lamps in lighting where used for

temporary lighting prior to Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 15%, but not less than 4 lamps in each case, of each type and size lamp used in each type luminaire. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space.


A. Clean lighting of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses and reflectors.

B. Protect installed luminaires from damage during remainder of construction period.

3.5 GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

3.6 WARRANTY:

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment including ballasts, lamps, luminaires, wiring, etc. free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects. Warranty period shall be from date of acceptance as set forth in the general conditions with periods as follows:

1. Lamps - Per Paragraph 3.3 2. Luminaires, wiring, etc. - 1 year 3. Ballasts - The manufacturer shall provide a full three year warranty beginning at time of substantial

completion. The manufacturer shall replace any and all failed ballasts within 48 hours of notification. The manufacturer shall provide the labor for warranty replacements.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Upon completion of installation of lighting and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

END OF SECTION


EMERGENCY LIGHTING 26 51 01 - 1

SECTION 26 51 01 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Types of emergency luminaires in this section include the following:

1. Unitized battery powered units 2. Exit lights 3. Emergency fluorescent lamp power supply.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of emergency luminaires and

equipment of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects

with emergency lighting work similar to that required for project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on emergency lighting.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each luminaire, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical, or numerical order, with proposed luminaire and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each emergency lighting and accessory

including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.


A. Handle emergency lighting carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring. Do not install damaged

luminaires or components; replace with new.

B. Store in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide emergency lighting of one of the following (for each type of emergency luminaire):

1. Unitized Battery Powered Fixtures:

a. Dual-Lite Spectron b. Prescolite CVS c. Siltoron Continuous Diagnostic d. Others only by approval by University



2. Exit Signs:

a. As specified in Luminaire Schedule.

3. Emergency Fluorescent Lamp Power Supplies:

a. Bodine b. Dual-Lite Inc. c. Lithonia Lighting Inc. d. Siltron Illumination Inc.

2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING:

A. General: Provide lighting of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not limited to,

housings, energy efficient lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, energy-efficient ballasts, starters and wiring.

B. Wiring: Provide wiring within fixtures for connection to branch circuit wiring as follows:

1. NEC Type TFN for 120 & 277 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG.

C. Emergency Battery Powered Units: Provide battery powered, self-contained, self-testing, self-diagnostic units with solid-state, fully automatic charger, unit "Ready" light, transfer/brownout circuit and low-voltage battery disconnect.

1. Power Supplies:

a. Provide unit with universal transformer for 120 or 277 VAC operation.

b. Battery: Provide maintenance free lead-calcium battery for 12 VDC operation capable of

supplying connected load for period of 1-1/2 hours to end voltage or 87-1/2 percent of nominal battery voltage.

2. Charger: Provide automatic battery charger with full recharging capability in 12 hours, or less

after full discharge.

3. Enclosure: Provide enclosure constructed in accordance with NEMA 1 standards. Provide low profile brushed aluminum canopy capable of being mounted on standard 3-1/2" or 4" octagonal, or 4" square wall box, or being fastened directly to wall.

4. Lamps: Provide two, unit mounted 12-volt, 7.2 watt sealed beam lamps.

5. Accessories: Provide following accessories mounted on unit cabinet:

a. Unit test switch b. Voltmeter c. Ammeter d. AC "ON" pilot light e. High Charge Pilot Light f. Battery life expectancy alarm g. Heavy-duty wall mounting bracket

2.3 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT LAMP POWER SUPPLY:

A. General: Provide self-contained battery powered invertor unit for direct mounting in designated

fluorescent luminaires. Provide unit with fully automatic two rate charger, nickel-cadmium battery, AC "ON" pilot light, and test switch. Unit shall automatically transfer to battery supply on loss of normal



AC power and shall operate one or two rapid start F32 fluorescent lamps with minimum output of 1350 lumens. Unit shall have minimum output of 3000 lumens for single high output lamp applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which emergency lighting is to be installed, and substrate which will support lighting luminaires. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS:

A. Install emergency lighting units at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fulfills requirements.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of emergency

lighting with other work.

C. Coordinate mounting of test switch indicator light and ballast prior to installation.


A. Clean emergency lighting of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

B. Protect installed units from damage during remainder of construction period.

3.4 GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for emergency lighting as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.


A. Upon completion of installation of emergency lighting and after building circuitry has been energized

with normal power source, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Test emergency lighting to demonstrate operation under emergency conditions. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

3.6 WARRANTY:

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment including ballasts, lamps, luminaires, wiring, etc. free

from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for five (5) years. Warranty period shall be from date of acceptance as set forth in the general conditions.

END OF SECTION


POLES AND STANDARDS 26 56 00 - 1

SECTION 26 56 00 POLES AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of lighting poles and standards work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Applications of lighting poles and standards for this project include the following:

1. Automobile parking lots.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical poles and standards of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing electrical pole and standard work similar to that required for this project.


A. Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 1 foot above grade and vegetation. Support pole to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

1. Fiber Glass Poles: Retain factory-applied pole wrappings until just before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.

2. Metal Poles: Retain factory-applied pole wrappings until just before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical poles, standards and hardware; include certified dimension drawings for fabricated poles, standards and mast arms, if any.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of pole or standard).

1. Metal Poles:

a. Anchor Metals, Inc. b. Marathon Steel Co. c. Meyer Industries Div; ITT Corp. d. Union Metal Mfg Co. e. Valmont Industries, Inc.

2. Pole Hardware:

a. A.B. Chance Co. b. Dixie Electrical Mfg Co.


POLES AND STANDARDS 26 56 00 - 2

c. Stanley G. Flagg and Co., Inc. d. Hercules, Inc. e. Joslyn Mfg and Supply Co. f. McGraw-Edison Co. g. Preform Line Products Co. h. Reliable Electric Co. i. Utilities Service Co.

2.2 POLES AND STANDARDS:

A. Metal Poles: Provide galvanized steel, tapered tubular seamless shaft poles, of sizes and types indicated, with 1/4inch bearing plates and ground sleeves for direct embedment. Provide removable step bolts 3/4 inch diameter and 6inches long with threaded steel lugs welded to pole beginning 12 inches above finish grade. Space step bolts at 15 inches intervals on alternative sides of pole continuing to the top. Provide pole with adequately sized reinforced handhole complete with matching cover and located on climbing side of pole, 18 inches above grade level. Weld 1/2 inch grounding nut on shaft with accessibility from handhole. Design poles to withstand loads developed by 100 MPH wind pressure, as adjusted for height above ground level, structural shapes and cable/wire loading. Construct poles whose total length is over 40 feet in two sections for shipping purposes.

1. Metal Pole Accessories: Provide accessories for metal poles, including crossarms, bolts, lifting eyes, and nuts as recommended by pole manufacturer, of sizes and materials needed to meet erection and loading application requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS:

A. Install lighting poles and standards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, in compliance with National Electrical Safety Code and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that poles and standards comply with requirements.

B. To protect finishes, use belt slings or rope (not chain or cable) to raise and set finished poles and standards.

C. Where poles/standards are indicated to be embedded in soil, set poles approximately 1/6 of pole length, but not less than 5 feet 6 inches depth below finish grade.

D. Set poles and standards plumb. Support adequately during back-filling, or when anchoring to foundations.

E. Provide sufficient space encompassing hand access and cable entrance holes for installation of cables from underground where indicated.

3.2 GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment bonding and grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective grounds, where indicated, for installed poles and standards.

1. Install 10 foot driven ground rod at each pole.

2. Non-metallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting unit and foundations. Connect lighting to ground system with No. 6 AWG conductor.

END OF SECTION

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review COMMUNICATIONS – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

27 05 00 - 1

SECTION 27 05 00 COMMUNICATIONS – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.0 PURPOSE

A. The Division 27 specifications are provided as guideline standards for telecommunications cabling projects at the University of Colorado at Boulder (UCB), Information Technology Services (ITS).

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General Provisions of the Contract including, but not limited to, Drawings, Contract Forms, General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Construction Manager/General Contractor (CM/GC) Agreement, Exhibits and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section

B. Architectural, Electrical, and Technology Drawings. Other systems drawings may apply.

C. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK SUMMARY

A. This Division 27 specification includes all labor, materials, equipment, and related services for telecommunications cabling projects at UCB.

B. Work specified consists of all elements related to telecommunications cabling including, but not

limited to: 1. Telecommunications Room Hardware 2. Backbone Cabling and Terminations 3. Horizontal Cabling and Terminations 4. Testing, Identification and Administration 5. Interior Telecommunications Pathways

C. Work shall be subject to UCB inspection. D. The term “provide” used throughout this specification and drawings shall mean “furnish, install,

test, and certify”.

E. Coordinate project schedule, installation schedule, phasing and any other requirements deemed necessary with Construction Manager and/or General Contractor and all necessary trades to ensure successful completion of work.

F. Phasing, temporary distribution/equipment, cut-over and implementation shall be coordinated

with Owner, Construction Manager and/or General Contractor, Architect, and Engineer.

G. Extent of communications infrastructure work is indicated by Division 27 specifications and Technology drawings and schedules and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, the provisions of:


27 05 00 - 2

1. Raceway systems including but not limited to conduits, cable trays, sleeves, surface

raceways, telecommunication services entrance, manholes, pull-boxes, junction boxes, back-boxes, etc. are required and specified in Division 27 sections and other Division 26 sections. The Construction Manager and/or General Contractor shall coordinate this with the Sub-Contractor performing work and determine how scope of work is assigned. The purpose of this specification is to establish design intent and general system scope.

2. All communications infrastructure shall be provided as part of the Base Building Project including but not limited to raceway, cable, cable terminals, and comm room fit-out.

3. Backbone cables between the Main Communications (MC) Room and the Intermediate Communication (IC) rooms.

4. Horizontal or station cables between the Intermediate Communications (IC) Rooms and the communication device outlets.

5. Backbone and horizontal cable termination and terminals including but not limited to wiring panels/blocks, patch panels, fiber optic terminals and panels, and outlets/jacks.

6. Patch cords, jumper cables, and cross-connect cables to interconnect wiring terminals as well as electronic equipment.

7. Communication room hardware and component fit-out including cabinets, racks, cable tray, backboard, and raceways for terminating cable and installation of electronic equipment.

8. Power distribution within equipment racks and cabinets including power strips. 9. Grounding and bonding of all metallic hardware components to the nearest

telecommunications grounding bus (TGB) bar including but not limited to equipment racks, cabinets, cable trays, ladder rack, metallic cable sheaths, wall mounted wiring terminals, conduits, sleeves, metallic ductwork, and frames.

10. All physical cable management hardware including, but not limited to: “D-rings” on backboards, vertical and horizontal managers on racks and cabinets, vertical and horizontal ladder-type cable tray within all communication rooms, etc.

11. Fire stopping as required. 12. Seismic bracing of all equipment cabinets, equipment racks and ladder-type or wire basket

cable tray as required by code and by local governing jurisdiction. 13. Testing of all communications cable infrastructure and grounding systems as noted by

specification, drawings, and applicable industry standards. 14. Labeling of all communication infrastructure components, hardware, cable, and

terminations with mechanically printed labels. 15. Preparation and submission of product data, shop drawings, testing reports, as-built

drawings, and cabling documentation as required in this specification. 16. Construction and Installation warranties. 17. Manufacturer components, channel and solutions warranties. 18. Installation and testing of all system and components. 19. Onsite administrative and user training. 20. Manufacturer training of components.

H. All work shall be conducted in coordination with UCB ITS and other building trades.

I. The work covered by this Division consists of furnishing all materials, accessories, connectors,

supports, electrical protection, equipment, tools, setup, preparation, labor, supervision, incidentals, transportation, storage, and related items and appurtenances, and performing all operations necessary to complete the telecommunications work as indicated in the project drawings and specified herein. It is the intent and purpose of this specification to have, upon completion of the project, a “turn-key” telecommunications system designed, built, coordinated and integrated with the existing telecommunications system and complete and operable in all respects. Completely install, connect, and test all systems, equipment, devices, etc., shown or noted or required to final connections and leave ready for satisfactory operation. Provide any minor items omitted from the design, but obviously necessary to accomplish the above intent.


27 05 00 - 3

J. All telecommunications designs for UCB buildings on and off campus must be approved by the

UCB ITS department for standard and design structure. Any design outside of these ITS standards must be approved and include a written agreement for the design from the UCB ITS department.

K. Minimum composition requirements and/or installation methods for the following materials and

work are included in this section: 1. Cables 2. Factory Assembled Products 3. Compatibility of Related Equipment 4. Special Tools and Kits 5. Firestops and Penetration Seals 6. Anchoring and Supports 7. Grounding and Bonding 8. Cutting and Patching 9. Concealment 10. Equipment Modification

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General Description and Requirements 1. In addition to the requirements noted herein, refer to Division 1 Specification for additional

requirements. 2. Within 45 days after award of contract or as dictated by the construction schedule

(whichever period of time is shorter), the Contractor shall submit prefabrication submittals consisting of product data and shop drawings for approval. Partial submittals will not be accepted without prior written approval from the Architect.

3. Review of the Prefabrication Submittals by the Architect is for purposes of tracking the work and contract administration and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the Contract Documents, or from providing equipment and/or services required by the Contract Documents which were omitted from the prefabrication submittals.

4. No portion of the project shall commence nor shall any equipment be procured until the prefabrication submittals have been approved in writing by the Architect. All installations shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents.

5. A detailed completion schedule shall be submitted with the prefabrication submittals. 6. Prefabrication submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal identifying the

name of the project, Contractor's name, date submitted for review, and a list of items transmitted.

B. Product Data:

1. Warranty Information

2.

: The Contractor shall provide statement(s) of warranty based on the vendors’, manufacturers’ and Contractor’s warranties. Component List: Provide complete submittal component list at the beginning of the submittal package. Component list shall identify each component name, manufacturer, and specific product/part number. All part numbers shall clearly indicate special options, color, accessories, etc. Component list and manufacturer cut-sheets shall be compiled to match the order of Appendix 1

3. .

Cut-Sheets:

4. Complete technical specifications and performance data.

Submit manufacturer’s cut-sheets on all components listed within this specification and corresponding appendix. All components and parts being used shall be highlighted in color on cut-sheets to distinguish specific product/part numbers, options, colors, accessories, etc.


27 05 00 - 4

5. Product Substitutions:

6. Requests to substitute for previously approved materials or equipment shall be submitted by the Contractor to UCB and the Engineer for review. Substitution requests shall include all required submittals and shall be complete with reasons for substitutions and savings which will accrue to UCB if substitutes are approved. Substitutes will be considered only if equal or superior to that specified.

This specification is intended to be performance based, thus all products listed in Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule are benchmark products. The Contractor is encouraged to substitute manufacturers and models that may be more cost effective or readily available. All substitutions shall meet or exceed the minimum functional, physical, and technical specifications. Acceptance of such substitutions is at the discretion of the Owner, Architect, and Engineer. Additionally, the requirements of Division 1 Specifications shall apply and may supersede requirements noted herein.

7. Approval of alternate or substitute equipment or material in no way voids the Contract Document requirements.

8. Under no circumstances shall UCB be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is not equal to the specified item. It shall be mandatory that the Contractor submit to the Owner all evidence to support the contention that the item proposed for substitution is equal to the specified item. The UCB decision as to the equality of substitution shall be final and without further recourse.

9. The Contractor shall be liable for Engineer’s costs for review and for incorporation of accepted substitutions if the proposed substitutions require design modifications. The Engineer will bill the Contractor standard hourly rates for the time used to review substitutions and to incorporate proposed substitutions into design documents.

10. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assure that the substitute material and/or equipment fits into the space provided and the Contractor shall pay for all extra costs incurred by other trades for any and all changes necessitated by these substitutions.

C. Prefabrication Shop Drawings:

1. Symbol Legend, Abbreviations, and Description

2.

: Provide drawings including descriptions of all abbreviations, symbols, typical mounting heights, project information, etc. Floor Plans

3.

: Indicating all communication device outlets, equipment, and components proposed to be installed. Floor plans shall indicate cable routing origin and labeling scheme. Additionally, major raceway routing shall be indicated for conduits 2-inches and larger. Site Plan

4.

: Provide complete site and exterior plans indicating all site and building façade mounted communication device outlets, equipment, and components proposed to be installed. Additionally, major raceway routing shall be indicated for conduits 2-inches and larger. This includes incoming utility service conduits. Enlarged Plans:

5.

Provide ¼” = 1’-0” enlarged plans of all communication rooms including Demarcation Room, Data Center, Main Communications Room (MC), Server Rooms, Intermediate Communications (IC) Rooms indicating the position of equipment cabinets, racks, wiring terminals, patch panels, , grounding equipment, cable tray, conduit/riser locations, fiber and copper terminations, and other low voltage systems equipment layout within the rooms. Details

6.

: Including method of attachment of racks to the floor and ladder tray systems, method of attachment of wall mounted distribution frames, grounding details indicating grounding method for racks and tray, cable management, and power details for rack mounted power distribution. One-Line Wiring Diagrams

7.

: Include one-line wiring diagrams as necessary indicating all backbone and horizontal cabling, copper pair and fiber strand counts, cable quantities, splice enclosures, etc Elevationsa. Rack elevations indicating patch panels, fiber terminals and enclosures, vertical and

horizontal cable managers, rack mounted power strips or distribution units, etc.

:


27 05 00 - 5

b. Wall elevations of distribution frame with block size, cable routing, cable management, pair counts, method of attachment, etc.

8. Drawing Scale

9.

: Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale and completely dimensioned as to clearly show construction detail. Labeling

10.

: Provide documentation of all labeling schemes for conduit, back boxes, panels, cable, outlets, wiring panels, patch panels, terminals, device faceplates, etc. The Contractor shall submit the proposed outlet numbers, using the T-5 template provided by ITS, for review and approval prior to construction. Documentation

: Provide (7) hardcopy sets of prints for review.

D. As-Built Drawings 1. At the beginning of work, the Contractor shall set aside one complete set of the project

drawings which shall be maintained as a complete “as-built” set. The Contractor shall record all changes and deviations on the as-built drawing set. Changes that must be noted on the as-built drawing set shall include equipment numbering and labeling and any change in cabling or materials, cable routing, equipment placement, etc. In addition, installed cable footages for all backbone cabling shall be recorded on the as-built drawings.

2. Preliminary as-built station cabling drawings, with all outlet numbers identified on the floorplans and a pre-numbered T-5 jack numbering template, shall be provided to UCB ITS within two (2) weeks of award on big projects (within two days on small project) and are expected to not change or adjust after the submittal unless errors are found which are corrected immediately. Additional T-5 lists shall be submitted for more than five (5) additions through the project as well as a list of five (5) or more deletions on a stand alone list not to include the original list. This submittal shall also include the contractor’s construction timeline with all milestones included.

3. At one (1) week prior to occupancy, or as agreed on per the project schedule with UCB ITS, the contractor shall submit an updated hard copy of the as-built drawings and an updated electronic and hard copy of the T-5 jack numbering template of which the installed work was based with all the changes and device locations. All changes must have the approved signature of the UCB project manager. Notations and changes shall be done in a neat and legible manner by marking the original drawings with RED pencil to indicate additions and GREEN pencil to indicate deletions.

4. Contractor shall comply with attached document: Construction Drawings AS-BUILT Requirements

5. A hard copy and electronic copy of the as-built files shall be submitted to UCB ITS from the contractor and communication consultant within four (4) weeks of completion of the project. All re-submittals shall be submitted within two (2) weeks to UCB ITS. These as-built documents apply to all projects unless written approval from UCB ITS. This submittal shall not be held up for delivery to UCB ITS for any reason.

E. Test Results and Configuration Information

1. Upon completion of the work, but before final approval, the Contractor shall submit test results and configuration information as required by each of the individual specification sections.

2. Standard UCB test sheets will be provided by UCB ITS for fiber optic cabling. 3. Test sheets for communication jacks will not be supplied to the Contractor by UCB ITS.

The Contractor shall comply with the most current Hubbell Mission Critical Warranty documentation and procedure. All documentation including, but not limited to the “Structured Cabling System Registration Request Form,” “testing disk,” “Horizontal Schematic,” and “Backbone Schematic” shall be completed in full and shall include the installers full name, company name, telephone number, date completed, and UCB jack outlet with faceplate port numbers (e.g., 202-1A-1C). All documentation shall be provided to both Hubbell and the University of Colorado ITS for warranty. The testing disk to UCB ITS shall be converted to a text format. Most projects will require as-built submittals of this


27 05 00 - 6

information no later than 4 weeks following project completion and large projects may be subject to submittal on a monthly basis as determined by UCB ITS. Daily contractors will e-mail completions on a weekly basis.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: All materials and installations shall comply with current applicable codes and standards, including but not limited to: 1. ANSI/EIA/TIA-526: Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Systems. 2. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 3. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways

and Spaces. 4. ANSI/EIA/TIA-606A: Administrative Standard for Commercial Telecommunications. 5. ANSI/EIA/TIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications. 6. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 7. BICSI CO-OSP Design Manual (current edition): Customer-Owned Outside-Plant Design

Manual. 8. BICSI Network Design Reference Manual (current edition). 9. BICSI TDM Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (current edition). 10. BICSI Wireless Design Reference Manual (current). 11. EIA/TIA TSB67: Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded

Twisted-Pair Cabling. 12. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association 13. IEEE-802.11 a, b, g, n: Wireless Local Area Networks 14. IEEE-802.3: 10Mb/s, 100Mb/s, 1Gb/s, and 10Gb/s Ethernet Standards as applicable based

on media types (twisted pair copper, fiber optics, etc.) 15. IEEE-802.3ak: 10Gb/s Ethernet (evolving copper standard). 16. IEEE-802.3af: Power-over-Ethernet (PoE). 17. IEEE-1100-1999: Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic

Equipment. 18. IEEE-241: Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings. 19. ISO/IEC 11801: International Standard on Information Technology – Generic Cabling of

Customer Premises. 20. NESC: National Electrical Safety Code 21. NEMA Std 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 22. NFPA-70/NEC: National Electrical Code. 23. USDA Bulletin 1751F-643: Underground Plant Design.

B. Manufacturer and Product Qualifications

1. Provide products from manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of communications infrastructure components, including but not limited to, horizontal copper cabling, copper and fiber optic backbone cabling, and connecting hardware.

2. Provide products from manufacturers whose products of similar types, capacities, and characteristics have been in satisfactory use in similar type projects for not less than five years.

C. Contractor Qualifications:

1. Firms with at least seven (7) years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing communications media systems, infrastructure and equipment similar to that required for this project.

2. The company shall have a fully staffed office with technical installations support personnel within 30 miles of the project.


27 05 00 - 7

3. The company shall be a certified installer of structured cabling systems, and shall provide a 25-year warranty on installation/applications.

D. General Project Requirements:

1. The Contractor shall designate and identify a Project Manager to oversee the project work specified in this Division and to attend all project meetings as a representative of the Contractor. The Contractor’s Project Manager shall have the authority to act for the Contractor, and all communications given to the Project Manager will be deemed to have been given to the Contractor.

2. Contractor shall not begin construction on any project without written notice to proceed. 3. All additional costs must be approved in writing with a change order signed by UCB project

manager or plant manager. 4. Perform project management and coordinate all phases of the project with UCB staff. 5. Attend weekly project management meetings on site at the Telecommunications Building on

the UCB campus. 6. Provide and maintain a complete project schedule and timeline for all project activities

including installation, inspection, and testing for each work activity in each building. The project schedule will be provided by the Contractor’s Project Manager at the first project meeting within one week of contact award. The project schedule and timeline shall be updated as appropriate and will be provided and reviewed at each weekly project meeting thereafter.

7. Job supervision: a. Designate and identify job supervisor in advance. b. Provide no more than one supervisor per job. c. Provide one primary contact, one backup contact. d. Inform UCB if contact is unavailable. e. Remove employees with behavior unacceptable to UCB.

8. Maintain the following information on the job site: a. Telecommunications specifications (Division 27). b. Telecommunications project drawings. c. Addenda. d. Submittals. e. Change Orders. f. Field Observation and inspection reports. g. Test results. h. Schedule and outage logs. i. As-built drawings showing all changes.

9. Assist UCB in performing inspections in evaluation and functional testing of the subsystems as completed and the total systems.

10. Conduct an overall quality assurance program. 11. Apply and install materials, equipment, and specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s

written instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer’s instructions and the specifications shall be referred in writing to UCB for resolution.

12. All products, components, devices, equipment and materials shall be new and unused, clean, free from defects, and free from damage and corrosion.

13. Installation and service shall be performed by manufacturer trained and authorized personnel.

14. All materials shall be Underwriters Laboratories Listed unless otherwise indicated. 15. Coordinate with local telephone company for main and alternate service to main telephone

room in the facility. 16. Coordinate with electrical work and other trades to properly interface installation of

telephone system with other work.


27 05 00 - 8

17. References to regulations, codes, and standards mean the latest edition, amendment and revisions to the regulations, codes and standards in effect on the date of the Contract Documents.

18. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected, and tested in accordance with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state, and local government agencies.

19. All modifications required by the referenced codes, rules, regulations, and authorities shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge to UCB.

20. Report immediately to UCB ITS personnel and/or the Consultant/Engineer, in writing, any part of the electrical design which does not conform to the requirements of these codes or regulations, or otherwise be held responsible to provide and install material which will comply with these codes and regulations.

21. Applicable codes and ordinances and local interpretations take precedence when they conflict with or are more stringent than the telecommunications design. Drawings and specifications take precedence where design is more stringent than codes and ordinances.

22. All materials, appliances, equipment, and devices shall conform to the applicable standards of Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and shall be listed by UL if a UL listing category has been established. Furnish products that have been tested and qualified to meet the rating criteria by UL or other testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

D. Deliver equipment and components in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which

properly protect equipment from damage.

E. Store equipment and components in original packaging. Store inside in a well-ventilated space protected from weather, moisture, soiling, humidity, and extreme temperatures.

F. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.

1.6 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES AND SCHEDULING

A. All work shall be reviewed and coordinated with the Construction Manager and/or General Contractor prior to commencing.

B. Communication systems, infrastructure, and equipment are sensitive to environmental conditions including but not limited to temperature, dirt, dust, and water. The contractor shall ensure the storage and installation of all communication components are sequenced and scheduled accordingly to prevent any damage, loss of performance, and warranty void of such systems. All mis-installed components shall be replaced with new parts and re-installed at the contractor’s expense.

C. Coordinate installation with Structural, Electrical, HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and other

trades to eliminate disruption and/or conflict with other systems.

D. Sequence installation of communications systems and infrastructure with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction.

E. The buildings may be in use during construction operations. Insofar as possible, the Contractor

shall employ such methods or means as will not cause interruption of, or interference with, the owner’s scheduled use of the building and will maintain existing systems in operation within all rooms of the building at all times.


27 05 00 - 9

F. For areas under renovation, coordinate all installation activities with UCB and other trades for renovations of architectural, mechanical, and/or electrical facilities. Insofar as possible, the Contractor shall employ such methods or means as will not cause interruption of, or interference with, the work of any other contractor.

G. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the project work

or of University operation.

H. Disruption of critical services will require after hour or weekend working constraints.

I. Existing communication services shall be interrupted only with consent from UCB. An advance warning time of seven working days shall be given. Such interruptions shall be preceded by all possible preparations which will minimize down time to expedite that particular phase of the work pursuant to good workmanship. This shall be done at regular and premium time as approved by UCB without additional expense to UCB.

J. Adjust work schedule within reason, as per direction of UCB, and coordinate with work or other

trades in order to make portions of project available to UCB as soon as possible.

K. All expenses due to untimely or improperly coordinated work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.7 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS

A. Prior to submitting a proposal, the Contractor shall inspect the Contract Documents, and shall

become fully informed as to laws, ordinances, and regulations affecting the project. The Contractor shall immediately bring to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer’s attention, in writing, any existing condition or statute that contradicts, is in conflict with, or negates the Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to become fully informed as to all above mentioned items shall in no way relieve the Contractor from any obligations with respect to their proposal.

B. The Technology Drawings depict equipment locations, backboxes, conduit runs, cabling, etc. in a

schematic manner. Field conditions and coordination with related trades may warrant relocations of field devices. No additional compensation will be allowed due to these revisions.

C. Prior to any project work, examine the project site carefully, including all project drawings

showing existing systems and equipment. The Contractor shall be fully informed of and shall identify all utility, state, and local requirements that will affect the telecommunications work at the project site.

D. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to determine if the installation of the proposed systems

will affect the operation or code compliance of existing systems. With UCB approval, relocate, modify, or otherwise revise existing telecommunications systems as required to maintain operational integrity and code compliance.

E. The Contractor shall become familiar with the local conditions under which the work is to be

performed and correlate the on-site observations with the requirements of the specifications and project drawings. No allowance will be made for claims of concealed conditions which the Contractor, in exercise or reasonable diligence in examination of the site, observed or should have observed.

F. Before ordering any materials or doing any project work, verify all measurements and be

responsible for correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed for


27 05 00 - 10

duplicate work or material required because of unverified differences between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the project drawings. Any discrepancies found shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the project work.

1.8 WARRANTY, WORKMANSHIP, AND SUPPORT

A. Materials and workmanship shall meet or exceed industry standards and be fully guaranteed for one full year from final acceptance for each project. Cable integrity and associated terminations shall be thoroughly inspected, fully tested and guaranteed as free from defects, transpositions, opens/shorts, tight kinks, damaged jacket insulation, etc.

B. Furnish a written warranty to UCB for a minimum of:

1. One-year materials warranty on parts and labor to repair/replace defective telecommunications materials specified herein. This warranty only applies to materials provided by Contractor and does not apply to materials provided by UCB.

2. Twenty-five-year Hubbell and Mohawk materials warranty on parts and labor to repair/replace defective telecommunications station cabling materials. The installer/contractor shall be certified by Hubbell to provide the materials warranty.

3. One-year installation workmanship warranty on parts and labor to resolve problems related to telecommunications system installation workmanship.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for and make good, without expense to UCB, any and all

defects arising during this warranty period that are due to imperfect materials, appliances, improper installation, or poor workmanship. 1. During the warranty period, provide all labor required to repair or replace defects in the

telecommunications system, at no cost to UCB. 2. During the warranty period, provide new materials to repair or replace defects in the

telecommunications system, at no cost to UCB.

D. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be construed to establish a shorter period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents or any manufacturer's warranty. The establishment of the time period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Documents relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the work or equipment, and has no relationship to the time within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to his obligations other than specifically to correct the work or equipment.

E. If system operation is not fully restored during the warranty period within two (2) business days, the

Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide on-site manufacturer's service technicians at no additional cost.

F. The Owner reserves the right to expand or add to the system during the warranty period using firm(s) other than the Contractor for such expansion without affecting the Contractor's responsibilities, provided that the expansion is done by a firm which is an authorized dealer or agent for the equipment of system being expanded.

1.9 SPECIFICATION RESPONSE

A. Pricing

1. Instructions to Bidders a. The following is a partial list of instructions. Bidders are responsible to provide a complete

proposal inclusive of all information requested in the Contract Documents.


27 05 00 - 11

b. Do not assume anything. Clarify your position in writing with your bid concerning any areas that may not be clear to you.

c. Copies of the bid proposal shall be submitted to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer for review and approval.

d. Bidders shall prepare equipment lists showing each item included in the bid. Equipment Lists must include the quantity, model number, manufacturer and price of each item listed under the generic description.

e. Provide a detailed description of any and all voluntary alternates and include cost changes in the Voluntary Alternate Bid forms. Bidders should submit voluntary alternates that will either provide for a better system or reduce costs without degrading the system. This includes alternate manufacturer and product substitution.

f. In the instance where the Drawings and the Specifications do not directly coincide, or coincide individually, the item of better quality, greater quantity and/or higher cost shall be included in the base bid.

2. Unit Pricing and Labor Rates a. Unit prices and labor rates submitted with the bid proposal shall be used for all additions,

deductions, and alterations of the original contract and shall further be used for future purchases by the Owner from the Contractor for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system.

B. Compliance 1. Bidders shall submit a Statement of Qualifications with their bid proposal that shall include the

following information: a. Proof of manufacturer certification for the Contractor. b. Company name, address, telephone number and contact person. c. Brief company history. d. Resumes of key personnel. e. Local staffing description (job descriptions and numbers of persons in each position). f. Local service capabilities (hours of operation and parts availability). g. Technician factory certifications. h. Description of local engineering and project management capabilities. i. Line sheet listing major suppliers of security equipment. j. Annual dollar value of sales, installation and service of each product line carried. k. List of references describing three (3) completed projects of similar size and complexity,

including names and telephone numbers of the contact persons. l. List of references describing similar projects completed in the area including names and

telephone number of the customer's contact person. m. List of similar projects currently under construction in the area including names and

telephone numbers of the customer's contact person. n. Licensing information.

2. Provide a specification compliance matrix indicating compliance or deviation for each item in the specification. The matrix shall be comprised of a list of all numbered paragraphs that appear in this Specification. Indicate compliance of the proposed equipment and/or services by the word "Comply" following each paragraph number. Indicate an exception to the requirement by the word "Exception" following the applicable paragraph number. Should the proposed equipment and/or services not entirely comply with the requirements specified, but ultimately achieve the intent, the Bidder shall explain fully the extent, or lack thereof, of compliance for the applicable equipment and/or services proposed. Instances where there is no indication of compliance or exception shall be considered non-compliant. This matrix is critical for proposal evaluation. Failure to submit may result in the disqualification of the bid. Contractor shall submit Compliance Matrix with the Bid Proposal AND at the time of Product Data submittal (as indicated previously in this specification) so that a complete security system submittal reviewed can be performed.


27 05 00 - 12

3. Additionally, as described in this Specification, bidders shall submit the following information with their bid proposal: a. Manufacturer's literature sheets for all standard manufactured items included in the

equipment list and as proposed in the Voluntary Alternate Bid form, if applicable. b. Workload and capability statements. The statements shall detail projects that will be active

during the completion of this project, and the manpower that would be available for this project.

c. Confidentiality and return statements. The statements shall guarantee that the Contract Documents shall not be copied or distributed physically or verbally. The Contractor shall also assure the Owner that the Contract Documents shall be returned in their entirety upon request. The successful Contractor will be provided with as many copies as requested.

4. Certain paragraphs of the Specification require the Bidder to provide information (possibly not listed above) in the proposal to demonstrate compliance with a requirement. If the Bidder fails to provide detailed responses to these items, the proposal will be deemed to be non-compliant to the paragraphs stated.

5. Number all pages of the bid submittal.

1.10 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION

D. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and shall at once report to UCB and/or the Consultant/Engineer any error, inconsistency or omission identified. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable cost for correction.

E. The Contractor shall advise UCB and/or the Consultant/Engineer as early as possible of any

product delays and minimum quantity requirements that may affect the project timeline.

F. Should conflicts, discrepancies, deficiencies, or errors arise which require changes in the Contract Documents, immediately notify UCB and/or the Consultant/Engineer. Failure to do so shall be interpreted as the intention of the Contractor to supply all necessary labor and materials for the suitable completion of this work. Obtain written approval on necessary adjustments before the installation is started.

G. In the event that the Consultant/Engineer is required to provide additional engineering services

as a direct result of Contractor’s errors, omissions or failure to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, then the Engineer’s expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any monies owed the Contractor.

H. In the event that the Consultant/Engineer is required to provide additional engineering services

as a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and accessories furnished, or if the Engineer is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor solely for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Engineer’s expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any monies owed the Contractor.

1.11 GLOSSARY

A. ANSI American National Standards Institute

B. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials


27 05 00 - 13

C. BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International

D. EIA Electronic Industries Association

E. FCC Federal Communications Commission

F. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

G. ISO International Organization for Standardization

H. ITS Information Technology Services

I. NEC National Electrical Code

J. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

K. NESC National Electrical Safety Code

L. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

M. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

N. TIA Telecommunications Industry Association

O. UCB University of Colorado at Boulder

P. UFBC Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code

Q. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.

1.12 DEFINITIONS

A. Every effort has been made to use industry standard terminology throughout this specification, but industry standard terminology is not used by all manufacturers and, in many cases, industry standard terminology does not exist. Contractor shall notify the UCB ITS Personnel and/or the Consultant/Engineer to define terminology used in specifications if they believe any questions could arise.

B. Approved/Approval Written permission to use a material or system C. Contractor Telecommunications Contractor performing work under Division 27 D. Engineer Telecommunications engineer for Division 27 E. Equal/Equivalent Equally acceptable as determined by UCB or Engineer F. Final Acceptance UCB acceptance of the project from Contractor G. Furnish Supply and deliver to installation location


27 05 00 - 14

H. Inspection Visual observation at job site by UCB representative I. Install Mount and connect equipment and associated materials ready for use J. Jack Modular connector for station cabling medium (UTP copper, fiber, coax) at work-area

outlet. K. Outlet Box and faceplate to accommodate up to six (6) modular jacks at the work-area. L. Pull-Box Box to be used for pull-through of cabling in a conduit run. Not to be used as a

junction box. M. Provide Furnish and install complete with all details and ready for use N. Relocate Disassemble, disconnect, and transport equipment to new locations, then clean, test,

and install ready for use O. Replace Remove and provide new item P. Telecommunications All work specified in Division 27 Q. Where this Division 27 indicates work to be performed by the words “shall” or “secure” or other

performance functions, it shall be assumed that such work shall be performed by the telecommunications Contractor performing work under Division 27.

1.13 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. It is the intention of these specifications and related project drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation in complete accordance with all applicable codes, regulations, standards, and ordinances.

B. These specifications and the project drawings are complimentary, and what is called for in either

of these shall be binding as though called for by both. Should any conflict arise between the drawings and specifications, such conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for resolution. If the Contractor fails to contact Engineering in writing of any conflict between the specifications and the project drawings, the Contractor shall be subject to re-work the area of conflict at the Contractor’s cost.

C. Omissions from the specifications and/or project drawings or the incorrect description of details

of work which are evidently necessary to carry out the intent of the specifications and project drawings, or which are customarily performed, shall not relieve the Contractor from performing such omitted or incorrectly described detail of the work. All work shall be performed as verified in field measurements, field construction criteria, material catalog numbers and similar data checked and coordinated with each shop drawing by the Contractor.

D. The telecommunications project drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general design, layout,

and arrangement of equipment and various systems. Being diagrammatic, the drawings may not necessarily show all details such as pull-boxes, conduit runs or sizes, etc., necessary for a complete and operable system. Unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included, exact locations are subject to approval of UCB.

E. Do not scale project drawings for dimensions. Take all dimensions and measurements from the

site and actual equipment to be furnished. All dimensions, measurements, and the location and


27 05 00 - 15

existence of underground equipment must be verified in the field since actual locations, distance, and elevations will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor shall be responsible for all measurements taken from the field.

1.14 SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENT

A. These construction documents and all phases of construction completed are to be governed by applicable provisions of the “Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, Public Law 91-596” and the latest amendments including: 1. Reporting/Investigating Accidents 2. Enforcement of Program 3. Telecommunications 1910.268 4. Hazard Communication 1910.1200 5. Confined Space 1910.146 6. Lockout/Tagout 1910.147 7. Asbestos 1910.1001 8. Assured Grounding 1926.404 9. Portable Wood Ladders 1910.25 10. Portable Metal Ladders 1910.26 11. Electrical Protection 1910.268 12. Exposure and Medical Records 1910.20 13. Emergency Evacuation 1910.38 14. Hantavirus/General Duty Clause/CDC Guidelines

B. Comply with specific UCB safety requirements.

C. Receive training if working in hazardous areas.

D. Provide hazards training certificates.

E. Inspect work sites for hazards regularly.

F. Provide safety program documents.

G. Comply with National Electrical Safety Code NESC C2-1997 including, but not limited to:

1. Section 42, General Rules for Employees. 2. Section 43, Additional Rules for Communications Employees.

H. The contractor shall be aware of and comply with UCB regulations for confined spaces (contact

EH&S 303-492-0215). 1.15 ASBESTOS/LEAD

A. The University manages asbestos/lead identification, removal and control. Normally the site of work operations will be identified by the University as suitable for construction to proceed and EH&S documentation is provided for the Contractor file. The Contractor shall refer to and comply with the EH&S report from UCB prior to performing any work. If that documentation is not available, the Contractor will not proceed with the work.

B. The Contractor shall be aware of and comply with UCB specific procedures and policies related

to asbestos and lead (contact EH&S 303-492-0215).


27 05 00 - 16

C. The University requires appropriate asbestos awareness training for Contractor employees. This shall be provided to Contractor employees at the expense of the Contractor and at no cost to the University

D. In the event the Contractor encounters suspected asbestos/lead containing materials which have

not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the condition to UCB verbally and followed by written notice. If in fact the material contains asbestos/lead and has not been rendered harmless, the project work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of UCB and the Contractor. In the absence of asbestos/lead, or when it has been rendered harmless, project work shall be resumed by written agreement of UCB and the Contractor.

1.16 PERMITS, LICENSES, INSPECTIONS AND FEES

A. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits, licenses and inspections and shall pay all legal and proper fees and charges including taxes, royalties, and other related charges. No work shall be started before obtaining all necessary permits and paying all required fees.

B. The Contractor shall at inception of the work provide UCB with copies of all required building

and trade permits, if said are required.

C. The Contractor shall furnish and file with the proper authorities all drawings required by them in connection with this work.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging all inspections and for securing all required

signatures. Upon completion of the work, properly completed permits shall be returned to UCB, if any are required.

1.17 PERIODIC FIELD OBSERVATION REPORTS

A. UCB will conduct site visits as required to monitor the progress and quality of the workmanship and the work environment as well as the surrounding facility. Any item found by UCB to be deficient will be documented in a Periodic Field Observation Report.

B. The Contractor shall take appropriate action to immediately correct and rectify any items

deemed unsatisfactory by UCB. The Contractor shall not wait for a hard copy of the Periodic Field Observation Report if the action required to rectify the situation is obvious and clear.

C. Contractor shall post and shall comply with attached document: CONSTRUCTION

INSPECTION REPORT – VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS for all aspects of this project.

D. UCB will conduct site visits as required to monitor the progress and quality of the workmanship

and the work environment as well as the surrounding facility. Any item found by UCB to be deficient will be documented in a Periodic Field Observation Report.

E. The Contractor shall take appropriate action to immediately correct and rectify any items

deemed unsatisfactory by UCB. The Contractor shall not wait for a hard copy of the Periodic Field Observation Report if the action required to rectify the situation is obvious and clear.

F. Contractor shall post and shall comply with attached document: CONSTRUCTION



27 05 00 - 17

G. UCB and/or the Consulting Engineer will conduct site visits as required to monitor the progress

and quality of the workmanship and the work environment as well as the surrounding facility. Any item found by UCB to be deficient will be documented in a Periodic Field Observation Report.

H. The Contractor shall take appropriate action to immediately correct and rectify any items

deemed unsatisfactory by UCB and/or the Consulting Engineer. The Contractor shall not wait for a hard copy of the Periodic Field Observation Report if the action required to rectify the situation is obvious and clear.

I. Contractor shall post and shall comply with attached document: CONSTRUCTION


1.18 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish promptly, without additional charge, all test equipment, instruments, facilities, labor, and material needed to perform safe and convenient inspection and testing.

B. Prior to beginning work, the Contractor shall submit to UCB a complete project schedule and

timeline including installation, inspection, and testing for each project area so that interim inspections can be conducted as work progresses. UCB shall not be obligated to inform the Contractor of its intent to inspect job sites while work is in progress.

C. The Contractor shall perform pre-testing of the installed telecommunications systems to

determine compliance and notify UCB ITS personnel when the system is ready for final inspection and testing. UCB shall be obligated to schedule final inspection and testing within five business days of such notification by the Contractor.

D. At such time as UCB and/or the Consultant/Engineer may direct, and in the presence of the UCB

ITS representative and/or Consultant/Engineer, conduct final inspection and testing of all telecommunications systems, both new and existing where modified.

E. Except as otherwise provided in the specifications, inspection and testing of materials and

workmanship shall be made at reasonable times and at the site of the work. UCB may determine that inspection or testing of materials shall be made off-site, at the place of production, manufacture, or shipment of the material. Such off-site inspection or testing shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of the material prior to acceptance, nor in any way affect the continuing rights of UCB after acceptance of the completed work.

F. Work shall not be covered up or enclosed until inspected by UCB personnel or other proper

authorities. Should any work be covered up or enclosed before such inspection, it shall be uncovered, inspected, and after approval, restored by the Contractor to finished condition at no additional cost to UCB.

G. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately. The Contractor

shall, without charge, replace any material or correct any workmanship found by UCB not to conform to the specifications, unless UCB consents to accept such material or workmanship with appropriate adjustment in price. The Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove rejected material from the premises. The Contractor will pay the additional cost of any test or inspection of the replaced material or corrected workmanship.


27 05 00 - 18

H. The Contractor shall prepare a written report of final test results together with UCB standard test sheets and all additional pertinent information and submit these to UCB ITS and/or the Consultant/Engineer for acceptance.

I. The telecommunications rooms shall be labeled and laid out well in advance of testing including

the outlet numbers on the patch panels (as soon as the racks are mounted) to allow pre-inspections and at least three (3) weeks prior to testing for large projects.

1.19 USE OF CABLE PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE

A. The Contractor shall permit the placement and installation by UCB of cross-connects, patch cords, and/or equipment onto cable and terminations installed under this contract, prior to substantial completion of the contract as necessary. Such placement or installation shall not evidence completion of the work or portion thereof, nor signify UCB acceptance of the work or portion thereof.

B. Cabling and equipment provided under this contract, whether the work of the Contractor is

partially or fully completed or not, shall be the property of UCB. UCB shall have certain rights and privileges in connection with use of same.

1.20 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND WORK CLOSEOUT

A. Contractor shall inspect the entire telecommunications system installation to assure all work is completed and all systems are completely operational before calling for final inspection, testing and acceptance of work.

B. Punch-List Close-out:

1. Notify UCB when telecommunications work is ready for final inspection and punch list preparation.

2. Resolve all punch list items before final invoicing. 3. Final payment will not be authorized until all punch list items have been resolved and

completed to the satisfaction of UCB.

C. After the successful installation inspections and functional testing by UCB and the Contractor, UCB will determine if there are any open issues or discrepancies and notify the Contractor. Upon completion or determined failure, UCB will issue written notification to the Contractor as to the status of the installation acceptance.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 DIVISION 27 OVERVIEW

A. 270500 – Common Materials and Methods for Communications Work

B. 270526 - Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding

C. 270536 – Cable Trays

D. 270800 – Communications Systems Commissioning

E. 271100 – Communications Equipment Room Work

F. 271313 – Communications Copper Backbone Cabling


27 05 00 - 19

G. 271323 – Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling

H. 271500 – Horizontal Cabling Requirements

I. 271700 – Testing, Identification and Administration

J. 271800 – Interior Telecommunications Pathway

2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

A. All materials and equipment shall be new, free from defects, installed in accordance with manufacturer’s current published recommendations in a neat manner and in accordance with standard practices of the industry.

B. Where no specific material, apparatus, or appliance is mentioned, any standard, first-class

product made by reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such material may be used providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets the approval of UCB ITS Personnel and/or the Consultant/Engineer.

C. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or

less, in accordance with NFPA 255.

D. Materials shall meet or exceed the following minimum requirements: 1. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label and listing of UL.

Application and installation of all listed equipment and materials shall be in accordance with such labeling and listing.

2. Equipment shall meet all applicable FCC regulations. 3. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL standards and requirements of the NEC.

This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with these requirements.

4. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not include acceptance of a standard or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the specifications and meet the quality of the specified item.

5. Materials and equipment shall bear the manufacturer’s name or trademark and model/serial number permanently marked.

2.3 CABLES

A. All UTP cable inside the building shall be UL listed and marked type CM, CMR, or CMP and shall be installed in accordance with NEC articles 300-22, 800-49, 800-50, 800-51, 800-52, and 800-53.

B. All fiber optic cable inside the building shall be UL listed and marked type OFN, OFNR, or

OFNP and shall be installed in accordance with NEC articles 300-22, 770-49, 770-50, 770-51, 770-52, and 770-53.

2.4 FACTORY ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS


27 05 00 - 20

A. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit. 1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer. 2. Constituent parts, which are alike, shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended

service. 4. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components and shall repair or

replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver the specified performance of the complete assembly.

2.5 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that a complete and fully operational system will result.

2.6 SPECIAL TOOLS AND KITS

A. The Contractor shall furnish any special installation equipment, tools, or kits necessary to properly complete the telecommunications system installation. This may include, but is not limited to, tools for pulling, splicing, terminating, and testing the cables, communication devices, stands for cable reels, cable wenches, assembly and adjustment devices, etc.

2.7 FIRESTOPS AND PENETRATION SEAL MATERIALS

A. Use qualified systems to firestop through penetrations in fire-rated walls and floors for pipes, cables, conduits, ducts, inner-ducts, and cable trays.

B. Firestopping for openings through fire and smoke-rated walls and floor assemblies shall be listed

or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.” The system shall meet the requirements of “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops” designated by ASTM E814.

C. Inside all conduits, the firestop system shall consist of a dielectric, water-resistant, non-

hardening, permanently pliable/re-enterable putty along with appropriate damming or backer materials (where required). The sealant must be capable of being removed and reinstalled and must adhere to all penetrants and common construction materials and shall be capable of allowing normal cable movement without being displaced.

D. Foam sealant shall meet all fire test and hose stream test requirements of ASTM E-119-73 and

shall be UL classified as a wall opening protective device.

E. Provide devices/systems fire tested by a third party according to ASTM E 814 (or UL 1479) tested under positive pressure.

F. Provide specific combinations of materials installed and supported or anchored.

G. Provide only material combinations that are qualified by independent agencies based on the

material’s performance when tested in a particular configuration.

H. Match the thickness (and/or depth) of firestop materials to that recommended by the manufacturer.


27 05 00 - 21

I. Thickness of materials must be established by formal ASTM E814 or UL 1479 tests.

J. Firestop for fire-rated floors and walls: 1. Dow Corning RTV silicon fire-resistant foam sealant 2. Chase-Foam, CTC PR-855 fire-resistant foam sealant 3. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI), EZ-Path Catalog Number EZDP33FWS

2.8 ANCHORING MATERIALS AND SUPPORTS

A. Metal bars, plates, channel, tubing, etc. shall conform to ASTM Standards: 1. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and grating – ASTM A36 2. Cold-formed steel tubing – ASTM A500 3. Hot-rolled steel tubing – ASTM A501 4. Steel pipe – ASTM A53, Schedule 40, welded

B. Metal fasteners shall be zinc-coated.

C. Anchoring Materials:

1. Structural Steel 2. Steel Channel: Galvanized or painted 3. Uni-Strut

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The approximate locations of existing and new telecommunications outlets, cabling and equipment will be indicated on the project drawings; however, the drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate information. Contractor is responsible to field verify existing outlets and cabling prior to submitting quote. Determine the exact location after thoroughly examining the general building plans and by actual measurements before and during construction, subject to the approval of UCB and/or the Consultant/Engineer.

B. Before construction work commences, visit the site and identify the exact routing for all

horizontal pathways and equipment placement. Verify all dimensions, locating the work and its relation to existing work, all existing conditions and their relation to the work and all man made obstructions and conditions, etc. affecting the completion and proper execution of the work as indicated in the project drawings and specifications.

C. If core drills are required, the exact core locations shall be identified and coordinated with the

UCB Asbestos Management plan as necessary.

D. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with UCB, other trades and existing conditions to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment maintenance and inspections.

E. Coordinate work with UCB, other trades and existing conditions to determine exact routing of

cable, cable tray, hangers, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation.

F. Install telecommunications cabling and equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Provide easy, safe and code mandated clearances at equipment racks and enclosures, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Coordinate with UCB exact location and mounting height of all equipment in finished areas, such as equipment racks, termination equipment, communication and electrical devices. As


27 05 00 - 22

much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with a minimum of interference with other installations.

G. Coordinate ordering and installation of all materials and equipment with long lead times or

having major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the schedule.

H. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align all equipment components. All work shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components.

I. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for delivery, installation, and

erection of materials, equipment, and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required. Use of University owned supplies and equipment is prohibited.

J. Examine areas and conditions under which communications systems and infrastructure are to be

installed. Notify Owner, Architect, and Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.

K. The Contractor shall be knowledgeable of work to be performed by other trades and take

necessary steps to integrate and coordinate their work with other trades.

L. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all materials indicated on the drawings or as specified herein for a complete communications system.

M. All communications infrastructure shall be installed in an aesthetically pleasing fashion. All surface raceway in new buildings must be approved by the Owner, Architect, and/or Engineer.

N. All communications cable routed within communications rooms shall be bundled and combed to provide a neat and organized appearance. Cables shall be bundled using only manufacturer and industry approved wire ties with tensions that do not deform and damage cable resulting in loss of transmission or performance. Any bundles and combing methods used shall not exceed manufacturer or industry standards recommendations for that cable type.

O. All communications infrastructure shall be installed for optimal performance.

P. All communications infrastructure shall be installed to allow for easy adds, moves, and other

changes in the future.

Q. Construction within communication rooms must be substantially complete before the installation of telecommunications cabling. This includes, but is not limited to, the installation of plywood backboard, cable tray or ladder rack, electrical outlets, light fixtures, sprinklers and ductwork. All walls shall also be painted before the installation of telecommunications cabling.

R. Communications rooms must be free from dust, dirt, and other foreign materials before the installation of any termination hardware or the termination of copper or fiber optic cables. The door to the telecommunication rooms must be installed and closed during termination.

S. Floor to floor distribution shall be provided with concrete floor sleeves or conduits as noted on

the drawings, and as required by Architectural Design.

T. Provide protective cable bushings on all conduits immediately after installation.


27 05 00 - 23

U. Use only electrical 45ºor 90º conduit elbows with long bend radii as follows: 1. 6:1 bend radius of the inside conduit diameter for sizes 2” or less. 2. 10:1 bend radius of the inside conduit diameter for sizes greater than 2”.

V. Do not place more than two 90º sweeps or exceed 100 ft. between pull boxes without providing

a pull box.

W. Fire seal all raceway penetrations and openings to maintain fire rating after communications cables are installed.

X. Provide labels on all communications pull-boxes and junction-boxes.

Y. Identify conduits at cable tray end by architectural room number. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP

A. All labor must be thoroughly competent and skilled, and all work shall be executed in strict accordance with the best practice of the trades.

B. Good workmanship and appearance shall be considered of equal importance with

telecommunications operation. Lack of quality workmanship shall be considered sufficient reason for rejection of a system in part or in its entirety. Carefully lay out all work in advance and install in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with recognized good practices and standards. Provide workmen who are skilled in their craft and a competent Project Manager who will be on the job at all times.

3.3 CABLES

A. Backbone and horizontal telecommunications cabling shall be placed in separate dedicated pathways. Cable trays shall be clearly divided between backbone and horizontal cabling.

B. Telecommunications pathways shall be dedicated for use for telecommunications cabling only.

No other cabling type of cabling (intercom, audio, video, security, fire, etc.) may be placed in telecommunications pathways without prior written approval from UCB ITS.

C. All horizontal cabling terminating within a single faceplate must be routed to and terminated in

the same ER or TR.

D. Consolidation points and multi-user telecommunications outlet assembly (MUTOA) configurations for horizontal cabling are not currently supported by UCB ITS and will not be permitted.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Provide all cutting, patching and core drilling, etc., as necessary for telecommunications work. Locate holes and outlets to be drilled and coordinate with work of other trades. Obtain approval of UCB prior to cutting or core drilling holes greater than ¾” in structural members.

B. Cut and drill from both sides of walls and/or floors to eliminate splaying.


27 05 00 - 24

C. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by installation of new work including insulation, walls and wall covering, ceiling and floor covering and other finished surfaces. Patch and/or paint openings and damaged areas equal to existing surface finish.

D. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Openings for electrical work shall be carefully caulked or grouted as required. Spare conduits

shall be tightly capped.

F. All cutting in the building construction made necessary to admit work, repair defective materials, defective workmanship, or by neglect of the Contractor to properly anticipate his requirements, shall be done in accordance with these specifications with no additional cost to UCB. Patching shall be complete in every detail. Actual work involved in these repairs shall be done by skilled craftsmen in the trades involved.

G. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust

and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.5 CONCEALMENT

A. Use existing conduit and cable trays where possible and practicable. Conceal all project work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impracticable, notify UCB and/or the Consultant/Engineer before starting that part of the work and install only after approval.

3.6 EQUIPMENT MODIFICATION

A. Where existing equipment is to be modified, Contractor shall furnish materials and labor as necessary to modify or add to the equipment. Modifications shall be done neatly with factory parts and assemblies approved for the application. Modification shall in no way jeopardize the compliance of existing equipment with any governing codes and regulations.

3.7 FIRESTOPS AND PENETRATION SEALS

A. All new and existing penetrations through fire-rated walls, floors, ceilings, etc. shall be sealed to prevent of the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas, or water through the penetration either before, during, or after a fire. The fire rating of penetration seal shall be at least that of the wall, floor, or ceiling into which it is installed, so the original fire rating is maintained. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. This includes all existing telecommunications cables and pathways to remain within the project area.

B. All new and existing conduit and sleeve openings used for the project shall be waterproofed or

fireproofed upon cable placement through such passageways in compliance with Colorado Building and Fire Codes and UCB standards.

C. Patch all openings remaining around and inside all new and existing conduit sleeves and cable

penetrations to maintain the integrity of any fire-rated wall, floor, ceiling, etc.

D. Manufacturer’s installation standards shall be closely followed (minimum depth of material, use of ceramic fiber, procedures, etc.)

E. Brick, Concrete, and Concrete Blocks Walls:


27 05 00 - 25

1. Provide metallic sleeving systems for routing of cables through these surfaces. 2. Ensure that sleeve extends from the front and back of the wall only far enough to attach the

required bushing or collar. 3. Secure sleeves in place according to manufacturer’s specifications. 4. Provide firestop seal between sleeve and wall, but do not use firestopping material to

support or secure sleeve. 5. Firestop around any inner-duct used to contain fiber optic cable through a wall. 6. Firestop ends of sleeving or inner-duct after installation of cable, without exception.

F. Floor Openings:

1. Install firestop materials to stop openings between sleeving (or other supporting material) and core.

2. When coring through concrete flooring, use boots and packing materials to fashion core before installing firestopping materials.

3. If rectangular openings exist in concrete floors, use steel sleeving to fashion opening before installing firestopping materials.

4. Firestop around any inner-duct used to contain fiber optic cable through a floor. 5. Firestop openings in slots, sleeves or ducts after installation of cable, without exception.

G. Cable Trays: All new cable tray pathways shall not penetrate fire-rated walls. Cable tray shall

stop within 6 inches of the wall and fire-rated wall shall include EZ path product or equivalent approved by ITS fire stopping system. 1. Close cable tray penetrations with a qualified firestopping system. 2. Install the system according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Ensure that system provides proper support and relief of firestop materials. 4. Firestop materials must be easily removable if required. 5. Firestopping materials must provide for installation of cable through the opening without

the replacement of material. 6. Use of intumescent sheets of approximately .5 inch maximum thickness is preferred.

H. Fire-Rated Gypsum Walls:

1. Sleeve all penetrations of gypsum walls used for cable routing if cable is not in conduit or inner-duct (fiber).

2. Firestop seal between sleeve, conduit, or inner-duct and wall on both sides of the wall. 3. Use qualified firestop systems to seal penetrations in gypsum wallboard assemblies. 4. Verify that penetration conditions fall within the following firestop system parameters: a)

Hourly rating. b) Opening size. c) Annular space. 5. Install the firestop system symmetrically on both sides of the wall. 6. Install the materials according to manufacturer-tested methods. 7. Box out gypsum penetrations used for cable trays. 8. Firestop gypsum box with qualified system. 9. Use identical guidelines for penetrations of hollow lath or plaster surfaces.

I. Other Firestopping:

1. Firestop through penetrations according to the guidelines for the basic construction of the two outermost layers of the combination wall.

2. Firestop load-bearing stud walls that are part of combination walls by enclosing (i.e., boxing) the penetration in the cavity.

3. Firestop partial penetrations according to the recommendations for the type of wall being penetrated.

4. Firestop any penetrations which violate the fire-rating integrity of vertical shafts. 5. Firestop openings around outlet boxes installed in fire-rated walls, on both sides.

J. Firestop Installation Methods:


27 05 00 - 26

1. Use drop cloths to protect other surfaces when installing. 2. Firestop completely around each cable individually – do not stop bundles of cables. 3. If using putty around a vertical penetration, use putty to build flooring of seal, fill with fiber

or rock wool to required thickness, then top with putty according to Manufacturer’s specifications.

4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities that permit the easy removal or addition of conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools.

5. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and to permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling, and resulting reduction in fire rating.

K. The installed firestop system shall meet the requirements of “Fire Tests of Through-Penetration

Firestops” designated ASTM E814.

L. Seal all foundation penetrating conduits and all service entrance conduits and sleeves to eliminate the intrusion of moisture and gases into the building. This requirement also includes spare conduits.

M. Spare conduits shall be plugged with expandable plugs.

N. All service entrance conduits through the building shall be sealed or resealed upon cable

placement.

O. Entrance conduits with cables in them shall be permanently sealed by firmly packing the void around the cable with oakum and capping with a hydraulic cement or waterproof duct seal.

P. The firestop system shall be submitted to UCB ITS at the preconstruction meeting with a list or

map of each location and system number used for the project. 3.8 ANCHORING METHODS

A. Anchor and brace all cabling, material, and equipment installed under this Division as required by all codes, regulations, and standards. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, straps, struts, and other items to properly support project work. Supports shall meet the approval of UCB.

B. Supports shall be fabricated from structural steel, steel channel, or uni-strut, rigidly bolted or

welded to present a neat appearance.

C. Fastenings and supports shall be adequate to support loads with ample safety factors.

D. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet boxes, and pull-boxes to building structure.

E. Use toggle bolts, spider type expansion anchors, or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls.

F. Use lead expansion shields or expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls.

G. Use self-drilling anchors or lead expansion anchor on concrete surfaces.

H. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs.


27 05 00 - 27

I. Use wood screws in wood construction.

J. In pre-cast structures, use cast-in inserts wherever possible. Expansion anchors can be used with

caution, but only with prior approval.

K. In cast-in-place concrete, use expansion anchors, preset inserts, or self-drilling masonry anchors.

L. Use lead expansion anchors, or preset inserts on metal surfaces.

M. Do not fasten supports to piping, ceiling support wires, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

N. Power-actuated anchors, plastic or fiber expansion anchors, and drive pin anchors are prohibited.

O. Do not drill structural steel members.

P. Any anchoring must be able to be unsecured and removed should relocation be required. The old

Hilti HIT-pin is not acceptable.

Q. Where necessary and with approval from UCB, modify studs, add studs, add framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as required to suit project work. If necessary in stud walls provide special supports from floor to structure above.

R. For precast panels/planks and metal decks, support communication work as determined by

manufacturer and UCB.

S. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates for mounting project work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs. Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity.

T. Install freestanding telecommunications equipment on concrete pads.

U. Support surface mounted cabinets, enclosures, and panelboards with a minimum of four anchors.

V. On exterior concrete walls below grade, provide 1” steel channel stand-offs for cabinets and

raceways.

W. Use stud bridges at top and bottom of cabinets and enclosures that are flush mounted on hollow drywall walls.

X. Use suitable vibration isolation pads for vibrating equipment.

END OF SECTION

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING

27 05 26 - 1

SECTION 27 05 26 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to, Drawings, Contract Forms, General and

Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Construction Manager/General Contractor (CM/GC) Agreement, Exhibits and other Division-1 Specification sections apply.



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of telecommunications grounding and bonding work is indicated by drawings and schedules and

as specified herein. Grounding and bonding work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment.

B. Type of telecommunications grounding and bonding work specified in this section includes the following: 1. Solidly grounded.

C. A dedicated telecommunications ground system shall be provided with insulated bonding backbones

(TBB), equalizing conductors (TEC), and pre-drilled tinned copper busses (TMGB and TGB) shall be provided at each communications room (Telecom Demarcation, Data Center, Main Cross-Connect, Intermediate Cross-Connects, Intermediate Closets, and Server Rooms) to bond metallic equipment and hardware components.

D. Applications of telecommunications grounding and bonding work in this section includes the following:

1. Underground metal piping. 2. Building frames - structural steel. 3. Electrical power systems. 4. Grounding electrodes. 5. Raceways. 6. Service equipment. 7. Enclosures. 8. Equipment. 9. Equipment cabinets. 10. Equipment racks. 11. Conduits. 12. Conduit risers. 13. Conduit sleeves. 14. Cable trays and ladder racks.

E. Refer to other Division-26 and 27sections for wires/cables, telecommunications raceways, boxes and

fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction with telecommunications grounding and bonding work; not work of this section.


27 05 26 - 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on grounding and bonding products and associated accessories.

B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for telecommunications grounding and bonding work which

indicates layout of ground rods, location of system grounding electrode connections, routing of grounding electrode conductors, also include diagrams for circuits and equipment grounding connections.

C. Submit ground riser diagram for entire project. Show bus bars with transformer ground electrode

conductors, etc.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of grounding and bonding

products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with telecommunications grounding work similar to that required for project.

C. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the

authority having jurisdiction, and NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to systems, circuits and equipment.

2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards No.’s 467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment”, and 869 “Electrical Service Equipment”, pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. In addition, comply with UL Std 486A, “Wire Connectors and soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.” Provide grounding and bonding products which are UL-listed and labeled for their intended usage.

3. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment.

4. ANSI/EIA/TIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of ANSI/EIA/TIA Standards 568, 569, and 607.

5. BICSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of BICSI Standards TDM, CO-OSP, Data Network Design Reference Manual, and Wireless.

PART 2 – SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials and Components:

1. Provide telecommunications grounding and bonding system; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is installer’s option. Where materials or components are not indicated provide products which comply with NEC, UL, IEEE, ANSI/EIA/TIA, and BICSI requirements and with established industry standards for those applications indicated.

2.2 CONDUCTORS


27 05 26 - 3

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Bonding Backbone (TBB), Equalizers (TEC), and Tie Cables: #3/0 AWG. 2. Equipment and Component Bonding Conductors: Insulated stranded No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded

conductors.

B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus (TMGB): Provide (1) 24-inch x 3-inch x ¼-inch (600mm x 75mm x 6mm) tinned copper bus with pre-drilled two-hole bonding lugs in existing Main Communications Room. Bus shall have isolated stand-offs.

C. Telecommunications Grounding Bus (TGB): Provide (1) 12-inch x 3-inch x ¼-inch (300mm x 75mm x

6mm) tinned copper bus with pre-drilled two-hole bonding lugs. Bus shall have isolated stand-offs.

2.3 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by Cadweld (or approved equal)

manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Compression Fittings: All cable splices from bonding backbone to tie cables shall use irreversible compression fittings to join cable ends.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.

B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with

nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts. 1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches (1200 mm) long. 2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Stranded conductors shall be used for all telecommunication ground cables, unless

otherwise indicated.

B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus (TMGB):

1. Install in Main Communication Room or Data Center. (Refer to Technology drawings for exact location.)

2. Install bus on insulated spacers 1-inch (25 mm) minimum, from wall and 12-nches (300 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

3. The TMGB shall be connected to the main electrical service ground bus with an insulated #3/0 (120mm2) stranded grounding conductor installed in continuous conduits.

4. The TMGB shall be connected to building steel if existing within room.


27 05 26 - 4

C. Telecommunications Grounding Bus (TGB):

1. Install in all intermediate communication rooms, server rooms, and other low voltage or communication rooms.

2. Install bus on insulated spacers 1-inch (25 mm), minimum, from wall and 12-inches (300 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

3. The TGB shall be connected to the TMGB bus via the TBB with an insulated #3/0 (120mm2) stranded grounding conductor installed in continuous conduits where required by code.

4. The TGB shall be connected to building steel if existing within room.

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2, ANSI/EIA/TIA and BICSI grounding requirements

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor,

close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

3.3 EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors to all telecommunications equipment and components.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70, ANSI/EIA/TIA and BICSI: 1. Armored and metal-clad cable sheaths. 2. Equipment Cabinets and Racks. 3. Cable trays and ladder racks. 4. Conduits sections and conduit sleeves. 5. Equipment and Power Supply Enclosures. 6. Wall mounted cable terminals. 7. Other metallic components as necessary.

3.4 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which telecommunications grounding and bonding connections are

to be made and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


27 05 26 - 5

3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Install telecommunications grounding and bonding systems in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions and applicable portions of NEC, NECA’s “Standard of Installation”, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements.

B. Coordinate with other electrical and telecommunications work as necessary to interface installation of telecommunications grounding and bonding system work with other work.

C. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. 1.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except

where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any

adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is

not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is

required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.

F. Apply corrosion-resistant finish to field-connections, buried metallic grounding and bonding products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, which are subjected to corrosive action.

G. Install all connectors on clean metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with

ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 5 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION


CABLE TRAYS 27 05 36 - 1

SECTION 27 05 36 CABLE TRAYS


A. General provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to, Drawings, Contract Forms, General and

Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Construction Manager/General Contractor (CM/GC) Agreement, Exhibits and other Division-1 Specification sections apply.



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of cable tray system work is indicated by drawings. Cable trays are defined to include, but not

limited to, straight sections, reducers, bends, tees, crosses, elbows, covers and accessories.

B. Separate (dedicated) cable trays shall be provided for building backbone cabling and horizontal tele/data cabling, as indicated on the Technology Drawings.

C. Types of cable tray systems required for project include the following: 1. Wire Basket type.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Component List: Provide complete submittal component list at the beginning of the submittal package. Component list shall identify each component name, manufacturer, and specific product/part number. All part numbers shall clearly indicate special options, color, accessories, etc. Component list and manufacturer cut-sheets shall be compiled to match the order of Appendix 1

2. .

Cutsheets:

3.

Submit manufacturer’s cut-sheets on all components listed within this specification and corresponding appendix. Product Substitutions:

This specification is intended to be performance based, thus all products listed in Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule are benchmark products. Alternate products of equal performance characteristics may be submitted, but are subject to final review by the owner and engineer to ensure the intent of these specifications are met.

B. Shop Drawings and As-Built Drawings shall include: 1. Complete set of floor plans

2.

: Submit plan layout drawings of installation of cable tray systems and accessories including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice plate connectors, expansion joint assemblies, and fittings, showing accurately scaled components, mounting heights/elevations, and spatial relationships (clearances) to adjacent structure and equipment, including but not limited to, HVAC ductwork, piping, and light fixtures. Documentation:

Provide (7) hardcopy sets of prints for review.



1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of cable trays and fittings of types and capacities

required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with cable tray

system work similar to that required for project.

C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds Pub No. VE 1, “Cable Tray Systems.”

D. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC, as applicable to construction and installation of cable tray systems.

E. UL Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and labeled.

F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA70B, “Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance,” pertaining to installation of cable tray systems.

G. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Stds 141 and 241.

H. ANSI/EIA/TIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of 568 and 569.

I. BICSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of BICSI.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver cable tray systems and accessories packaged in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers.

B. Handle cable tray systems and components carefully to avoid breakage, denting and scoring finishes. Do

not install damaged equipment; replace and return damaged units to manufacturer.

C. Store cable trays and accessories in original cartons and in a clean dry space; protect from weather and construction traffic.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation with Electrical, HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and other trades to eliminate

disruption and/or conflict with other systems.

B. Sequence installation of cable tray with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction.

PART 2 – SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2.1 CABLE TRAY SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide metal cable trays, of types, classes and sizes indicated;

with splice plates, bolts, nuts and washers for connecting units; capable of supporting concentrated loads of 100-lb (0.45kN) at any given point and maximum deflection of 1-inch (25mm) at full cable load (of 100-lb/ft(1.48kN/m).Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces; in compliance with applicable standards; and with the following additional construction features:



1. Wire Basket Type: a. Tray Material: ASTM A510 high strength steel wires. b. Cross Rungs: Standard 2-inch (50mm) x 4-inch (100mm) wire mesh pattern. c. Bends and Fittings: 24-inch (600mm) minimum radius. d. Construction: Steel wires with 6-inch (150mm)” deep side flanges and rounded wire ends. e. Tray Finish: ASTM B 633 Electrozinc (Interior Locations) and ASTM A 123 Hot Dipped

Galvanized (Exterior, Wet, and Corrosive Locations). f. Lengths shall not exceed 10’-0” (3.0m).

Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule, Table 1 for list of approved manufacturer’s part numbers.

2.2 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

A. Provide dropouts, conduit adapters, hold-down devices and blind ends, as indicated, and as recommended

by cable tray manufacturer.


2.3 SUPPORTS AND CONNECTORS

A. Provide cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as indicated and as recommended

by cable tray manufacturer.


2.4 FIRESTOPPING - UL 1489

A. Provide firestopping pillows and/or bricks as required in all cable tray openings to maintain rating of the

wall. Fireproofing shall consist of ready to use, intumescent fibrous material enclosed in a strong polyethylene envelope.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS

A. Install cable trays in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions, and with recognized

industry practices, to ensure that cable tray equipment complies with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NFPA 70B and NECA’s “Standard of Installation” pertaining to general electrical installation practices.

B. Coordinate with other low voltage, electrical, and mechanical work as necessary to properly interface installation of cable tray work with other work.



C. Remove burrs and sharp edges of cable trays, wherever these could possibly be injurious to wiring insulation or jacketing.

D. Support cable tray to withstand a minimum of 100-lb (0.45kN) at any given point and maximum deflection of 1-inch (25mm) at full cable load (of 100-lb/ft(1.48kN/m).

E. Complete cable tray installation before starting installation of cables.

F. Provide a minimum of 12 inches (300mm) of free space encompassing cable trays to permit access for installing and maintaining cables. Coordinate location of cable trays with Mechanical Contractor to obtain clearances. Refer to Technology Drawings for additional requirements. In cases of conflict, the most stringent (greatest length) shall govern.

G. Provide “Firestopping” for all cable tray penetrations through fire rated walls and slabs. Refer to Division 7 for additional requirements.

H. Clearances: Telecommunications raceway shall be routed to maintain appropriate clearances from potential interfering electrical sources per NEC, ANSI/EIA/TIA, and BICSI requirements. Provided below are minimum requirements of key components that shall be maintained. 1. 120V Power Conduits: 6-inches (150mm) 2. 208V and Higher Power: 24-inches (600mm) 3. Lighting System: 12-inches (300mm)Transformers: 48-inches (1200mm) 4. Motors and Fans: 48-inches (1200mm) 5. Other Interfering Sources to be field verified and coordinated by Contractor with Architect and

Engineer. I. All walls where cable tray is installed with wall type brackets shall be internally reinforced as necessary

at all bracket locations to support cable tray loads.

3.2 GROUNDING A. Electrically ground cable trays and ensure continuous electrical conductivity of cable tray system.

Provide maximum of 1.0 ohms resistance to building ground connection. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground.

3.3 TESTING

A. Test cable trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections, and to demonstrate

compliance with specified maximum grounding resistance. Submit results to Engineer for approval.

3.4 WARNING SIGNS A. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs, either on or in proximity of cable

trays, where easily seen by occupants of space, and indicating warning with following wording, “WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY.” Provide 1-1/2”-high yellow lettering on black background, of style selected by Architect/Engineer.

END OF SECTION



APPENDIX 1: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

Table 1 - Cable Tray Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number

1 8" x 4" Wire Basket Tray Cooper B-Line WB408

2 90 Degree Kit Cooper B-Line 90 DEGREE KIT

3 Horizontal Adjustment Kit Cooper B-Line FTSHAK

4 Aluminum Center Rail End Cap Cooper B-Line CAM-EC20B

5 Horizontal Offset Coupling, 8" Cooper B-Line CAC-0H080B

6 Horizontal Tee Coupling Cooper B-Line CAC-HTM12B

7 Vertical Coupling Cooper B-Line CAC-VB

8 Horizontal Pivot Connector Cooper B-Line CAC-UFB

9 Horizontal Adjustable Splice Cooper B-Line CAS-HB

10 Vertical Adjustable Splice Cooper B-Line CAS-VB

11 Cable Drop Out Cooper B-Line CAM-DO-11

12 Qwik-Bolt Splice Hanger Cooper B-Line CAC-SB

13 Qwik-Bolt No Gap Splice Cooper B-Line CAC-NG

14 EZ Path Firestop Device, 4"x4-5/8" Cablofil EZD 44

PR 002650 University of Colorado Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

27 08 00 - 1

SECTION 270800 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to, Drawings, Contract Forms, General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Construction Manager/General Contractor (CM/GC) Agreement, Exhibits and other Division-1 Specification sections apply.



1.2 EMERGENCY FACILITIES

A. Maintain at all times free access to fire lanes and emergency and utility control facilities such as fire hydrants, fire alarm boxes, utility vaults, manholes, pull-boxes, etc.

1.3 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

A. Initiate, maintain, and supervise all safety precautions and programs in connection with the project work. Comply with all safety precautions and programs of UCB.

B. Take all reasonable precautions for safety of, and provide reasonable protection to prevent

damage, injury, or loss to: 1. personnel conducting project work and other persons who may be affected thereby; and 2. existing facilities, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated; and 3. project work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage

or off site, under care, custody or control of Contractor or any subcontractors; and 4. installed equipment and existing construction; and 5. other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,

pavements, fences, roadways, structures and utilities not designed for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.

C. Trucks and other equipment shall not drive on lawns, concrete sidewalks, or concrete curbs

unless approved in writing by the UCB Project Manager. All lawns, shrubs, walks, irrigation equipment, tunnels, curbs, or other property damaged in such a manner by the Contractor shall be replaced or repaired in a timely manner by the Contractor to the satisfaction of UCB.

D. Comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, policies of UCB, and lawful

orders of any public authority having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property to protect them from damage injury or loss.

E. Assume responsibility for construction safety at all times and provide, as part of contract, all

trench or building shoring, scaffolding, shielding, dust/fume protection, mechanical/electrical protection, special grounding, safety railings, barriers, and other safety features required to provide safe conditions for all workers and site visitors.


27 08 00 - 2

F. Moderate public pedestrian traffic should be expected around all work locations. Ladders, scaffold, installation materials, and all other hazardous conditions must be fully protected at all times. Warning cones, barricades, warning tapes, etc. shall be used to warn and protect persons and property at all times in public corridors.

G. Work shall not interfere with legal fire exits. Corridors, areas of egress, fire protection

standpipes, hydrants, and exit stairs shall be maintained at all times.

H. Comply with any and all code related and UCB specific safety requirements for work to be performed in confined spaces. The University requires appropriate safety training, physical examination and fit testing for employees working in confined spaces. This shall be provided to Contractor employees at the expense of the Contractor and at no cost to the University.

I. Comply fully with National Electrical Safety Code NESC and UCB specific safety requirements

for work in electrical high voltage power manholes. Only licensed electricians may perform work in electrical high voltage power manholes. In addition, a UCB high voltage electrician escort is required to be on site throughout the time work is being conducted by contractors (including standing order electricians) in any high voltage power manholes or vaults.

1.4 LOCATION AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES

A. Notwithstanding any other provisions of the contract, Contractor shall be solely responsible for location and protection of any and all public lines and utility customer service lines in the work area.

1.5 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

A. Provide required parking permits for all construction vehicles furnished by the Contractor. Permits shall be purchased by the Contractor from the University Parking Management Office at 303-492-7384. Any cost to the Contractor for parking related items is not a billable charge.

B. Park only in approved and authorized areas. UCB shall not pay the cost of parking tickets.

1.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. All Contractor personnel shall be clearly identified by uniform and or company badge with photo ID.

B. Contractor may also be issued and required to wear UCB provided Contractor ID’s for required

card access locations or identification. All owner provided Contractor ID’s must be returned upon completion of the project work.

C. Equip all vehicles with signs identifying the Contractor company. All vehicles used on campus

by Contractor personnel, whether owned by the employee or the Contractor shall have visible company identification on both sides of the vehicle. Magnetic signs are acceptable.

1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Make provisions for the delivery and safe storage of all materials and equipment. Specific delivery and storage instructions to be coordinated between UCB and Contractor in advance.

B. Mark materials and store in such manner as to be easily checked and inspected.


27 08 00 - 3

C. Store all materials and equipment out of the weather and protected from damage, theft, and vandalism and assume complete responsibility for losses due to any cause. Store materials on dry base at least 6” above ground or floor and provide waterproof covering. Remove and provide special storage for items subject to moisture damage. Replace items stolen or damaged at no cost to UCB.

D. Equipment or materials stored on site shall be stored so as not to interfere with other work, block

passageways, or obstruct access/exits to buildings or facilities.

E. Where materials are indicated to be furnished by other or by UCB for installation under this Division, make a complete and careful check of all materials delivered and furnish a receipt acknowledging acceptance of the delivery and condition of the materials delivered. After such acceptance, assume full responsibility for their safe-keeping until such time as the completed installation has been accepted.

F. Use of trailers may be required. Coordinate with UCB for location of any required trailers.

G. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with materials and equipment delivery

and storage. 1.8 SITE ACCESS AND COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Contractor shall have access to site during normal business hours subject to any work restriction for the duration of the project.

B. Perform work in a manner so as to minimize disruption to the ongoing day-to-day activities of

the occupants of the facility.

C. Notify UCB to schedule activities that may disrupt the occupants.

D. There are areas of the building where access shall be restricted or regulated due to personnel safety. UCB shall identify such sensitive work areas in which advanced scheduling and admittance permission is required.

1.9 SITE RESTORAL AND CLEANUP

A. Keep the building, premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of surplus, waste materials or rubbish caused by operations at all times.

B. Remove tools, equipment and scaffolding, and leave the area where the work has been done

broom clean at the end of each workday. In the case of dispute, the University may remove all such items and charge the cost of such removal to the Contractor.

C. Before leaving each day, remove all surplus material, waste material, empty boxes, crates, and

rubbish and transport rubbish to an on-site location designated by the University. Use of University dumpsters and trash cans is prohibited.

D. Keep clean all equipment and fixtures for the duration of the project.

E. Upon completion of work and before acceptance, remove from the site all surplus and discarded

materials, temporary structures, tools, and debris. Surplus and waste materials removed from the site shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable laws and regulations.

F. Equipment shall be turned over to UCB in perfect, unblemished condition.


27 08 00 - 4

G. Replace, restore, or bring to original condition any damaged floors, ceilings, walls, furniture,

grounds, pavement, etc., caused by Contractor personnel and operations. Restore damage or disfigurements and repair surfaces, including finish and/or paint, to match existing.

H. Upon completion of work and before acceptance, thoroughly clean the entire work area

including all equipment and fixtures, both exposed surfaces and interiors. Final cleanup at job completion shall include: 1. Exterior: In addition to items specified below, any new surfaces on exterior, concrete, metal,

etc. shall be carefully and thoroughly cleaned. 2. Hardware: Clean and polish all hardware and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt,

etc. 3. Electrical: Clean and polish all electric fixtures, including glassware, switchplates, etc. and

leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. 4. Equipment: Carefully and thoroughly clean all items of equipment, mechanical, electrical,

cabinets, ductwork, etc. 5. Floors: Thoroughly clean all floors. Vacuum and clean all carpeting.

I. Leave the site in a clean, neat, and orderly condition at least equal to that which originally

existed. All final cleanup of the exterior and interior of the building shall be done by the Contractor or by professional cleaners hired and paid for by the Contractor as required.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 27 08 00

PR 002650 University of Colorado Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM WORK

27 11 00 - 1

SECTION 27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM WORK


A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections.




A. Provide all services, labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete and proper installation within the Telecommunications Rooms (TRs) and Equipment Rooms (ERs) as called for in these specifications and related drawings.

B. This section includes minimum requirements and installation methods for the following:

1. Equipment Racks and Cable Routing Hardware 2. Refer to 271313 for Copper Termination Equipment 3. Refer to 271323 for Fiber Termination Equipment 4. Refer to 270526 for Grounding and Bonding

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. All installation work in the TRs shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated shall be subject to the control of UCB.

C. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment

specified is based on the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where “approved equal” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval of UCB based on submittals provided.

D. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of:

1. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC) Articles 250, 300, and 645 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard –

Part 1: General Requirements, including applicable addendum 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard –

Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components, including applicable addendum 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, including

applicable addendum


27 11 00 - 2

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B – Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-604 Series – Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standards 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 – Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of

Commercial Buildings 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 – Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications 9. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 10. FCC CFR 47 Part 68 – Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network

1.5 ARCHITECTURAL, ELECTRICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. New Telecommunications Rooms (TRs), also referred to as Intermediate Cross-connect Rooms (IC-rooms or IC’s), shall be designed in compliance with the space, electrical, and environmental requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA569-A – Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. Smaller spaces or enclosures shall not be acceptable without prior written approval from UCB ITS.

B. The locations for all TRs shall be designed to be within a 150’ radius of all areas to be served

with the understanding to maintain ANSI/TIA/EIA distance standards for telecommunications cabling.

C. Corridor access with the door to swing out is required for all new TRs, which shall comply with

common area access requirements. No other rooms shall lead directly to or from the TR or ER.

D. All walls of the TRs will be covered with rigidly fixed ¾” A-C fire-resistant or noncombustible plywood backboard, void free, 8’ high, painted with two coats of light colored fire retardant paint.

E. TRs and Telecom ERs shall be open to the structure above (no suspended ceiling).

F. The floor, walls and ceiling of the TRs will be sealed to reduce dust. Flooring materials with

antistatic properties shall be used.

G. TRs and ERs cannot be shared with other departments or purposes including, but not limited to, custodial, access services, electrical, mechanical, storage, etc.

H. Equipment not related to the support of the TR (e.g., piping, ductwork, pneumatic piping,

electrical equipment, plumbing, etc.) should not be installed in, pass through, or enter the room.

I. No liquid piping, dry liquid piping, or steam piping shall pass through or within the walls of any TRs or ERs with the exception of fire safety systems.

J. No equipment, hardware, piping, etc. shall be added in or near any TR that will change the

temperature or humidity of these rooms without written agreement from UCB ITS department prior to design and installation.

K. Power for all TRs in the building will be provided by a separate supply circuit terminated on its

own electrical panel with an isolated ground. This electrical panel shall be located in the room with the MDF. If a standby power source is available in the building, the panel serving the TRs shall be connected to the standby power


27 11 00 - 3

L. Power for telecommunications and data network equipment in the TRs should be provided by one (1) double duplex outlet with a dedicated 120VAC, 20A circuit and one (1) L530R outlet with a dedicated 120VAC, 30A circuit. In addition, convenience duplex power outlets should be placed at 6 foot intervals on the walls.

M. Lighting in the TRs should be a minimum of 500 lx (50 foot candles) measured 1 m (3 ft) above

the finished floor, mounted 2600 mm (8.5 ft) minimum above the finished floor. Lighting fixtures should not be powered from the same electrical distribution panel as the telecom or data equipment in the room

N. New TRs shall not be adjacent to any electrical room or room containing a transformer or

motors. Electrical power systems in or adjacent to the TRs should be configured such that their electromagnetic fields do not interfere with telecom cabling or equipment.

O. The temperature and humidity in the TRs should be controlled to provide continuous operating

ranges of 64oF to 75oF with 30% to 55% relative humidity. A positive pressure differential with respect to surrounding areas should be provided. If a standby power source is available in the building, the HVAC system serving the TRs should be connected to the standby power. HVAC loads will depend on the equipment in these rooms. The equipment list and associated loads should be provided by UCB staff responsible for the equipment.

P. All CAD design shall comply with the CAD standards document attached at the end of this

section.

Q. Building designs shall be Star topology with no splice points. All voice, utility, fiber and Qwest backbone cabling shall terminate from the building MDF to a TR.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABLE ROUTING HARDWARE

A. Communications Backboard 1. Plywood Backboard:

a. Provide ¾-inch (19mm) fire retardant, exterior, Marine-grade plywood backboard mounted on communications walls at 6-inches to 102-inches (150mm to 2550mm) AFF as noted on drawings and painted to match architectural finish (white minimum). If plywood is not fire rated then backboard shall be painted with fire resistant paint on all sides to match architectural finish (white minimum).

B. Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures

1. Equipment Racks – Cable Distribution and Network Type:

a. Provide Equipment Racks as shown on drawings. b. Cable distribution equipment racks shall utilize 19-inch EIA Standard / ETSI

wide. c. Racks shall be completely setup and installed at locations shown on drawings. d. Racks shall be vertically and horizontally level. e. Refer to drawings for additional requirements. f. Equipment Cabinet and Rack Specifications:

1) Enclosure: None. 2) Rack Type: 2-Post, 19-inch EIA Standard. 3) Rack Rail Width: 3-inch (75mm).


27 11 00 - 4

4) Rack Size: 19-inch W x 84-inch H (483mm x 2100mm). 5) Rack Units: 42U (minimum). 6) Rack Material: 6061-T6 Aluminum. 7) Rack Finish: Black Epoxy Powder Coat. 8) Rack Mounting Holes: Pre-drilled and Threaded Tap Holes (spacing and

diameter) or 3/8-inch (9.5mm) Square Punch with Cage Nuts per EIA Standard Pattern.

9) Loading: 1000-lb (450kg). 10) Mounting Type: Bolted to Floor with Neoprene Isolator. 11) Vertical Cable Managers: Yes. 12) Horizontal Cable Managers: Yes. 13) Power Strips: Vertical and Horizontal. 14) Bonding and Ground. Yes. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers’ part numbers.

C. Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels

1. All communications cables shall be terminated unless noted otherwise. 2. Cable terminations including wall fields, blocks, and patch panels are specified with in

other sections. 3. Refer to 27 13 13 – Communications Copper Backbone Cabling, 27 13 23 –

Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling, and 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling for additional requirements.

D. Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack

1. Cable Tray – Ladder Type

a. Cable racking in Communications Rooms shall be ladder rack with ASTM A513 and A570 structural tubular steel side rails 1½-inch x 3/8-inch (150mm x 9.5mm), with rungs on 9-inches (225mm) centers; yellow zinc dichromate finish; complete with all required mounting hardware and with all fittings and cables needed to form a bonded (grounded) system.

b. Horizontal ladder rack shall be mounted around room perimeter and above equipment racks as indicated on drawings. Tray sections shall be offset a minimum of 6-inches (150mm) clear from wall to allow passage of other systems up wall including risers, backbone, and other distribution.

c. Vertical ladder rack shall be placed on wall above riser conduit locations as indicated on drawings, to tie backbone cable.

d. Tray shall sections shall be bonded together for electrical continuity (grounding) and system bonded to telecommunications ground bus (TGB) or electrical ground bus. Ladder rack, hardware, and components shall be UL classified. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers’ part numbers.

2. Equipment Rack Vertical Cable Management:

a. Provide double-sided, high capacity, 6-inch W by 84-inch H vertical cable managers on each side and between all equipment racks for horizontal tele/data cables and patch cords.

b. As an option submitted for approval, provide double-sided, high capacity, 10-inch W by 84-inch H vertical cable managers for positions in between all equipment racks (due to patch cable size and quantities) for horizontal tele/data cables and patch cords. Vertical managers at each end of the row or group shall remain as


27 11 00 - 5

the 6-inch W version. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers’ part numbers

3. Equipment Rack Horizontal Cable Managers:

a. Patch panel cable managers: Provide double-sided horizontal cable managers above, below, and between all patch panels for horizontal tele/data cables and patch cord management.

b. Data network switch cable managers: Provide double-sided horizontal cable managers for data network switch patch cord management. The quantity of patch panels for data network switches shall equal the quantity provided for patch panels. Additionally, Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to confirm the exact placement of these horizontal cable managers in the equipment racks. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers’ part numbers

4. Wall Field Cable Managers:

a. Jumper troughs and cable managers shall be provided along each side and between wall fields or any other wall mounted cable terminals or patch panels. This is to provide adequate support of cables interconnecting wall fields or other wall mounted cable terminals. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers’ part numbers

5. D-Rings:

a. D-Rings or equivalent means shall be provided as necessary on backboard to support any horizontal and vertical cables not supported by cable tray or other means. Spacing shall not exceed 24-inches (600mm) or cable manufacturer’s recommendation, whichever is less. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers’ part numbers

E. Communication Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips

1. Vertical Power Strips a. Each equipment cabinet shall be installed with (2) vertical power strips that have

multiple power outlets to connect equipment within cabinet. b. Power strips shall have a cord with plug and shall be connected to specific

receptacles on dedicated circuits. c. Power strips shall be connected to different power sources or UPS wherever

possible. d. There are various power strip types and configurations used on this project. Refer

to drawings and schedules for additional requirements. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers’ part numbers

2. Horizontal Power Strips a. A minimum of (1) horizontal power strip shall be provided for each equipment

rack location.


27 11 00 - 6

b. Power strips shall have a cord with a plug and shall be connected to specific receptacles on dedicated circuits.

c. There are various power strip types and configurations used on this project. Refer to drawings and schedules for additional requirements. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers’ part numbers

F. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) 1. Each Communications Room shall be installed with a dedicated telecommunications

ground bus bar (TGB) and bonded to the telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB). 2. Each Equipment Cabinet, Equipment Rack, Ladder Rack or Wire Basket Tray, Conduit

Sleeves, and other metallic components etc. shall be individually bonded and grounded to TGB.

3. Refer to Section 27 05 26 – Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding for additional requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABLE ROUTING HARDWARE IN

TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS

A. Refer to Section 27 00 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section.

B. The Telecommunications Rooms (TRs) may be equipped with some existing hardware, such as plywood backboards, grounding bus bars, equipment racks, ladder cable runway, horizontal and vertical cable management, and copper and fiber termination equipment. Existing hardware already be in place will be shown on the project drawings.

C. Examine TRs and verify conditions are as shown on project drawings. Provide notification in

writing of conditions deviating from drawings or detrimental to proper completion of the work.

D. Beginning of installation in the TRs indicates Contractor acceptance existing conditions.

E. Install new equipment racks with vertical and horizontal cable management in the TRs as required for project and as shown on drawings. Letter designation for racks and equipment shall be placed as shown in the rack layout at the end of this Section and in the panel details at the end of Section 271700. All equipment racks shall be securely anchored to the concrete floor using a minimum 3/8” hardware or as specified by rack manufacturer.

F. Install new ladder cable runway for cable routing in the TRs as required for project and as shown

on drawings. All ladder cable runway shall be securely anchored to the walls with support kits and brackets as specified by manufacturer. Secure equipment racks to ladder cable runway with all-thread covered with EMT conduit sleeve.

G. Install plywood backboard on the walls in the TRs as required for the project and as shown on

drawings. All plywood backboard shall be securely anchored to the walls.

H. Install D-rings on plywood backboard for cable routing in the TRs as required for the project and as shown on drawings.

I. All new cables shall be supported using ladder cable runway, D-rings, and cable management

hardware and shall be neatly dressed-out in the TRs


27 11 00 - 7

J. Clamp all new cables at the entrance to the TRs for strain relief.

K. Provide coils on all new fiber cables terminated in the TRs per the project drawings to control excess fiber lengths.

L. Bind fiber cable coils in four places with separation of 90 degrees and anchor to wall within four

feet of cable entrance. Do not install cable coils on cable or equipment racks.

M. Firestop all sleeves and conduit openings after the cable installation is complete.

N. The hardware layout in the racks shall follow the UCB standard format from top to bottom and left to right as shown in the typical rack layout drawings.

O. Equipment placement shall be coordinated with UCB ITS staff.

P. Data patch cords being installed to ports on equipment must not cross the center of the port

section on the equipment.

Q. Patch cords being installed to jacks on patch panels must not cross the center of the patch panel.

R. Patch cords from equipment ports on one side of the rack to jack patch panel positions on the other side of the rack must route to the vertical manager, up to the top, and over and down the vertical manager on the other side of the rack, so that the patch cords do not cross the center of the patch panel or the center of the port section on the equipment.

S. Patch cords may be installed from equipment ports to jacks on patch panels when the ports and

jacks are on the same side of the centerline.

T. A small drip loop is required for trouble shooting and tracing patch cords.

U. Refer to the drawings attached at the end of this section for patch cord routing.

V. Provide a junction plate at top of equipment rack and required cable runway to attach rack to cable runway around the perimeter of the Communications room.

W. The completed equipment rack will be affixed to the floor using drop-in anchors and 5/8-inch zinc-plated hex bolts, split and flat washers.

X. Install the junction plates above all equipment racks and attach to cable runway that is installed

around the perimeter of the Communications room. Junction plate must be fastened to frame without using “J” hooks so that no equipment space is lost.

Y. All communications cables routed within communications rooms shall be bundled and combed

to provide a neat and organized appearance. This includes horizontal and vertical cables routed on cable tray, d-rings, vertical cable managers, equipment rack cable managers, etc. Cables shall be bundled using only manufacturer and industry approved wire ties with tensions that do not deform and damage cable resulting in loss of transmission or performance. Any bundles and combing methods used shall not exceed manufacturer or industry standards recommendations for that cable type.

Z. All equipment and components noted in this section and drawings shall be provided and

completely setup and installed. This includes but not limited to Cabinets and Racks, Cable


27 11 00 - 8

Management and Ladder Rack, Communication Wall Fields and Patch Panels, and Communications Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips.

AA. Cabinets and racks shall be vertically and horizontally level.

BB. All equipment shall be generally installed per drawings and field coordinated with current

conditions and other trade. The final locations shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to installation. No additional cost submitted by contractor shall be incurred by Owner due to Contractor’s failure to comply with this requirement. shall be completely setup and installed at locations shown on drawings.


Table 1 - Equipment Cabinets/Racks and Ladder Rack Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number

1 2-Post Open Equipment Rack (19"W x 84"H) CPI 55053-503

2 2-Post Open Equipment Rack (Installation kit) CPI 40604-001

3 2-Post Open Equipment Rack (dust covers) CPI 41050-119

4 6-inch Vertical Cable Manager Chatsworth 30162-703

5 Interbay Cable Organizer B-Line SB-719-19-2XL FB

6 Screw-Mount, Reusable Cable Ties Hubbell MCCMV9BS10

7 Back Wire Manager 2" Narrow Cable Rings Hubbell 11228-501

8 Back Wire Manager 4" Doublewide Cable Rings Hubbell 12228-501

9 Blank Filler Panel 1U Hubbell MCCBP175



12 19” rack-mount power strip Hubbell MCCPSS19TS

13 12-inch Ladder Rack Type Cable Tray (Gray) Chatsworth-CPI 10250-112

14 Ladder Rack Radius Drop Out (Cross Member) Chatsworth-CPI 12100-712

15 Ladder Rack Radius Drop Out (Stringer Member) Chatsworth-CPI 12101-702

16 Ladder Rack Butt-Splice Kit Chatsworth-CPI 16301-001

17 Ladder Rack Junction Splice Kit Chatsworth-CPI 16302-001

18 Ladder Rack Triangular Support Bracket - Aluminum 18-inch wide

Chatsworth-CPI 11312-718


27 11 00 - 9

END OF SECTION

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLING

27 13 13 - 1

SECTION 27 13 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLING


A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1

Specification sections.



1.2 SCOPE OF WORK SUMMARY A. The term “provide” used throughout this specification and drawings shall mean “furnish, install, test, and

certify”.

B. Coordinate project schedule, installation schedule, phasing and any other requirements deemed necessary with Construction Manager and/or General Contractor and all necessary trades to ensure successful completion of work.

C. Phasing, temporary distribution/equipment, cut-over and implementation shall be coordinated with

Owner, Construction Manager and/or General Contractor, Architect, and Engineer.

D. Extent of communications infrastructure work is indicated by Division 27 specifications and Technology drawings and schedules and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, the provisions of: 1. Raceway systems including but not limited to conduits, cable trays, sleeves, surface raceways,

telecommunication services entrance, manholes, pull-boxes, junction boxes, back-boxes, etc. are required and specified in Division 27 sections and other Division 26 sections. The Construction Manager and/or General Contractor shall coordinate this with the Sub-Contractor performing work and determine how scope of work is assigned. The purpose of this specification is to establish design intent and general system scope.

2. All communications infrastructure shall be provided as part of the Base Building Project including but limited to raceway, cable, cable terminals, and comm room fit-out.






8. Power distribution within equipment racks and cabinets including power strips. 9. Grounding and bonding of all metallic hardware components to the nearest telecommunications

grounding bus (TGB) bar including but not limited to equipment racks, cabinets, cable trays, ladder


27 13 13 - 2

rack, metallic cable sheaths, wall mounted wiring terminals, conduits, sleeves, metallic ductwork, and frames.

10. All physical cable management hardware including, but not limited to: “J-hooks” in accessible ceiling areas, “D-rings” on backboards, vertical and horizontal managers on racks and cabinets, vertical and horizontal ladder-type or wire basket cable tray within all communication rooms, etc.

11. Fire stopping as required. 12. Seismic bracing of all equipment cabinets, equipment racks and ladder-type or wire basket cable tray

as required by code and by local governing jurisdiction. 13. Testing of all communications cable infrastructure and grounding systems as noted by specification,

drawings, and applicable industry standards. 14. Labeling of all communication infrastructure components, hardware, cable, and terminations with

mechanically printed labels. 15. Preparation and submission of product data, shop drawings, testing reports, as-built drawings, and

cabling documentation as required in this specification. 16. Construction and Installation warranties. 17. Manufacturer components, channel and solutions warranties. 18. Installation and testing of all system and components. 19. Onsite administrative and user training. 20. Manufacturer training of components.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section.



1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING




1.8 WARRANTY





27 13 13 - 3

PART 2 - SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2.1 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER CABLING SYSTEM

A. Topology:

1. The Communications Copper Backbone Cabling will be an industry standard physical star topology with high pair count copper cabling interconnecting each Intermediate Communications (IC) Room to the Main Communications or Main Cross-Connect (MC) Room.

2. There may be conditions required where backbone cable is provided to non-communication room locations. These locations shall follow the same requirements and originate from the MC unless noted otherwise.

3. Refer to drawings for additional requirements.

B. General Requirements 1. All cable and terminations shall meet the minimum Performance and Criteria listed in specification

below and on drawings. 2. Cable requirements including cable quantities and pair / strand counts are specified on the drawings. 3. All cable splices shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer. This includes those

shown on drawings and/or proposed by Contractor. 4. Cable splices are only acceptable as noted on the drawings and must be approved by Owner,

Architect, and Engineer. 5. Cable splices are only intended where differing cable types are joined and/or multiple smaller cables

are joined to a larger backbone feeder cables. 6. Splices are not acceptable to extend cables of inadequate length. 7. All cables shall have the appropriate fire spread rating per building codes, industry standard, and

Underwriters Laboratory (UL/cUL) including plenum (CMP/OFNP/OFCP), riser (CMR/OFNR/OFCR), etc. The contractor shall verify the appropriate cable is being used for application it is installed.

8. Any cable routed below grade shall utilize specific water block construction. Copper cables generally use gel-filled compound to achieve this rating. The contractor is required to submit a solution wherever this condition exists regardless of whether noted on drawings.

9. Underground rated cable that doesn’t carry a suitable indoor building cable rating per building code and UL, shall not be routed more than 50-ft (15m) inside the building. Cable shall be spliced or terminated as appropriate and noted on drawings.

10. All armored and/or metallic cable sheaths shall be bonded to Telecommunications Ground Bus (TGB).

C. Performance and Criteria

1. The following information listed below is considered the minimum performance and criteria accepted.

2. Category 3 Telecommunications a. Cable Use and Construction Type:

1) Plenum Rated b. Cable

1) Category 3 2) Construction: Unshielded Twisted Pair 3) Medium: Solid Annealed Copper

c. Length Limitations: 2600-feet (800m) d. Physical Specification

1) Standard Cable Sizes: 25, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 600, and 900-pairs. 2) Conductor Size: 24 AWG

e. Electrical Specification


27 13 13 - 4

1) Frequency: 1-16MHz 2) Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms

f. Transmission Performance (min.) 1) Permanent Link

2) Channel

3) Connecting Hardware

4) Assembled Patch Cord a) Use Category 5E requirements if patch cords are used rather than cross-

connect jumpers.

Frequency Insertion NEXT(MHz) Loss (dB) (dB)

1.0 3.5 40.14.0 6.2 30.78.0 8.9 25.9

10.0 9.9 24.316.0 13.0 21.0

CATEGORY 3 - PERMANENT LINK


1.0 4.2 39.14.0 7.3 29.38.0 10.2 24.3

10.0 11.5 22.716.0 14.9 19.3

CATEGORY 3 - CHANNEL


1.0 3.5 40.14.0 6.2 30.78.0 8.9 25.9

10.0 9.9 24.316.0 13.0 21.0

CATEGORY 3 - CONNECTING HARDWARE


1.0 3.5 40.14.0 6.2 30.78.0 8.9 25.9

10.0 9.9 24.316.0 13.0 21.0

CATEGORY 3 - ASSEMBLED PATCH CORDS


27 13 13 - 5

2.2 CABLE REQUIREMENTS

A. Cat. 3 Plenum Rated – Telecommunications Cables 1. General:

a. This cable shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria Section for Category 3.

2. Application: Building backbone and riser installation within duct, conduits or cable trays telecommunications backbone cable.

3. Standard Available Sizes: a. 4, 6, 25, 50, 100, 200, and 300-pairs. b. Refer to drawings for minimum requirements.

4. Construction: a. Insulation: Flame retardant semi-rigid PVC. b. Shield/Sheath: None. c. Filling Compound: None. d. Jacket: Flame retardant PVC.

5. Color: White. 6. Temperature

a. Operating: -4 to +140 OF (-10 to +60 OC). b. Storage: -4 to +140 OF (-10 to +60 OC).

7. Pulling Tensions (max): lb (xx kg). 8. Compliances: ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.2, NEC/CEC Type CMP

Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer’s part numbers.

2.3 TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS

A. 66-Type Wiring Block (To be provided at the Existing MDF / MC-room)

1. General: a. This wiring terminal shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria

Section for Category 3. b. Provide all necessary wiring terminals, jumper troughs, protector panel, ground wire and bonding

to building ground, and plug in protectors. 2. Type: 66-Type. 3. Mounting Configuration: Wall Mounted (or Rack). 4. Size: 100-Pair (and as required). 5. Cable Interface:

a. Input: 66-Type Wiring Block. b. Output: 66-Type Wiring Block.

6. Electrical Specifications: a. TIA/EIA: Category 3 b. UL and cUL Listed c. FCC Part 68

7. Temperature a. Operating: +14 to +140 OF (-10 to +60 OC).


27 13 13 - 6

b. Storage: -40 to +158 OF (-40 to +70 OC).


B. RJ45-Type Patch Panel (To be used at the new TRs / IC-rooms) 1. General:

a. This wiring terminal shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria Section for Category 5E.

b. Provide all necessary wiring terminals, horizontal cable manager, protector panel, ground wire and bonding to building ground, and plug in protectors.

c. As an alternate to 110-Type Wiring Blocks or as noted on drawings or other specification sections, all copper backbone cable shall be terminated on patch panels.

d. Provide double-sided horizontal cable manager above and below each patch panels. e. For Cat. 3 cable, terminate 1-pair per RJ45 jack on Pins #4/5. Some applications may require

additional pairs. Exact requirements shall be coordinated and approved with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating any work.

f. For Cat. 5 cable, terminate 4-pairs per RJ45 jack per T568B standard termination. Exact requirements shall be coordinated and approved with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating any work.

g. Specific communication device and outlet types shall be grouped together on patch panel plus 20% spare jacks be added within grouping.

2. Type: RJ45-Type. 3. Mounting Configuration: 19-inch EIA Rack. 4. Size: 48-port (provide as required to terminate all cable). 5. Cable Interface:

a. Input: 110-Type (back). b. Output: RJ45-Type (front).

6. Electrical Specifications: a. TIA/EIA: Category 5E b. Insulation Resistance: 500 MegaOhms (minimum). c. Current Rating: 1.5A @68 OF (20 OC). d. Dielectric Withstand Voltage: 1000 VAC RMS, 60Hz (minimum), contact-to-contact and 1,500

VAC RMS, 60Hz (minimum) to exposed conductive surface. e. UL and cUL Listed f. FCC Part 68

7. Plug Requirements: a. Retention Force: 30-lb (133N). b. Insertion Life: 750 minimum. c. Plug/Jack Contact Force: 0.22-lb (100g).

8. Temperature a. Operating: +14 to +140 OF (-10 to +60 OC). b. Storage: -40 to +158 OF (-40 to +70 OC).


C. Voice Patch Cable from Patch Panel to 66 Blocks 1. Colored Blue for Voice in TR and ER (Special Order): Gruber 17-611800 2. Special Circuit Colored Yellow for Circuits other than Voice or Data in TR and ER (Special Order):

Gruber 17-607400


27 13 13 - 7


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 270000 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 3.2 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLE INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. This Section describes the installation locations for the products and materials, as well as methods

associated with the Telecommunications Installation portions of the Project. These Specifications, along with the drawings shall be followed during the course of the installation.

2. All communications cables routed within communications rooms shall be bundled and combed to provide a neat and organized appearance. This includes horizontal and vertical cables routed on cable tray, d-rings, vertical cable managers, equipment rack cable managers, etc. Cables shall be bundled using only manufacturer and industry approved wire ties with tensions that do not deform and damage cable resulting in loss of transmission or performance. Any bundles and combing methods used shall not exceed manufacturer or industry standards recommendations for that cable type.

3. All components noted in this section and drawings shall be provided and completely setup and installed. This includes but not limited to Cable, Terminations, and Cable Managers.

4. The Contractor is required to coordinate their efforts with the other trades and sub-contractor who may be working within the same vicinity to avoid conflict and lost time.

5. The Contractor shall supply all necessary tools, equipment, accessories, safety equipment, protective clothing, etc., as customary for the craft and necessary for the installation.

6. The Contractor shall verify space requirements and locations before starting cable installations and terminations. Inappropriate conditions shall be immediately reported to Construction Manager or General Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating installation

7. Where applicable, the Contractor shall verify existing cable fill in riser conduit before installation of additional cables so as not to exceed 40% cable fill. Contractor will be responsible for installation of additional riser conduit, where additional cables to be added will exceed the 40% cable fill.

8. The contractor shall not install any cable in conduits that does not have the appropriate protect bushings on conduit ends. All mis-installed cable will be removed, bushings installed, and new cable re-installed at the Contractors expense. No additional cost will be submitted to Owner.

9. The contractor shall not install any component in a manner or condition that will void manufacturer and/or contractor warranty. Any such conditions that prevent an acceptable install shall be immediately reported to Construction Manager or General Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating installation. All mis-installed components will be removed and replaced with new at the Contractors expense. No additional cost will be submitted to Owner.

10. All equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, arranged for convenient operation, testing and future maintenance.

11. Cable bends shall not be greater than that recommended by the manufacturer of the cable. 12. Care shall be taken so as not to damage cable during the installation process and that manufacturer’s

pull tension specification is not exceeded. 13. Provide a minimum 8’-0” and maximum 10’-0” of slack. Loop at the IC-rooms to be contained on

the horizontal cable tray or ladder rack. Additional slack of (4’-6’) of tight buffered fiber (900-micron) is required within the fiber enclosures.


27 13 13 - 8

14. Within TRs, cables shall be snugly wrapped using Velcro reusable cable ties, a minimum of every 3’-0” for cable organization. Velcro ties shall be tightened so as not to deform cable jackets and thus affect cable performance. Plastic cable tie wraps shall not be used.

15. Cable fill in riser conduits shall not exceed 40% cable fill. 16. New IC-rooms must be free from dust, dirt, and other foreign materials before the installation of any

termination hardware or the termination of fiber optic cables. The door to the telecommunication rooms must be installed and closed during termination.

17. Perform all backbone cable installation in conformance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines. 18. Ensure that maximum pulling tensions of specified cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain

the proper radius during placement. 19. Failure to follow appropriate guidelines for cable installation will require the Contractor to provide,

in a timely fashion, the additional material and labor necessary to rectify the situation. This shall apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables during installation.

20. Field verify all cable measurements and install all backbone cables in such a matter as to avoid any and all mid-span splices. No mid-span splices are allowed except as specified and shown on project drawings.

21. Pull new pull-rope through all conduit while pulling new backbone cable. 22. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to the cable during placement. 23. Do not roll or store cable reels without an appropriate underlay. 24. Clamp all new backbone cables at the entrance facilities for strain relief. 25. Backbone telecommunications cabling shall be placed in dedicated pathways separate from horizontal

and other cabling. 26. Backbone cables and splice cases installed in tunnels, crawl spaces and manholes shall be strapped to

the cable racks using stainless steel ties. 27. Terminate cables so as not to pull tight on terminating equipment. 28. Ensure that all splice closures are properly sealed for protection of the cable and splices. 29. Neatly and permanently label all backbone cables with the cable number at both ends and at all splice

locations. 30. Firestop all sleeves and conduit openings after the cable installation is complete. 31. Plug ends of conduit entering buildings with watertight conduit caulking compound after cable

installation is complete to ensure foreign matter does not enter the buildings. 32. Test, label, and document the final backbone cable installation, including cable footages, on the as-

built drawings. Standard UCB test sheets and labels can be picked up by contacting the UCB ITS Construction Supervisor at 303-492-8033.

33. Install copper UTP backbone cabling through conduit, tunnel, and crawl spaces, manholes and other pathways as shown on the drawings.

34. Terminate cable pairs on 66M1-50 connecting blocks in each ERs and TR as shown on the project drawings and following the industry standard color code sequence.

35. Terminate voice backbone (tie) cable pairs on 96-port panels in ERs and TRs as shown on the project drawings. Terminate one pair on each port. Each 25-pair binder group shall have the first 24 pairs terminated on 24 ports in the panel and the 25-pair in each binder group shall remain unterminated.

36. Terminate utility cable pairs on 48-port panels in ERs and TRs as shown on the project drawings. Terminate four pairs on each port. Each 25-pair binder group shall have the first 24 pairs terminated on 6 ports in the panel and the 25-pair in each binder group shall remain unterminated.

a. Labeling: i. The labeling scheme shall be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with

Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to finalizing and initiating any work. A sample scheme shall be submitted for approval.

ii. Each cable, wiring block, patch panel, and termination shall be identified at the main cross-connect (MC), at the intermediate cross-connect (IC), and at each station termination.

iii. All labels shall be consistent font type, size, and color throughout project. iv. All labels shall be white back with black text.


27 13 13 - 9

v. The label shall include: 1. Cable number at both ends. 2. MC block/panel and port number 3. IC number. 4. IC block/panel and port number. 5. Station ID.

b. Telecommunications Testing:

i. All communications copper backbone cabling and pairs shall be tested for electrical continuity and wire map.

ii. All cabling will be test/certified for conformance to the EIA/TIA 568 Category 3 and Category 5 specifications using TSB-67 Level 2 test equipment.

iii. Cable tests will be per industry standard and also include the following: 1. Cable Length 2. Attenuation 3. NEXT 4. Characteristic Impedance 5. Mutual Capacitance 6. Resistance 7. Noise 8. Wire Map

iv. (5) Printed test results shall be submitted on disc and printed copies by the Contractor for approval by Owner, Architect, and Engineer.

c. INSPECTION:

i. Examine areas and conditions under which backbone cable is to be installed. Provide notification, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.

ii. Verify field measurements and cable routing and termination conditions are as shown on drawings. Provide notification, in writing, of conditions deviating from drawings.

iii. Beginning of backbone cable installation indicates Contractor acceptance of existing conditions.

iv. Post and comply with: CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT – VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS attached to Section 270100.

3.3 SAFETY

A. The contractor must comply with UCB regulations for asbestos, lead, and confined spaces (contact EH&S 303-492-0215)

B. Guard manhole openings per NESC C-2-1997, 423.A:

1. When covers of manholes, handholes, or vaults are removed, the opening shall be promptly protected with a barrier, temporary cover, or other suitable guard.

C. Test for gas in manholes and unventilated vaults per NESC C2-1997, 423.B and C, including, but not

limited to: 1. The atmosphere shall be tested for combustible or flammable gas(es) before entry. 2. Where combustible or flammable gas(es) are detected, the work area shall be ventilated and made

safe before entry. 3. Unless forced continuous ventilation is provided, a test shall also be made for oxygen deficiency. 4. Provision shall be made for adequate continuous supply of air. Note: The term adequate includes

evaluation of both the quantity and quality of the air.


27 13 13 - 10

5. Employees shall not smoke in manholes. 6. Where open flames must be used in manholes or vaults, extra precautions shall be taken to ensure

adequate ventilation. 3.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Mark the project drawings with notations reflecting actual cable lengths and any variations from the base specifications and drawings including as-built cable routing.

B. Comply with Construction Drawings AS-BUILT Requirements attached to Section 270100.


27 13 13 - 11


Table 1- Cross Connect Hardware Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number

66-Style Termination Block, 100-pair Homaco H66M4-100 110-Style Termination Block (100-pair with legs) Homaco 110D-100PRBLK 4-pair 110C connecting blocks CommScope Systimax 110D-C4 5-pair 110C connecting blocks CommScope Systimax 110D-C5 Category 5E Modular Patch Panel 48-port Hubbell UDX48E

Category 5E Modular Patch Panel 48-port Hubbell P5E96UE

Table 2 - Copper Backbone Cable Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number

100-Pair, Category 3, Plenum Rated Cable (CMP) Mohawk M56128 200-Pair, Category 3, Plenum Rated Cable (CMP) Mohawk M56129

END OF SECTION

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING

27 13 23 - 1

SECTION 27 13 23 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING


A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1

Specification sections.



1.2 SCOPE OF WORK SUMMARY A. The term “provide” used throughout this specification and drawings shall mean “furnish, install,

test, and certify”.

B. Coordinate project schedule, installation schedule, phasing and any other requirements deemed necessary with Construction Manager and/or General Contractor and all necessary trades to ensure successful completion of work.

C. Phasing, temporary distribution/equipment, cut-over and implementation shall be coordinated

with Owner, Construction Manager and/or General Contractor, Architect, and Engineer.

D. Extent of communications infrastructure work is indicated by Division 27 specifications and Technology drawings and schedules and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, the provisions of: 1. Raceway systems including but not limited to conduits, cable trays, sleeves, surface

raceways, telecommunication services entrance, manholes, pull-boxes, junction boxes, back-boxes, etc. are required and specified in Division 27 sections and other Division 26 sections. The Construction Manager and/or General Contractor shall coordinate this with the Sub-Contractor performing work and determine how scope of work is assigned. The purpose of this specification is to establish design intent and general system scope.

2. All communications infrastructure shall be provided as part of the Base Building Project including but limited to raceway, cable, cable terminals, and comm room fit-out.






8. Power distribution within equipment racks and cabinets including power strips. 9. Grounding and bonding of all metallic hardware components to the nearest

telecommunications grounding bus (TGB) bar including but not limited to equipment racks,


27 13 23 - 2

cabinets, cable trays, ladder rack, metallic cable sheaths, wall mounted wiring terminals, conduits, sleeves, metallic ductwork, and frames.

10. All physical cable management hardware including, but not limited to: “J-hooks” in accessible ceiling areas, “D-rings” on backboards, vertical and horizontal managers on racks and cabinets, vertical and horizontal ladder-type or wire basket cable tray within all communication rooms, etc.

11. Fire stopping as required. 12. Seismic bracing of all equipment cabinets, equipment racks and ladder-type or wire basket

cable tray as required by code and by local governing jurisdiction. 13. Testing of all communications cable infrastructure and grounding systems as noted by

specification, drawings, and applicable industry standards. 14. Labeling of all communication infrastructure components, hardware, cable, and terminations

with mechanically printed labels. 15. Preparation and submission of product data, shop drawings, testing reports, as-built

drawings, and cabling documentation as required in this specification. 16. Construction and Installation warranties. 17. Manufacturer components, channel and solutions warranties. 18. Installation and testing of all system and components. 19. Onsite administrative and user training. 20. Manufacturer training of components.

1.3 SUBMITTALS










1.8 WARRANTY





27 13 23 - 3

PART 2 – SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2.1 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING SYSTEM

A. Topology:

1. The Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling will be an industry standard physical star topology with fiber optic cabling interconnecting each Intermediate Communications (IC) Room to the Main Communications or Main Cross-Connect (MC) Room.

2. There may be conditions required where backbone cable is provided to non-communication room locations. These locations shall follow the same requirements and originate from the MC unless noted otherwise.


B. General Requirements: 1. All cable and terminations shall meet the minimum Performance and Criteria listed in

specification below and on drawings. 2. Cable requirements including cable quantities and pair / strand counts are specified on the

drawings. 3. All cable splices shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer. This includes

those shown on drawings and/or proposed by Contractor. 4. Cable splices are only acceptable as noted on the drawings and must be approved by Owner,

Architect, and Engineer. 5. Cable splices are only intended where differing cable types are joined and/or multiple

smaller cables are joined to a larger backbone feeder cables. 6. Splices are not acceptable to extend cables of inadequate length. 7. Approved splices shall be low attenuation fusion type. 8. All cables shall have the appropriate fire spread rating per building codes, industry standard,

and Underwriters Laboratory (UL/cUL) including plenum (CMP/OFNP/OFCP), riser (CMR/OFNR/OFCR), etc. The contractor shall verify the appropriate cable is being used for application it is installed.

9. Any cable routed below grade shall utilize specific water block construction. Fiber optic cables can use dry water block tape or gel-filled compound to achieve this rating. The contractor is required to submit a solution wherever this condition exists regardless of whether noted on drawings.

10. Underground rated cable that doesn’t carry a suitable indoor building cable rating per building code and UL, shall not be routed more than 50-ft (15m) inside the building. Cable shall be spliced or terminated as appropriate and noted on drawings.

11. All armored and/or metallic cable sheaths shall be bonded to Telecommunications Ground Bus (TGB).

12. Fiber terminations shall swap transmit/receive polarity on far end of cable per industry standards for all mated or duplex connectors. This requirement shall be coordinated with Owner and Facility Operator.

13. Service loops shall be provided at each end of cable at the termination point. 14. Provide breakout or fan-out kits for all loose type fiber optic cables for transitioning to tight

buffered cable at termination points.

C. Performance and Criteria: 1. The following information listed below is considered the minimum performance and criteria

accepted. 2. 50.0 – Micron Multi-Mode 300 (OM3)

a. Cable Use and Construction Type: 1) Outside Plant Underground w/ Water Block


27 13 23 - 4

2) Riser Rated Building 3) Plenum Rated Building 4) Indoor/Outdoor Building 5) Interlocking Armored 6) Loose Tube

b. Physical Specification: 1) Strand Counts: 2, 4, 6, 18, 24, 26, 48, 96 and 144. 2) Core Diameter: 50.0-Micron 3) Cladding Diameter: 125-Micron

c. Transmission Performance:

3. 8.3 – Micron Single-Mode (OS1) a. Cable Use and Construction Type:

1) Outside Plant Underground w/ Water Block 2) Riser Rated Building 3) Plenum Rated Building 4) Indoor/Outdoor Building 5) Interlocking Armored 6) Loose Tube



4. 8.3 – Micron Single-Mode (OS2)

a. Cable Use and Construction Type: 1) Outside Plant Underground w/ Water Block 2) Loose Tube



50.0 - MICRON MULTI-MODE, 300 (OM3)

Maximum Bandwidth

Attenuation (MHz-km) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1 Gbps 10Gbps

850 nm 3.5 dB/km 2000 MHz-km 980-feet (300m) 980-feet (300m) 3280-feet (1000m) 980-feet (300m)

1300 nm 1.5 dB/km 500 MHz-km 6560-feet (2000m) 6560-feet (2000m) 1960-feet (600m) 980-feet (300m)

Supported Ethernet LengthWavelength

8.3 - MICRON SINGLE-MODE, (OS1)

Maximum Bandwidth


1310 nm 1.0 dB/km 100 TeraHz-km 9800-feet (3000m) 9800-feet (3000m) 9800-feet (3000m) 9800-feet (3000m)




27 13 23 - 5

2.2 CABLING

A. Standard Building Cables

1. Plenum Rated (CMP / OFNP)

a. General: 1) This cable shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and

Criteria Section. b. Application:

1) Building Cable is intended for interior building backbone and riser distribution installation within duct, conduits, and/or cable tray. Requires installation within inner-duct to protect cable.

c. Fiber Types: 1) 50.0-Micron Multi-Mode 300 (OM3) 2) 8.3-Micron Single-Mode (OS1)

d. Sizes: 1) 2, 4, 6, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 96, and 144 strands. 2) Refer to drawings for minimum requirements.

e. Construction: 1) Jacket: Flame Retardant, Plenum Rated, (CMP / OFNP) 2) Fiber Buffer: Tight Buffered, 900-micron. 3) Armor: None. 4) Strength Member: Aramid Strength Yarn. 5) Water Block/Filling Compound: None.

f. Temperature 1) Operating: -4 to +158 OF (-10 to +70 OC). 2) Storage: -4 to +158 OF (-10 to +70 OC).

g. Bend Radius (Minimum): 1) Installation: 20X Outside Cable Diameter. 2) Operating: 10X Outside Cable Diameter.

h. Compliances: 1) ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B 2) NEC/CEC Type CMP / OFNP.

i. Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer’s part numbers.

B. Interlocking Armored Building Cables

1. Plenum Rated (CMP / OFCP)

a. General: 1) This cable shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and

Criteria Section. b. Application:

8.3 - MICRON SINGLE-MODE, (OS2)

Maximum Bandwidth






27 13 23 - 6

1) Building Cable is intended for interior building backbone and riser distribution installation within duct, conduits, and/or cable tray.

c. Fiber Types: 1) 50.0-Micron Multi-Mode 300 (OM3) 2) 8.3-Micron Single-Mode (OS1)

d. Sizes: 1) 4, 6, 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, and 144 strands. 2) Refer to drawings for minimum requirements.

e. Construction: 1) Jacket: Flame Retardant, Plenum Rated, (CMP / OFNP) 2) Fiber Buffer: Tight Buffered, 900-micron. 3) Armor: Interlocking Aluminum. 4) Strength Member: Aramid Strength Yarn. 5) Water Block/Filling Compound: None.

f. Temperature 1) Operating: -4 to +158 OF (-10 to +70 OC). 2) Storage: -4 to +158 OF (-10 to +70 OC).

g. Bend Radius (Minimum): 1) Installation: 20X Outside Cable Diameter. 2) Operating: 10X Outside Cable Diameter.

h. Compliances: 1) ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B 2) NEC/CEC Type CMP / OFCP.

i. Products:See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer’s part numbers.

2.3 TERMINATION EQUIPMENT

A. Connectors 1. SC-Type

a. Fiber Type: 1) Laser Optimized Multimode SC Connector 0.9 mm: Systimax P6201A-Z-

125 for buffered fiber 2) Laser Optimized Multimode SC Connector 3.0 mm: Systimax P6200A-Z-125

b. Form Factor: Small Form Factor c. Adapter Type: Duplex d. Ferrule: Ceramic e. Fiber Buffer Size: 900-micron f. Optical Specification

1) Multi-Mode: 2) Single-Mode: 3) Insertion Loss (Typ. / Max.): <0.3dB / <0.75dB

g. Plug Requirements: 1) Retention Force:

a) Buffer: 2-lb (0.9kg) b) Cordage: 10-lb (4.5kg)

2) Insertion Life: 500 minimum. h. Temperature:

1) Operating: -40 to +167 OF (-40 to +75 OC). i. Products:

See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer’s part numbers.


27 13 23 - 7

B. Enclosures

1. 1U- Rack Mount Fiber Optic Housing a. Use: Enclosure or housing for consolidating connectors of optical fiber typically at

communication distribution and equipment rooms. b. Size: 1U c. Capacity:

1) LC-Connectors: 48-strands (max). 2) SC-Connectors: 48-strands (max) 3) ST-Connectors: 24-strands (max).

d. Mounting Configuration: 19-inch EIA Rack. Brackets to expand to 23-inch EIA or ETSI frame.

e. Access: 1) Hinged Front Doors.

f. Density: Double density and capable of supporting terminations and splice trays. g. Connector Panels: Snap in type to accommodate specified connector types as required. h. Cable Managers:

1) Internal strand managers for service loops and strand management in back side.

2) Internal patch cord trough at front side. 3) Cable access on both sides at front and back sides. Access points should

have integrated curved guards to support appropriate cable bends. i. Products:

See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer’s part numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION


3.2 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. This Section describes the installation locations for the products and materials, as well as methods associated with the Telecommunications Installation portions of the Project. These Specifications, along with the drawings shall be followed during the course of the installation.

2. All communications cables routed within communications rooms shall be bundled and combed to provide a neat and organized appearance. This includes horizontal and vertical cables routed on cable tray, d-rings, vertical cable managers, equipment rack cable managers, etc. Cables shall be bundled using only manufacturer and industry approved wire ties with tensions that do not deform and damage cable resulting in loss of transmission or performance. Any bundles and combing methods used shall not exceed manufacturer or industry standards recommendations for that cable type.




27 13 23 - 8







11. Cable bends shall not be greater than that recommended by the manufacturer of the cable. 12. Care shall be taken so as not to damage cable during the installation process and that

manufacturer’s pull tension specification is not exceeded. 13. Provide a minimum 8’-0” and maximum 10’-0” of slack. Loop at the IC-rooms to be

contained on the horizontal cable tray or ladder rack. Additional slack of (4’-6’) of tight buffered fiber (900-micron) is required within the fiber enclosures.

14. Within TRs, cables shall be snugly wrapped using Velcro reusable cable ties, a minimum of every 3’-0” for cable organization. Velcro ties shall be tightened so as not to deform cable jackets and thus affect cable performance. Plastic cable tie wraps shall not be used.

15. Cable fill in riser conduits shall not exceed 40% cable fill. 16. New IC-rooms must be free from dust, dirt, and other foreign materials before the

installation of any termination hardware or the termination of fiber optic cables. The door to the telecommunication rooms must be installed and closed during termination.

17. Install fiber optic backbone cable through conduit, tunnel, crawl spaces, manholes and other pathways as shown on the drawings.

18. Install service coils with length of 20 feet, and a diameter of 18 inches, at each end of all new backbone fiber optic cables to control excess cable lengths before terminating fiber strands. Do not leave cable slack on walls or ladder racks.

19. Bind fiber cable service coils in four places with separation of 90 degrees and anchor to wall with cable ties within four feet of cable entrance per the drawings. Do not install cable coils on cable or equipment racks.

20. Install fiber connectors in the ERs and TRs as shown on the project drawings. 21. Perform termination of multimode fiber strands on ST II and SC connectors with loss ≤ 0.5

dB at 850 nm. 22. Perform termination of singlemode fiber strands on ST II and SC connectors with loss ≤

0.2 dB at 1310 nm 23. Terminate fiber strands on connectors and in termination equipment (shelves and panels) as

specified in manufacturer’s color code sequence. 24. Do not terminate, splice or cut off “DEAD” cable strands. Neatly coil these unterminated

strands inside the shelves or panels with the proper bend radius to protect them for future termination or splicing.


27 13 23 - 9

25. Perform fusion splices for multimode and singlemode fiber strands at each splice location with strand numbering as indicated on the drawings.

26. Perform fusion splices for singlemode fiber strands with splice loss ≤ 0.2 dB at 1310 nm. 27. Perform fusion splices for multimode fiber strands with splice loss ≤ 0.3 dB at 850 nm. 28. Place “Caution Fiber” tags at all coils and every 50’ along the cable route.

B. Labeling: 1. The labeling scheme shall be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with Owner,

Architect, and Engineer prior to finalizing and initiating any work. A sample scheme shall be submitted for approval.

2. Each cable, wiring block, patch panel, and termination shall be identified at the main cross-connect (MC), at the intermediate cross-connect (IC), and at each station termination.

3. All labels shall be consistent font type, size, and color throughout project. 4. All labels shall be white back with black text. 5. The label shall include:

a. Cable number at both ends. b. MC block/panel and port number c. IC number. d. IC block/panel and port number. e. Station ID.

C. Fiber Optic Testing/Certification (Passive)-EIA/TIA-526-14

1. Multi-mode Fiber: a. All fiber optics will be tested for end-to-end attenuation at 850nm and 1300nm; using a

optical power source and a optical power meter. b. Tests will be performed after connectors have been installed, and will be from jumper

side of hub(s) bulkhead connector to the jumper side of the bulkhead connectors at the MC/IC fiber interconnect panel.

c. Maximum loss will not exceed manufacturers’ passive cable system attenuation; adjusted for cable length connector loss.

d. Maximum connector pair loss is .5dB. Splices are not acceptable in this system. e. Test results, including OTDR printouts, will be included in the final documentation

package. f. Contractor shall complete a fiber optic post installation report at the time of testing

containing meter readings at both 850 nm and 1300 nm from both directions on each fiber. Report shall include actual loss and other pertinent data regarding the cables tested, including model and serial number of test equipment, cable part number, installed fiber length, building span loss at 850 nm and 1300 nm and date tested.

g. Span loss calculations are required on the final test sheet for loss at 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode.

3.3 (D x L) + (C x # connectors) 1) D = Length; L = Loss; C = Connector loss (Max 0.75 dB)

2. 1 ft. = .0003048 km.

3. Single-mode Fiber: a. All fiber Optics will be tested for end-to-end attenuation at both 1310nm and 1550nm;

using a optical power source and a optical power meter. b. Tests will be performed after connectors have been installed, and will be from jumper

side of the hub(s) bulkhead connector to the jumper side of the bulkhead connectors at the MC/IC fiber interconnect panel.

c. Maximum loss will not exceed manufacturers passive cable system attenuation; adjusted for cable length and connector loss.


27 13 23 - 10

d. Maximum connector pair loss is .5 dB. Splices are not acceptable in this system. e. Test results including OTDR printouts will be included in the final documentation

package. f. Contractor shall complete a fiber optic post installation report at the time of testing

containing meter readings at both 1310nm and 1550nm from both directions on each fiber. Report shall include actual loss and other pertinent data regarding the cables tested, including model and serial number of test equipment, cable part number, installed fiber length, building span loss at 1310nm and 1550nm and date tested.

g. Span loss calculations are required on the final test sheet for loss at 1310nm and 1550nm for single-mode.

3.4 (D x L) + (C x # connectors) 1) D = Length; L = Loss; C = Connector loss (Max 0.75 dB)

2. 1 ft. = .0003048 km.

D. INSPECTION: 1. Examine areas and conditions under which backbone cable is to be installed. Provide

notification, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. 2. Verify field measurements and cable routing and termination conditions are

as shown on drawings. Provide notification, in writing, of conditions deviating from drawings.

3. Beginning of backbone cable installation indicates Contractor acceptance of existing conditions.

4. Post and comply with: CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT – VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS attached to Section 270100.

3.5 SAFETY

A. The contractor must comply with UCB regulations for asbestos, lead, and confined spaces (contact EH&S 303-492-0215)

B. Guard manhole openings per NESC C-2-1997, 423.A:

1. When covers of manholes, handholes, or vaults are removed, the opening shall be promptly protected with a barrier, temporary cover, or other suitable guard.

C. Test for gas in manholes and unventilated vaults per NESC C2-1997, 423.B and C, including,

but not limited to: 1. The atmosphere shall be tested for combustible or flammable gas(es) before entry. 2. Where combustible or flammable gas(es) are detected, the work area shall be ventilated and

made safe before entry. 3. Unless forced continuous ventilation is provided, a test shall also be made for oxygen

deficiency. 4. Provision shall be made for adequate continuous supply of air. Note: The term adequate

includes evaluation of both the quantity and quality of the air. 5. Employees shall not smoke in manholes. 6. Where open flames must be used in manholes or vaults, extra precautions shall be taken to

ensure adequate ventilation. 3.6 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Mark the project drawings with notations reflecting actual cable lengths and any variations from the base specifications and drawings including as-built cable routing.


27 13 23 - 11


END OF SECTION


27 13 23 - 12


Table 1 - 50 um Multimode Fiber Optic Backbone Cabling Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number

1 12-strand Multi-mode Fiber Optic Plenum (OFNP) Rated Primise Cable. (Armored)

CommScope Systimax

5201-012A-XPAQ-APAQ

Table 2 - Single Mode Fiber Optic Backbone Cabling Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number

2 12-strand Single-mode Fiber Optic Plenum (OFNP) Rated Primise Cable. (Armored)

CommScope Systimax

5201-012A-WPYL-APYL

Table 3 - Fiber Optic Termination Equipment

Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number 3 Fiber Optic Termination Shelf (4U) Avaya (Systimax) 1000G2-4U-MOD-SD

4 Fiber Optic Splice Kit / Splice Manager Avaya (Systimax) RS-4AF-16SF

5 Fiber Optic Termination Modules (Multi-mode) Avaya (Systimax) MODG2-12LC-LS-PT

6 Fiber Optic SC-type Connector (Multi-mode), Pre-radiused

Avaya (Systimax) P6201A-Z-125

7 Fiber Optic Termination Modules (Single-mode) Avaya (Systimax) MODG2-12LC-SM-PT

8 Fiber Optic SC-type Connector (Single-mode), Pre-radiused

Avaya (Systimax) P1101A-Z-125R

9 12A Grounding Clamp (for Armored Fiber) Avaya (Systimax) 12A1 (700025513)

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review HORIZONTAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS

27 15 00 - 1

SECTION 27 15 00 HORIZONTAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS





1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all services, labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete and proper installation and termination of new horizontal “station” cabling as called for in these specifications and related drawings.

B. The horizontal portion of the telecommunications cabling system extends from the work area

telecommunications outlet to the termination in the Telecommunications Room (TR) or Equipment Room (ER).

C. This section includes minimum requirements and installation methods for the following:

1. Copper Horizontal Cabling 2. Work Area Faceplates 3. Copper Modular Jacks

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. All horizontal “station” cable installation and termination shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated shall be subject to the control of UCB.

B. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment


C. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of:

1. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code including, but not limited to, the following articles: a. 300 – Wiring Methods b. 645 – Information Technology Equipment c. 725 – Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote Control, Signaling, and Power-Limited


27 15 00 - 2

Circuits d. 770 – Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways e. 800 – Communications Circuits

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard – Part 1: General Requirement, including applicable addendum

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard – Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components, including applicable addendum

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components, including applicable addendum

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B – Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-604 Series – Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 – Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of

Commercial Buildings 8. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596 – Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable 9. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

A. Topology

1. The Communications Horizontal Cabling will be an industry standard physical star topology with cabling routed to each communication device outlet location from the nearest Intermediate Communications (IC) Room.

2. Communications horizontal cabling shall terminate on the horizontal cross-connect locations at the IC-Room unless noted otherwise on drawings or within other specification sections.

3. Communications horizontal cabling shall not exceed a total cable length of 295-feet (90m) for the permanent basic link. The channel length shall not exceed 325-feet (100m) when patch cords are installed.

4. Contractor shall immediately notify Owner, Architect, and Engineer of any cable segment that exceeds the length limitation.


B. General Requirements 1. All cable and terminations shall meet the minimum Performance and Criteria listed in

specification below and on drawings. 2. Cable requirements including cable quantities are specified on the drawings. 3. Cable splices of any kind are not acceptable for communications horizontal cabling system. 4. All cables shall have the appropriate fire spread rating per building codes, industry standard,

and Underwriters Laboratory (UL/cUL) including plenum (CMP/OFNP/OFCP), riser (CMR/OFNR/OFCR), etc. The contractor shall verify the appropriate cable is being used for application it is installed.

5. Any cable routed outside and/or below grade shall utilize specific water block construction. Cables generally use gel-filled compound to achieve this rating for copper cable and dry water block paper for others. The contractor is required to submit a Outdoor Rated and/or Underground Rated solution wherever this condition exists regardless of whether noted on drawings.

6. Outdoor Rated and/or Underground Rated cable that doesn’t carry a suitable building cable rating per building code and UL, shall not be routed more than 50-ft (15m) inside the building. Cable shall be spliced or terminated as appropriate and noted on drawings.


27 15 00 - 3

7. Cabling system shall be procured from a single manufacturer that offers a complete end-to-end certified and warranted system for the TIA/EIA Category noted for each system.

C. Elevator Interface

1. Provide for Elevator Junction Box requirements, as follows: a. Low Voltage Cabling Contractor shall provide an elevator device junction box located

within or outside of the Elevator Machine Room, for interface of elevator devices (elevator phones, IP security cameras, etc.) to be located within the elevator cab(s). This requirement complies with ANSI A17.1 code which prevents work within the Elevator Machine Room, other than specific elevator work.

b. Elevator device J-box shall include a keyed lockable door. Additionally, J-box shall have proper terminal strips suitable for terminating all cables within the J-box.

c. Coordinate exact location of elevator device junction box with the Elevator Contractor, Architect, and Engineer, prior to installation.

d. Provide all cabling as required between the elevator device J-box and the IC-room for all elevator device interfaces.

e. Provide all required interface points for connecting to elevator relays and travel cables. f. The Elevator Contractor shall provide all cables in conduit from the elevator machine room

to the associated elevator device J-box. g. Cables entering the elevator device J-box shall be appropriately labeled by the Elevator

Contractor, so that the Low Voltage Cabling Contractor can connect to the appropriate wires. Wires should be individually labeled to separate them from other elevator functions and to assist the Low Voltage Cabling Contractor in making proper connection points.

D. Performance and Criteria

1. Category 5E a. Cable Use and Construction Type:

1) Riser Rated (CMR). 2) Plenum Rated (CMP). 3) Outdoor Rated (all outdoor or below grade applications).

b. Cable 1) Category 5E. 2) Construction: Unshielded Twisted Pair. 3) Medium: Solid Annealed Copper.

c. Length Limitations: 1) Data: 295-feet (90m) for data.

d. Physical Specification 1) Standard Cable Sizes: 4 and 25-pairs. 2) Conductor Size: 24 AWG.

e. Electrical Specification 1) Frequency: 1-100MHz. 2) Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms.


27 15 00 - 4

f. Transmission Performance (min.)

1) Permanent Link

2) Channel

Frequency Insertion NEXT PSNEXT ELFEXT PSELFEXT Return (MHz) Loss (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) Loss (dB)

1.0 2.1 >60.0 >57.0 58.6 55.6 19.04.0 3.9 54.8 51.8 46.6 43.6 19.08.0 5.5 50.0 47.0 40.6 37.5 19.0

10.0 6.2 48.5 45.5 38.6 35.6 19.016.0 7.9 45.2 42.2 34.5 31.5 19.020.0 8.9 43.7 40.7 32.6 29.6 19.025.0 10.0 42.1 39.1 30.7 27.7 18.0

31.25 11.2 40.5 37.5 28.7 25.7 17.162.5 16.2 35.7 32.7 22.7 19.7 14.1

100.0 21.0 32.3 29.3 18.6 15.6 12.0Minimum Link Propogation Delay: 518ns @10MHzMaximum Link Delay Skew: 45ns @100MHz

CATEGORY 5E - PERMANENT LINK

Frequency Insertion NEXT PSNEXT ELFEXT PSELFEXT Return (MHz) Loss (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) Loss (dB)

1.0 2.2 >60.0 >57.0 57.4 54.4 17.04.0 4.5 53.5 50.5 45.4 42.4 17.08.0 6.3 48.6 45.6 39.3 36.3 17.0

10.0 7.1 47.0 44.0 37.4 34.4 17.016.0 9.1 43.6 40.6 33.3 30.3 17.020.0 10.2 42.0 39.0 31.4 28.4 17.025.0 11.4 40.3 37.3 29.4 26.4 16.0

31.25 12.9 38.7 35.7 27.5 24.5 15.162.5 18.6 33.6 30.6 21.5 18.5 12.1

100.0 24.0 30.1 27.1 17.4 14.4 10.0Minimum Link Propogation Delay: 555ns @10MHzMaximum Link Delay Skew: 50ns @100MHz

CATEGORY 5E - CHANNEL LINK


27 15 00 - 5

3) Connecting Hardware

4) Assembled Patch Cord

E. General 1. The cables shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria Section

for Category 5E based on TIA/EIA equivalent cable rating. 2. Colors:

a. Cables shall be colored to differentiate applications types. b. Additional discussion will be required if multiple TIA/EIA cable categories exist. c. The following minimum colored code shall be used. Exact requirements shall be

coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating installation. 1) Telecom: Blue. 2) CU-JILA Data: Gray

F. Category 5E Plenum Rated – Horizontal Cable

1. General: a. This cable shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria

Section for Category 5E.

CATEGORY 5E - CONNECTING HARDWARE

Frequency Insertion NEXT FEXT Return(MHz) Loss (dB) (dB) (dB) Loss (dB)

1.0 0.1 65.0 65.0 30.04.0 0.1 65.0 63.1 30.08.0 0.1 64.9 57.0 30.0

10.0 0.1 63.0 55.1 30.020.0 0.2 57.0 49.1 30.025.0 0.2 55.0 47.1 30.031.3 0.2 53.1 45.2 30.062.5 0.3 47.1 39.2 24.1

100.0 0.4 43.0 35.1 20.0

Frequency 2 m Cord 5 m Cord 10 m Cord Return(MHz) NEXT (dB) NEXT (dB) NEXT (dB) Loss (dB)

1.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 19.84.0 62.3 61.5 60.4 21.68.0 56.4 55.6 54.7 22.5

10.0 54.5 53.7 52.8 22.816.0 50.4 49.8 48.9 23.420.0 48.6 47.9 47.1 23.725.0 46.7 46.0 45.3 24.031.3 44.8 44.2 43.6 23.062.5 39.0 38.5 38.1 20.0

100.0 35.1 34.8 34.6 18.0Attenuation: per 100 meters (328-feet) @20 C = HorizontalUTP Cable Attentuation + 20% (due to Stranded Conducts)

CATEGORY 5E - ASSEMBLED PATCH CORDS


27 15 00 - 6

2. Application: Primarily for communications horizontal cable installation within duct, conduits or cable trays. May also serve in the building backbone and riser applications.

3. Sizes: a. 4 and 25-pairs. b. Refer to drawings for minimum requirements.

4. Construction: a. Insulation: Flame retardant semi-rigid PVC. b. Shield/Sheath: None. c. Filling Compound: None. d. Jacket: Flame retardant PVC.

5. Temperature a. Operating: -4 to +140 OF (-10 to +60 OC). b. Storage: -4 to +140 OF (-10 to +60 OC).

6. Pulling Tensions (max): 25 lb (11 kg). Refer to MFR requirements. 7. Compliances: ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.2, NEC/CEC Type CMP. Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer’s part numbers.

2.2 TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General 1. All terminations shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria

Section for Category 5E based on TIA/EIA equivalent cable rating. 2. All terminations for copper cables located on the face of the building or at remote locations

outside of the building footprint (i.e. IP security cameras, WLAN data, etc.) shall have surge protectors at the termination point within the communications room. Contractor shall comply with manufacturer recommendations.

B. RJ45-Type Patch Panels

1. General: a. The patch panels shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and

Criteria Section for Category 5E based on TIA/EIA equivalent cable rating. b. Specific and dedicated patch panels shall be used when multiple TIA/EIA cable

categories are used on the same project. c. Provide all necessary wiring terminals and horizontal cable manager. d. Provide double-sided horizontal cable manager above and below each patch panels. e. Terminate 4-pairs per RJ45 jack per T568B standard termination. Exact requirements

shall be coordinated and approved with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating any work.

f. Specific communication device outlet types shall be grouped together on patch panels. Additionally, 20% spare jacks shall be added within each grouping.

2. Type: RJ45-Type. 3. Pin Configuration: T568B. 4. Mounting Configuration: 19-inch EIA Rack. 5. Size: 48-port (provide as required to terminate all cable). 6. Colors:

a. Jacks or labeling shall be colored to differentiate applications types. b. Additional discussion will be required if multiple TIA/EIA cable categories exist. c. The following minimum color code shall be used. Exact requirements shall be

coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating installation. 1) Telecom: Blue. 2) CU-JILA Data: Gray

7. Cable Interface:


27 15 00 - 7

a. Input: 110-Type (back). b. Output: RJ45-Type (front).

8. Electrical Specifications: a. TIA/EIA: Category 5E b. Insulation Resistance: 500 MegaOhms (minimum). c. Current Rating: 1.5A @68 OF (20 OC). d. Dielectric Withstand Voltage: 1000 VAC RMS, 60Hz (minimum), contact-to-contact

and 1,500 VAC RMS, 60Hz (minimum) to exposed conductive surface. e. UL and cUL Listed f. FCC Part 68.




C. RJ45-Type Device Outlet Jacks

1. General: a. The device outlet jacks shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and

Criteria Section for Category 5E based on TIA/EIA equivalent cable rating. b. Specific and dedicated jacks shall be provided for each cable. c. Splitting pairs on multiple jacks is not allowed unless noted otherwise. d. Provide faceplate or trim plate necessary to install all jacks. e. Terminate 4-pairs per RJ45 jack per T568B standard termination. Exact requirements

shall be coordinated and approved with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating any work.

2. Type: RJ45-Type 3. Pin Configuration: T568B. 4. Mounting Configuration: Faceplates, Trim Plates, and Modular Patch Panels. 5. Colors:

a. Jacks shall be colored to differentiate applications types. b. Additional discussion will be required if multiple TIA/EIA cable categories exist. c. The following minimum color code shall be used. Exact requirements shall be

coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating installation. 1) Telecom: Blue. 2) CU-JILA Data: Gray.

6. Cable Interface: a. Input: 110-Type (back). b. Output: RJ45-Type (front).

7. Electrical Specifications: a. TIA/EIA: Category 5E b. Insulation Resistance: 500 MegaOhms (minimum). c. Current Rating: 1.5A @68 OF (20 OC). d. Dielectric Withstand Voltage: 1000 VAC RMS, 60Hz (minimum), contact-to-contact

and 1,500 VAC RMS, 60Hz (minimum) to exposed conductive surface. e. UL and cUL Listed f. FCC Part 68.

8. Plug Requirements: a. Retention Force: 30-lb (133N).


27 15 00 - 8

b. Insertion Life: 750 minimum. c. Plug/Jack Contact Force: 0.22-lb (100g).



D. Faceplates:

1. General: a. Faceplates and/or trim plates shall be provided at each communication device location

as necessary to install jacks. b. No communication device cable and outlet jack shall be installed without a faceplate to

tightly secure assembly. c. Faceplates shall have multi-port configurations. Refer to drawings for additional

requirements. d. All unused ports shall have a blank dust cover installed. The color of each dust cover

shall match the faceplate color as closely as possible, unless otherwise indicated. e. Coordinate final selection of faceplate material with Owner, Architect, and Engineer

prior to purchasing components and initiating installation. f. Faceplate and/or surface box shall be provided at modular furniture locations.

Coordinate requirements with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to purchasing components and initiating installation.

g. Wall telephone locations shall use a modular faceplate with standard integrated mounting knobs for installing telephone handset to wall.

h. Coordinate faceplate requirements at specialty locations for floor boxes, surface raceway, surface mount boxes, and other locations accordingly.

2. Material: a. Wall Devices: Stainless Steel. b. Modular Furniture Devices: Plastic c. Surface Mounted Raceway Devices: Plastic

3. Type: RJ45 Standard Form Factor. 4. Ports: Available in 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 8-ports. (Refer to Technology Details for specific

project requirements.) 5. Size:

a. 1-Gang 1) Height: 4.5-inch (115mm) 2) Width: 2.75-inch (70mm) 3) Depth: 0.16-inch (4mm)

b. 2-Gang. 1) Height: 4.5-inch (115mm) 2) Width: 2.75-inch (70mm) 3) Depth: 0.16-inch (4mm)


E. Style-Line Modular Faceplate Mounting Frames

1. Modular faceplate mounting frames shall be provided as necessary to support RJ-45 outlet jacks within all Floor Boxes and Surface Raceway.

2. Coordinate final color selection of mounting frames with Owner, Architect, and/or Engineer prior to purchase to ensure color matches floor box or surface raceway material finish. As a minimum, the color black shall be submitted for approval.


27 15 00 - 9


F. Communication Device Outlets

1. Typical Wall Devices 2. Floor Devices 3. Surface Raceway Devices 4. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlets

2.3 PATCH CORD REQUIREMENTS

A. General: 1. The patch cords shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria

Section for Category 5E based on TIA/EIA equivalent cable rating. 2. Patch cords shall be provided as part of project at main cross-connects, intermediate cross-

connects, horizontal cross-connects, and communication device outlet locations. 3. Exact patch cords requirements including TIA/EIA category, quantity, and lengths shall be

coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer. 4. The sum of patch cord lengths when added the permanent basic link shall not exceed 325-

feet (100m). 5. Sizes:

a. 4-pairs. 6. Construction:

a. Conductors: Stranded 7. Colors:

a. Cables shall be colored to differentiate applications types. b. Additional discussion will be required if multiple TIA/EIA cable categories exist. c. The following minimum color code shall be used. Exact requirements shall be

coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating installation. 1) Colored Blue for Voice in TR and ER (NO BOOT): Hubbell PCX5EB03-

CU, PCX5EB04-CU, PCX5EB05-CU, PCX5EB06-CU, PCX5EB07-CU, PCX5EB08-CU, PCX5EB09-CU, PCX5EB10-CU, PCX5EB11-CU, PCX5EB12-CU, PCX5EB13-CU, PCX5EB14-CU, PCX5EB15-CU

2) Colored Black for Data in TR and ER (NO BOOT): Hubbell PCX5EBK03-CU, PCX5EBK04-CU, PCX5EBK05-CU, PCX5EBK06-CU, PCX5EBK07-CU, PCX5EBK08-CU, PCX5EBK09-CU, PCX5EBK10-CU, PCX5EBK11-CU, PCX5EBK12-CU, PCX5EBK13-CU, PCX5EBK14-CU, PCX5EBK15-CU

3) Desktop Mounting Cord Colored Black for Data at Outlet Location (NO BOOT): Hubbell PCX5EBK03-CU, PCX5EBK04-CU, PCX5EBK05-CU, PCX5EBK06-CU, PCX5EBK07-CU, PCX5EBK08-CU, PCX5EBK09-CU, PCX5EBK10-CU, PCX5EBK11-CU, PCX5EBK12-CU, PCX5EBK13-CU, PCX5EBK14-CU, PCX5EBK15-CU

4) Special Circuit Cord Colored Yellow for Circuits other than Voice or Data in TR and ER (NO BOOT): Hubbell PCX5EY03-CU, PCX5EY04-CU, PCX5EY05-CU, PCX5EY06-CU, PCX5EY07-CU, PCX5EY08-CU, PCX5EY09-CU, PCX5EY10-CU, PCX5EY11-CU, PCX5EY12-CU, PCX5EY13-CU, PCX5EY14-CU, PCX5EY15-CU

B. Category 5E Patch Cords

1. General: a. This cable shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria

Section for Category 5E.


27 15 00 - 10

2. Cable Interface: RJ45 / RJ45 3. Lengths: 2m, 5m and 10m. 4. Electrical Specifications:

a. TIA/EIA: Category 6A b. UL and cUL Listed CM Cordage c. FCC Part 68.


6. Temperature a. Operating: 14 to +140 OF (-10 to +60 OC). b. Storage: -4 to +140 OF (-20 to +60 OC).

7. Compliances: ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.2 Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer’s part numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 3.2 HORIZONTAL TELE / DATA CABLE INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. This Section describes the installation locations for the products and materials, as well as

methods associated with the Telecommunications Installation portions of the Project. These Specifications, along with the drawings shall be followed during the course of the installation.

2. All communications cables routed within communications rooms shall be bundled and combed to provide a neat and organized appearance. This includes horizontal and vertical cables routed on or within cable tray, d-rings, vertical cable managers, equipment rack cable managers, etc. Cables shall be bundled using only manufacturer and industry approved wire ties with tensions that do not deform and damage cable resulting in loss of transmission or performance. Any bundles and combing methods used shall not exceed manufacturer or industry standards recommendations for that cable type.







27 15 00 - 11




11. Cable bends shall not be greater than that recommended by the manufacturer of the cable. 12. Care shall be taken so as not to damage cable during the installation process and that

manufacturer’s pull tension specification is not exceeded. 13. Provide a minimum 8’-0” and maximum 10’-0” of slack. Loop at the IC-rooms to be

contained on the horizontal cable tray or ladder rack. 14. Within communications rooms, cables shall be snugly wrapped using Velcro reusable cable

ties, a minimum of every 3’-0” for cable organization. Velcro ties shall be tightened so as not to deform cable jackets and thus affect cable performance. Plastic cable tie wraps shall not be used.

15. Cable fill in riser conduits shall not exceed 40% cable fill. 16. New communications rooms must be free from dust, dirt, and other foreign materials before

the installation of any termination hardware or the termination of fiber optic cables. The door to the telecommunication rooms must be installed and closed during termination.

B. Labeling:

1. The labeling scheme shall be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to finalizing and initiating any work. A sample scheme shall be submitted for approval.

2. Each cable, wiring block, patch panel, and termination shall be identified at the main cross-connect (MC), at the intermediate cross-connect (IC), and at each station termination.

3. All labels shall be consistent font type, size, and color throughout project. 4. All labels shall be white back with black text. 5. The label shall include:

a. Cable number at both ends. b. MC block/panel and port number c. IC number. d. IC block/panel and port number. e. Station ID.

C. Horizontal Systems Cable Testing:

1. All communications copper horizontal cabling and pairs shall be tested for electrical continuity and wire map.

2. Cable testing shall confirm to the cables TIA/EIA rating. 3. All cabling will be test/certified for conformance to the EIA/TIA 568 Category Category

5E, Category 6, and Category 6A specifications using TSB-67 Level 4 time domain reflectometer (TDR) or approved equivalent test equipment.

4. Cable tests will be per industry standard and also include the following: a. Cable Length b. Attenuation c. NEXT d. Characteristic Impedance e. Mutual Capacitance


27 15 00 - 12

f. Resistance g. Noise h. Wire Map

5. (5) Printed test results shall be submitted on disc and printed copies by the Contractor for approval by Owner, Architect, and Engineer.

3.3 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which horizontal cable is to be installed. Provide notification, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.

B. Verify cable routing and termination conditions are as shown on drawings. Provide

notification, in writing, of conditions deviating from drawings.

C. Beginning of horizontal cable installation indicates Contractor acceptance of existing conditions.

D. Post and comply with: CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT – VOICE AND DATA

COMMUNICATIONS attached to Section 270100. 3.4 HORIZONTAL CABLING INSTALLATION

A. Install faceplates and copper and fiber jacks at each work area outlet location as indicated on the project drawings. Place the jacks in the faceplates beginning with position A and placing the copper jacks before the fiber adapter jacks. Place blank covers in the unused openings on each faceplate.

B. All faceplates shall have a minimum of two cables and jacks with the exception of wall plates

and wireless drops.

C. Faceplates shall be secured with mechanical fasteners. Adhesive fasteners shall not be allowed.

D. Install one surface housing and one Category 5e jack in each wireless access box.

E. Install copper and fiber optic horizontal cable from each work area outlet location indicated on the drawings to the nearest TR or ER as indicated on the project drawings.

F. Perform all horizontal cable installation in conformance with manufacturer’s installation

guidelines.

G. Ensure that maximum pulling tensions of specified cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during placement.

H. For outlet locations in walls, floor, and overhead, the horizontal cable distribution design uses

conduit or surface raceway to the outlet location with conduit, surface raceway, and/or cable tray in the ceiling space to the TR or ER. Coordinate as necessary with electrical contractor for placement of horizontal cable pathways and outlet boxes.

I. Horizontal telecommunications cabling shall be placed in dedicated pathways separate from

backbone and other cabling.

J. All horizontal cabling terminating within a single faceplate must be routed to and terminated in the same ER or TR.

K. Pull new pull-rope through all conduit while pulling new horizontal cable.


27 15 00 - 13

L. Ceiling tile shall be removed as necessary for the cable installation and put back in place

without damaging or dirtying any of the tiles or supporting framework. Ceiling tile shall be handled with clean hands so that no fingerprints or marks are left on the tiles. The contractor is responsible for the cost of repair or replacement of any damaged or dirtied tiles or ceiling hardware.

M. For cable penetration of ceiling tiles, the holes must be placed along the ceiling tile edge.

N. All cables in the ceiling space:

1. shall be supported in conduit or in the cable tray and shall not droop or hang outside of cable tray;

2. shall not be run “wild” (unsupported by conduit or cable tray) for distances greater than six inches;

3. shall not be attached to the suspended ceiling structure or laid directly on the ceiling grid as a means of support;

4. shall not be supported by or attached by any means to fire sprinkler heads or delivery systems, any environmental sensor, or the exterior of any conduit or raceway;

5. shall be routed at right angles to the electrical power circuits where the cable is not enclosed in conduit or in cable tray.

O. Where specifically allowed by UCB ITS, cable hangers shall be specifically designed and

installed for the purpose of supporting telecommunications cables. The hangers shall be: 1. attached to the building structure and framework at a maximum of five-foot intervals.

Existing bridle rings may be left in place to support existing cables that are not removed. Bridle rings shall not be used to support new cables

P. All cables in the ceiling space and cable tray shall be bundled with plenum rated cable ties

snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. Cable bundles shall have no more than 32 cables per bundle.

Q. The total length of any horizontal station cable from the jack location to the termination block

shall not exceed 90 meters.

R. Maintain the following clearances from EMI sources: 1. Unshielded power lines or equipment less than or equal to 5 kVA near cable in open or non-

metal pathway: 12” 2. Unshielded power lines or equipment greater than 5 kVA near cable in open or nonmetal

pathway: 24” 3. Unshielded power lines or equipment less than or equal to 5 kVA near cable in grounded

metal pathway: 6” 4. Unshielded power lines or equipment greater than 5 kVA near cable in grounded metal

pathway: 12” 5. Power lines enclosed in grounded metal conduit less than or equal to 5 kVA near cable in

grounded metal pathway: 3” 6. Power lines enclosed in grounded metal conduit greater than 5 kVA near cable in grounded

metal pathway: 6” 7. Fluorescent fixtures near cable in open or non-metal pathway: 12” 8. Fluorescent fixtures near cable in grounded metal conduit: 6” 9. Motors or transformers near cable in non-metal pathway: 48” 10. Motors or transformers near cable in grounded metal pathway: 36”

S. Manage slack to avoid excess cable or kinking.


27 15 00 - 14

T. Cable shall not be exposed along route.

U. Do not splice or bridge tap the cable.

V. All cables shall be tied and dressed neatly with a minimum bend radius of 10 times the cable diameter. Provide necessary hardware to maintain proper bend radius at corners.

W. All cables shall be firmly held in place. Fastenings and supports shall be adequate to support

loads with ample safety factors.

X. All ladders used for cable installation shall be padded on both ends and shall be carried by two people when moved within the building.

Y. Failure to follow appropriate guidelines for cable installation will require the Contractor to

provide, in a timely fashion, the additional material and labor necessary to rectify the situation. This shall apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables during installation.

Z. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to the cable during placement.

AA. Cables with jackets that are chaffed or burned exposing internal conductor insulation or have

any bare copper (shiners) shall be replaced.

BB. Do not roll or store cable reels without an appropriate underlay.

CC. Neatly and permanently label all horizontal cables with the cable number at both ends.

DD. Firestop all sleeves and conduit openings after the cable installation is complete.

EE. Test, label, and document final horizontal cable installation including outlet numbering on as-built drawings.

FF. Remove existing cable and terminations that will no longer be used as specified and shown on

project drawings. Coordinate as necessary with electrical contractor for removal of existing horizontal cable pathways and outlet boxes.

GG. All wireless box installations shall comply with the “Wireless Security Box Instructions”

attached to the end of Section 271800. 3.5 COPPER CABLE TERMINATION

A. At the work area outlet, terminate all pairs of the each copper horizontal cable on the jack with TIA/EIA T568B pin-pair assignments.

B. All cables shall be terminated so as not to pull tight on the terminating equipment.

C. Do not untwist cable pairs more than 0.5 inches when terminating. 3.6 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Mark the project drawings with notations reflecting actual cable outlet numbering and any variations from the base specifications and drawings.


27 15 00 - 15


END OF SECTION


27 15 00 - 16


Table 1 - Cat 5e Horizontal/Station Cable Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number

1 Category 5e Plenum Rated Cable (Gray) CommScope Systimax

2061-004FWH

2 Category 5e Plenum Rated Cable (Blue) CommScope Systimax

2061-004FBL

Table 2 - Cat 5e Outlets and Face Plates

Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number 3 Category 5e Information Outlet (Gray) CommScope

Systimax MPS100E-317

4 Category 5e Information Outlet (Blue) CommScope Systimax

MPS100E-318

5 Stainless Steel Faceplate for Wall Phone CommScope Systimax

M10LW

6 Stainless Steel Faceplate, 6-port (with label window)

CommScope Systimax

M16SP-L

7 Blank Outlet Dust Covers (Electric Gray) CommScope Systimax

M20AP-270

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION

27 17 00 - 1

SECTION 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION





1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all services, labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for complete and proper testing, certification, identification, and administration of the installed telecommunications cabling as called for in these specifications and related drawings.


1. Copper Cable Testing and Testers 2. Fiber Optic Cable Testing and Testers 3. Labels and Labeling 4. Documentation

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Test reports (including fiber pre-test sheets)

B. As-built drawings

C. The Contractor shall submit the proposed outlet numbers, using the T-5 template provided by ITS, for review and approval prior to construction.


A. All testing procedures and testers shall comply with applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard –

Part 1: General Requirements, including applicable addendum 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard –

Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components, including applicable addendum 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, including

applicable addendum 4. EIA/TIA-455 Series – Fiber Optic Test Procedures 5. TIA/EIA-526 Series – Optic Fiber Systems Test Procedures 6. TSB 140-04 – Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical

Fiber Cabling Systems

B. Identification and administration work shall comply with applicable requirements of:


27 17 00 - 2

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard – Part 1: General Requirements, including applicable addendum

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard – Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components, including applicable addendum

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, including applicable addendum

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A – Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-A – Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding 6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 – Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of

Commercial Buildings 7. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 8. UCB ITS Standards for Identification and Administration

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER CABLE TESTERS

A. Test equipment and field test instruments shall meet requirements for ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Annex B and Annex I.

B. Physical interface shall be modular RJ-45 connector and a serial port with DB-9 connector.

C. Store test results including date stamp of tests and UCB jack designator for each tested link.

D. Print test results in report form when connected to a PC.

E. Have auto-testing to determine if cable meets requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Annex B

and Annex I, 10Base-T, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, and ATM standards.

F. Measure NEXT for all pair combinations and Attenuation on all pairs from 1.0 to 350 MHz. 2.2 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE TESTERS

A. Field test instruments for multimode fiber cabling shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIAA-526-14-A.

B. Field test instruments for singlemode fiber cabling shall meet the requirements of

ANSI/TIA/EIAA-526-7.

C. Multimode Light Source 1. Meet the launch requirements of ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-50B achieved within the field test

equipment or by use of an external mandrel wrap (as described in clause 11 of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1) with a Category 1 light source.

2. Provide stabilized 850 nm and 1300 nm +/- 20 nm wavelength LED light source 3. Spectral width of sources shall be ≤ 50 nm of 850 nm wavelengths and ≤ 140 nm for 1300

nm wavelengths 4. Output of light source shall be 8 MW for 62.5 or 50 μm core optical fiber as appropriate 5. Output stability +/- 0.40 dB from 0 to 50 degrees C 6. Long term output stability +/- 0.10 dB at 25 degrees C 7. Connector types shall include: ST and SC

D. Singlemode Light Source


27 17 00 - 3

1. Provide stabilized 1310 nm and 1500 nm +/- 20 nm wavelength Laser light source 2. Output stability +/- 0.40 dB from 0 to 50 degrees C 3. Long term output stability +/- 0.10 dB at 25 degrees C 4. Connector types shall be ST

E. Optical Power Meter

1. Calibrated against National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standard. 2. Provide 850 nm, and 1300 nm +/- 20 nm selectable wavelength test capability 3. Measurement range from 10 to –60 dBm 4. Accuracy +/- 5% at 0 to 50 dBm 5. Accuracy +/-10% 10 to 0 dBm and –50 to –60 dBm 6. Resolution 0.01 dB 7. Connector types shall include: ST and SC

F. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)

1. Dual selectable wavelength: 850/1300 nm for multimode 2. Dual selectable wavelength: 1310/1550 nm for singlemode 3. Selectable Cable Index of Refraction 4. Visual fault locator for continuity checks and dead zone fault location 5. Front display and printer connection for hard-copy documentation 6. Equipped with launch jumper cable of sufficient length to offset entry “dead zone” 7. Connector types shall include: ST and SC

2.3 LABELS

A. Faceplate labels shall be printed and supplied by the Contractor with a Dymo Electronic Labelmaker 5000 or equivalent with prior approval from UCB ITS.

B. The one page Copper Termination sheet and Fiber Termination Labels will be provided by UCB

ITS and installed by the Contractor. All additional labels needed shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor. Replacement sheets and labels will be provided to the Contractor at an additional cost.

C. Labels for cable marking: vinyl substrate with a white printing area and a clear “tail” that self

laminates the printed area when wrapped around the cable. If cable jacket is white, provide cable label with printing area that is any other color than white, preferably orange or yellow - so that the labels are easily distinguishable.

D. Pre-printed labels shall meet legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL

969.

E. Hand written labels are not allowed.

F. Cable ID tags: Canoga Perkins P400W 2101801-W. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COPPER CABLE TESTING

A. Test 100% of installed backbone copper cabling for: 1. Wire Map 2. Length


27 17 00 - 4

B. Perform the following Permanent Link tests for 100% of installed copper horizontal cabling as described in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, Section 11.2 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Annex E:

1. Wire Map 2. Length 3. Insertion Loss 4. Pair-To-Pair NEXT Loss 5. Propagation Delay 6. Delay Skew

C. Perform the following Permanent Link tests for 100% of installed Category 5e and Category 6

horizontal copper cabling as described in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, Section 11.2 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Annex E: 1. PSNEXT Loss 2. Pair-To-Pair ELFEXT 3. PSELFEXT 4. Return Loss

D. Cross-connects from horizontal to backbone cabling will not be in place for these tests.

E. The wire map test shall verify pair to pin termination at each end and check for connectivity

errors. The wire map shall indicate the following for each of the eight conductors: 1. Continuity to the remote end 2. Shorts between any two or more conductors 3. Reversed pairs 4. Split pairs 5. Transposed pairs 6. Any other miswiring

F. The maximum length of the permanent link for horizontal cable shall be 90 meters. Shorten

any cable runs as required at no additional cost to UCB.

G. Replace and or repair cable and terminations as necessary to assure 100% passing performance specifications.

H. Final testing shall be scheduled and conducted in the presence of the UCB ITS representative as

specified in Section 270100, 1.7.

I. Submit electronic and printed test results reports for each copper cabling permanent link to UCB before project is closed.

3.2 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE TESTING

A. Test all fiber optic cable strands for continuity and performance before and after the cables are pulled and terminated.

B. Test link attenuation of all installed multimode fiber optic strands after splicing and termination

in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, Section 11.3 and TSB-140. 1. One direction with an optical light source and an optical power meter. 2. Test at two wavelengths to account for attenuation differences due to wavelength: a) 850 nm

and 1300 nm for multimode strands b) 1310 nm and 1550 nm for singlemode strands 3. Test multimode strands in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A, Method B, One

Reference Jumper. 4. For multimode strands, wrap reference jumper around mandrel to remove high-order mode


27 17 00 - 5

transient losses as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, Section 11.3.3, Table 1115. 5. Test Singlemode strands in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-7, Method A.1, One

Reference Jumper. 6. The total attenuation budget for each fiber cable length (end-to-end) shall equal the allowed

attenuation for the fiber (0.2 dB per km times the length in km) plus the attenuation for each splice and connector. For example, a cable length of 3 km with 1 splice and 2 connectors would have an attenuation budget of (3 km x 0.2 dB/km) + (2 x 0.2 dB) = 1.2 dB.

C. Test all installed fiber optic strands after splicing and termination with an OTDR (Optical

Time-Domain Reflectometer) per TIA/EIA-455-61 and TSB-140: 1. End-to-end bi-directional signature trace with fault finding, connection point reflections,

fiber bend, pressure point locations, etc. 2. One wavelength, 1300 nm for multimode strands. 3. One wavelength, 1550 nm for singlemode strands. 4. Multimode fiber connector losses ≤ 0.5 dB at 850 nm 5. Singlemode fiber connector losses ≤ 0.2 dB at 1310 nm 6. Multimode fiber splice losses ≤ 0.3 dB at 850 nm 7. Singlemode fiber splice losses ≤ 0.2 dB at 1310 nm 8. Localized attenuation shall not exceed 0.5 dB at any point

D. Fibers that are broken or damaged shall be replaced at no cost to UCB and replaced fiber optic

cables shall be re-tested.

E. Final testing shall be scheduled and conducted in the presence of the UCB ITS representative as specified in Section 270100, 1.7. Complete and submit the fiber pre-test sheet prior to scheduling the final testing. The fiber pre-test sheet is attached to the end of this Section.

F. Submit electronic and printed OTDR test results reports for each fiber optic cable strand to

UCB before project is closed. 3.3 HORIZONTAL CABLE IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING:

A. Neatly and permanently label all copper and fiber optic cables with the cable number at both ends.

B. The UCB standard outlet numbering plan to be used for labeling faceplates, 66-blocks, patch

panels, and fiber terminations is described in the attached document Labeling and Testing.

C. The identification and labeling for all copper and fiber optic cables and TR/ER terminations shall be clearly labeled and approved by UCB ITS 3 weeks prior to customer move occupancy.

3.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Mark the project drawings with notations reflecting any variations from the base specifications and drawings including as-built numbering for the outlets on the floorplans.

B. Comply with Construction Drawings AS-BUILT Requirements attached to Section 27 01

00.

END OF SECTION

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review INTERIOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS

27 18 00 - 1

SECTION 27 18 00 INTERIOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS






A. Provide all services labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete and proper installation of interior telecommunications pathways as called for in these specifications and related drawings.


1. EMT Conduit and Cable Tray Systems

C. Wireless Access Boxes

D. Drawings are diagrammatic. All bends, boxes, fittings, couplings are not necessarily shown. Supply as necessary to comply with the National Electric Code.

E. This Section includes raceways for communications cabling. Types of raceways, boxes and fittings in this section include the following: 1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 2. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 3. Liquid-tight flexible conduit. 4. Rigid metallic conduit (RMC). 5. Surface raceways. 6. Rigid non-metallic conduit. 7. Electrical non-metallic tubing (ENT) 8. Wireway. 9. Outlet boxes. 10. Junction boxes. 11. Pull boxes. 12. Bushings. 13. Locknuts. 14. Knockout closures.

F. Related Sections: The following section contains requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 26 Section “Raceway and Boxes” for conduit connectors, fittings, and couplings. 2. Division 7 Section “Firestopping” for conduit penetrations through rated walls and slabs.


27 18 00 - 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of contract and Division 1

Specification Section. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for additional requirements.

B. Product Data for the following products: 1. Raceways and fittings. 2. Wireways and fittings. 3. Boxes and fittings.

C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer’s written installation instructions for wireway, surface raceway, and nonmetallic raceway products.


A. All installation work for the new interior telecommunications pathways shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated shall be subject to the control of UCB.

B. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment


C. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of:

1. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code including, but not limited to, the following articles: a) 250 – Grounding b) 300 – Wiring Methods c) 314 – Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes; Conduit Bodies; Fittings; and Manholes d) 358 – Electrical Metallic Tubing: Type EMT e) 386 – Surface Metal Raceways f) 392 – Cable Trays g) 770 – Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard – Part 1: General Requirements, including applicable addendum

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B – Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, including applicable addendum

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 – Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 – Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

6. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

D. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.”

E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways.

F. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components listed and labeled by UL.

G. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and fittings, of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.


27 18 00 - 3

H. Installer’s Qualifications: Firms with at least five years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing electrical boxes and fittings similar to those required for this project.

I. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings.

J. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514-Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL-listed and labeled.

K. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds/Pub No.’s OS1, OS2 and PUB 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers and box supports.

L. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of FS W-C 586, “Electrical Cast Metal Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies, and Entrance Caps.”

M. ANSI/EIA/TIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended

installation practices of ANSI/EIA/TIA Standards 568 and 569.

N. BICSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of BICSI Standards TDMM, CO-OSP, Data Network Design Reference Manual, and Wireless.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 EMT CONDUIT

A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Electro-galvanized steel tubing 3/4” and larger diameter per project requirements: 1. Conduit joint couplings and connectors: steel double set screw indenter fittings 2. Metal bushings for 3/4” and 1” conduit 3. Insulated metallic bushings for 1-1/4” and larger conduit 4. Insulated metallic bushings with grounding lugs as required 5. Conduit sweeps: minimum 10 times the conduit inside diameter 6. Include required conduit straps, and hangers, heavy-duty malleable iron or steel. Perforated

pipe strap, j-hooks, bridle rings, or wire hangers are not permitted 7. LB fittings and plastic fittings are not permitted 8. Nipple runs from one outlet box to another outlet box are not permitted

B. Outlet boxes: Galvanized steel sheet metal 4” x 4” x 2-1/8” deep minimum with single gang mud

ring

C. Pull-boxes: Minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel with screw fastened cover and trim for flush or surface mounting as required for project. Dimensions as required for project. 1. Box extensions are prohibited for new construction however they are permitted on remodel

work to extend existing installations.

D. Metal Flex Conduit (3/4”) and deep Cut-In Boxes for outlets in existing walls for remodel projects only.

E. Pull-rope: polypropylene monofilament line with a minimum pull tensile strength of 200 pounds.

2.2 CONDUIT BODIES AND FITTINGS


27 18 00 - 4

A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching covers with gaskets secured with corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for threaded raceways.

C. EMT Conduit Bodies 1-Inch (25mm) and Smaller: Use bodies with steel set screw connectors and couplings for interior applications and steel compression gland connectors and couplings for exterior applications.

D. EMT Conduit Bodies 1-Inch (25mm) and Larger: Use bodies with steel set screw connectors and couplings for interior applications and steel compression gland connectors and couplings for exterior applications.

E. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing: Use nonmetallic conduit bodies conforming to UL514B.

F. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Either steel or malleable iron only with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without O-ring seal. Each connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected.

G. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC and EMT, larger than ¾-inch size.

H. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or secured to the buildings construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings for rigid steel conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring. Expansion fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be of the short type in runs 25-feet (7.6m) or less , and the long type in runs 26 to 80-feet (7.9 to 24.3m). The long type shall be a two piece barrel and piston joint, providing 6-inch (150mm) of the total movement range in ¾-inch (19-mm)through 6-inch (150mm)” conduit sizes. The short type shall be a one piece, coupling with O-ring, providing 2-inch (50mm) of total movement range in ¾ to 2-inch (19 to 50mm) conduit sizes.

I. Seal Off Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type.

2.3 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS

A. Surface Metal Raceway Systems: Refer to Division 26 Specifications for requirements. 2.4 WIRELESS ACCESS BOXES

A. Wall-Mount Enclosure for Wireless Access Equipment 1. Vented steel closure 11” x 8” x 3” 2. White, beige, or black finish to match wall color 3. Continuous hinge swing down door with keyed lock 4. Knockouts for cable entry/exit 5. Two 1” antenna openings 5” apart on top of enclosure 6. CPI: WA064WAP-R114 (see the attached “Wireless Security Box Instructions” for this

execution) 7. Include components and compatible fittings from the manufacturer as required for a

complete installation


27 18 00 - 5

B. Ceiling Enclosure for Wireless Access Equipment 1. Plenum-rated enclosure 2. Mounts in standard 2’ x 2’ or 2’ x 4’ ceiling tile 3. Continuous hinge swing down door with keyed lock 4. Cable entry/exit opening with approved fire-rated foam kits 5. CPI: WA064-CAP-R113 (see the attached “Wireless Security Box Instructions” for this

execution) 6. Include equipment mounting plate and other components and compatible fittings from the

manufacturer as required for a complete installation 2.5 FABRICATED MATERIALS - BOXES

A. Device Outlet Back-Boxes: Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet-steel outlet wiring boxes, of

shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes (two-gang, 4 11/16-inch x 4 11/16-inch 2 1/8-inch deep (120mm x 120mm x 54mm)), including box depths as required, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes, and with cable and conduit-size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding. 1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation,

including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer’s code-compliance option.

B. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, and washers. Minimum box dimensions shall be 30-inch W x 60-inchL x-24-inchD (750mm x 1500mm x 600mm). Exact size shall be provided to meet industry standards based on conduit quantities and stacking arrangement. Pull boxes installed in finished spaces must be flush mounted cabinets provided with trim, hinged door and flush latch and lock to match flush mounted panel board trim.

C. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which the new interior telecommunications pathways are to be installed. Provide notification, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.

B. Verify field measurements and pathway routing conditions are as shown on project drawings.

Provide notification, in writing, of conditions deviating from drawings.

C. Beginning of telecommunications pathway installation indicates Contractor acceptance of existing conditions.

D. Post and comply with: CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT – VOICE AND DATA

COMMUNICATIONS attached to Section 270100.


27 18 00 - 6

3.2 INSIDE CONDUIT AND CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Place new inside EMT conduit and cable tray systems as shown on the project drawings.

B. Perform installation of pathways as specified in Section 270500 including anchoring and supports, grounding and bonding, firestop, etc.

C. No section of conduit shall be longer than 30 m (100 ft) between pull points (e.g., outlet boxes,

telecommunications closets, or pull-boxes).

D. The inside radius of a bend in conduit shall be at least 10 times the conduit internal diameter. Bends in the conduit shall not contain any kinks or other discontinuities that may have a detrimental effect on the cable sheath during cable pulling operations.

E. No section of conduit shall contain more than two 90

o bends, or equivalent bends exceeding

180o total, between pull points. If there is a reverse (u-shaped) bend in the section, a pull-box

shall be installed. Of the 180o offsets, saddles and kicks shall not exceed 30 degrees.

F. Provide pull-boxes as required to accommodate wire pulling, splices, taps, equipment

connections, and code compliance as required due to field conditions for each project.

G. Install pull-boxes in readily accessible locations. Equipment, piping, ducts, and the like shall not block access to the boxes. Coordinate access doors as required to provide access to pull-boxes in hard ceilings and similar inaccessible areas.

H. Collector/distribution conduit shall be 25’ ± 5 between pull-boxes. Conduits and boxes shall be

upsized per fill in area. Install the conduit collector/distribution system so that the electrical continuity of the system for the main feed is maintained.

I. Conduit, cable tray, and surface raceway shall be so installed, that no cable run shall exceed

290’ in length from the Telecommunications Room (TR) or Equipment Room (ER) to the farthest outlet. Where building conditions prohibit meeting this requirement, additional TRs or ERs may need to be provided.

J. Conduits terminating into cable trays shall be no more than 6” away from the cable tray.

K. Provide dedicated 3/4” for each telecommunications outlet to the nearest pull-box or cable tray.

Where multiple outlets serve an area, a conduit feeder system shall be used based on the attached drawing: TYPICAL TELECOMMUNICATION CONDUIT LAYOUTS. The conduit feeder system design shall be documented in drawing form and shall be approved in writing by the UCB ITS department prior to installation.

L. Conduit for fire alarm cable shall be separate, dedicated 3/4” conduit for the entire distance

from the outlet to the TR or ER.

M. Minimum conduit size for telecommunications shall be 3/4”

N. Stub out conduits into the TRs and ERs only enough to attach connector and bushings with grounding lugs except conduits shall extend a minimum of 6 inches above the finished floor.

O. The ends of the metallic conduit shall be reamed and bushed using:

1. Metal bushings for 3/4” and 1” conduit stubs to cable trays 2. Insulated metallic bushings for 1-1/4” conduit and larger 3. Insulated metallic bushings with grounding lugs for conduit entering TRs and ERs


27 18 00 - 7

P. Cut ends of metallic conduit shall be filed to remove burs.

Q. Bond all metallic raceways (conduit, cable tray, etc.) entering the TRs and ERs to the TGB or

TMGB in the same room with #6 AWG grounding wire as straight as possible.

R. Ceiling tile shall be removed as necessary for the conduit and cable tray installation and put back in place without damaging or dirtying any of the tiles or supporting framework. Ceiling tile shall be handled with clean hands so that no fingerprints or marks are left on the tiles. The contractor is responsible for the cost of repair or replacement of any damaged or dirtied tiles or ceiling hardware.

S. Support conduits above suspended ceilings from building structure by suitable straps, racks, or

hangers. Supporting conduits from ceiling suspension wires is not permitted.

T. Provide conduit support within 18” of each termination, and a maximum of 7’ between supports along conduit.

U. Support pull-boxes independently from building construction. Do not support from conduit.

V. Provide conduit expansion fittings with external grounding straps at building expansion joints.

W. Install new pull rope in all new conduits prior to pulling cable. The pull rope shall extend three

feet from each end of the conduit and shall be knotted and secured to remain in place.

X. Do not install conduit or cable tray adjacent to hot surfaces or in wet areas.

Y. Install metal flex conduit and deep cut-in boxes for outlets in existing walls for remodel projects only. Connect flex conduit to pull-box within 4’ of entering ceiling space from wall space. Flex conduit and deep cut-in boxes are not allowed in new construction.

Z. Conduit and cable tray sizes and routes and pull-box sizes and locations shall be coordinated

with UCB ITS for each project.

AA. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, receive written approval from UCB as to the location and size of the hole before proceeding with work and abide with UCB standards for this work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary.

BB. Support cable tray with manufacturers supports and/or using threaded, galvanized rod hangers

with rods extended through support steel and double-nutted. Size support members within load rating of member section and without visible deflection. Cut off excess threaded rod ends flush with the bottom of the double nut.

CC. Install cable tray level and straight to the extent possible.

DD. Where cable trays abut walls, supports shall be provided to walls.

EE. Provide cable tray supports at a minimum of 8’ on center and at all intersections and angles.

FF. A minimum 12” headroom shall be provided above all cable trays.

GG. A minimum 8” horizontal clearance shall be provided on at least one side of all cable trays.

HH. All cable tray shall be installed in compliance with clearances specified in Section 271500.

II. Install the cable tray system so that the electrical continuity of the system is maintained.


27 18 00 - 8

JJ. Provide body expansion connectors for cable trays at building expansion joints.

KK. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, sleeves, crossovers and other locations

where cable tray continuity is interrupted.

LL. Support racks for telecommunications conduit and or cable tray must be dedicated for telecommunications pathways only. Multi-use suspension systems for plumbing and other piping along with electrical and telecommunications pathways are not permitted.

MM. Coordinate conduit and cable tray runs with other trades.

NN. Label all conduit and cable tray at both ends indicating TR, ER, outlet, or other location where

conduit terminates and the length of the conduit. Label pull-boxes indicating destination of conduits entering and exiting.

OO. Label all conduit, pull-boxes, and cable tray with “Telecom” stickers at each end and every 75

feet.

PP. Label conduits entering TRs and ERs in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 – Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

QQ. Separate dedicated pathways (conduit, cable tray, etc.) shall be provided for backbone and

horizontal telecommunications cabling. Cable trays shall be clearly divided between backbone and horizontal cabling.

RR. Cable trays shall not pass through any firewall or fire-rated walls or surfaces. Cable tray shall

end before the firewall and transition to the EZ Path within six (6) inches of the firewall. The cable through the EZ Path shall not exceed 60% fill, so that and 40% future fill shall remain.

SS. Firestop all pathways and core drills through walls and floors as specified in Section 270500.

3.3 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY INSTALLATION

A. Place new surface metal raceway systems as shown on the project drawings.

B. For outlets in Hubbell 3000 and 4750 surface raceway, use single-gang flush-type extension adapter 5760 with shallow box 5748IV on the front of the raceway so jacks do not protrude into pathway as shown in the drawing attached at the end of this Section.

C. Perform installation of routing hardware as specified in Section 270500 including anchoring

and supports, grounding and bonding, firestop, etc. Use anchors for attachment to surface. Use of adhesives is prohibited.

D. Collector/distribution surface raceway shall be 25’ ± 5 between pull-boxes. Surface raceway

and boxes shall be upsized per fill in area.

E. Cut raceways square and ream ends to remove burs at raceway connections to outlets.

F. Install raceways parallel or perpendicular to building walls, floors and ceilings.

G. When installing through false ceiling, extend raceway 1” above top of ceiling grid. Notch ceiling panel to size of raceway.

H. Coordinate raceway runs with other trades.


27 18 00 - 9

I. Ceiling tile shall be removed as necessary for the raceway installation and put back in place

without damaging or dirtying any of the tiles or supporting framework. Ceiling tile shall be handled with clean hands so that no fingerprints or marks are left on the tiles. The contractor is responsible for the cost of repair or replacement of any damaged or dirtied tiles or ceiling hardware.

J. Upon request per project and daily installs, the contractor shall coordinate finish selection with

the Department of Facilities Management prior to final design and all surface raceways shall be painted to match the wall as directed by Facilities Management. All coordination and disposal cost shall be included in fixed-pricing or project bid.

K. Identify all raceway with Telecommunications labeling as directed by UCB ITS.

3.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS AND WIRELESS ACCESS ENCLOSURES

A. The locations of outlet boxes and wireless access enclosures shown on project drawings are approximate. The exact location of outlet boxes and enclosures shall be governed by structural conditions, obstructions, or other equipment. 1. Unless otherwise noted, outlet boxes shall be located as follows (dimensions are above

finished floor to center line of boxes): a) Standard telecommunications outlets: 1’6” b) Wall-mount telephone outlets: 4’6” c) ADA Wall mount telephone outlets: 4’0”

2. All ADA standards shall be met when applicable. 3. Adjust outlet box locations so that they will be symmetrically located and not interfere with

other equipment. 4. Where outlets of other types are adjacent, coordinate heights to be similar where possible 5. Where outlets are located on masonry walls, adjust box location to set in corner of block or

brick. 6. Back to back outlet boxes are not permitted. Separate boxes a minimum of 6” in standard

walls and a minimum of 2’ in acoustical walls. 7. Where conflicts are noted for outlet box locations, coordinate with UCB ITS and Facilities

Management. 8. Outlet box locations may be adjusted by UCB up to six (6) feet from the location shown on

drawing with no additional cost to UCB.

B. Support outlet boxes independently from building construction. Do not support from conduit or raceways.

C. Install wall-mount and ceiling enclosures for wireless access equipment, including all

accessories and firestop materials, in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. When wireless wall boxes are installed on gypsum board (sheet rock) secure with toggle bolts. After ceiling boxes are installed per manufacturer’s specifications, place on self tapping screw to ceiling grid through each of the support arms.

D. Provide EMT conduit to within 6” of ceiling enclosures for wireless access equipment.

E. Provide EMT conduit connecting to wall-mount enclosures for wireless access equipment.

F. All wireless box installations shall comply with the “Wireless Security Box Instructions”

attached to the end of this section 3.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Mark the project drawings with notations reflecting any variations from the base specifications and drawings including as-built conduit routing.


27 18 00 - 10


END OF SECTION

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review SECURITY SYSTEMS – GENERAL

28 00 00 - 1

SECTION 28 00 00 SECURITY SYSTEMS - GENERAL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of the Contract, including but not limited to, Drawings, Contract Forms,

General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Construction Manager/General Contractor (CM/GC) Agreement, Exhibits and other Division-1 Specification sections apply.

B. Drawings (Architectural, Electrical, and Technology/Security)


1.2 SUMMARY

A. The Security System shall consist of the following integrated subsystems as specified herein and within other related specification sections: 1. Access Control and Intrusion Detection Systems 2. Security Management System (SMS) 3. Security Software, Computer Workstations and Video Displays 4. Wire and Cable

B. The Security System shall be monitored and controlled from networked computer workstations

located throughout the facility, as indicated on the drawings.

C. All components shall be suitable for installation in facilities which may be subject to vandalism and other abuses.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing complete, fully operational, and functionally

integrated Security System to the Owner. This shall include, but not be limited to, all raceway, cabling, electronic components, power supplies, UPS units, hardware and software required to create such system. Any scope of work separation (i.e. raceway, data cabling, etc.) shall be determined by the General Contractor, unless noted otherwise.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete turnkey installation with the exception

of those items noted as being provided by others, including but not limited to, all material, labor, warranties, freight and permits.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all labor and materials sub-contracted by the

Contractor for completion of the project, whether or not that labor and materials is claimed by related trades or included as part of the project as described in this Specification.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all power supplies (including conduit, backboxes,

wire and cable, fire alarm system interconnects, etc.) with the exception of those items noted as being provided by others, as described herein and as required by the various manufacturers.

H. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the Security System with the following related

work of other sections: 1. Division 08 - Door Hardware 2. Division 14 - General Elevator Requirements


28 00 00 - 2

3. Division 26 - General Electrical Requirements

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General Description and Requirements 1. Within 45 days after award of contract or as dictated by the construction schedule (whichever

period of time is shorter), the Contractor shall submit prefabrication submittals consisting of product data and shop drawings for approval. Partial submittals will not be accepted without prior written approval from the Architect.

2. Review of the Prefabrication Submittals by the Architect is for purposes of tracking the work and contract administration and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the Contract Documents, or from providing equipment and/or services required by the Contract Documents which were omitted from the prefabrication submittals.

3. No portion of the project shall commence nor shall any equipment be procured until the prefabrication submittals have been approved in writing by the Architect. All installations shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents.

4. A detailed completion schedule shall be submitted with the prefabrication submittals. 5. Prefabrication submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal identifying the name of

the project, Contractor's name, date submitted for review, and a list of items transmitted.

B. Compliance Matrix: 1. Provide a specification compliance matrix indicating compliance or deviation for each

item in the specification. Refer to the SPECIFICATION RESPONSE section within this specification for additional requirements.

C. Product Data: 1. Warranty Information

2.

: Provide all warranty information as described in this specification section for review and approval. Component List: Provide complete submittal component list at the beginning of the submittal package. Component list shall identify each component name, manufacturer, and specific product/part number. All part numbers shall clearly indicate special options, color, accessories, etc. Component list and manufacturer cut-sheets shall be compiled to match the order of Appendix 1

3. .

Cutsheets:

4.


This specification is intended to be performance based, thus all products listed in Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule are benchmark products. The Contractor may substitute manufacturers and models that may be more cost effective or readily available. All substitutions shall meet or exceed the minimum functional and technical specifications. Acceptance of such substitutions is at the discretion of the Owner, Architect, and Engineer.

D. Shop Drawings and As-Built Drawings: Submit drawings of on proposed layout(s) of security systems components. The following drawings shall be submitted for review by Architect, Engineer, and Owner; prior to commencing installation of any security systems components1. Legend: Provide drawings including descriptions of all abbreviations and symbols.

:

2. One-Line Diagrams: Provide drawings that indicate all equipment components, locations, integration, etc. as required to complete a fully functioning security system as described throughout the security specifications and drawings.

3. Plans: Provide scaled site and building plan drawings based on architectural background indicating device and equipment locations including, but not limited to; raceways (including pull-boxes), security control panels, access control and intrusion detection edge devices, computer workstations, power supplies, UPS systems and any other components as required to


28 00 00 - 3

complete the security system. Additionally, provide wiring diagrams for indicating cable origination and routing.

4. Enlarged Plans and Elevations: Provide enlarged scaled plan drawings and elevations for equipment layouts in all security monitoring locations and each Communications Room (and/or other applicable rooms with security components). Drawings shall include walls, door(s), and all items listed in section above.

5. Details: Provide detail drawings as required to show components requiring greater detail, including but not limited to, security control panel mounting and components, etc.

6. Labeling: Provided documentation of all labeling schemes for conduit, back-boxes, junction boxes, cable, outlets, cross-connects, patch panels, device faceplates, etc. Additionally, all electronic equipment shall be labeled including equipment racks/cabinets, security control panels, computer workstations, power supplies, UPS systems, enclosures, etc. Contractor shall coordinate labeling of all components with the Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to commencing work.

7. Documentation: Provide a minimum of one (1) hardcopy set of prints for review if the Division 1 requirements do not require hard copies. Coordinate with General Contractor or Construction Manager to ensure submission is per project requirements.

8. As-Built Drawing Documentation: All documentation shall be shall be provided on CD-RW as AutoCAD Release 2006.dwg files or as specified in the Division 1 requirements. Additionally, provide an electronic PDF copy of As-Built Drawings to the Engineer upon project close-out. Coordinate with General Contractor or Construction Manager to ensure submission is per project requirements.

E. Security Software Documentation

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the Owner to identify: a. Specific naming convention for devices within the Access Control System software,

including, but not limited to, Security Control Panels and Edge Devices (i.e. Card Readers named per room or door number, or other Owner preferred method, etc.).

b. Any specific needs pertaining to management of the security software. c. Preferences for operator interaction with the security software. d. Special sequences and/or procedures that fall under the category of Contractor programming

or system options. 2. All coordination with the Owner shall be fully documented by the Contractor and included in

the record documentation.

F. Samples: 1. The Contractor shall provide examples (hard copies) of all custom configured screen layouts,

custom graphics, menus, and configurations resulting from the initial coordination with the Owner. These examples may be modified as the project develops, pending review by the Owner, Architect and/or Engineer.

2. Upon request from the Owner or Architect, submit samples of the following: a. Camera enclosures and/or housings b. Proximity readers and/or keypads (as applicable) c. Exit alarm unit d. Request-to-Exit devices (as applicable) e. Door release pushbuttons f. Access key fob and/or cards g. Finish samples for each custom trim plate, as applicable.

3. Samples submitted shall be the latest version of equipment submitted with the bid.


A. Codes and Standards


28 00 00 - 4

B. The Security System shall be installed in accordance with all applicable national, state and local codes and standards including, but not limited to the following:

1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 2. Local Governing Codes and Standards. 3. National Fire Protection Association, National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). 4. National Fire Protection Association Life Safety Code (NFPA 101). 5. Underwriters Laboratories Applicable Standards for Safety (UL). 6. Underwriters Laboratories Applicable Standards for Proprietary Security System (UL). 7. ANSI/EIA/TIA-526: Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Systems. 8. ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 9. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways

and Spaces. 10. ANSI/EIA/TIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications. 11. BICSI CO-OSP Design Manual (current edition): Customer-Owned Outside-Plant Design

Manual. 12. BICSI Network Design Reference Manual (current edition). 13. BICSI TDMM Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (current edition). 14. BICSI Wireless Design Reference Manual (current). 15. EIA/TIA TSB67: Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded

Twisted-Pair Cabling. 16. EIA Compliance: Comply with Electronic Industries Association's Standards RS-170, RS-232,

RS-312, RS-330, and RS-420 for closed-circuit TV cameras, monitors and component interfaces.

17. FCC Compliance: Comply with Subpart J of PART 15, FCC Rules pertaining to computing devices including Class A, Class B, personal and peripheral types. Provide equipment which complies with technical standards for both radiated and power line conducted interference.

18. IEEE-208 Video Techniques: Measurement of Resolution of Camera Systems. 19. IEEE-802.11 a, b, g: Wireless Local Area Networks. 20. IEEE-802.3: 10Mb/s, 100Mb/s, 1Gb/s, and 10Gb/s Ethernet Standards as applicable based

on media types (twisted pair copper, fiber optics, etc.). 21. IEEE-802.3ak: 10Gb/s Ethernet (evolving copper standard). 22. IEEE 1100-1999: Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic

Equipment. 23. ISO/IEC 11801: International Standard on Information Technology – Generic Cabling of

Customer Premises. 24. NEMA Std 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 25. NEMA Compliance: Comply with requirements of Stds Pub/No. WC 41, "Coaxial

Communication Cable," pertaining to testing of coaxial cable. 26. NFPA-70/NEC: National Electrical Code. 27. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards 983, 1409, 1410,

1412, 1414, 1416, 1417, and 1418 pertaining to CCTV and video products. Provide CCTV systems and components which are UL-listed and labeled.

28. USDA Bulletin 1751F-643: Underground Plant Design. 29. Other applicable codes, standards, and installation procedures consistent with recognized

industry standards, trends, and generally accepted procedures. 30. Owner Design and Construction Standards

C. Manufacturer and Product Qualifications

1. Provide products from manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of security system components, including but not limited to, video surveillance, access control, and intrusion detection systems hardware and software.


28 00 00 - 5

2. Provide products from manufacturers whose products of similar types, capacities, and characteristics have been in satisfactory use in similar type projects for not less than five years.

3. The systems (including software, hardware and firmware) proposed for this project shall have been installed in at least one project of similar size and nature and shall have been in beneficial use for at least 24 months prior to submission of the bid proposal.

4. The Contractor shall provide at the time of installation the latest version of all equipment hardware and software. Discontinued equipment shall not be acceptable.

D. Contractor Qualifications

1. The project specified herein shall be the responsibility of a single electronic security systems integration contractor. The Contracting firm shall document in its bid packages that it has a minimum of five (5) years experience in the fabrication, assembly and installation of systems of similar complexity as specified herein. The documentation shall include the names, locations and points of contact for at least three (3) installations of the type and complexity specified herein where the Contractor referred to above has installed such systems. The Contractor shall indicate the type of each referenced system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 24 months.

2. The Contractor shall have a fully staffed local office including service center within the project area capable of providing comprehensive maintenance and service to the specified systems. The service center shall be staffed by factory trained technicians and adequately equipped to provide emergency service within four (4) hours after being called, 24 hours per day, whether or not the Owner elects to purchase a maintenance contract with the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall provide factory certified technicians to install and maintain the systems provided. All installing personnel shall be licensed as required by local jurisdiction. The Bidder shall provide information in the proposal to demonstrate compliance with this requirement, including copies of appropriate factory certifications.

4. The Contractor shall ensure compliance with and have an understanding of all local code and contract conditions pertaining to this project.

5. The Contractor shall maintain an inventory of spare parts and other items critical to system operation as necessary to meet the emergency service requirements within the local service center.

6. The Contractor shall have local in-house engineering and project management capabilities consistent with the requirements of the project. The Contractor shall provide a full-time project manager who is to be present on site at all times that installation is actively in progress. This person shall be the same individual throughout the course of the Project and shall be the person responsible for system programming, preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Training Programs and Schedules and Test Protocols, documentation of system testing, maintenance of record drawings, coordination and scheduling of all subcontract labor. The Owner reserves the right to approve the Contractor's project manager.

7. By submitting a bid, the Contractor thereby certifies that it is qualified in all areas pertaining to, either directly or indirectly the project. In the event the Contractor becomes unable to complete the project in accordance with the Contract Documents, or the satisfaction of the Owner or his representatives, due to a lack of understanding of equipment, systems or services required by the Contract Documents, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to retain the services of the applicable manufacturers' representatives to expeditiously complete the project in accordance with the construction schedule with no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Coordinated Work 1. It is understood that the Work as described in this Specification is contingent on other trades

and work. Therefore, the Contractor shall coordinate with related trades to schedule this Work with related trades and ensure a complete installation in accordance with the schedule outlined by the Construction Manager.


28 00 00 - 6

2. The Contractor shall carefully examine the Contract Documents, all related equipment schedules and installations, related Architectural and Engineering drawings, etc. to ensure compatibility between the Security System design, related packages and applicable site conditions.

3. Within the Specification and as shown on the Security System Drawings (i.e. Technology Drawings), specific mounting heights and general device locations are specified. Architectural and related Engineering Drawings should be carefully examined to coordinate final equipment/device locations, facility designations, floor accessibility, floor type, ceiling heights and ceiling types. The exact mounting locations and mounting heights of all equipment shall be verified with the Architect prior to installation. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager in the event that a particular location appears to be unsuitable.

1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the delivery of all security system products to the site with the Construction Manager. All components shall be properly packaged in factory-fabricated type containers. Enclose an operating impact sensor in each container, capable of recording a 5g rating.

B. The Contractor shall ensure that all security system products stored on site and/or in the Contractor's

facilities are protected from theft or damage. All components shall be stored in original cartons and in a clean dry space protected from weather and construction traffic.

C. The Contractor shall handle all security system components carefully to avoid breakages, impacts, denting and scoring finishes. Do not install any damaged equipment; replace and return damaged units to equipment manufacturer.


A. The Contractor shall schedule all site activities with the Construction Manager.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling with related trades to ensure that all contingent installations will be completed in accordance with construction schedule.


A. Prior to submitting a proposal, the Contractor shall inspect the Contract Documents, and shall become fully informed as to laws, ordinances, and regulations affecting the project. The Contractor shall immediately bring to the Engineer's and Architect's attention, in writing, any existing condition or statute that contradicts, is in conflict with, or negates the Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to become fully informed as to all above mentioned items shall in no way relieve the Contractor from any obligations with respect to their proposal.

B. The Security Device Drawings depict equipment locations, backboxes, conduit runs, feeders and wiring in a schematic manner. Field conditions and coordination with related trades may warrant relocations of field devices. No additional compensation will be allowed due to these revisions.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. A one (1) year warranty on the Work shall be provided by the Contractor. If, within one (1) year after the date of final acceptance of the installation or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents or provided by a manufacturer, any of the work or equipment is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly including all parts and labor after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall survive termination of the contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the


28 00 00 - 7

condition. Such notice shall be provided by Owner representatives, to be identified, either verbally or in writing.

B. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be construed to establish a shorter period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents or any manufacturer's warranty. The establishment of the time period (indicated above) after the date of final acceptance or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Documents relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the work or equipment, and has no relationship to the time within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to his obligations other than specifically to correct the work or equipment.

C. Preventative maintenance shall be performed by the Contractor during the warranty period and shall include but not be limited to a quarterly maintenance check of all system components which will include cleaning, adjustments and necessary repairs. The Contractor shall submit a list of items to be included in the preventative maintenance program. The list shall include maintenance to each item, the frequency of such maintenance, and the amount of time to be spent on each item for maintenance.

D. A manufacturer’s software maintenance agreement shall be included within the warranty period and shall include all software updates, revisions and telephone service assistance. The software maintenance agreement shall include training for any changes in operation due to the software revisions.

E. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Owner documenting any work performed during the warranty period, including any preventative maintenance work performed. Loaner equipment shall be provided for any equipment not field repairable. Such loaner equipment shall be in working order and the functional and technical equivalent of the item replaced.

F. Repair or replacement service during the warranty period shall be performed in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Schedule A - 7 days, 24 hour, 4 hour response time. 2. Schedule B - 8:00-5:00 business days, excluding holidays, 4 hour response time.

G. Schedule A shall apply for major system components including but not limited to the System

Servers, System Software, Computer Workstations (if provided by the Contractor), Security Control Panels and associated products.

H. Schedule B shall apply for all other components and devices. The Contractor shall provide as part of his bid an after hours labor rate for any warranty service required during hours not covered under Schedule B.

I. If system operation is not fully restored during the warranty period within two (2) business days, the Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide on-site manufacturer's service technicians at no additional cost.

J. The Owner reserves the right to expand or add to the system during the warranty period using firm(s) other than the Contractor for such expansion without affecting the Contractor's responsibilities, provided that the expansion is done by a firm which is an authorized dealer or agent for the equipment of system being expanded.


28 00 00 - 8

K. The Contractor shall provide for on-line software maintenance and support during the warranty period. All software and hardware, including telephone modems, shall be provided by the Contractor. Modem access to the system shall be password protected and controlled by the Owner.

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor shall provide a quote to include annual costs for the second through fifth years, for a maintenance contract to provide repair service including all parts and labor and a Preventative Maintenance Program on the Security System. The Contractor shall provide a list of all items, schedule, and services included in the Preventative Maintenance Program with the bid.

B. The Contractor shall provide a quote for a manufacturer’s software maintenance agreement after the warranty period has expired. The maintenance agreement shall include all software updates, revisions and telephone service assistance. The software maintenance agreement shall include training for any changes in operation due to the software revisions. The period for this software maintenance agreement shall be consistent with the Preventative Maintenance Program noted above.

C. The Preventative Maintenance Program shall include, but not be limited to a quarterly maintenance check of all system components which will include cleaning adjustments and all necessary repairs. The Contractor shall submit a list of items to be included, the frequency of such maintenance, and the amount of time to be dedicated to the preventative maintenance program. A written notification shall be given to the Owner outlining any work performed and noting any foreseeable problems. Loaner equipment will be provided for any equipment not field repairable. Such loaner equipment shall be in working order and the functional and technical equivalent of the item replaced.

D. Repair or replacement service for the second through fifth year after the warranty period has expired shall be performed in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Schedule A - 7 days, 24 hour, 4 hour response time. 2. Schedule B - 8:00-5:00 business days, excluding holidays, 4 hour response time.

E. Schedule A shall apply for major system components including but not limited to the System

Servers, System Software, Computer Workstations (if provided by the Contractor), Security Control Panels and associated products.

F. Schedule B shall apply for all other components and devices. The Contractor shall provide as part of his bid an after hours labor rate for any maintenance service required during hours not covered under Schedule B.

G. If system operation is not fully restored under the maintenance contract within two (2) business days, the Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide on-site manufacturer's service technicians at no additional cost.

H. The Contractor shall provide for on-line software maintenance and support during the maintenance period. All software and hardware, including telephone modems, shall be provided by the Contractor. Modem access to the system shall be password protected and controlled by the Owner.


A. Pricing 1. Instructions to Bidders

a. The following is a partial list of instructions. Bidders are responsible to provide a complete proposal inclusive of all information requested in the Contract Documents.

b. Do not assume anything. Feel free to clarify your position in writing with your bid concerning any areas that may not be clear to you.


28 00 00 - 9

c. Copies of the bid proposal shall be submitted to the Architect for review and approval. d. Bidders shall prepare equipment lists showing each item included in the bid. Equipment

Lists must include the quantity, model number, manufacturer and price of each item listed under the generic description.

e. Provide a detailed description of any and all voluntary alternates and include cost changes in the Voluntary Alternate Bid forms. Bidders should submit voluntary alternates that will either provide for a better system or reduce costs without degrading the system.

f. In the instance where the Drawings and the Specifications do not directly coincide, or coincide individually, the item of better quality, greater quantity and/or higher cost shall be included in the base bid.

2. Unit Pricing and Labor Rates a. Unit prices and labor rates submitted with the bid proposal shall be used for all additions,

deductions, and alterations of the original contract and shall further be used for future purchases by the Owner from the Contractor for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system.

B. Compliance 1. Bidders shall submit a Statement of Qualifications with their bid proposal that shall include the

following information: a. Company name, address, telephone number and contact person. b. Brief company history. c. Resumes of key personnel. d. Local staffing description (job descriptions and numbers of persons in each position). e. Local service capabilities (hours of operation and parts availability). f. Technician factory certifications. g. Description of local engineering and project management capabilities. h. Line sheet listing major suppliers of security equipment. i. Annual dollar value of sales, installation and service of each product line carried. j. List of references describing three (3) completed projects of similar size and complexity,

including names and telephone numbers of the contact persons. k. List of references describing similar projects completed in the area including names and

telephone number of the customer's contact person. l. List of similar projects currently under construction in the area including names and

telephone numbers of the customer's contact person. m. Licensing information.

2. Provide a specification compliance matrix indicating compliance or deviation for each

3. Additionally, as described in this Specification, bidders shall submit the following information with their bid proposal:

item in the specification. The matrix shall be comprised of a list of all numbered paragraphs that appear in this Specification. Indicate compliance of the proposed equipment and/or services by the word "Comply" following each paragraph number. Indicate an exception to the requirement by the word "Exception" following the applicable paragraph number. Should the proposed equipment and/or services not entirely comply with the requirements specified, but ultimately achieve the intent, the Bidder shall explain fully the extent, or lack thereof, of compliance for the applicable equipment and/or services proposed. Instances where there is no indication of compliance or exception shall be considered non-compliant. This matrix is critical for proposal evaluation. Failure to submit may result in the disqualification of the bid. Contractor shall submit Compliance Matrix with the Bid Proposal AND at the time of Product Data submittal (as indicated previously in this specification) so that a complete security system submittal reviewed can be performed.

a. Proposed System Manufacturer's source code agreement. b. Maintenance Agreement and a Sample Maintenance Contract describing the nature of the

Maintenance Service to be provided after the warranty period has expired.


28 00 00 - 10

c. After hours labor rate for any warranty service required during hours not covered under Schedule B.

d. List of all items, schedules, and services included in the Preventative Maintenance Program. e. A quote for a manufacturer’s software maintenance agreement after the warranty period has

expired. f. Manufacturer's literature sheets for all standard manufactured items included in the

equipment list and as proposed in the Voluntary Alternate Bid form, if applicable. g. Workload and capability statements. The statements shall detail projects that will be active

during the completion of this project, and the manpower that would be available for this project.

h. Confidentiality and return statements. The statements shall guarantee that the Contract Documents shall not be copied or distributed physically or verbally. The Contractor shall also assure the Owner that the Contract Documents shall be returned in their entirety upon request. The successful Contractor will be provided with as many copies as requested.

4. Certain paragraphs of the Specification require the Bidder to provide information (possibly not listed above) in the proposal to demonstrate compliance with a requirement. If the Bidder fails to provide detailed responses to these items, the proposal will be deemed to be non-compliant to the paragraphs stated.

5. Number all pages of the bid submittal.

1.11 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Security System (i.e. Technology System) Symbol Legend sheet for abbreviations and/or device symbol clarification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Refer to Specification Section 28 13 00 for requirements.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. The Contractor shall examine areas and conditions under which security systems are to be installed and notify Construction Manager, Architect and Engineer in wiring of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

B. The Contractor shall verify that the site conditions are in agreement with the Contract Documents

and the design package. The Contractor shall submit a report to the Construction Manager documenting changes to the site or conditions that affect the performance of the system to be installed. For those changes or conditions which affect system installation or performance, provide (with the report) specification sheets, or written functional requirements to support the findings, and a cost estimate to correct the deficiency. The Contractor shall not correct any deficiency without written permission from the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Install all security systems components where indicated, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's written instructions, in compliance with all previously listed codes or standards,


28 00 00 - 11

and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that all components comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

2. Use extreme care in handling, fishing and pulling-in electronic cable to avoid damage to cable and jacket. Avoid excessive and sharp bends.

3. Install security system equipment properly to avoid causing mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment or equipment being exerted by clamps, supports, and cabling.

4. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.

B. Security System Programming and Setup The Contractor shall provide all initial system programming and setup including, but not limited to the following: 1. Initial system network programming. 2. Initial system users, including levels of access. This shall include the designation of an Owner's

representative at the "Super User" level immediately upon system initialization. 3. Initial graphical maps and icons. The Contractor shall verify maps and icon locations with the

Owner. 4. Initial device naming mentality within the system software, per Owner direction. 5. Initial camera aiming, programming and setup. 6. Initial system proximity reader card information. The Contractor shall coordinate all proximity

reader card values and text, including descriptors, alarm messages, camera call up, map call up and identification with the Owner.

7. Input and output points for the system. The Contractor shall coordinate all proximity reader card values and test, including descriptors, alarm messages, camera call up, map call up and identification, with the Owner.

8. Initial setup for interface with Video Surveillance System.

C. Equipment 1. The exact mounting locations of all equipment shall be verified with the Architect prior to

installation. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager in the event that a particular location appears to be unsuitable.

2. Tamperproof fasteners shall be used on all equipment in public areas. Fastener finish shall match equipment finish.

3. Finish and graphics for all equipment in public areas shall be submitted to, and approved by, the Architect prior to installation.

4. All visible panel and control labels shall be silkscreened, engraved or filled, or engraved plastic laminate. All labels shall be submitted to, and approved by, the Architect prior to fabrication.

5. The Contractor or equipment manufacturer logos or names shall not be visible on equipment in public areas.

D. Grounding 1. Provide equipment grounding connections for security systems as indicated and per

manufacturer recommendations. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. Ensure and demonstrate that resistance to solid earth for signals in less than, or equal to 3 ohms.

E. Adjusting and Cleaning


28 00 00 - 12

1. Set field-adjustable cameras to obtain the proper view as intended per the drawings and camera schedules. In addition, exact camera field of view shall be reviewed and confirmed with the Owner during the security training and close-out period.

2. Set field-adjustable video surveillance system components for input voltages, current settings and frequency settings.

3. Touch-up scratched and marred surfaces to match original finishes; remove dirt and construction debris.

F. Data Entry

1. The Contractor shall enter all data needed to make the system operational. The Contractor shall deliver the data to the Owner on data entry forms, utilizing data from the Contract Documents, Contractor's field surveys and all other pertinent information in the Contractor's possession required for complete installation of the data base. The Contractor shall identify and request from the Owner any additional data needed to make the system fully operational and integrated. The completed forms shall be delivered to the Owner for review and approval at least 90 days prior to the Contractor’s scheduled needs date.

3.3 CONDUIT, BOXES AND RACEWAYS

A. Boxes and Wireways 1. Field boxes and cabinet enclosures containing remote system electronics and/or circuit boards

shall contain a wiring chart delineating wire routings, labeling and termination points. The chart shall be housed in a clear plastic sleeve affixed to the inside of the enclosure cover.

B. Conduit

1. All conduit materials and workmanship included in this Work shall be in strict compliance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and applicable local electrical codes.

2. Certain conduits, boxes, and raceways are to be provided by others as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing any additional conduits, boxes and raceways that are required to provide a complete installation. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all conduit, backboxes and raceways meet equipment and wiring requirements for the system.

3. All system electronics located in the field shall be mounted within junction boxes. The Contractor shall provide conduits, boxes and raceways as required to adequately accommodate all field electronics.

4. All conduit installed shall be EMT (of milled steel tubing), except where exposed to any water or moisture, or unless otherwise, securely fastened in place as required by code and as specified hereinafter. Compression type fittings shall be used for all EMT terminations and connections.

5. For exterior applications or where conduit will be exposed to moisture, or where buried in slab, hot dipped galvanized steel conduit shall be used.

6. Flexible conduit shall be used to extend conduit connections to permanently connected equipment, but in no case shall the length of flexible conduit exceed 24" for connection of any one piece of equipment. Provide ground wire from conduit to the equipment to maintain continuity.

7. In no instance shall the diameter of conduit installed be less than 3/4". When conduit sizes larger than 1-1/2" are specified, use standard elbows for all bends 45 degrees and larger. Field bends shall be permitted for conduit bends less than 45 degrees, provided the cross-sectional area of the conduit is not reduced and the conduit is in no way damaged.

8. Conduit in finished areas shall be installed concealed in chases, furrings, concrete slabs and/or above suspended ceiling. The intent is that vertical conduit be provided in all finished spaces up into the accessible ceiling. Once in the ceiling, cable can be routed exposed, provided it is plenum rated as required by code. Conduit in exposed spaces shall be exposed from the junction or pull box, vertically and horizontally until said conduit can be extended into accessible ceiling. Installation of the conduit shall be square and parallel to the building and


28 00 00 - 13

shall be securely supported. Conduits shall be grouped wherever it is feasible to do so. All backboxes and pull-boxes shall be plumb and square and parallel to the building and shall be securely supported.

9. All conduit shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be installed without springing or forcing.

10. All required inserts shall be drilled-in and all openings required through concrete or masonry shall be saw cut or core drilled with tools specifically designed for this purpose.

11. All conduits shall be swabbed out and burrs removed before any wires are pulled. 12. The Contractor shall lay out and install conduit runs as to avoid proximity to hot water/steam

pipes. In no case shall a conduit be run within three (3) inches of such pipes, except where crossing are unavoidable and then the conduit shall be kept at least one (1) inch from the covering of the pipe crossed.

13. Conduit shall be carefully installed, properly and adequately supported as required to comply with the requirements outlined herein and in Division 26 and/or 27 to provide a neat, workmanlike installation. Where riser conduit protrudes through floors slabs, they shall be supported by approved riser clamps. Horizontal conduit runs shall be supported by clamps, pipe straps, special brackets or heavy iron tie, tied to the black iron structural member supporting the ceiling. Fastening of conduit to masonry walls, floor or partitions require malleable pipe clips with screws and suitable expansion sleeves.

14. Straight runs of conduit shall have pull boxes as required by the National Electrical Code where conduit runs are not broken by junction boxes or outlet boxes. Conduit runs with bends shall have additional pull boxes as required to not exceed maximum allowable pulling tension of cable.

15. Threaded conduit shall be secured to boxes, cabinets, etc. by means of galvanized or sherardized threaded bushing on the outside of such boxes and cabinets. Fittings shall be watertight and the same materials as the conduit installed. Damaged raceways and fittings shall not be installed or accepted.

16. Provide fire stops where conduits penetrate fire rated wall and/or floors. 17. All conduit installation, whether run exposed or concealed, shall be approved prior to

installation by the Architect and Engineer through the shop drawing review process.

3.4 WIRING TECHNIQUES

A. All wiring shall be run within conduit, or plenum type cable shall be used in return air plenum spaces, or as required by code.

B. Code compliant fire proofing techniques shall be provided by the Contractor for all penetrations of fire rated partitions and slabs, where the penetrations are made by or used by the Contractor.

C. All cable and wiring methods shall meet national, state and local code requirements and shall be ULC listed for their application.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the routing of wire and cable requiring isolation from power, radio frequency (RF), telephone, etc.

E. All cables must be run continuous from device location to the final point of termination. No mid-run cable splices will be allowed.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for visually inspecting wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation.

G. Provide grommets and strain relief material where necessary, to avoid abrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable.


28 00 00 - 14

H. Make connections with solderless devices, mechanically and electrically secure in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

I. A single "system ground" point shall be established within the security console room for the system. The system ground shall consist of a single grounding point to which all grounds in the system are connected. Under no conditions shall the AC neutral either in a power panel or in receptacle outlets be used for a reference ground. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing the ground point and ensuring that no ground loops are created.

3.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS

A. 120V AC power on generator backup shall be provided within each Communications Room for use by the security system. Contractor shall refer to Power Drawings for additional requirements.

B. The Contractor shall connect to the AC power and provide ULC listed power supplies and transformers to distribute low voltage power to the system components.

C. Provide hinged cover terminal cabinets with tamper switches for all power supplies, transformers and power distribution terminal strips. Provide all conduit and wiring from the AC power facilities to the terminal cabinets.

D. Provide protection against spikes, surges, noise, and other line problems for all system equipment and components.

3.6 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES

A. In no instance shall any ULC labeled door or frame be drilled, cut penetrated, or modified in any way.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any labeled door or frame that is modified without written approval from the Architect.

3.7 LABELING

A. All cables shall be marked in common at both ends using a permanent method such as self laminating write on cable marking tape. The tags shall be attached to the wire and cable nylon cable ties in an accessible location so that they can easily be read. Ties shall be similar to T&B TyRap cable ties. Tags shall be installed when wire and cables are installed. Device and cable labeling shall be coordinated with the Owner and shall agree with record drawings.

B. Wire identification number shall be placed at each end of the conductor involved by using sleeve type, heat shrinkable markers. The markers shall be installed so as to be readable from left to right or top to bottom.

C. All connectors shall be marked with common designations for mating connectors. The connector designations shall be indicated on the record drawings.

D. Spare conductors are to be coiled in the device back-box, panel wireway, or top of panel where wireway is not provided. These conductors shall be neatly bundled and tagged.

3.8 SYSTEM START-UP

A. The security system shall be complete and ready to operate prior to Owner final acceptance of the system. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing all systems for user operation.


28 00 00 - 15

B. The Contractor shall load all of the initial user database as defined in this Section into all programmable systems up to the inaugural day of beneficial use of the system. The Owner will assist in establishing procedural guidelines and in defining terminology and conditions unique to the Owner's operation.

C. The Contractor shall label all controls as necessary to agree with their function.

3.9 TRAINING

A. Access Control System Training: The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the SMS system manufacturer to arrange for (20) hours of operator and administrative training by a manufacturer representative to representatives of the Owner. The training shall be held at the Owner's facility on a complete and fully operational system parallel to the system being provided. The training shall include, but not be limited to all operating system procedures, data base functions, applications programs, system configuration, video switching and recording functions, and map graphics generation. All such training shall be videotaped and the tapes provided to the Owner for future in-house training sessions or reviews.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to provide a training outline and schedule for approval by the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall be on call during the warranty period to answer any questions the Owner's representatives might have. The Contractor shall maintain time sheets verifying the total hours of training provided. The Owner reserves the right to use any excess training hours, not used by the time of system completion, for future training as requested by the Owner until the total number of training hours has been completed.

3.10 RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Prior to the final acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall submit record documentation sets to the Construction Manager as indicated in Division 1 General Conditions.

B. Record documentation shall include all information required in the prefabrication submittals but revised to reflect "as installed" conditions. Record documentation shall, at a minimum, include the items described previously under the Shop Drawings and As-Built Drawings section.

C. Record documentation shall include Contractor generated operation and maintenance manuals for all devices, equipment and software modules. Manuals shall include the following: 1. Operational description of each system. 2. Detailed programming descriptions for each system, including step by step procedures. 3. Explanations of system interrelationships. Explanations shall include operations of each system

and operations unique to the interfaces between each of the systems and possible conflicts that may occur with the interfaces. Each explanation shall be identified, tagged, bound and indexed into a single binder.

4. Power-up and power-down procedures for each system. 5. Description of all diagnostic procedures. 6. An error list indicating all messages that may be displayed on each system and a description of

the operator response to each. 7. A menu tree for each system. The tree shall provide a graphical flow of commands within the

menu system. 8. Setup procedures for each component of the systems. 9. A list of manufacturers, their local representatives and subcontractors that have performed work

on the project. The list shall include contact names, phone numbers and addresses for each. 10. Installation and service manuals for each piece of equipment.


28 00 00 - 16

11. Maintenance schedules for all installed components. Schedules shall include inspections and preventative maintenance schedules, and documentation of all repaired or replace equipment.

D. Final copies of the manuals as specified, bound in hard-back loose-leaf binders, shall be delivered to the Owner within 30 days after completing the performance verification test. The draft copy used during the site testing shall be updated with any changes required prior to final delivery of the manuals. Each manual's contents shall be identified on the cover. The manual shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment and system, and nearest service representatives for each item of equipment for each system. The manual shall have a table of contents and tab sheets. Tab sheets shall be placed at the beginning of each chapter or section and at the beginning of each appendix. Any hardware manual demonstrating more than one (1) model number of device on any one (1) page shall be clearly marked as to delineate which model has been implemented into the Project. The final copies delivered after completion of the performance verification test shall include all modifications made during installation, checkout and acceptance

E. Manuals 1. Hardware manuals shall include, at a minimum, the following information:

a. General hardware description and specifications. b. Installation and checkout procedures. c. Equipment electrical schematics and layout drawings. d. System schematics and wiring lists. e. System setup procedures. f. Manufacturer's repair parts list indicating sources of supply.

2. Software manuals shall include, at a minimum, the following information: a. Definitions of terms and functions. b. Procedures for system generation. c. Description of implementation of the program. d. Description of required sequences. e. Directory of all disk files. f. Description of all communications protocols, including data formats, command characters,

and a sample of each type of data transfer. g. Alarm reports. h. Report generation. i. Data base format and data entry requirements.

3. Operator's manuals shall explain all procedures and instructions for operation of the system including: a. SMS system b. Camera and video recording equipment. c. Use of the software. d. Operator commands. e. System start-up and shut-down procedures. f. Recovery and restart procedures.

3.11 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

A. Final acceptance testing of the system will be conducted by the Owner, Architect, and Engineer.

B. Prior to any final acceptance testing, the Security Contractor shall submit all record documentation as described above.

C. The Contractor shall submit a paragraph by paragraph completion matrix indicating completion or delinquency for each item included in the Specification and all subsequent addenda and bulletins to the base contract. Indicate completion of the requirement by the word "Completed" following each


28 00 00 - 17

paragraph number. Indicate delinquency for the requirement by the words "To Be Completed" following the applicable paragraph number. Should work on any item be under way, but not yet fully complete, the Contractor shall indicate the extent (or lack thereof) of completion to date.

D. The Security Contractor shall conduct a complete test of the entire system and shall provide the Architect with a written report on the results of that test. During the course of the Contractor's system test, the Contractor shall calibrate and test all equipment, verify data transmission media (DTM) operation, place the integrated system in service, and test the integrated system.

E. The checklist (included as Appendix "1") shall be completed by the Contractor prior to the burn-in test of the security system. The checklist shall accompany the written certification to the Owner that the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested, and is fully functional as specified herein.

F. Following completion of the Contractor's system test and correction of any noted deficiencies, the Contractor shall conduct a burn-in test for a minimum of 10 days. The intent of such test shall be to prove the system by placing it in near real operating conditions. During this period the system shall be fully functional and programmed such that all system points, interfaces, controls, reports, messages, prompts, etc. can be exercised and validated. The Contractor shall record and correct any system anomaly, deficiency, or failure noted during this period. Scheduling of the final acceptance test shall be based on a review of the results of this burn-in test.

G. The Contractor shall deliver a report describing the results of functional tests, burn-in tests, diagnostics, calibrations, corrections, and repairs including written certification to the Architect that the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested, and is fully functional as specified herein. The report shall include a "Point List" printout from the system of all input and output points in the system. This "Point List" shall be used in conjunction with the preliminary record drawings by the Architect to conduct the system final test.

H. Prior to the final acceptance test, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Construction Manager and related trade representatives for security related construction clean-up and patch work requirements. Security equipment closets and similar areas should be free of accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's and his/her subcontractors' tools, construction equipment, machinery and all surplus materials.

I. Upon written notification from the Contractor that the system is completely installed, integrated and operational, and the burn-in testing completed, the Architect shall conduct a final acceptance test of the entire system.

J. During the course of the final acceptance test by the Architect, the Contractor shall be responsible for demonstrating that, without exception, the completed and integrated system complies with the contract requirements. ALL PHYSICAL AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE PROJECT SHALL BE DEMONSTRATED AND SHOWN. This demonstration will begin by comparing "as built" conditions of the system to requirements outlined in the Specification, item by item. Following the Specification compliance review, system head-end equipment will be evaluated.

K. In order to sufficiently demonstrate the system's functionality, the SMS operator on duty and his/her superior will be requested to perform certain daily operations inherent to the system. These operations may include, but not be limited to, manually locking and unlocking doors within the system, verifying the current status of various points within the system, and responding to and acknowledging alarms. Furthermore, the SMS operator and his/her superior will be requested to perform such tasks as entering information into the SMS System Data Base, generating various types of reports, adding a video camera to the viewing window, and manipulation of map graphics (addition/deletion of icons, etc.). As all of these operations depend heavily on the training outlined


28 00 00 - 18

within the Specification, the Contractor shall have completed all of the required training prior to initiation of the final acceptance test.

L. The functionality of the various interfaces between systems shall be demonstrated. This will include, but not be limited to, correct camera call-up on certain alarms within the system, generation of alarms from related systems failure (i.e. loss of communications, UPS alarms, etc.), fire alarm system fail safe lock release, and interface to any external control and/or data base system(s).

M. Typically prior to the Security System head-end equipment and console review, the installation of all field devices will be inspected. This field inspection will weigh heavily on the general neatness and quality of installations, complete functionality of each individual device, and mounting, back-box and conduit requirements compliance.

N. All equipment shall be on and fully operational during any and all testing procedures. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, and supplies necessary to perform all site testing. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of two employees familiar with the system for the final acceptance test. One employee shall be responsible for monitoring and verifying alarms while the other will be required to demonstrate the function of each device. The Contractor shall supply at least two (2) two-way radios for use during the test. A manufacturer's representative should be available on site to answer any questions beyond the technical capability of the Contractor's employees.

O. Upon successful completion of the final acceptance test (or subsequent punch list retest) the Architect will issue a letter of final acceptance.

P. The Owner/Architect retains the right to suspend and/or terminate testing at any time when the system fails to perform as specified. In the event that it becomes necessary to suspend the test, all of the Owner's fees and expenses related to the test will be deducted from the Contractor's retainage. Furthermore, in the event it becomes necessary to suspend the test, the Contractor shall work diligently to complete/repair all outstanding items to the condition specified in the Specification and as indicated on the plans. The Contractor shall supply the Architect with a detailed completion schedule outlining phase by phase completion dates and a tentative date for a subsequent punch list retest. During the final acceptance test, no adjustments, repairs or modifications to the system will be conducted without the permission of the Architect.

3.12 POINT CHARTS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible to define, describe and identify all required points to support the system and provide such charts or print-outs developed listing all points as part of prefabrication submittals.

END OF SECTION


28 00 00 - 19

APPENDIX 1 - SECURITY ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM COMPLETION/READINESS CHECKLIST

The Contractor shall indicate completion/compliance of the listed conditions by placing a check mark in the applicable space provided. All items are required to be complete before a final inspection of the security system can be scheduled. If for some reason the Contractor is unable to fully comply with any of the listed conditions, a written statement describing the exception is to be submitted with the checklist for review.

TASK DESCRIPTION CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION

1. Required interfaces to other building systems have been completed and are functional. Other building systems may include:

Fire Alarm System Elevator System Building Management System (HVAC) Building Management System (Lighting)

_______________

2. SMS network programming has been completed, including any partitioning requirements.

_______________

3. Initial Owner users of the system have been entered and passwords assigned, including one Owner user at the "Super User" level.

_______________

4. Graphical maps and associated device icons have been installed on the system. Maps and icon designations have been coordinated with the Owner. Owner concurs that maps and on designations are acceptable.

_______________

5. Initial input, output and control information has been loaded into the SMS system. This includes items such as:

Point descriptors Alarm priorities Alarm messages Camera call-up Map call-up Proximity/Smart Card reader identification

_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________

6. All text, messages and descriptors shall have been coordinated with the Owner prior to loading.

_______________

7. The required number of access cards and key fobs have been delivered to the Owner.

_______________

8. Initial access cards and key fob holders have been entered into the system. _______________

9. The CCTV matrix has been programmed for all necessary responses to SMS events.

_______________

10. On-screen alphanumeric identification of each camera has been completed on all systems elements. Identification schemes have been coordinated with the Owner.

_______________

11. Programming and set-up of all DVR's, multiplexers, video motion detectors, etc. has been completed.

_______________


28 00 00 - 20

12. Preset positioning of all pan, tilt and zoom cameras has been completed including required interfaces to the SMS system.

_______________

13. All cover plates have been furnished and installed on junction boxes, wireways, etc. All wiring contained therein has been properly bundled, labeled and wrapped. Excess wiring has been removed.

_______________

14. Installation of all power supplies, control panels, interface panels, batteries, etc. are installed and fully functional. Wire contained therein has been properly bundled, labeled and wrapped.

_______________

15. Tamper switches have been installed in each cabinet as required by the specification, and are functionally reporting to the SMS system.

_______________

16. All cables, wires, terminals and other conductors have been labeled per specification requirements. Spare conductors have been labeled and neatly coiled and bundled in appropriate cabinets and wireways.

_______________

17. Tamper-proof fasteners have been utilized to secure equipment or devices located in public areas.

_______________

18. All panel controls have been properly labeled. Such labeling has been coordinated with the Owner.

_______________

19. The Contractor's self test plan for al security devices and systems has been prepared and presented to the Owner for approval.

_______________

20. The self test has been conducted and a copy of the report detailing the results of such test is attached to this checklist.

_______________

21. Correction of such deficiencies discovered during the self test has been completed or noted as in progress on the inspection report.

_______________

22. The Contractor has prepared and submitted to the Owner for approval the training curriculum and schedule of such training to the Owner for approval.

_______________

23. All required system training has been completed. _______________

24. Draft as-built documentation, including wiring diagrams, point charts, device location drawings, panel diagrams, etc. as defined in the specification, are available for use during the final inspection.

_______________

25. System operation and set-up manuals, and functional descriptors have been provided to the Owner.

_______________

26. All equipment has been installed in all racks and consoles as shown on the detail drawings or per Owners request.

_______________

27. Charts or diagrams have been provided in each rack, cabinet, and panel defining wire routing and interconnections.

_______________

28. All patch work required by other trades (i.e. general contractor(s)) has been noted by the Contractor for action by the Construction Manager.

_______________


28 00 00 - 21

29. Contractor has coordinated with the Construction Manager and related trade representatives for security related construction clean-up. Security equipment closets and similar areas are free of accumulation of waste materials or rubbish.

_______________

30. All equipment is completely programmed and operational. _______________

31. The Contractor has made provisions for all equipment (i.e. two-way radios, etc.) and personnel necessary to conduct the final inspection.

_______________

32. The Contractor's pre-burn in period test has been completed. _______________

33. A completed written report of the Contractor's test of the entire system with a "Point List" printout of all input and output points in the system.

_______________

34. "Specification Completion Statement" indicating completion of each item in the specification.

_______________

Certified by: Date:

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review ACCESS CONTROLS

28 13 00 - 1

SECTION 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROLS



B. Drawings (Architectural, Electrical, and Technology/Security)


1.2 SUMMARY

A. The Security System shall consist of the following integrated subsystems as specified herein and within other related specification sections: 1. Access Control and Intrusion Detection Systems 2. Security Management System (SMS) 3. Security Software, Computer Workstations and Video Displays 4. Wire and Cable

B. The Security System shall be monitored and controlled from networked computer workstations

located throughout the facility, as indicated on the drawings.

C. All components shall be suitable for installation in facilities which may be subject to vandalism and other abuses.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing complete, fully operational, and functionally

integrated Security Management System to the Owner. This shall include, but not be limited to, all raceway, cabling, electronic components, power supplies, UPS units, and hardware required to create such system.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete turnkey installation with the exception

of those items noted as being provided by others, including but not limited to, all material, labor, warranties, freight and permits.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all labor and materials sub-contracted by the

Contractor for completion of the project, whether or not that labor and materials is claimed by related trades or included as part of the project as described in this Specification.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all power supplies (including conduit, backboxes,

wire and cable, fire alarm system interconnects, etc.) with the exception of those items noted as being provided by others, as described herein and as required by the various manufacturers.

H. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the Security System with the following related

work of other sections: 1. Division 08 - Door Hardware 2. Division 14 - General Elevator Requirements 3. Division 26 - General Electrical Requirements


28 13 00 - 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General Description and Requirements: Refer to Section 28 00 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section.

B. Compliance Matrix 1. Provide a specification compliance matrix indicating compliance or deviation for each

item in the specification. The matrix shall be comprised of a list of all numbered paragraphs that appear in this Specification. Indicate compliance of the proposed equipment and/or services by the word "Comply" following each paragraph number. Indicate an exception to the requirement by the word "Exception" following the applicable paragraph number. Should the proposed equipment and/or services not entirely comply with the requirements specified, but ultimately achieve the intent, the Bidder shall explain fully the extent, or lack thereof, of compliance for the applicable equipment and/or services proposed. Instances where there is no indication of compliance or exception shall be considered non-compliant. Contractor shall submit Compliance Matrix with the Bid Proposal AND at the time of Product Data submittal (as indicated previously in this specification) so that a complete security system submittal reviewed can be performed.

C. Product Data: 1. Warranty Information

2.

: Provide all warranty information as described in this specification section for review and approval. Component List: Provide complete submittal component list at the beginning of the submittal package. Component list shall identify each component name, manufacturer, and specific product/part number. All part numbers shall clearly indicate special options, color, accessories, etc. Component list and manufacturer cut-sheets shall be compiled to match the order of Appendix 1

3. .

Cutsheets:

4.


This specification is intended to be performance based, thus all products listed in Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule are benchmark products. The Contractor may substitute manufacturers and models that may be more cost effective or readily available. All substitutions shall meet or exceed the minimum functional and technical specifications. Acceptance of such substitutions is at the discretion of the Owner, Architect, and Engineer.

D. Shop Drawings and As-Built Drawings: Refer to Section 28 00 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section.

E. Security Management System (SMS) Software Documentation: Refer to Section 28 00 00 for

requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section.

F. Samples: Refer to Section 28 00 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section.



1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING





28 13 00 - 3



1.8 WARRANTY


1.9 MAINTENANCE




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS) – SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. Architecture: 1. The system architecture consists of various “edge devices”, including but not limited to, card

readers, keypads, door monitors, motion sensors, duress buttons, etc. each of which are connected via dedicated homerun low voltage cables to the nearest security control panel (SCP), as indicated on the drawings and schedules. Each SCP shall have Ethernet connectivity for interface to an Owner provided security LAN or VLAN to allow connectivity back to a SMS host computer or server.

2. Computer workstations with security software licenses shall be the primary means for monitoring the security system. Additional monitoring may be done via web based client licenses. Report generation and credential badge issuance shall be done through dedicated printers connected to the system.

B. The Access Control Security Management System shall consist of the following different

functional components: 1. The primary monitoring and control point of the Security System is yet to be determined. 2. Security Software shall be provided for operating the Security System on computer

workstations. 3. A Computer Workstation (i.e. personal computer or PC) shall be provided. This workstation

shall be designed for viewing the Security System as indicated within these specifications. 4. Report Printers are not required. 5. Credential Badge Stations and Printer shall be provided as indicated within specification

Section 28 00 01. 6. Security Control Panels (SCPs) shall be provided as indicated on the drawings to connect all

edge devices back to the SMS host server. 7. Card Readers shall be provided as indicated on the drawings to restrict access into the

building and/or select areas, based on individual credentials. 8. Access Cards and Key Fobs shall be provided and programmed to allow employee and/or

student access into the building and/or select areas, based on individual credentials. 9. Door Monitors or Door Position Switches (DPS) shall be provided as indicated on the

drawings to monitor door status. 10. Door Hardware and Locking Mechanisms shall be provided as indicated in the Division 8

Door Hardware Specifications and shall be interfaced to the security system as required.

C. Electric Locking Mechanism Power Supply


28 13 00 - 4

1. Card reader controlled doors shall be equipped with an electric locking mechanism and power supplies, typically provided by the Door Hardware Supplier. Security Contractor shall verify exact scope requirements with the Construction Manager and/or General Contractor.

2. Select doors may require 120V power at the door

3.

to operate the specified door lock and/or hardware. Refer to Security Access Control Schedules and Electrical Power Drawings to verify where 120V power is required, as coordinated with the Door Hardware Consultant prior to issuance of these documents. Security Contractor is responsible for coordinating with all applicable parties to ensure a fully functioning Security System is provided, including all required power to door locks (i.e. 120V at the door, 24V from remote power supply, etc.),

All door lock information indicated within the Security Access Control Schedules and Details is subject to change as a result of potential door hardware schedule changes. Contractor shall review the Door Hardware Specifications in detail prior to submitting product data and shop drawings. Any conflicts between the Security drawings or schedules and Door Hardware Specifications shall be resolved through the product data and shop drawing review process to ensure that the Security Contractor has fully coordinated the requirements with the Construction Manager and/or General Contractor, Architect, Door Hardware Consultant, Electrical Engineer, and Security Consultant.

D. ADA Power Assist Door Operator Interface 1. Certain electric locking mechanisms with card access shall be connected (hardwired) to the

ADA Power Assist Door Operator pushbutton. In this scenario, card reader shall be interfaced to the ADA Door Operator pushbutton to approve activation of door motor based on card authorization or pre-programmed security schedule.

2. Door motor shall not be energized until authorized by the security system to prevent operation and eventual burn-out of the motor from hitting the button with the security system activated.

3. Contractor shall provide all necessary hardware, interfaces, and system programming.

E. Fire Alarm Interface 1. Certain electric locking mechanisms shall be connected (hardwired) to the building fire

alarm system for fail safe release upon any fire alarm. A single low voltage/low current normally closed dry contact from the fire alarm system shall be provided by others in each room with Security Control Panels. This contact shall open on any fire alarm condition. The Contractor shall provide all additional UL listed failsafe relays and power supplies as necessary to interface to this contact and unlock all of these doors. Fail safe/fail secure requirements have been outlined in the Point Charts. However, the Contractor shall verify fail safe and fail secure locking requirements with the Architect and the door hardware contractor/provider. See contractor shop drawing for fire alarm interface requirements.

2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – SOFTWARE AND OVERALL SYSTEM

A. General 1. The system shall grant access through system controlled doors with the use of proximity card

reader devices and/or combination keypad and proximity card reader devices. 2. The system shall support System Workstations configured to view the security software. 3. The system software shall be designed to support multi-tasking/multi-user applications.

Independent, simultaneous performance of multiple system functions from system workstations shall not cause an appreciable reduction in system processing or response time.

4. The system shall allow the operator to switch between the system software and other applications while the system software is running. Switching between applications shall be accomplished through the use of hot keys on the system keyboard at the workstation. The system shall be configured such that only an operator logged in at the "System Administrator"


28 13 00 - 5

or the "Security Director" level can minimize the system software and switch to other applications. If an alarm condition occurs while the system software is minimized, the system software shall be maximized, become the active window in the foreground, and display the map and associated device icon in alarm.

5. The system software shall be menu driven with help screens to assist the operator. The system keyboard shall be equipped with function keys to call up help screens and standard operator and administrative tasks such as arm/disarm, lock/unlock, proximity holder review, alarm acknowledge, map call up, etc.

6. The system shall provide for at least (10) password restricted operator access levels. This feature shall restrict access to sensitive programming functions to authorized personnel only. The highest-level password shall have access to all system data bases. Each password shall be individually programmable to restrict operator access to programming and operator functions, commands, data base access and alarm point and control point functions.

7. The system shall provide an audit trail feature to maintain a historical record of what changes were made to the data base, when the changes were made, and who made them.

8. The system shall allow for the import of graphics generated by other drawing programs. The graphics shall be used in the generation of maps and facility floor plans as implemented at the GUI for alarm acknowledgment, camera call-up, etc. A conversion program shall be included with the system to convert .DXF files from CAD programs into the format used by the system.

9. The system shall provide for the assignment of a minimum of three (3) map graphic displays to each alarm point such that graphics associated with a specific alarm point are displayed sequentially upon operator selection from menus via operation of a special function key at the system keyboard. Full graphic display shall occur within five (5) seconds of request by the operator.

10. Upon operator acknowledgment of an alarm, the computer workstation shall display up to two (2) lines of text for each alarm. The first line shall be the alarm message as described above and the additional space shall be used for a user programmable response message or instruction list unique to each alarm point. The system shall allow the user to move freely between lines of text. The computer workstation shall allow the operator to choose from a list of Owner selectable alarm message responses, and log the applicable response.

11. The system shall display on the workstation monitor the date, time, and number of alarms waiting at all times.

12. The system shall have an integral color Computer aided drawing (CAD) software package that shall allow for the creation of facility maps and/or floor plans and drawings. The CAD package shall include functions for line drawing, boxes, ellipses, arcs, shading, patterns, scaling, rotation, and movement of objects and/or groups.

13. The system shall allow, through implementation of tiled windows, the operator to simultaneously monitor a map graphic display, the alarm status screen, live security camera video with associated control as applicable, and acknowledge alarms as they are initiated.

14. The system shall provide for a status screen on the video monitoring system. The status screen shall be automatically displayed at the beginning of an operator session and shall be manually displayed by an operator anytime during a session through the use of function keys. The operator shall be able to select any group from the status screen to view in more detail. The status screen shall display the following: a. Total number of points in alarm. b. Total number of points in access (system time program access). c. Total number of points in access (operator manual bypass). d. Total number of card readers in alarm. e. Total number of cards in access (system time program access). f. Total number of cards in access (operator manual bypass). g. Total number of system points in a trouble state.

15. Multiple alarms shall be queued in their order of priority.


28 13 00 - 6

16. The system workstation shall display and record the alarm message including the following for each point transaction: a. Time b. Date c. Location d. Point Number e. Event Type f. Point Status

17. The system data base program shall provide for the printing, displaying and archiving of all point transactions by default. The system shall allow the Owner to override the default mode on a point by point basis for each function.

18. The operator/administrator shall be able to verify the current status of any point in the system and change any of the programmable point descriptors via the system workstation.

19. The system shall include a schedule program that will allow the Owner to automatically schedule events such as report printing, output commands, door access, alarm access, etc. on a time/day programmable basis up to one (1) year in advance.

20. The system shall monitor the input point status of the following equipment and systems as indicated on the plans. a. Video Surveillance System

1) System recording status. b. Access Control

1) Proximity reader card controlled door prop alarms, intrusion alarms and invalid access attempt alarms (monitored and annunciated individually).

c. Uninterruptible Power System 1) UPS alarm, low battery and battery run alarm contacts.

d. Electromagnetic Lock Bond Sensors 1) A normally closed contact from an electromagnetic lock bond sensor

(provided by others) for monitoring of the secure status of doors equipped with electromagnetic locks as indicated on the plans. The bond sensor and associated magnetic door position switch(es) shall be wired in series as one alarm input.

e. Door Position Switches 1) A normally closed contact from a concealed magnetic door position switch,

surface mounted magnetic door position switch, or overhead door magnetic door position switch to monitor the status of each door in the system as indicated on the plans.

f. Fire Alarm System 1) Normally closed dry contacts from the fire alarm system for monitoring the

auxiliary fire alarm, system trouble outputs, and the manual unlock switch position.

g. Tamper Switches 1) A normally closed contact from a tamper switch for monitoring the secure

status of all SCPs, power supplies and power distribution units. The number of these units is dependent on the system supplied by the Contractor and shall be included in the total alarm input figures.

21. The system shall provide control point outputs to the following equipment and systems for access control as indicated on the plans: a. Access Control

1) Door control activated by proximity reader card, door release pushbutton, door control panel pushbutton (optional), wireless door release pushbutton. SMS system workstation keyboard, GUI keyboard, and/or SMS system software time schedule.

b. Exit Alarm Units


28 13 00 - 7

1) Unit reset/bypass control activated by SMS system workstation keyboard and/or SMS system software time schedule.

B. Access Control

1. The system shall provide control point outputs for lock power control activated by card readers, door release push button, SMS system workstation keyboard and/or SMS system software time schedule.

2. The system shall provide for card readers and remote control of certain doors as indicated on the plans.

3. The system shall provide for controlling access through card reader controlled doors based on the user's access levels. An access level shall define a door or group of doors accessible by a card holder during a certain time period. Time periods shall include both authorized days and hours. The system shall allow each user to have multiple access levels.

4. The system shall provide for automatic card or key fob invalidation after a programmable number of transactions and/or a programmable time period.

5. The system shall store in memory every proximity reader card transaction, describing the nature of the transaction, time, date, reader location, user name, key fob number and validity status.

6. Unauthorized card reader use attempts shall cause an alarm indication at the system workstation.

7. The system shall provide system workstation display of card reader use (all transactions or violation only) by card/fob number and/or by reader.

8. The system shall provide for momentary or maintained release of card reader controlled door locks via the SMS system workstation keyboard and GUI.

9. The system shall monitor the status of card reader controlled doors (against intrusion or door propping) as indicated on the plans.

10. The system shall provide for user programming of the following data for each person enrolled in the system: a. Card/Key Fob number b. Access level(s) c. Authorized areas d. Effective date e. Expiration date f. Card/Key Fob holder name g. Card/Key Fob holder department name h. Employee identification number i. Card/Key Fob holder home telephone number j. Card/Key Fob holder business telephone number k. Company name (if other than Owner) l. Employee status (active, retired, temporary, etc.) m. Hair color n. Eye color o. Weight p. Height q. Ethnic group r. Ten user definable fields of 28 characters each

11. The system shall provide for software partitioning of the access control data base by password, to restrict access to system programming functions for groups of key fobs and proximity reader cards.

12. The system shall provide for initial bulk loading of the access control data base for large numbers of users with the same access levels.

13. The security system network shall be configured such that a severed or damaged network communications cable, or communications failure with one or more of the system workstations shall not cause failure of the entire network.


28 13 00 - 8

14. The system shall annunciate via the computer workstations all component, communications, and power failure and supervisory alarms anywhere within the SMS system.

C. Point Monitoring

1. The system shall provide for user programming of the following for each alarm input point: a. Point number b. Point type c. Point priority group d. Point location e. Point description f. Normal mode descriptor g. Abnormal mode descriptor h. Response message i. Restore message j. Time program arm and disarm k. Real time arm and disarm

2. The system shall allow for software partitioning of all alarm input points in the system so that they can be reported only at certain workstations during certain time periods and at other workstations during other time periods.

3. The system shall store in memory every alarm condition. 4. The system shall provide for user programming of the following for each control output point:

a. Point number b. Point activation (alarm point, time schedule or real time) c. Maintained or momentary output d. Normally open or normally closed output

5. The system shall allow all control output points in the system to be partitioned by password for real time control only by certain operators.

6. The system shall provide for "transparent" alarms. These points, used to initiate another event within the system, shall not be annunciated at the GUI, system workstation.

7. The system shall provide for time programmable and real time arming and disarming of all alarm input points and all control output points.

8. Alarm reporting shall take precedence over all other system functions. The system workstation/GUI shall visually and audibly annunciate that an alarm condition exists, independent of any other current system workstation activity. The transaction time shall not be more than one (1) second from the time the alarm condition is initiated until it is reported on the system workstation. Response to this type of alarm condition shall under no circumstance require the operator to log out of one SMS application and log into another for alarm response. The use of a hot key shall be the maximum acceptable operator action at the system workstation(s). Operator action at the GUI shall be through mouse technology.

9. The GUI/system workstation shall display the date, time, and number of alarms waiting at all times, etc.

D. Data Base Queries and Printing

1. The system shall provide for report printing and/or display of any group of events within any selectable time period. The report printer shall be capable of producing a hard copy of any report that the system may generate. Reports shall include historical events, defined by any combination of the following categories: a. All events b. Location c. Point number d. Event type (e.g. intrusion, door open, etc.) e. Point status (e.g. on, off, alarm, normal, shunted, etc.)


28 13 00 - 9

f. Management reports of transaction history by proximity card number, holder data, reader number, time period, or invalid attempts.

g. Audit trail reports 2. The system shall provide for creating user defined custom reports. Sorts and queries for

custom reports shall be any field or combination of fields of key fob holder, proximity reader card, alarm input point and control output point data bases. Custom report generators shall be user friendly and shall not require user knowledge of high level programming languages. The Bidder shall provide information in the proposal to demonstrate compliance with this requirement.

3. System shall have a minimum of (10) preprogrammed reports. Such preprogramming reports shall be capable of point and click selections at the system workstation(s), and selection at the GUI to accommodate user defined report items and time periods. The Contractor shall submit report formats to the Owner for review and acceptance.

2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – SERVERS AND APPLICATIONS

A. SMS Directory (Host) Server 1. The server shall provide the following features and functions:

a. Components shall be specifically designed for high reliability and high availability file/web server systems.

b. Sufficient processing capability, memory and the ability to upgrade as necessary to RAID-5 based storage capacity to accommodate the SMS minimum capacities as per these specifications.

c. Supports centralized storage, retrieval, and archive of all SMS database and history information

d. Supports centralized control of operator access to the SMS. e. Supports centralized means of downloading and uploading software and firmware updates

to computer workstations, SCPs and field devices. f. Supports connections to the appropriate security LAN or VLAN, computer workstations,

printers and SCPs. g. Supports monitoring of communications between the SMS server and SCPs such that any

loss of communication shall cause a supervisory alarm at the SMS server, and/or the security computer workstations.

h. Supports annunciation of component, communications and power failure as well as supervisory alarms anywhere within the SMS or Video Surveillance System.

i. Supports database record of all SMS transactions for a minimum of 1,000,000 transactions. The SMS shall have an automated system for backups. The SMS shall have an overwrite feature in which disk space shall be reused in a “first-in, first-out” manner.

2.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – PRODUCTS

A. General: 1. Contractor shall confirm product recommendations with the manufacturer during the bid

process and prior to submittals to ensure that the selected products will meet the most current manufacturer model and/or recommendations (at the time of ordering) in addition to meeting the fundamental intent of the specifications.

B. Software Licenses:

1. All necessary software licenses shall be provided for a complete system, including but not limited to, the Security Management System (SMS) software.

2. Contractor shall provide a software license for each security computer workstation indicated on the drawings. The Owner may elect to provide the security computer workstations, in which case the Contractor is still responsible for providing the software licenses to be loaded onto the computers provided by the Owner.


28 13 00 - 10

3. Contractor shall provide an additional (5) software licenses for loading on other miscellaneous computer workstations (not indicated on the drawings) provided by the Owner.

Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer’s part numbers.

C. Computer Workstations (PCs)

1. Pricing: a. Computer Workstations shall be included in project as a DEDUCT ALTERNATE. If

desired, the Owner may elect to remove the workstations from the project scope in which case the Owner would provide the workstations. If the Owner elects to provide the workstations, the Contractor shall still be responsible for providing security software licenses for those workstations.

2. General Requirements: a. Computer workstations shall have full system functional capability. b. Computer workstations shall not be proprietary to the Contractor. The Owner shall be able

to purchase terminals from computer vendors other than the Contractor. c. Computer workstations shall be re-startable within one (1) minute from a complete

shutdown to full operation. The system shall be self-booting upon power restoration. d. Computer workstations shall provide for non-volatile storage of the operating system

program, user database, video images, and event data files. A hard disk shall be provided as the primary mass memory storage device. A CD ROM drive shall be provided for downloading operating system and system software.

e. Computer workstation monitors shall display real-time system messages, data files and records, operator instructions, data programming information and custom graphic illustrations. System keyboards shall provide for entry of operator commands and acknowledgment, and system data base.

f. Computer workstations shall continuously maintain a database record of all system transactions for a minimum of two hundred thousand (200,000) transactions. The system shall prompt the operator to back up the data base as the memory becomes filled. The system shall have an overwrite feature in which disk space shall be reused, with the oldest data being erased first in order to preclude the loss to vital information. The system shall automatically prompt memory capacity warning at an Owner programmable time prior to overwrite and as overwrite begins.

g. Operator interface at the computer workstation shall be achieved primarily by the use of mouse technology and/or joystick keyboard control. The operator shall be able to perform such system activities as acknowledging alarms, logging messages to the system data base, remotely locking/unlocking doors within the system, call up graphical maps, etc.

h. Computer workstations shall provide for map graphics that depict alarm sensor activation, card readers, alarms or normal activities and system troubles through device icons representing proximity reader cards, alarm points, CCTV cameras, etc. The device icon in alarm shall be differentiated from other device icons by enhancement, color change, and/or flashing. The icons shall be interactive and indicate the real-time status; normal, shunted, active, acknowledged, locked/unlocked, etc. of each device by color change and/or flashing. The computer workstations shall allow for placing icons throughout the various maps and displays. Graphics quality shall be comparable to architectural drawings and shall illustrate partitions, doors and other major built-in structures.

i. Computer workstations shall have a video capture card to enable display of real time video on the video monitor.

j. Computer workstations shall display real-time system messages, data files and records, operator instructions, data programming information and custom graphic illustrations.


28 13 00 - 11

System keyboards shall provide for entry of operator commands and acknowledgment, and system data base.

3. Workstation

a. Enclosure: Mini-Tower

: Provided below are the minimum equipment requirements for computer workstation to be provided.

b. Operating System: Microsoft Windows (most current version) c. Processors: (1) Dual Core Intel Xeon® 3.6Ghz processors, 800MHz Front Side Bus

and 2MB L2 Cache. d. RAM: 2GB PC2-320R 400MHz DDR2 Memory e. Hard Drives-Operating System: (1) 120GB Ultra 320 SCSI 10,000 RPM hard drives

for operating system. 1) The operating system and the database must reside on separate media

(drives). The system supports SCSI and IDE hard drives. In the case of SCSI drives, the disk must be Ultra 160 SCSI or better. In the case of IDE drives, the HD speed must be 7200 RPM, Ultra ATA/100 or better.

f. Hard Drives-Applications: (1) 120 GB Ultra 320 SCSI 10,000 RPM hard drives for Access Control and/or IP Video Surveillance Security Software.

g. Hard Drive Controller: Standard h. Network Controller: Integrated PCI-X 64-Bit 10/100/1000Gigabit Ethernet. i. Graphics Card: Single 256MB nVidia GeForce Series video cards (1) DVI output j. Optical Drive: DVD/CD-R, RW k. I/O Ports:

1) Six USB 2.0 on back. 2) Two USB 2.0 on front. 3) Two IEEE 1394a on back. 4) Two Serial on back. 5) One Parallel on back. 6) Two PS/2 on back. 7) One RJ45 on back. 8) Line-In on back. 9) Line-Out on back. 10) Microphone Connectors on back. 11) Microphone and Headphone Connectors on front.

l. Keyboard: Full Size m. Mouse: Optical with three button and USB 2.0 interface. n. Video Display:

1) Quantity: (1) Video Display 2) Type: LCD Flat Panel. 3) Aspect Ratio: Wide. 4) Size: 20-inch or larger. 5) Mounting: VESA 75 with swivel mount to Console. 6) Dynamic Contrast Ratio: 2000:1 7) Static Contrast Ratio: 700:1. 8) Viewing Angle: 160/160 (CR>5). 9) Frequency

(a) Horizontal: 30 ~ 81kHz (b) Vertical: 56 ~ 75kHz

10) Resolution: 1440x900 or higher. 11) Colors Support: 16.7 Million or higher. 12) Video Inputs: Analog RGB (15-pin D-Sub) and DVI (DVI-D).


28 13 00 - 12

Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers’ part numbers.

D. Card / Badge Printer(s)

1. The Card / Badge printer shall be interfaced to computer workstation for printing security badges. Computer interface shall be via the dedicated Security System LAN or VLAN.

2. The Card / Badge Printer shall be capable of printing employee information, vitals, and picture on proximity card key for photo identification and electronic card access.

Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers part numbers.

E. Credential Badge Station(s) 1. The Credential Badge Station shall consist of the following:

a. Digital video/web camera with USB interface to computer workstation for capturing personnel photo to be printed on proximity card key and saved within a security profile.

b. Digital signature pad with USB interface to computer workstation for programming security profiles.

c. Credential proximity card key reader with USB interface to computer workstation for programming security profiles.


F. SMS Directory (Host) Server

1. As a minimum, the SMS Directory (Host) Server shall meet the following requirements: a. Operating System: Windows Server (most current version), unless otherwise dictated by

the selected SMS head end software. b. Dual core Xeon Series 3.2 GHz Processor with 800MHz FSB and cache. c. 4 GB Dual-channel DDR2 SDRAM d. 10/100/1000 Base-T Network Interface Card e. Dual 80 GB hard drives for the operating system partition in RAID-1 configuration. f. Additional 200 GB hard drives in RAID-5 configuration, as required by the selected SMS

system operating software, for local data base storage. g. CD/DVD-RW optical disk drive h. 19-inch rack mountable


G. Security Control Panel (SCP)

1. The SCPs shall provide an intelligent interface between point monitoring devices, proximity reader cards and the host computer. SCPs shall collect alarm input point status and proximity reader card data, multiplex the information, and transmit that data back to the host computer. The SCPs shall be capable of providing control output points initiated by alarm events, proximity reader card transactions, remote control from operator terminals or by software time programming.

2. SCPs shall be provided so that each SCP will have 15-20 percent spare card reader interface points, input points and output points after all specified points are connected. Each SCP shall support a minimum of two (2) card readers.

3. SCPs shall be provided as indicated on the Security Drawings AND/OR as required, based on Contractor selected communications protocol between SCP and edge devices (i.e. Card Readers, Keypads, etc.). Contractor shall upsize device wiring and/or provide additional SCPs


28 13 00 - 13

(possibly not shown on the drawings) as required to accommodate maximum cable distances (for specific communications protocol selected) in order to provide a complete and fully functioning system. Additional cost for changes due to lack of Contractor coordination and verification shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

4. The SCPs shall be capable of collecting alarm input point status, card reader data, multiplexing the information, and transmitting that data back to the computer.

5. The SCPs shall be capable of providing control output points initiated by alarm events, activated by SMS system workstation keyboard and/or SMS system software time schedule.

6. The SCPs shall be capable of receiving and executing instructions issued automatically from the system or manually by operators via system workstation.

7. The SCPs shall have memory and logic circuits as required to ensure continued operation of connected devices without degradation in system security in the event that communications with the computer(s) are interrupted.

8. The SCP power supplies shall provide four (4) hours of battery backup to provide continuous operation during power failure.

9. All system SCPs shall communicate with the host computer/file server via terminal server(s) connected to and transmitting over the dedicated Security System LAN and Facility LAN (Ethernet) provided by Owner.

10. The SCP shall provide an intelligent interface between proximity reader cards and the computer utilizing distributed procession technology.

11. The SCP shall provide supervised alarm inputs to monitor the status of alarm circuits and report the status information to the SMS computer.

12. The SCP shall provide control relay outputs for controlling devices by remote command from the GUI/system workstation, remote door release push button, through time programming or on alarm point activation.

13. All wiring between the SCP and the monitored alarm devices shall be supervised such that any wiring fault causing a voltage, current or frequency variation exceeding ± 50 percent of the normal value shall cause a supervisory alarm at the operator's terminal. The Bidder shall provide information in the proposal to demonstrate compliance with this requirement.

14. All wiring between the computer and SCPs shall be supervised by poll response technique such that any loss of communication shall cause a supervisory alarm at the system terminal. The Bidder shall provide information in the proposal to demonstrate compliance with this requirement.

15. The SCP shall contain enough RAM to maintain a minimum access control data base of 2500 users.

16. Communications between SCPs and the Computer shall conform to EIA standards. 17. The SCP shall automatically disconnect from the communication loop upon a communication

failure within the SCP to prevent communication to other SCPs in the loop being interrupted. 18. Upon loss of communication with the Computer, the SCP shall contain enough RAM to operate

normally. In addition, the SCP shall store up to two thousand (2,000) proximity card transactions and up to 16 events per potential alarm input, and transmit that data to the computer as soon as communication is restored.

19. The SCP shall provide an intrusion alarm indication on the system if the proximity reader card controlled door is opened without an authorized card reader use or request to exit.

20. Upon verification of key fob authorization or request to exit, the SCP shall activate a door control relay output and shunt the intrusion alarm. The lock control output contacts shall be rated for 2 A @ 24V DC. Relay activation time shall be adjustable from the system workstation from one (1) to thirty (30) seconds on a per reader basis. The door shall automatically relock upon closure. On doors equipped with electromechanical mortise locks, activation of the integral request to exit micro switch shall only shunt the magnetic door position switch.

21. Transaction time for authorized proximity card key fobs shall be less than 0.5 second from the time of key fob read until the door is unlocked.


28 13 00 - 14

22. The SCP shall provide a door prop alarm indication on the SMS system if the reader controlled door is held open past an adjustable time period after and authorized key fob use or request to exit. The door prop time delay shall be adjustable from the system workstation from one (1) to sixty (60) seconds on a per reader basis. This door prop condition shall report as a unique event and not generate the same message as a door forced open alarm.

23. All alarm and control points and card reader inputs shall be capable of independent time programming via software controls from the system Computer.

24. The SCP power supplies shall provide for four (4) hours of battery backup to provide continuous operation during power failure.

25. The SCP shall be housed in a locking steel enclosure designed for surface mounting. The Contractor shall provide any conduit required from the SCP to power supplies, junction boxes or wireways. All SCPs shall be keyed alike and shall be on the same key as all security system power supply and power distribution cabinets and power supplies.

26. The SCP shall have a tamper switch provided to sense the removal or opening of the enclosure cover. The tamper switch shall be a normally closed plunger type switch integrated into the enclosure to sense the removal or opening of the enclosure cover.


H. Proximity Card Reader Device (Wall mount type)

1. The card reader device shall utilize proximity/smart card technology to read encoded data from cards and key fobs and transmit the data to the SCP.

2. An LED on the face of the card reader and an audible tone shall indicate authorized and unauthorized reader uses.

3. The card reader shall mount directly to a metal surface. 4. Wall mounted card readers shall mount directly to a standard single gang electrical box and

shall have a minimum read range of five (5) inches. 5. The Contractor shall supply the manufacturer recommended power supply for the proximity

reader card. The power supply shall be UL Class 2, power limited.


I. Proximity Card Reader Device (Mullion mount type)

1. The card reader device shall utilize proximity/smart card technology to read encoded data from cards and key fobs and transmit the data to the SCP.

2. An LED on the face of the card reader and an audible tone shall indicate authorized and unauthorized reader uses.

3. The card reader shall mount directly to a metal or aluminum mullion surface. 4. Mullion mounted card readers shall be no wider than a door mullion and shall have a minimum

read range of five (5) inches. 5. The Contractor shall supply the manufacturer recommended power supply for the proximity

reader card. The power supply shall be UL Class 2, power limited.


J. Access Key Fob

1. The access key fob shall not indicate the Contractor or manufacturer name and/or logo. 2. The Contractor shall provide 100 access key fobs. 3. The key fob shall have an eyelet provided for attachment to a key ring. 4. The key fob shall be made of ABS plastic.


28 13 00 - 15

5. The key fob shall be a passive device with no internal battery, but shall contain a semiconductor element which is energized when brought within the operating range of the reader causing transmission of the code from the tag to the reader.

6. The key fob operating temperature shall be -22 degrees to +160 degrees F.


K. Access Card

1. The access card shall not indicate the Contractor or manufacturer name and/or logo. 2. The Contractor shall provide 100 access cards. 3. The card key shall have an eyelet provided for attachment to lanyard. 4. The card key shall be made of printable plastic. 5. The card key shall be a passive device with no internal battery, but shall contain a

semiconductor element which is energized when brought within the operating range of the reader causing transmission of the code from the tag to the reader.

6. The key fob operating temperature shall be -22 degrees to +160 degrees F.


L. Concealed Door Position Switch

1. The concealed door position switch shall for monitoring of the open/closed status of certain doors as indicated on the plans.

2. The concealed door position switch shall be mounted within the door header frame, approximately 6-inches from the latch edge of the door frame, or per manufacturer recommendations. Contractor shall confirm exact mounting position as recommended by the manufacturer for doors with electric strikes or electromagnetic locks located at the door frame header (if applicable).

3. The concealed door position switch shall operate with up to ½" gap between the switch and magnet when mounted in a steel door and frame. The contact configuration shall be normally closed when the door is closed. The switch and magnet shall mount into a 1" diameter hole.

4. A concealed magnetic door position switch for card reader controlled doors shall indicate the open/closed status of the associated door(s) and shall be used by the system to report door propping and unauthorized entry.


M. Overhead Door Position Switch

1. The overhead door position switch shall be a heavy duty floor mounted contact with an aluminum housing and a 3-foot stainless steel armored cable. The overhead door position switch shall operate with up to a 3" gap between the switch and the magnet when mounted on a steel door or frame. The contact configuration shall be SPDT.


N. Request-to-Exit (REX) and Alarm Shunting Devices.

1. Integrated REX: Typical card access doors shall have integrated request-to-exit functions built in to the door hardware, as indicated in the Door Hardware Specifications (Division 8).

2. PIR / Motion REX: Select card access doors shall have PIR/Motion Request-to-exit (REX) devices, as indicated on the Security Access Control Schedules, for unlocking select door


28 13 00 - 16

locks. Request to exit devices shall detect motion and be wired to the request to exit input of the associated SCP. Activation of the request to exit device shall release the lock and shall shunt the intrusion alarm output.

3. Pushbutton REX: Select card access doors shall have Push Button REX device, as indicated on the Security Access Control Schedules, for unlocking select door locks. The Pushbutton REX may be the primary REX or secondary back-up to a PIR / Motion REX device. The pushbutton shall be wired to the request to exit input of the associated SCP. Activation of the request to exit device shall release the lock and shall shunt the intrusion alarm output.

4.

All Request-to-exit (REX) information indicated within the Security Access Control Schedules and Details is subject to change as a result of potential door hardware schedule changes. Contractor shall review the Door Hardware Specifications in detail prior to submitting product data and shop drawings. Any conflicts between the Security drawings or schedules and Door Hardware Specifications shall be resolved through the product data and shop drawing review process to ensure that the Security Contractor has fully coordinated the requirements with the Construction Manager and/or General Contractor, Architect, Door Hardware Consultant, Electrical Engineer, and Security Consultant.


O. Security System Component Power Supply (12V DC)

1. The device is intended to power SCP boards, device interfaces, and/or edge devices. 2.

3. The device power supply shall meet the following minimum specifications:

Edge device (i.e. Card Readers, Keypads, etc.) power supplies and wiring shall be provided based on Contractor selected communications protocol between SCP and edge devices. Contractor shall upsize device wiring as necessary to accommodate edge device distances from SCPs. Additional cost for changes due to lack of Contractor coordination and verification shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

Type ULC Listed Class II power limited

Input 120V AC hard wired Output Regulated and filtered 12V DC individual fused outputs

to each device. 4/5 Amps continuous The power supply shall be sized to deliver 150 percent of the actual connected load.

Battery backup Four (4) hours of rechargeable backup for the connected load.

Battery Batteries shall be sealed gel type. Low battery supervision.

Enclosure Key lockable wall mount housing with tamper switch.


2.5 WIRE AND CABLE

A. The Contractor shall provide security system wire and cable. Wire and cable shall meet the following minimum specifications: 1. All wire and cable shall be Underwriter's Laboratories (ULC) listed. 2. All wire and cable shall be plenum rated type cable.


28 13 00 - 17

3. All wire and cable shall be verified with manufacturer and shall meet individual system or subsystem manufacturer specifications.

4. All insulated wire and cable shall conform to the minimum requirements of Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Standards. Wire and cable shall comply with the applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), latest edition, in regards to cable construction and usage.

5. The conductors of wires shall be copper, and have conductivity in accordance with the standardization rules of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE). The conductor and each strand shall be round and free of kinks and defects.

6. Color coding shall be accomplished by using solidly colored insulation. Grounding conductors, where insulated, shall be colored solid green or identified with green color as required by the National Electric Code (NEC).

7. All wire and cable insulation shall be rated for a minimum of 300 V. 8. All cable sizes are listed for reference but shall be verified by the Contractor to ensure that

cable is appropriately sized for voltage drop, which is dependant on exact cable routing.


B. Card Reader Control and Power Cable (Low Voltage)

1. Single credential reader or keypad: Provide 7-conductor #18 AWG, UL listed, stranded cable with overall shield and drain wire.

2. Dual credential reader or keypad (i.e. Card-In, Card-Out): Provide 9-conductor #18 AWG, UL listed, stranded cable with overall shield and drain wire.

3. Wiring shall accommodate requirement for powering LED and audible beeper function. 4. Contractor shall confirm proposed wiring is acceptable to the manufacturer(s) of the card

reader or keypad device and SCP interface point, prior to ordering. Provide additional conductors as required to accommodate fully functioning system.

C. Miscellaneous Edge Device Control Cable (Low Voltage)

1. Wiring shall be stranded twisted pair with overall jacket and UL Listing, sized to compensate for length of cable run and electrical current requirements as verified by the Contractor.

2. Minimum size of #20 AWG conductor shall be used for each security zone signal.

D. Miscellaneous Edge Device Power Cable (Low Voltage – 12V DC) 1. Wiring shall be stranded twisted pair with shield drain wire, overall jacket and UL Listing,

sized to compensate for length of cable run and electrical current requirements as verified by the Contractor.

2. Minimum size of #18 AWG conductor shall be used for each power signal.


E. Panel and Enclosure Grounding Cable

1. Alarm panel and enclosure grounding, lightning suppression, and 120VAC surge suppression drain cable shall be #8 AWG, copper cable.

F. Request-to-exit (REX) Control Cable (Low Voltage)

1. Wiring shall be stranded twisted pair with overall jacket and UL Listing, sized to compensate for length of cable run and electrical current requirements as verified by the Contractor.

2. Minimum size of #20 AWG conductor shall be used for each REX signal.


28 13 00 - 18

G. Electric Locking Mechanism Power Cable (Low Voltage from Comm Room) 1. Specified under Division 8 – Door Hardware Specifications. Contractor shall confirm if

Locking Mechanism power cables (as specified in Division 8) are to be included in the Access Control scope of work, in order to provide complete and fully functioning system.

H. Electric Locking Mechanism Power Cable (where 120V is required at the door)

1. Specified under Division 8 – Door Hardware Specifications. Contractor shall confirm if Locking Mechanism power cables (as specified in Division 8) are to be included in the Access Control scope of work, in order to provide complete and fully functioning system.


3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 INSTALLATION


3.3 CONDUIT, BOXES AND RACEWAYS


3.4 WIRING TECHNIQUES


3.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS


3.6 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES


3.7 LABELING


3.8 SYSTEM START-UP


3.9 DEMONSTRATION


3.10 TRAINING


3.11 RECORD DOCUMENTATION


3.12 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE


3.13 POINT CHARTS


28 13 00 - 19


END OF SECTION


28 13 00 - 20


Table 1 - Access Control System Components Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number

1 Security Management System (SMS) Software - FCWnx v7 Enterprise

GE Security WX70ENT-16CAPMIC

2 SMS Software - Reader Capacity License (16-256 card readers)

GE Security WXRDRLIC-0256CAP

3 SMS Software - Camera Capacity License (16-256 card readers)

GE Security WXCAMLIC-0256CAP

4 SMS Software - FCWnx Client License GE Security WXSWOPT-001CNT

5 Photo ID Software - FCWnx Integrated Photo ID Credentialing

GE Security WXSWOPT-CLNTRED

6 API Interface - FCWnx API Connectivity (if required)

GE Security WXSWOPT-001APIC

7 Access Control Server - Dell PE2900 Raid-5 (or most current version at time of submittal)

Dell PCSERV-2900TR5

8 Server Operating System Software (Base License - 5 clients)

GE Security 441519001

9 Server Operating System Software (Additional License - 1 per additional client)

GE Security PCSW-SQLADDCAL

10 Server Software - Windows SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition D.B.


11 Server Software - Preload and application configuration option

GE Security PCSVC-PRELOADEEGE

12 Computer Workstation - Hewlett Packard WS with dual video monitor support, dual core processing (or most current version at time of submittal)

Hewlett Packard (HP)

HPXW8400

13 Client Workstation Software - Windows XP Profesional Edition Operating System (Base license - 5 clients)


14 Client Workstation Software - Windows XP Profesional Edition Operating System (Additional license - 1 client)

GE Security PCSW-WINADDCAL

15 Client Workstation Software - Preload and application configuration option

GE Security PCSVC-PRELOADPRO

16 22-inch Monitor (Flat Panel) Dell PCPER-22FPMON

17 Computer Workstation Accessories - Desktop Credential Reader (for card enrollment)


18 Report/Administrative Printer HP Laserjet Per recommendation of SMS Manufacturer

19 Card Badge Printer - Fargo DTC 550 Dual Side Printer

Fargo IMGPR-F550DSSC

20 Photo Badging Camera Kit GE Security 420224002

21 Signature Capture Pad - For Badging Station GE Security 420613001

22 Security Control Panel (SCP) - M3000PNXplus GE Security M3PPMSP


28 13 00 - 21

23 Reader Interface Unit - For Wiegand Interface GE Security 521252001

24 Reader Interface Board (8-port) - 8RP GE Security 110100501

25 Digital Input Board - 20 supervised points GE Security 110072003

26 Digital Output Board (with relays) - 16 points GE Security 110078001

27 Proximity Card Reader - Standard Smart Card (with MR J-box)


32 Proximity Key Fobs GE Security 700195001

34 Concealed Door Position Switch (Door Monitor) GE Security Sentrol 1078CW

37 12V DC Lock Power Supply N/A Integral to Security Control Panel (SCP)

38 24V AC Device Power Supply GE Security KTP-24-16-200

39 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) APC Per recommendation of SMS Manufacturer

40 Low Voltage Power Cable (18 AWG minimum) Belden, General Cable

Per recommendation of SMS Manufacturer

41 Reader Cabling (20 AWG minimum) - 4-pair cable

Belden, General Cable

8725, C1368A

42 Alarm Point Monitoring Cable (22 AWG minimum) - 1-pair cable


9406, C1350A

43 Control Point Cable, Low Voltage (18 AWG minimum) - 1-pair cable


8471, C2405A


FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 - 1

SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


A. Extent of fire alarm systems work is indicated by drawings, schedules, and riser diagrams.

B. All existing electrical equipment to be reused must comply with current codes and standards and be tested as part of this project.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire alarm systems of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with fire

alarm systems work similar to that required for this project. 1. Firm with manufacturer's factory trained personnel.

2. Firm with factory authorized service organization and spare parts stock within 50 miles of the University and with a 24 hour response time.

3. Electrical journeymen shall have at least 2 years of documented fire alarm installation experience.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. Each and every item of the fire alarm system shall be listed as the product of a single fire alarm system

manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL) and shall bear the UL label on all devices, appliances and panels comprising the system. All control equipment shall be listed under the category UOJZ as a single control unit and cross listed with the base loop fire alarm system. Partial listings shall be unacceptable.

2. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of NFPA and Local Code

Requirements, and the National Electrical Code with particular attention to article 760. All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL 864 requirements or Standard #497B as applicable.

3. The fire alarm system and devices shall comply with ADA 1990 and UL 1971 requirements.

4. Uniform Building Code.

5. All other applicable codes and standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and installation instructions, for each type of fire alarm system equipment. Submit a complete list of equipment to be furnished, including quantities of equipment, annotated catalog weights and physical sizes. Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in maintenance manuals.



B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings within 30 days after award of contract showing system components, locations and full schematic of system wiring showing conductor routings, color coding, quantities, and connection details. Provide updated room names and numbers that match the names and numbers as labeled at the building. Room names and numbers shown on the contract documents are not necessarily those that are currently being used in the building. The fire alarm manufacturer shall coordinate with the contractor and owner on existing and new work and survey the site on existing work to identify the proper names and numbers. All conduit routing must be submitted to, and accepted by, the Architect/Engineer. Shop drawing documents must be submitted simultaneously with sprinkler system documents and prior to installation.

This information shall be submitted on 1/8" = 1'-0" scale building floor plans. No other systems shall be included on these plans. Reproduction of contract drawing will not be acceptable.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including outlet or back box requirements for each piece of

equipment.

D. Submit manufacturer's certificate that system meets or exceeds specified requirements.

E. Submit verification of system operation by manufacturer or his authorized representative.

F. Submit back-up battery calculations.

G. All shop drawings and battery calculations shall be submitted to the authority having jurisdiction for review after review by the Architect/Engineer.

H. Submit three copies of test results and data to Architect/Engineer no later than seven days after conclusion of

tests described in this section.

I. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of fire alarm equipment installed, including furnished specialties and accessories. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

1. At time of demonstration and testing the Contractor shall turn over to the University O & M Manuals

which shall contain the following (as a minimum submittal).

a. Building fire alarm prints with Workman's notes.

b. Provide three sets of Owner operation and maintenance manuals in three ring binders. The operation and maintenance manuals shall as a minimum contain the following:

1) Record Drawings:

a) Complete, reproducible (24" x 36") as-built plans and CAD disks showing conduit

routing and number of conductors per conduit. Show all devices including known future devices and indicate as such.

b) Revised schematic, wiring, and interconnection diagrams of all circuits, internal and

external, for all equipment installed and exact location for all devices. Provide manufacturer's technical information drawings. These schematics shall include the conductor color coding and terminal identification system, location of all terminal boxes complete with numbering.

c) Complete, as-installed, riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of all alarm-

initiating devices, supervisory devices, and all signaling appliances on all signaling circuits.



d) A complete description of the system operation, including a schedule of relay abbreviations used on the drawings, list of relay functions, and the sequence of relay operation during supervisory trouble and alarm conditions.

e) As-built point-to-point wiring diagrams depicting every device, conduit routing, wire

sizes, and all equipment locations, on CAD disks and reproducible drawings with CAD backgrounds provided by the Architect or Engineer, complete with room numbers. Turn over the workman's set with their notes to the University.

2) All maintenance data including cut sheets for all components; all technical wiring diagrams

and schematics for all related equipment and components.

3) Certification of equipment that it is UL approved on manufacturer's letter head including UL reference number.

4) Fixture cuts of all devices and components.

5) Warranty system, all parts and labor for a period of one year, free of defects in materials and

workmanship at no cost to the University. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Handle fire alarm equipment carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new.

B. Store fire alarm equipment in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris,

and physical damage. 1.5 OPERATION:

A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station, automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch shall be as follows:

1. All audible alarm indicating appliances shall sound a distinctive and continuous fire alarm signal until

silenced by the alarm silence switch at the control panel.

2. All visible alarm indicating appliances shall flash continuously until the system is reset. Visual alarm devices shall continue to operate when audible devices are silenced. Any subsequent zone alarm after reset shall reactivate the alarm indicating appliances.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXISTING CONTROL PANEL MANUFACTURER:

A. Simplex-Grinnell

B. Fire Alarm Cable

1. West Penn 2. Belden 3. Annixter

2.2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS:



A. General: Provide complete fire alarm system products of types, sizes, and capacities indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components; construct in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. Provide fire alarm and detection systems for applications indicated.

B. Wiring System Materials: Provide basic wiring materials which comply with Division-16 Basic Electrical

Materials and Methods sections, "Raceways" and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings"; types to be selected by Installer.

1. Provide wire and cable in accordance with requirements of manufacturer. Wire insulation shall comply

with NEC Article 760.

2. Provide copper conductors, solid #14 AWG minimum. Refer to table in 16721.3.3.E for color coding of wires.

2.3 ALARM SIGNAL DEVICES:

A. Fire Alarm Horn/Strobe Combination: Provide high impact resistant red LEXAN horn/strobe combination devices as shown on the plans. Each assembly shall consist of two independent devices which are manufactured as compatible with each other and with the control equipment. Each assembly shall provide a terminal strip or wire leads for true in-out wiring connections. The strobe unit shall have a candela-second rating in compliance with ADA requirements and be rated at 24 VDC. Strobes shall be clear with red letters "FIRE" on two sides.

1. Provide wall mounting as shown on the plans. Verify manufacturer mounting requirements prior to

rough in.

B. Individual Strobe Unit: Provide strobe units mounted where shown. Units shall match those used in the combination horn/strobe or speaker/strobe specified.

C. Where multiple strobe units are visible from a single location and the potential visible flash rate is 5 hz or

more, provide synchronizing modules and strobes compatible for synchronizing as required. Provide additional wiring, conduit, and power supplies as necessary.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which fire alarm systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION:

A. Install electrical identification in accordance with Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section "Electrical Identification."



3.3 INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM MATERIALS:

A. Install wiring, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections, "Raceways", "Wires and Cables", and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings" for wiring of non-power limited circuits. Install all wiring in conduit or entrance raceway.

B. Addressable wiring may be AT Tapped@ with written permission of the UCB Fire Alarm Shop. Failure to

obtain permission will result in the Contractor rewiring the device per CU direction at their own cost (no cost to the University).

C. General wire requirements are:

1. Minimum conduit shall be 3/4" for all horizontal floor/device runs. All risers/distribution conduits shall

be a minimum 3/4" to 8" x 8" minimum J-boxes.

2. Contractor shall not pull fire alarm wiring through conduits with line voltage circuits.

D. Fire alarm circuit conductor terminations:

1. Wires in control panels are to be landed on numbered terminal strips with one conductor per screw terminal pressure connector. Arrange wiring neatly using clips and harnesses as required. Identify conductors and the terminal landed upon per Section 16195 - Identification. Include wiring diagram on inside cover of panels and in O&M=s.

2. All junction boxes larger than 4" x 4" shall be provided with numbered terminal strips with all wires

numbered and landed on corresponding terminal strip (one conductor per screw terminal strip). If a 4" x 4" junction box is not large enough due to wire fill requirements, the next minimum size junction box shall be 8" x 8". Only one extension ring is allowed on a 4" x 4" box with one extension ring, then an 8" x 8" box upgrade with terminal strips is required. Include wiring diagram on inside cover of boxes and in O&M=s.

E. Color code wire sizes for fire alarm system as follows, all wire is solid copper:

Circuit Type

Colors

Size

Fire Alarm Zones

(+)Red (-)Black

14 THHN

Mapnet

(+)Red (-)Black

18 Twisted Shielded

Communications Lines

(+)White or Red

(-)Black

18 Twisted Shielded

Audio Risers (panel to floor terminal

cabinet or floor to floor riser

(+)Red (-)Black

12 Twisted Shielded

Horns

Twisted-Jacketed

(+)Red (-)Black

14 THHN

Strobes (visuals)

(+)Yellow w/stripe

(-)Brown w/stripe

14 THHN



Speakers (floor wiring-riser to device) (+)Red (-)Black

14 Twisted Shielded

Remote test Switches

White/White

14 THHN

Remote Lights

(+)Red (-)Black

14 THHN

Damper Controls

Same as Fans

14 THHN

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS:

A. Install fire alarm system as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and complying with applicable portions of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation."

B. Wiring: Wiring of fire alarm system is work of this section, but is not specifically detailed on drawings.

1. Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Color code wiring and install per

manufacturer's point-to-point wiring diagram and cable/terminal strip schedule. Connect each device with sufficient wiring to complete its intended operation.

2. Where there are a number of power requiring devices such as smoke detectors, fan relays, door holders

and smoke damper operators installed in a circuit, group in numbers so power required does not exceed 80% of manufacturer's power supply rating. Provide extra wiring, or extra power supplies required to fulfill that requirement. In addition, provide extra or larger size wiring to alleviate voltage drops which makes device operate beyond voltage limits for which it was designed. Determine above with manufacturer's representative while equipment is being installed.

3. The existing system shall remain in operation while the new systems are being installed, tested, and

accepted.

C. Mount devices per UFAS 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. All contractors shall have documented a minimum of five (5) years commercial or industrial fire alarm installation experience. Journeyman shall have a minimum of two (2) years documented fire alarm installation experience. Documentation shall be submitted if requested.

B. Notify the Department of Facilities Management two (2) weeks prior to request of scheduling of final testing.

Notify Facilities Management=s Service Desk and University Fire Alarm Technician at (303) 492-5522 three working days prior to any interruption or modification of any existing fire alarm system for scheduling of work.

C. All wiring is to be done by experienced personnel under supervision of manufacturer=s representative. The

fire alarm equipment supplier shall make a thorough inspection and test of the completed fire alarm system prior to final interconnection to the central station. All conduit shall be installed by a licensed electrician. This does not require the foreman to be licensed.

D. Limit downtimes as much as possible and schedule all downtimes with UCB at least 2 weeks in advance.



3.6 SYSTEM TEST AND APPROVAL:

A. System installation shall be verified as complete by contractor as follows:

1. Installation is complete with all devices. 2. Wiring is checked for opens, shorts, ground faults, improper branching, etc. 3. Fill out and sign attached Fire Alarm Certification and Description form and turn over to CU Facilities

Management before 100% test. Manufacturers approved equal form will be acceptable.

B. Before final interconnection, the Contractor shall perform a complete system check with the manufacturer=s technician present. This test shall be completed without the involvement of the Owner and prior to scheduling the final test with the Owner. This test shall include setting every device into alarm individually, operating each pull station, operating all audible systems, operating all functions in the FACP, etc. The purpose of this test is to ensure that the entire system is functioning properly prior to the final test. This Apreliminary@ test shall be documented as to what was tested, the testing procedure used and all detector sensitivities. This test documentation and the attached Fire Alarm Certificate and description form shall be submitted to the Owner for review prior to scheduling a final test.

C. 100% System Operation Test:

1. The 100% fire alarm test shall be scheduled only after receipt of the "Fire Alarm System Certification

and Description Form" by Facilities Management Electrical Engineering and Project Manager. The 100% fire alarm test shall be scheduled by the Facilities Management Project Manager. Contractor shall notify all parties of scheduled test times, dates, and locations. All tests shall be conducted by the contractor/manufacturer and witnessed by the University. The Contractor shall submit to Facilities Management Project Manager, and electrical engineer the proposed date/agenda/schedule of the test and a letter stating proposed method of testing all devices a minimum of two weeks prior to the date of test.

2. The Contractor shall furnish all test equipment necessary including an electric detector tester and canned

smoke to set the detector into an alarm condition. In cases where a system was remodeled or added to, all new devices shall be 100% tested and a representative quantity of existing devices, as determined by UCB, shall be re-tested to ensure proper operation still remains.

3. Final testing shall be performed in accordance to UCB Standards and all compliance forms completely

filled out. (See attached forms)

D. The following tests shall be required, depending upon the particular installation, and the following parties shall be required to attend. Attendance by others indicated as optional may be desirable.

1. Initiation of All Other Devices:

a. Devices to be tested include:

1) Horn/strobes

b. Attendance required by:

1) Contractor 2) CU - Fire Alarm 3) Manufacturer's Rep.

c. Inform the following:

1) CU - Owner's Rep. 2. Horn/Speaker Audibility Test:



a. Attendance required by:

1) Contractor 2) CU - Fire Alarm 3) Manufacturer's Rep.

b. Inform the following:

1) CU - Owner's Rep.

E. A punch list shall be developed during the 100% test. The final punch list will come from the design engineer

within two weeks and shall incorporate all relevant University items. The Contractor shall correct all items on the punch list and reschedule through the Project Manager retesting of all devices to show compliance with the punch list (first retest). All costs incurred for all retests above and beyond the first retest shall be borne and paid for by the Contractor. After all punch list items have been corrected all parties shall sign the "Building Fire Alarm Acceptance Form" (included at the end of this section). The Contractor shall turn this form over to the Facilities Management Project Manager with a copy to Facilities Management Electrical Engineer. The contract cannot be closed out without this form.

3.7 INSTALLATION DOCUMENTATION FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE:

A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished as specified herein. Four (4) manuals and four (4) sets of drawings for each fire alarm system shall be provided. One copy shall be encased in an accessible plastic envelope permanently affixed to the FACP and sub-panels. All other copies shall be delivered with the final indexed copies of approved shop drawings and catalog data in a hard-back cover 3-ring binder which is clearly labeled to designate to building for which it is intended. Manuals shall be as approved by the Engineer and the University. The working field set with workman=s notes shall be turned over to the University. All technical information shall include the manufacturers logos.

B. Record Drawings:

1. One (1) set of complete reproducible (24"x36") record drawings the same size as the original drawings and one (1) CAD disk showing conduit routing and number of conductors per conduit. Show all devices including known future devices and indicate as such.

2. Provide as-built point-to-point wiring diagrams depicting every device (CAD backgrounds provided by

Architect or Engineer, complete with room numbers.) Provide revised schematic, wiring, and interconnection diagrams of all circuits, internal and external for all equipment installed and exact locations for all devices. These schematics shall include the conductor color coding and terminal number identification system, location of all terminal boxes complete with numbering and each device address.

3. Complete, as-installed, riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of all alarm initiating devices,

supervisory devices, and all signaling appliances on all signaling circuits.

4. A complete description of the system operation, including a schedule of relay abbreviations used on the drawings, list of relay functions, and the sequence of relay operation during supervisory trouble and alarm conditions.

5. Complete wiring and control diagrams for control and shutdown circuits for fan systems.

6. Completed UCB certificate of compliance and testing. (See attached forms)

7. The manufacturer=s representative and CU Facilities Management representative shall walk through the

building and spot check 5-10% of device locations against the as-builts. If devices are not as shown, the



drawings shall be rejected for a redraw. Upon re-submittal, another spot check will be done. If deficiencies are still found, an independent audit to the system by the system manufacturer will be required and the cost of the audit will be the responsibility of the installing contractor.

C. Parts List:

1. Recommended spare parts list shall be received with the record drawings, including:

a. Complete parts catalog of installed parts (include quantities).

b. Complete parts price list. c. Recommended spare parts list.

3.8 GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES:

A. Conduct instruction to the Owner=s representatives on all normal maintenance and trouble shooting procedures down to circuit board level of equipment included in contract (1 to 4 hours as required for remodeled systems).

B. Failure to comply with all contractual obligations resulting in costs incurred by the University, shall result in

those costs being transferred to the appropriate Contractor for payment.

C. Contractor shall follow Owner=s shut down procedures as outlined within specification section and Owners= standards. Contractor shall provide a fire watch when required by written guidelines.

D. Contractor shall be financially responsible for all fees assessed to the University by Boulder Fire Department,

and all lost research due to false alarms.

END OF SECTION

University of Colorado APPLICATION FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST Building ____________________________________________________________

Installation Contractor: ______________________________________________________________ Foreman: ____________________________________ Date of Final Pre-Test:__________________ System Manufacturer:___________________________ Technician: __________________________

The above listed Contractor and Manufacturers Representative hereby acknowledge that they have completely Pre-tested the following devices and functions for proper operation (check mark indicates completion of testing for all devices in listed category):

DEVICES

Smoke detectors tested for Alarm

Heat detectors tested for Alarm

Duct Detectors tested for Alarm

Manual Pull Stations tested for Alarm

Duct Detector Remote LED/Test Switches

Tamper Switches tested for Supervisory

Water Flow Switches Tested for Alarm

Pre-Action Low Air for Supervisory

Pre-Action APS tested for Alarm

SIGNALS

Audible appliances for audibility and operation

Visual appliances for operation

Outside Water Flow Bell tracks Main Water Flow Switch

AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

Fan shutdown operations

Damper operations

Primary Elevator recall

Alternate Elevator recall

Elevator Shunt

Door Holder Operations

We are applying for a final acceptance test with the University of Colorado Fire Systems and Life Safety groups. The requested date of the final acceptance test is _____/_____/_____, starting at (time)_______. Foreman: ___________________________________________ Date: ________________________ Manufacturer Rep: ____________________________________ Date: ________________________ Note: No exceptions are allowed-all devices and functions to be 100% tested PRIOR to applying for final acceptance test.

Page - 2

University of Colorado CERTIFICATION OF SYSTEM OPERATION Building____________________________________________________________ Date _________________________________ Contractor: __________________________ System Model_______________________________ All operational features and functions of this system were tested and found to be operating properly (checked below) in accordance with the job specifications.

Smoke detectors tested for Alarm Heat detectors tested for Alarm Duct Detectors tested for Alarm Manual Pull Stations tested for Alarm Water Flow Switches tested for Alarm Tamper Switches tested for Supervisory Pre-Action Low Air for Supervisory Pre-Action APS tested for Alarm Duct Detector Remote LED/Test Switches Audible appliances for audibility and operation Visual appliances for operation Fan shutdown operations Damper operations Primary Elevator recall Alternate Elevator recall Elevator Shunt Door Holder Operations

Department of Facilities Management Fire and Life Safety (Audible and Water Flow): Signed: Date: Department of Facilities management Fire Systems (Devices and Functions): Signed: Date: Department of Facilities Management: Signed: Date:

PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review

SITE CLEARING31 1000-1

SECTION 31 1000SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided, to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, and other vegetation toremain or as designated by Owner in pre-construction conference.

2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, and other vegetation.3. Clearing and grubbing.4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place and removing

site utilities.7. Removing existing fill.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section “LEED” or “Sustainable Design” requirements for product data andmanufacturing documentation.

2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and sitegrading.

3. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for storm watererosion and sediment mitigation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, andclay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red thanunderlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2inches (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or othernonsoil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protectedduring construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line ofgroups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain on Owner'sproperty, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed fromProject site.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings,adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused bysite clearing.

B. Record drawings, identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurfacestructural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. Information required may also be included inDivision 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

C. LEED Submittals

1. Include manufacture’s product data indicating separate percentages, by weight, of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for projects having recycled content.Include statement indicating material costs for products.

2. Indicate location of manufacturing facility including name, address and distance betweenmanufacturing facility and the proposed site. Provide manufacture’s documentationindicating location where the base materials were extracted, mined, quarried, harvested,etc. and the distance between this location and the project site. Also include materialcosts, excluding cost of installation.


A. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’sRepresentative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which mayalso be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupiedor used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilitieswithout permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal andalteration work on property adjoining Owner’s property will be obtained by Owner before awardof Contract. Authority and permits for performing indicated removal and alteration work onadjacent rights-of-way shall be obtained by Contractor.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed in writing by Owner’sRepresentative.

C. Protect improvements on Owner’s property.

D. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner'spremises where indicated.

E. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located beforesite clearing.



F. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation controlmeasures are in place.

G. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties havingjurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified inDivision 31 Section "Earth Moving," (PART 2 – PRODUCTS).

2.2 LEED REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retainsmaterial integrity.

B. Preference shall be given to materials that are manufactured, harvested, extracted, mined,quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks, survey control points, monuments, property line pins andother reference points from disturbance during construction. If disturbed or destroyed, restore orreplace at no cost to Owner.

B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing waterrunoff or airborne dust from leaving project site.

C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore or replace damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable toOwner.

3.2 TREE PROTECTION

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around drip line of individual trees or around perimeterdrip line of groups of trees to remain before starting site clearing. Remove fence whenconstruction is complete.

1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area.2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area.3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.



C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear andexcavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil toexpose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated

and covered with soil.3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified

asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues.4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying and backfill with soil

as soon as possible.

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by constructionoperations, in a manner approved by Owner’s Representative.

1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submitdetails of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined bythe qualified arborist.

3.3 UTILITIES

A. Contractor will locate, identify, arrange for disconnect and seal or cap off utilities indicated to beremoved before site clearing.

1. Verify that utilities indicated as abandoned have been disconnected and capped beforeproceeding with site clearing.

2. Arrange with utility companies having jurisdiction to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unlesspermitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporaryutility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utilityinterruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative’s writtenpermission.

C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

D. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 2 Sections covering siteutilities. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 15 Mechanical orDivision 16 Electrical Sections.

E. After removal of underground utilities, as indicated, properly cap and/or plug existing lines toremain in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of newconstruction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.



2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful mannerwhere such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.

3. Grind stumps and completely remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depthof 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade.

4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unlessfurther excavation or earth moving is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm),and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered or as determined by Geotechnical Engineer in amanner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm) unless authorized by Owner’sRepresentative.

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees.3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading a thicker layer of topsoil.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary tofacilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated on plans.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut lengthof existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut facesvertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

C. Remove existing fill. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation and/or drawings for informationregarding suitability for re-use and estimates of location/extent of existing fill.

3.7 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclablematerials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport themto recycling facilities.

END OF SECTION 31 1000


EARTH MOVING31 2000-1

SECTION 31 2000EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning earth moving may be found on the civil drawings, in theproject geotechnical report and University of Colorado construction standards. In case ofconflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, themore stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning earth moving may be found in the geotechnical investigationreport by Reynolds & Associates dated February 3, 2009. All requirements of this report shallbe followed. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be thecontractors responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns andgrasses, and exterior plants.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures including overexcavation ofexisting unsatisfactory on-site soil materials and replacement with structural fill.

3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.4. Subbase and base course for asphalt or concrete paving.5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.



2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpilingtopsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

3. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage " for drainage of foundations, slabs-on-grade, walls,and landscaped areas.

4. Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling” for excavating and backfilling ofutilities.

5. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion andsedimentation control measures.

C. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required for the work of this section,including erosion and sediment control and water quality permits required by the City of Boulderand the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Divi-sion.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.



1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches tosupport sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill approved byGeotechnical Engineer.

E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillaryflow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever character required for the work encounteredabove subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders. SeeSection 3.4 for definition of unclassified and classified excavation.

G. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicatedlines and dimensions as directed or approved by Owners Representative and the testing andinspections agency to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Authorized additional excavation andreplacement material will be paid for according to Contract Provisions for changes in the Work.

H. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) inlength.

I. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines anddimensions without direction by Owners Representative. Unauthorized excavation includingdisposition of overexcavated materials and other work resulting from slides, cave-ins, swelling,upheaval, or remedial work, as well as remedial work directed by Owners Representative, shallbe without additional compensation.

J. Fill: Fill is all material placed to raise the grade of the site or to backfill excavation, upon whichthe Geotechnical Engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue awritten statement that, in his opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance withthe requirements of these specifications.

K. Structural Fill: Select granular material for use below floor slabs and to 5’-0” beyond buildinglines. On-site material may be used if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

L. Underslab Gravel: Imported Class 6 road base per Colorado Department of TransportationStandard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (2005) or material approved byGeotechnical Engineer.

M. Rock Excavation: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits,and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for Bulk Excavation or 3/4 cu.yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation which in the Geotechnical Engineer’sopinion cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in sizeand performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting,when permitted:

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulicexcavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rockbucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force



of not less than 28,090 lbf (125 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf (83kN); measured according to SAE J-1179.

2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (157-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf (216-kN) breakout forcewith a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.

N. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical andelectrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below theground surface.

O. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphaltpavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cementconcrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

P. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill orbackfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

Q. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as undergroundservices within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Test Reports: Submit six (6) copies of a report from a qualified testing agencyindicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirementsindicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil materialproposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soilmaterial proposed for fill and backfill.

B. Dewatering Plan including disposition of groundwater is required for University review. Alsoinclude a copy of any applicable and completed discharge permit, if required.

C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining constructionand site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage causedby earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.

C. LEED Submittals




A. Comply with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations, references and standards in effect at biddate:



1. Uniform Building Code (UBC) or International Building Code (IBC) per jurisdiction cri-teria.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (test methods as specified hereafter)(ASTM).3. State and local codes.

B. In case of conflict between the above codes, regulations, references and standards and thesespecifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Testing Agency: The Owner will employ a qualified independent Geotechnical testing agency.Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work, facilities and incidental labor required fortesting. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all workrequiring testing.

D. Geotechnical Engineer: All materials and operations under this section of the specificationsshall be executed under the supervision of a Geotechnical Engineer who will place qualified per-sonnel on the site during earth moving operations as necessary.

The Geotechnical Engineer shall approve all foundation excavations and give written approvalof the completed foundations to the Owner’s Representative at the following times:

1. When excavations are first open.2. Just prior to placing of concrete, shall test and control the fill compaction, approve the

materials and method of placing and compacting and give written approval to theOwner’s Representative that all bearing surfaces and fill requirements have been in-spected.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Geotechnical Engineer when tests are tobe made.

E. For approval of imported or on-site fill material, notify the Geotechnical Engineer at least four(4) working days in advance of intention to import material, designate the proposed borrow areaand permit the Geotechnical Engineer to sample as necessary from the borrow area for the pur-pose of making acceptance tests to prove the quality of the material. The Geotechnical Engineerreport on the acceptability shall be final and binding.

F. Reference Standards:

Compaction Standard: Standard Proctor Density ASTM D698.

G. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’sRepresentative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, whichmay also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Existing Utilities: Locations, sizes and depths or invert elevations of existing utilities as shownon the drawings are based on information provided by others, and believed to be correct, butmay not be absolutely so. Such information is therefore presented only as approximations, andshould be verified prior to construction. Protect from damage any sewer, water, gas, electric,phone or other pipe lines or conduits uncovered during the work until they have been examinedby the Owner’s Representative. If such lines are found to be abandoned and not in use, removeaffected sections without extra cost. If such lines are found to be in use, carefully protect andcarry on work around them. If Owner’ Representative deems it advisable to move such lines,Owner will pay cost of moving. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owneror others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging toprovide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.



1. Contact utility-locator service for area where project is located before excavating.2. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative's written

permission.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be re-moved. Coordinate with utility companies or University Engineer to shut off services if linesare active.

C. Remove all existing fill deemed by Geotechnical Engineer to be unsatisfactorily placed.

D. Existing Contours and Elevations: Contours and spot elevations of existing ground elevations atthe site, and approximate elevations of finish grade cuts, fills, and excavations for the Work areshown on Drawings. Contours and elevations for existing ground lines are based on informationprovided by others, and are believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Existing con-tours and elevations should therefore be considered approximate, and should be verified at thesite prior to construction.

E. Verification of Existing Conditions: Visit the site prior to submission of bids. Verify existingconditions, elevations, and contours. In the event of discrepancies between existing conditionsand those indicated on the Contract Documents or survey, contact the Owner’s Representativefor clarification.

F. Existing Benchmarks: Carefully preserve and maintain existing benchmarks, monuments, prop-erty line pins, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace by a Pro-fessional Land Surveyor at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Frost Protection: When freezing temperatures may be expected, do not excavate to the fulldepth indicated unless the footing or slabs are to be poured immediately after the excavation hasbeen completed. If placing of concrete is delayed, protect the bottoms of excavations from frostuntil concrete is placed.

H. Water-jet using a truck mounted system and videotape storm sewers where debris may have ac-cumulated. Comply with 334100 requirements. This must be completed prior to acceptance bythe University. University fire hydrants are not to be used for flushing purposes.

1.7 WARRANTY

Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within thespecified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any structuresdamaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost tothe Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are notavailable from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Shall meet approval of Geotechnical Engineer and shall be free of rock orgravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,



vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Clean, on-site, natural soils, or imported materials, asapproved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GP, SP, CH, MH, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PTaccording to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups, as identified by the GeotechnicalEngineer.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent ofoptimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Backfill and Fill: Approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Structural Fill: Approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

F. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushedstone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 ½-inch(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushedstone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1 ½-inch(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

H. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushedstone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 ½-inch(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

I. Bedding Course: Approved by utility provider.

J. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushedgravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 ½-inch(37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

K. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone andnatural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

L. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

M. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage and Separation Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile,manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; withelongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288. Utilize Mirafi 140N oras recommended by Geotechnical Engineer.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused bysettlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth movingoperations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earth moving operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31Section "Site Clearing."

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31Section "Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control," during earth moving operations. Provideerosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soilbearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-way.

D. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protectiveinsulating materials as necessary.

E. Cold Weather Work: Prevent frost from entering bearing stratus upon which construction willtake place or in areas where fill will be placed in that season.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from entering excavations, from ponding onprepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or wateraccumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water toaccumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainageditches.

2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away fromexcavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

3. Obtain and comply with all provisions of the Colorado Department of Public Health andEnvironment, Water Quality Control Division, Construction Dewatering Permit.

C. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and passersby. Barricade open exca-vations occurring as part of the Work, as required by municipal or other authorities hav-ing jurisdiction.

2. Protect adjacent streets, roadways, and properties throughout the entire operation. Protectnewly graded areas from destruction by weather or runoff. Protect structures, utilities,sidewalks, pavements, and other improvements from damage caused by settlement, lat-eral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving opera-tions.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.



3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: All excavation (other than rock excavation) is considered asunclassified and is defined as removal of all material encountered, regardless of soil type.Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditionsencountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include soil materials, and obstructions.Unclassified excavation is considered normal excavation and no extra costs will be allowed.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materialsand rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Remove material of every nature or description encountered in obtaining required linesand grades. Excavate and/or place and compact fill to provide for building pad eleva-tion(s) required by drawings.

3. Excavate wide enough at foundations and retaining walls to permit erection and removalof forms, application of dampproofing or waterproofing.

4. Pitch grading around excavations to prevent water from running into excavated areas.5. Pre-rip hardpan and soft bedrock with single-tooth ripper or other suitable equipment to

facilitate excavation with conventional earth-moving equipment.6. Bearing soils disturbed by excavating equipment must be recompacted to 95 percent of

maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698) prior to placing concrete.7. Exposed areas which will receive fill once properly cleaned, shall be scarified to a mini-

mum depth of 8”, conditioned to near optimum moisture content, and compacted.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will beclassified as earth excavation and rock excavation. Do not excavate rock until it has beenclassified and cross sectioned by Owner’s Representative.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together withsoil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rockexcavation is earth excavation.

C. Stability:

1. Slope sides of excavations in compliance with OSHA requirements and local codes orordinances. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictionsor stability of material excavated.

2. Continuously monitor cut slopes for distress. Take all necessary precautions to safeguardworkers, structures, and utilities.

3. Provide all necessary shoring, sheeting, or bracing of sides of excavations required toprevent caving, erosion, and gullying. Provide underpinning of existing structures orother improvements adjacent to excavations which are subject to damage.

D. Unanticipated Conditions: Notify the Owner’s Representative immediately upon findingevidence of previous structures or filled materials which penetrate below designated excavationlevels, groundwater or water-bearing strata, or other conditions which are not shown or whichcannot be reasonably assumed from existing surveys and geotechnical reports. Secure theOwner’s Represenative instruction before proceeding with further work in such areas.

E. Rock Excavation: Includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgradeelevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction. Rock excavation inunconfined areas is defined as removal and disposal of material which in the Geotechnical



Engineer’s opinion, cannot be excavated without continuous and systematic drilling andblasting, or continuous use of a suitable ripper or other special equipment.

1. Unanticipated Rock Excavation: Rock excavation that is not indicated on existingsurveys or which cannot be reasonably assumed from geotechnical studies of the site andwhich could not have been anticipated without extensive investigations. Unanticipatedrock excavation shall be subject to change order procedures or previously agreed uponunit prices.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10-foot.If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removingconcrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trimbottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pilecap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displacedmaterial. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical UtilityStructures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus orminus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearingsurfaces.

4. Excavation Below Slab on Grade, Walks, or Pavement: Overexcavate clays andclaystone within the proposed footprint of the building slab-on-grade to a minimumdepth as recommended in Geotech Report and replace with on-site or imported materialsas approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Existing man-made fill shall be removed under structures as required by the GeotechnicalEngineer.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, andsubgrades.

B. Scarify subgrade soils beneath exterior slabs, sidewalks and pavements to a minimum depth of12-inches, moisture condition and recompact as specified.

C. Existing man-made fill shall be removed under walks and pavements as required by theGeotechnical Engineer.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Refer to Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling,” for excavating and backfilling ofutilities.

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.



B. If Owner’s Representative and Geotechnical Consultant determines that unsatisfactory soil ispresent, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tiredequipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Remove and replace soft areas.Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in directionperpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15tons.

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, asdetermined by Owner’s Representative, and replace with compacted backfill or fill asdirected.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according toContract provisions for changes in the Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, orconstruction activities, as directed by Owner’s Representative, without additionalcompensation.

3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevationof concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Leanconcrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used whenapproved by Geotechnical Engineer. If approved by Geotechnical Engineer, structural fillplaced at 100 percent ASTM D698, 2 percent below to 1 percent above optimum moisture maybe used.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed byOwner’s Representative.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials in approved locationswithout intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover toprevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line ofremaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.4. Removing concrete formwork.5. Removing trash and debris.



6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.8. Acceptance of subgrade by Geotechnical Engineer.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Refer to Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling,” for excavating and backfilling ofutilities.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, anddeleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.

1. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal sofill material will bond with existing material.

2. In areas of fill, scarify natural soil following removal of unsatisfactory material, to adepth of 8”.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations per the geotechnical report and asfollows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill or structural fill as approved by Geotechnical

Engineer.4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill or reconditioned on-site soils or imported fills of

native soils as approved by Geotechnical Engineer.5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill or reconditioned on-site soils or

imported fills of native soils as approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer beforecompaction to optimum or to 3 percent over optimum moisture content for clay soils, or within2 percent of optimum moisture content for granular soils. Refer to geotechnical study foradditional recommendations.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or containfrost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material thatexceeds optimum moisture content beyond the tolerances described above and is too wetto compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth formaterial compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) inloose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.



B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, anduniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weightaccording to ASTM D 698:

1. Under exterior flatwork, slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 8 inches(300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95percent.

2. Underfootings and interior floor slabs, excavate to approved natural soils, in fillcondition, compact to 95 percent.

3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) belowsubgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent.

4. Compact foundation wall backfill to 95 percent.5. Compact scarified subgrade soils to 95 percent.6. Compact retaining wall backfill to 95 percent.7. All Deep Fill Areas (fills over 12-feet deep): Comply with above requirements, except

compact each layer of backfill or fill material between 98% and 100% maximum drydensity.

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Complywith compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finishsubgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 feet.2. Walks: Plus or minus 0.10 feet.3. Pavements: Plus or minus 0.10 feet.4. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of ½-inch (13 mm) when

tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Install separation geotextile, if requested by Geotechnical Engineer, on prepared subgradeaccording to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.3. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.4. Place subbase and base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a

single layer.5. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in

layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick orless than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.



6. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weightaccording to ASTM D 698.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateralmovement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materialsand compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent ofmaximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.18 DRAINAGE COURSE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Install subdrainage geotextile if required by Geotechnical Engineer on prepared subgradeaccording to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of

equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than3 inches (75 mm) thick.

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to notless than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testingagency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed withsubsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply withrequirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performedto verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footingsubgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade whenapproved by Owner’s Representative.

D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Perform field moisture testsin accordance with ASTM D3017. Tests will be performed at the following locations andfrequencies at a minimum:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfilllayer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or buildingslab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree ofcompaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depthrequired; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.



3.20 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keepfree of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completedsurfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequentconstruction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner’sRepresentative; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.



DEWATERING31 2319 - 1

SECTION 31 2319DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional Information may be found in the Geotechnical study by Reynolds & Associates datedFebruary 3, 2009. All requirements of this study shall be followed unless noted otherwise.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes construction dewatering.



2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities andsupport facilities may be included.

3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and sitegrading.

4. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for permanent foundation wall, underfloor, andfooting drainage.


6. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for storm waterand sediment mitigation.

7. Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE), Standards andspecifications.

C. Erosion Control: The Erosion and Sedimentation Control Drawings included in the ContractDocuments is the minimum requirement to be implemented. Provide additional control asnecessary to meet applicable local and State criteria.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Dewatering Performance: Design, obtain permits, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, andmaintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flowinto excavations and allow construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.

1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations andconstructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades andpermanent structures is prevented.

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation.4. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for the project.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings for Information: For dewatering system, show arrangement, locations, anddetails of wells and well points, locations of headers and discharge lines, and means of dischargeand disposal of water.

1. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performanceof dewatering system.

2. Include a written report outlining control procedures to be adopted if dewatering devicesfail or problems arise.

3. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineerresponsible for their preparation.

B. Qualification Data: For installer and professional engineer.

C. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining constructionand site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations.

D. Record drawings at project closeout identifying and locating capped utilities and othersubsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions performed during dewatering.

1. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points.

E. Field Test Reports: Before starting excavation, submit test results and computationsdemonstrating that dewatering system is capable of meeting performance requirements.

F. Copy of Permit from governing jurisdiction/agency.

G. LEED Submittals




A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Colorado Department of Public Health andEnvironment (CDPHE) and all other applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’sRepresentative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which mayalso be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unlesspermitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to providetemporary utility services according to requirements indicated by the Owner’s Representative.



B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and isavailable for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of thegeotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results ofanalyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretationsor conclusions drawn from this data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary fordewatering.

2. The geotechnical report was prepared by Reynolds & Associates and dated February 3,2009.

C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer orland surveyor, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearlyidentify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log ofsurveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Owner’sRepresentative if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage isevident in adjacent improvements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused bysettlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewateringoperations.

1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, fromponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area.

2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or wateraccumulation.

B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and otheradjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilitieswithout permission from Owner’s Representative and authorities having jurisdiction.Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pumpequipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, waterdisposal, and surface-water controls.

B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water tospecified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have beenconstructed and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required.



C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation,construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficientdewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations,drains, sewers, and other excavations.

1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgradesoftening, and slope instability.

D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations,drains, sewers, and other excavations.

1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) below surface ofexcavation.

E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering according to local and State construction dewateringcriteria and in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, waters of State interest,and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoidsinconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices asrequired by authorities having jurisdiction. Disposal of water shall meet all requirements of thedewatering permit from governing agencies.

F. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintaindewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewateringrequirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restoredamaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner.

1. Remove dewatering system from Project site upon completion of dewatering. Plug or fillwell holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches (900 mm) belowoverlying construction.

G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.

3.3 OBSERVATION WELLS

A. Provide measurements and maintain at least the minimum number of observation wells orpiezometers indicated on the shop drawings and additional observation wells as may be requiredby authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observationwells.

C. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, ordestroyed. Suspend construction activities in areas where observation wells are not functioningproperly until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation wellrisers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly.

1. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed.



TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING31 2333-1

SECTION 31 2333TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Additional information concerning trenching and backfilling may be found on the civildrawings, in the project geotechnical study/report and University of Colorado constructionstandards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the informationspecified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning earthwork may be found in the geotechnical investigationreport by Reynolds & Associates dated February 3, 2009. All requirements of this report shallbe followed unless noted otherwise. The information shown in this report is for information andit shall be the contractors responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.2. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.3. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits

for buried utility structures.4. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.



2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpilingtopsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

3. Division 33 Section “Subdrainage Systems” for drainage of foundations, slabs-on-grade,walls, and landscaped areas.

4. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for soil materials, site excavating, filling andgrading.

5. Division 31 Section “Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion andsediment control.

6. Divisions 22, and 26 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electricalutilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures, if available.

7. Division 33 Section “Water Utility Distribution Piping” for water main installation.8. Division 33 Section “Storm Utility Drainage Piping” for storm sewer system installation.9. Division 33 Section “Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping” for sanitary sewer main

installation.

C. Shoring Design: Provide the services of a professional engineer to design all shoring, bracing,and underpinning required to protect the safety of workers and integrity of adjacent existingstructures or other improvements.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.



B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as backfill approved byGeotechnical Engineer.

E. Unclassified Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever-character required for the workencountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, includingboulders.

F. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicatedlines and dimensions as directed or approved by Owner’s Representative and the testing andinspections agency to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Authorized additional excavation andreplacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

G. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) inlength.

H. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines anddimensions without direction by Owners Representative. Unauthorized excavation includingdisposition of overexcavated materials and other work resulting from slides, cave-ins, swelling,upheaval, or remedial work, as well as remedial work directed by Owners Representative, shallbe without additional compensation.

I. Rock Excavation: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits,and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu.yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rockexcavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, withoutsystematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulicexcavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rockbucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling forceof not less than 28,090 lbf (125 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf (83kN); measured according to SAE J-1179.

2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (157-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf (216-kN) breakout forcewith a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.

J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphaltpavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cementconcrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill orbackfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.



L. Utilities: Includes on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well asunderground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Each type of plastic warning tape.

B. Samples: Contractor to submit representative samples of all materials proposed for use inbedding and trench backfilling operations to the testing and inspections agency for analysis anddetermination of compliance with the requirements specified herein.

C. Material Test Reports: Provided by Owner from a qualified testing agency indicating andinterpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil materialproposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soilmaterial proposed for fill and backfill.

D. Pre-Excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining constructionand site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage causedby earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.

E. LEED Submittals




A. Testing Agency:

1. All testing and inspections required herein will be performed by an independent testingand inspection agency employed by the Owner.

2. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work re-quiring testing or inspection services.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable requirements of the Occupational Safetyand Health Administration and local and State rules, regulations, and ordinances concerningshoring, bracing, or sloping of excavations and safety of workers. Safety of workers is the re-sponsibility of the Contractor.

C. Coordination: Coordinate scheduling and procedures for trench excavation, bedding, and back-filling with other Sections whose work relates to or is affected by this work.



D. Pre-Construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’sRepresentative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, whichalso may be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Existing Utilities: Locations, sizes and depths or invert elevations of existing utilities as shownon the drawings are based on information provided by others, and are believed to be correct, butmay not be absolutely so. Such information is therefore presumed only as approximations andshould be verified prior to construction. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied byOwner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner’s Representative and then only afterarranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Owner’s Representative not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed utilityinterruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s Representative's writtenpermission.

3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to beremoved. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

C. Existing Bench Marks: Carefully preserve and maintain existing bench marks, monuments,property line pins, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace themat no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Verification of Existing Conditions: Visit the site prior to submission of bids. Verify existingconditions, elevations, and utility locations. In the event of discrepancies between existingconditions and those indicated on the Contract Documents or survey, contact the Owner’sRepresentative for clarification.

1.7 WARRANTY

Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within thespecified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any structuresdamaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost tothe Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Utility Trench Bedding Materials:

1. Agency Requirements: Bedding requirements shall be in accordance with jurisdictionhaving control over utility.

B. Utility Trench Backfill Materials:

1. Existing soils obtained from trench excavations, including granular or aggregate basecourse from removed pavements, broken and pulverized claystone or claystone-sandstonebedrock may be used for backfilling trenches, provided it meets any special requirementsof the Utility Agency and Geotechnical Engineer. Bedrock must be processed and bro-



ken or pulverized so that the maximum particle or fragment size does not exceed three-inches (3”).

C. Unsuitable Utility Trench Materials: Materials unsuitable for bedding and backfilling includehighly organic soils, ASTM D2487 Group PT topsoil, and soils containing roots, vegetable mat-ter, trash, and debris.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Shoring and Bracing: Provide all materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling,uprights, stringers, and cross-braces, in good and serviceable condition, as required for safetyand by governing authorities.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tapemanufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility;colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.4. Blue: Water systems.5. Green: Sewer systems.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Sectionwill be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-rected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused bysettlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthworkoperations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31Section "Site Clearing."

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31Section "Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control," during earthwork operations.



D. Existing Utilities:

1. General: Location of existing utilities shown on the plans are approximate only. TheContractor shall be responsible to locate all existing underground utilities in areas of thework. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection during excavation and back-filling operations. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be en-countered during excavations, consult the Owner’s Representative immediately for direc-tion. Cooperate with the Utility Agency in keeping respective services and facilities inoperation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the Utility Agency.

2. Active Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used bythe Owner or by adjacent properties, except when permitted in writing by the Owner’sRepresentative, and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been pro-vided. Remove or relocate utilities only as indicated or specified.

3. Inactive Utilities: Report inactive or abandoned utilities encountered in excavating orgrading operations, and remove, plug, or cap as required. In the absence of specific re-quirements, plug or cap such utility lines at least 5’-0” outside new building walls, or asrequired by local requirements.

4. Removal: Demolish and completely remove from the project site all existing under-ground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with Utility Agencies for discon-tinuance of services if lines are active.

E. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and passersby. Barricade open exca-vations occurring as part of the work, as required by municipal or other authorities havingjurisdiction.

2. Protect adjacent streets, structures, and other improvements from damage caused by set-tlement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by trench excavations.

F. Protect subgrades and trench bottoms soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provideprotective insulating materials as necessary.

G. Cold Weather Work: Prevent frost from entering bearing strata upon which construction willtaken place or in areas where fill will be placed in that season.

3.3 SHORING AND BRACING

A. Provide shoring and bracing of excavations as required for safety and by governing authorities.Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. Maintain shoring and bracing inexcavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.

3.4 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. Where trenches or other utility excavations are made in existing paved areas, saw-cut pavementsurface to create a clean break line. Cut pavement a minimum of 12” beyond trench width oneach side of trench; remove and dispose of existing surface course and aggregate base course,leaving a 12” wide undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench.

B. After trench has been backfilled and compacted, place new pavement in accordance withapplicable requirements of Division 32 Sections as applicable, for Asphaltic or Portland cementconcrete pavement and in accordance with Authorities having jurisdiction.



3.5 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe belowfrost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe orconduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher thantop of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

C. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit as indicated.

1. Slope sides of trenches or provide shoulders in accordance with OSHA requirements andas required by Utility Agency standards.

2. Continuously monitor cut slopes and trenches for distress or movement. Provide allnecessary shoring and bracing required to protect the life and safety of workmenperforming excavation or installing piping or conduit.

D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) deeper than bottom of pipeelevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or otherunyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course and backfill with a 6” layer ofcrushed stone or gravel prior to installing pipe.

3.7 BEDDING OF PIPES:

A. After completion of trench excavation and before installation of piping, install not less than 3” ofapproved bedding material in trench bottom for support of pipe. Dig bell holes in bedding deepenough to provide a minimum of 2” clearance between the bell and bedding material. Fullysupport pipe on bedding material for the full length of the pipe barrel.

B. After pipe is adjusted for line and grade, and all jointing is complete, carefully place and tampbedding material under the haunches of the pipe and in the previously dug bell holes.

C. Install bedding to a minimum depth of 12” above top of pipe prior to starting placement ofcompacted backfill. Lightly compact or tamp bedding material in a manner to avoiddisplacement of or damage to the pipe.

3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials in approved locationswithout intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to preventwindblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line ofremaining trees.



3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. After installation of utility piping or lines have been completed, locations recorded, trash orother debris removed from excavations, and bedding placed and approved, backfill promptly aswork and weather conditions permit. Do not backfill trenches until all required pipe system testsand inspections have been made, unless partial backfilling is required to restrain pipe under testpressures. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

C. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape beddingcourse to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,and bodies of conduits.

D. Place backfill materials in layers not more than 8-inches in loose depth for material compactedby heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4-inches in loose depth for materialcompacted by hand operated tampers. Use hand held tools or compacting devices for trenchbackfill, until a minimum compacted thickness of 3’-0” above top of pipe is achieved.Mechanical or power compactors may be used thereafter.

E. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer of backfill to specifications.

F. Compact each layer to not less than 95% of maximum standard Proctor density (ASTM D698).Thoroughly compact by means of mechanical tampers areas which cannot be properlycompacted by means of rolling equipment.

G. Backfill to subgrade elevation shown for finish grading, topsoil placement, or paving.

H. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm)in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on bothsides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage ordisplacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

I. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

J. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

K. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, and 6inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Subdrainage Systems."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench.Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to supportsubdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filtermaterial, placed in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick, and wrap in subsurface drainagegeotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight accordingto ASTM D 698.



C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated,to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick.Overlay drainage backfill with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides andends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight accordingto ASTM D 698.

2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inches (150-mm) thickcompacted layers to final subgrade.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testingagency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed withsubsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply withrequirements.

C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Perform field moisture tests inaccordance with ASTM D3017. Tests will be performed at the following locations andfrequencies at a minimum:

1. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. At a minimum, testintervals and quantities shall meet or exceed the requirements of the local utility agency.

D. When testing agency reports that backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified,scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retestuntil specified compaction is obtained.

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keepfree of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completedsurfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequentconstruction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner’sRepresentative; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.



3.13 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT:

A. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: When completed compacted areas are disturbed by subse-quent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and recompact to re-quired density prior to further construction.

B. Cleanup: Remove excess materials not required for backfilling purposes, including excess spoilmaterial, accumulated debris, and rubbish from site. Burning of waste material is prohibited.

3.14 RESTORATION:

A. Adjacent Improvements: Restore all fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other struc-tures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began.

3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.


PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical ReviewTEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

31 2500-1

SECTION 31 2500TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK


B. Additional information concerning temporary erosion and sedimentation control may be foundon the civil drawings and City of Boulder construction standards. In case of conflict betweenthe drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringentrequirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning erosion may be found in the geotechnical investigationreport by Reynolds & Associates dated February 3, 2009. All requirements of this report shallbe followed unless stated otherwise.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included. Furnish, install, maintain, and remove temporary erosion and sedimentationcontrols as shown on the drawings or specified herein, or as required to complete the work.



2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpilingtopsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

3. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage " for drainage of foundations, slabs-on-grade, walls,and landscaped areas.



C. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required for the work of this section,including erosion and sediment control and water quality permits required by the authorityhaving jurisdiction and the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, WaterQuality Control Division.

D. Erosion Control: The Erosion and Sedimentation Control Drawings included in the ContractDocuments is the minimum requirement to be implemented. Provide additional control asnecessary to meet applicable local and State criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.


31 2500-2



B. Unclassified Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever character required for the workencountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, includingboulders.

C. Fill: Fill is all material placed to raise the grade of the site or to backfill excavation, upon whichthe Soils Engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue a writtenstatement that, in his opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with therequirements of these specifications.

D. BMP: Best Management Practice. Erosion and sediment control devices, which may consist ofsilt fence, hay bales, crates, filter fabric, riprap, etc.

E. SWMP: Storm Water Management Plan. Identifies BMPs, which are erosion and sedimentcontrol measures for the project.

F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical andelectrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below theground surface.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill orbackfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

H. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as undergroundservices to buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures: All submittals are to be made to the Owner’s Representative. Ifprovided refer to Division 1 section “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published descriptive literature and completespecifications for manufactured products specified herein and utilized on the project.

1. Geotextiles.2. Erosion Control Fabric.

C. Storm Water Management Plan:

1. The Engineer will provide a Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) and reportaddressing erosion and sediment control measures for all sites with over one acre ofdisturbed ground. The Engineer may also assist in preparation of the General Permitapplication.

2. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits including a GeneralPermit application for Storm Water Discharges associated with construction activities atleast ten (10) days prior to start of construction. Permits are to be filed with theColorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality ControlDivision.

3. Contractor shall have the Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) and report availableon-site at all times.


31 2500-3

D. LEED Submittals




A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable local, State and Federal ordinances, rulesand regulations concerning sedimentation control and storm water runoff.

B. In case of conflict between the above codes, regulations, references and standards and thesespecifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’sRepresentative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, whichmay also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: Verify all existing conditions affecting the work of this section prior tosubmitting bids or proposals. Additional compensation will not be allowed for revisions ormodification of work resulting from failure to verify existing conditions.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control measures shall be maintained until permanentmeasures are in place. All damaged, disturbed or devices filled with sediment, which mayoccur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner.Any devices damaged by erosion or sediment shall be restored to their original condition by theContractor, at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Materials: Provide one or more of the following materials,as shown on the plans or as applicable for site conditions:

1. Sand bags.2. Clean, seed-free, certified, grain straw bales.3. Silt fences.4. Rock riprap.5. Temporary seeding.6. Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a

photodegradable plastic mesh.


31 2500-4

7. Biodegradable twisted jute or spun-coir mesh, 0.92 lb/sy minimum, with 50 to 65 percentopen area.

8. Drainage geotextile.9. Impervious fill.10. Other materials proposed for use on-site.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General:

1. Determine the existing ground elevations, drainage patterns, and changes to suchpatterns during excavation in order to satisfactorily plan and provide materials foradequate erosion and sediment control devices.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion anddischarge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-wayaccording to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during constructionuntil permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed duringremoval.

D. Secure grading permit from agency have jurisdiction prior to commencing grading operations.

3.3 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this sectionwill be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices. Erosion and sedimentation control measures to betaken during construction include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:


31 2500-5

1. Apply soil stabilization within 14 days to all disturbed areas that are to be dormant for aperiod longer than 30 calendar days after reaching grade. Stabilize soil with mulchanchored per criteria of authorities having jurisdiction. Temporarily revegetate areasthat will remain in an interim condition for more than thirty (30) days.

2. Roads and parking areas indicated to be paved may be covered with an appropriateaggregate base course in lieu of mulch. Temporary mulching or aggregate base course isnot required if final pavement construction will take place within 30 days after grading tofinal contours.

3. Soils that will be stockpiled for more than 30 days must be mulched and seeded within14 days after stockpile construction.

4. Prevent sediment from leaving the project site by installing a silt fence or other BMPs asindicated on the plans. Protect existing storm inlets adjacent to the site by an approvedgravel filter.

5. Excavate the future detention/water quality pond and construct the outlet structure/stormsewer such that the pond may function as a temporary sediment basin duringdevelopment of the site. Construct the sediment basin in accordance with authorityhaving jurisdiction’s criteria. Provide temporary swales to convey site runoff to thepond.

6. Haybales may be used at specific locations to provide temporary filtration of sedimentfrom runoff.

7. Locate stone stabilization pads at all points of vehicular ingress and egress to theconstruction site.

8. Provide temporary erosion controls consisting of berms at the top of slopes andinterceptor ditches at ends of berms and at those locations which will eliminate orminimize erosion during construction, along with temporary seeding, temporarydiversion, chutes, and down pipes and lining of water courses.

9. Temporary sedimentation controls shall consist of silt dams, traps, silt fence, barriers,and appurtenances at the top of spoil and borrow area slopes and where runoff waterexits the site.

10. Maintain the available silt holding capacity of silt dams, fence traps and barriers until nolonger needed. The sediment capacity of sediment retainage areas shall be at aminimum, the capacity shown on the plans in conformance with Urban Drainage CriteriaManual, Volume 3. Prior to removal, obtain concurrence of the Owner and Engineer.

11. Remove accumulated sediment and debris from a BMP when the sediment level reachesone-half the height of the BMP, or at any time the sediment or debris adversely impactsthe functioning of the BMP.

12. Remove hay bales which have deteriorated and filter stone or cloth which has becomedislodged. Place new hay bales and new filter and fence.

13. The erosion/sediment control plan shows the minimum required for the project. If itbecomes apparent that additional controls are necessary, the Engineer shall be notifiedand with approval of the Owner’s Representative additional controls shall be installed.

B. Chemicals and Pollutants:

1. Store construction materials and chemicals that could contribute pollutants to the runoffwithin an enclosure, container, or dike located around the perimeter of the storage area,to prevent discharge of these materials into runoff from the construction site.

2. Locate areas used for collection and temporary storage of solid and liquid waste awayfrom the storm drainage system. Provide covering or fencing as required to preventwindblown materials; construct perimeter dike to contain liquid runoff. These measuresmay not be necessary if materials are immediately placed in covered waste containers.

3. Perform equipment maintenance in designated areas using measures such as drip pans tocontrol petroleum products spillage.


31 2500-6

4. Immediately clean up and properly dispose of spills of construction related materialssuch as paints, solvents, or other chemicals.

C. Final Stabilization and Long-Term Management: Colorado Department of Public Health andEnvironment (CDPHE)

1. Final stabilization shall be achieved through permanent vegetation and landscaping afterconstruction of all buildings and paved surfaces.

2. With approval of State of Colorado, temporary erosion and sediment control measuresmay be removed within 30 days after final site stabilization is achieved or aftertemporary measures are no longer needed.

D. Inspection and Maintenance: Inspect erosion and sediment control measures weekly duringconstruction. In addition, inspect all facilities immediately after any significant runoff orsnowmelt which results in runoff. Repair or otherwise mitigate any damage to the erosion andsediment control facilities at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Removal of Controls: Remove controls upon completion of that portion of the work for whichcontrols were furnished. Leave the site and work area in a clean condition.


PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

31 63 29 - 1

SECTION 31 63 29 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Drilling, casing (if necessary), cleaning, and dewatering (if necessary) of drilled pier

holes. 2. Removal of drilling spoil from immediate vicinity of the drilled pier hole. 3. Forming shear rings. Roughing of pier hole sides. 4. Installation of concrete and reinforcing in drilled piers. 5. All other work normally related to the above or specified under this section.


1. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for list of unit prices. 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general structural and building

applications of concrete.

C. Work Installed but Furnished under Other Sections.

1. Drilled Pier Reinforcing and Dowels: Furnished under Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

2. Concrete for Drilled Pier: Furnished under Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”. 3. Concrete Testing: Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”. 4. Anchor Rods: Furnished under Division 5 Section for Structural Steel.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Basis of Bids: Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers; design length from top elevation to bottom of shaft, and diameter of shaft.

B. Basis for Payment: Payment for drilled piers will be made on actual net volume of drilled piers in place and approved. Actual length and shaft diameter may vary to coincide with elevations where satisfactory bearing strata are encountered, and with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an independent testing and inspecting agency. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts.

1. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill, and other items for complete drilled-pier installation.


31 63 29 - 2

2. See Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for unit of measurement.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing.

C. Design Mixes: For each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Laboratory Test Reports: For evaluation of concrete materials and mix design.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer and surveyor.

E. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."


A. Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with provisions in ACI 336.1, "Reference Specifications for the Construction of Drilled Piers," unless modified in this Section.

B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data.

1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to perform material evaluation tests selected and paid for by the Owner.

1. Contractor shall furnish Testing Agency access to work, facilities, and incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the Owner of an independent Testing Agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performing all work in accordance with the contract requirements. See requirements herein for Testing Agency services.

2. The Owner’s Testing and Inspection Agency shall be the Project Geotechnical Engineer where indicated.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier operations.


31 63 29 - 3

1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, adapt drilling procedure if necessary to prevent damage to utilities. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping services and facilities in operation without interruption. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.

B. Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project. Copies of the report may be obtained from the office of the Owner.

1. The drilling log and accompanying report are believed to be accurate; however, neither the Owner, Architect, nor the Structural Engineer guarantees the information contained nor do they guarantee the conditions indicated to exist at the location of the test holes will prevail at other locations on the site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Meet requirements of Section 033000 “Cast-in-Place Structural Concrete”.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Meet requirements of Section 033000 “Cast-in-Place Structural Concrete”.

2.3 STEEL CASINGS

A. Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C; or ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plate, with joints full-penetration welded according to AWS D1.1.

1. Provide casings where required of sufficient strength to withstand handling stresses, concrete pressure and surrounding earth pressure. Casing inside diameter shall equal size of drilled pier specified such that the drilled pier diameter is within the tolerances noted below.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled-pier operations.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Drilling: By personnel experienced and properly equipped to construct drilled piers of indicated diameter and length. Drill diameter and with penetration into bearing material as indicated or as directed by the on-site Project Geotechnical Engineer.


31 63 29 - 4

B. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to bearing elevations regardless of character of materials or obstructions encountered.

1. Unclassified excavation includes removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions.

2. Removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other unforeseen obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work, will be paid according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

C. Prevent surface water from entering excavated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage facilities.

D. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of excavation.

1. Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane within 1:12 tolerance. 2. Cleaning and Dewatering: Holes shall be thoroughly dewatered and cleaned of debris by

the Contractor before placing concrete. The Contractor shall provide pumps in operating condition, of proper type and capacity for this type of work and sufficient hose to carry water away from excavations. Holes shall be dewatered so no more than 3 inches of water exists in the bottom of any hole when placing of concrete is started. Necessary equipment for cleaning of holes and a back-up pump in operating condition for dewatering shall be available on site at all times.

3. Cut series of grooves about perimeter of shaft to height from bottom of shaft, vertical spacing and dimensions indicated. Roughen sides of drilled pier hole as directed by Project Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Notify and allow Project Geotechnical Engineer to test and inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Architect.

1. Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated, unless approved by Architect. 2. Additional authorized excavation will be paid according to Contract provisions for

changes in the Work.

F. Excavate shafts for closely spaced drilled piers and those occurring in fragile or sand strata, only after adjacent drilled piers are filled with concrete and allowed to set.

G. Temporary Casings: Where necessary, install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to prevent entry of soil or water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses; and to maintain stability of shaft walls. The use of mud slurry to lubricate casings or seal off water will be allowable only with the prior approval of the Project Geotechnical and Structural Engineers. Casings may be left in place only with prior approval of the Project Geotechnical and Structural Engineers. 1. Casing Removal: Pull temporary casing with a slow and smooth vertical motion

maintaining casing in a plumb position. Casing shall not be pulled until concrete has been placed to a minimum of 5 feet above external water or slurry level or level of unstable soil. During pulling maintain concrete level a minimum of 5 feet above bottom of casing. Vibrate top 5 feet of pier after temporary casing is removed.

H. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances.


31 63 29 - 5

1. If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction. Submit design and construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding.

I. Inspection: Each drilled pier must be inspected by the Project Geotechnical Engineer before placing concrete.

1. Provide and maintain facilities with equipment required for testing and inspecting excavations. Cooperate with testing and inspecting personnel to expedite the Work.

2. Notify Architect and Project Geotechnical Engineer at least six hours before excavations are ready for tests and inspections.


A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Reinforcing: Exact location of dowels and reinforcing extending into adjacent construction shall be verified by the Contractor. Deviations in location of such reinforcing in excess of specified placing tolerances shall be reported to the Architect and Structural Engineer within 24 hours after concrete is placed. In reinforced piers, completed installation of reinforcement must be approved by the Project Geotechnical Engineer before depositing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit.

D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

E. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final concrete placement.

F. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical damage and exposure to weather.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and approval of shaft by the Project Geotechnical Engineer.

1. Place concrete continuously without construction joints for full height of pier. 2. Construct a construction joint if concrete placement is delayed more than one hour.

Level top surface of concrete. Before placing remainder of concrete, clean surface laitance, roughen, and slush concrete with commercial bonding agent or with sand-cement grout mixed at ratio of 1:1.

B. Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement.


31 63 29 - 6

1. Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without striking reinforcing, place concrete with chutes, tremies, or pumps. For 24 inch and smaller diameters, free fall of vertical concrete shall not exceed 20 feet.

2. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete after dowels or anchor bolts have been placed. 3. Do not deposit concrete in more than three inches of water.

C. Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation. Enlargement or “mushrooming” of top part of drilled pier is not permitted.

D. Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from frost, freezing, or low temperatures that could cause physical damage or reduced strength.

1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators.

E. When hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of concrete at no greater than 90 deg F.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency and the Project Geotechnical Engineer to sample materials, perform tests, and submit reports during excavation and concrete placement for drilled piers.

B. A drilled-pier report will be prepared by the Project Soils Geotechnical Engineer for each drilled pier as follows:

1. Identification Mark. 2. Shaft diameter. 3. Actual top and bottom elevations , and design bottom elevation. 4. Top of bearing strata elevation. 5. Description of soil materials. 6. Description, location, and dimensions of obstructions. 7. Final top centerline location and deviations from requirements. 8. Variation of shaft from plumb. 9. Shaft excavating method. 10. Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout. 11. Ground-water conditions and water-infiltration rate, depth, and pumping. 12. Description, diameter, and top and bottom elevations of temporary casings. Include

elevation of top of concrete, elevation of bottom of casing and elevation of external water level immediately before casing is pulled.

13. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground, and means of control.

14. Date and time of starting and completing excavation. 15. Size, number, and position of reinforcing steel. 16. Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays. 17. Elevation of concrete during removal of casings. 18. Locations of construction joints. 19. Remarks, unusual conditions encountered, and deviations from requirements.


31 63 29 - 7

20. Concrete testing results. 21. Overrun or underrun.

C. Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers indicated have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths will be determined by the Project Geotechnical Engineer. Final evaluations and approval of data will be determined by Architect.

D. The Testing Agency shall test concrete as specified in Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Structural Concrete. Take test specimens, consisting of at least one set of four cylinders as follows:

1. If more than one pier is cast from the same truckload, take one set per truckload. 2. If more than one truckload is placed in a pier, take one set per pier.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS

A. Material removed during drilled pier construction shall not be used for fill. Remove surplus excavated material and slurry and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. Dispose of such material as specified under Section 13 50 00 Earthwork.



31 63 29 - 8


ASPHALT PAVING32 1216-1

SECTION 32 1216ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found on the civil drawings, in theproject geotechnical report and University of Colorado construction standards. In case ofconflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, themore stringent requirements shall govern.

C. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found in the geotechnicalinvestigation report by Reynolds & Associates dated February 3, 2009. All requirements of thisreport shall be followed unless noted otherwise. The information shown in this report is forinformation and it shall be the contractors responsibility to field verify conditions indicated.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.3. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay.4. Asphalt surface treatments.5. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.



2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling and sitegrading.

3. Division 32 Section “Pavement Markings” for pavement striping and symbols.

C. References:

1. City of Boulder Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.2. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge

Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation.



C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Roadand Bridge Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving in accordance with Section 401 of the CDOT Specifications.

1. Standard Specification: CDOT Specifications.2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in CDOT

Specifications do not apply to this Project.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include technical data and tested physical andperformance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

D. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by providers.

E. LEED Submittals




A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphaltsimilar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-serviceperformance.

2. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mixasphalt paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project andwith a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Testing Agency:

1. All testing and inspections required herein will be performed by an independent testing andinspection agency employed by the Owner.

2. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all workrequiring testing or inspection services.



C. Testing Requirements: Asphalt Paving shall be tested for gradation, asphalt content and in-place density in accordance with CDOT Specifications, the current edition of CDOT FieldMaterials Manual, and local Regulatory Agency requirements, whichever are the most stringent.

D. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner’sRepresentative. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included inDivision 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessivelydamp or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Tack Coats: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 60 deg F (15 deg C).2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910.3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 40 deg F and

rising at time of placement.4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 50 deg F

and rising at time of placement.

B. Coordination and Scheduling:

1. Cooperate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoid damage to other work,including grading, site utilities and piping, exterior concrete, landscaping and irrigationsystems.

2. Before commencing pavement operations, ascertain that utility lines, site lighting andwiring, piping, curb and gutter work, general grading and heavy trucking is complete sothat such operations will not damage paving work.

3. Mask off and protect exposed building surfaces and abutting concrete from damage orstaining by tack coat and paving operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previousinstallations meeting the requirements of the CDOT Specifications.

B. Asphalt Concrete Aggregate: Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed slag,crushed gravel, or natural gravel conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.04 of theCDOT Specifications and Grading SX and S (Table 703-4).

C. Mineral Filler: Rock dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, or other suitable mineralmaterial conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.06 of the CDOT Specifications.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Cement: The asphalt cement to be used on this project shall be PG 64-22 conformingto the requirements of Subsection 702.01 of the CDOT Specifications.



B. Tack Coat: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsifiedasphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

C. Fog Seal: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt,slow setting, diluted at the factory in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

D. Water: Potable.

2.3 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes. Furnish job-mix formulas foreach pavement type, conforming to the requirements of Subsection 401.02 of the CDOTSpecifications. Mix aggregates and bituminous materials in accordance with the requirementsof Subsection 401.15 of the CDOT Specifications. Use approved job mix formulas. Mix tocomply with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area whereProject is located.

2. Base Course: Grading S.3. Surface Course: Grading SX.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt: Shall conform to AASHTO M140 or M208 in accordance with Subsection702.03 of the CDOT Specifications.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is unfrozen, free of water, snow, and ice otherwise in suitable condition tosupport paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or thatrequire further compaction. Scarify, regrade and recompact surface of subgrade that is pumpingor deforming as required to provide true levels, uniform slopes and proper total thickness ofpaving as required in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.”

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before coldmilling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sectionsindicated.



1. Mill to a depth of a minimum 1 ½-inches or as indicated on the plans.2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of gouges, grooves, and ridges.3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course.4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling.5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material

separate from milled hot-mix asphalt.6. Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility.7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.

3.3 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavementsection to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically.Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form newsubgrade.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mixasphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.2 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.8 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot,compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush withadjacent surfaces.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surfacecourse to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing pavements.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of1/4 inch (6 mm).

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than ¼ inch (6 mm) wide. Fill

flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than ¼ inch (6 mm) wide.

Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

C. Hot-applied joint sealant being a single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405or D1190.

1. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 702.06 for joint and crack sealantmaterial requirements.

2. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 408.01 and 408.03 for joint and cracksealant installation requirements.



3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious materialfrom substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do notdislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates andwritten application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gal./sq.yd. (0.2 to 0.8 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.6 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION

A. Apply asphalt binder uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.25 gal./sq. yd. (1.0L/sq. m) per in accordance with Subsection 420.04 of the CDOT Specifications.

B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom orroll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches (100mm) and transverse joints 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place hot-mix asphalt pavingoverlay the same day.

3.7 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Placeasphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation ofmix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated on theplans or as directed by Geotechnical Report. Maximum lift thickness shall be 3-inches.Minimum lift thickness shall be 1½-inches for Grading SX and 2-inches for Grading S.

2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. Maximum lift thickness shall be 2-inches.

3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 235 deg F (113 deg C) per in accordance withSubsection 401.15 of the CDOT Specifications, Table 401-5.

4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side ofone-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls andtears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of alesser width are required.



1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling tooverlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphaltsurface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand toolsto remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to preventsegregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.8 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Constructjoints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphaltcourse.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150mm).3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, 6 to 12 inches (150-300 mm).4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt

Pavements."5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement.6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.9 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight withoutexcessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-platecompactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. When paving surface temperature falls below 185 deg F (85 deg C) no furthercompaction effort will be permitted unless approved.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints andoutside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling whilehot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mixasphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density in accordance withSubsection 401.17 of the CDOT Specifications.

1. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92% to 96% of the maximum theoreticaldensity, determined according to Colorado procedure 51. Field density determinationwill be in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is stillwarm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement toproper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.



F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials andreplace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surfacesmoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooledand hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to becomemarked.

3.10 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the followingtolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus ¼ inch (6 mm).2. Surface Course: Plus ¼ inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within thefollowing tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely orlongitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: ¼-inch (6 mm).2. Surface Course: 3/16-inch (5 mm).3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is ¼-inch (6 mm).

3.11 MANHOLE FRAME ADJUSTMENTS

A. Set frames for manholes and other such units within areas to be paved to ¼-inch minimum to ½-inch maximum below final grade as part of this work. Include existing frames or new framesfurnished under other sections of these specifications.

B. Set cover frames to ¼-inch minimum and ½-inch maximum below surface of adjacentpavement. Surround frames set to grade with a ring of compacted asphaltic concrete base priorto paving. Place asphaltic concrete mixture up to 1-inch below top of frame, slope to grade, andcompact with hand tamping. Adjust frames as required for paving.

C. Provide temporary closures over openings until completion of rolling operations. Removeclosures at completion of work.

3.12 ASPHALT CURBS

A. Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coatunless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum temperatureof 250 deg F (121 deg C).

1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.

B. Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standardshapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screedto smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.



3.13 SURFACE TREATMENTS

A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.7 L/sq. m) to existingasphalt pavement and allow to cure. With a fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fogseal.

B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow tocure.

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency toperform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether testedwork complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determinecompliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determinedaccording to ASTM D 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested forcompliance with smoothness tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures andcompacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results fromfour samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, preparedaccording to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samplesaccording to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 350 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement,with no fewer than 3 cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclearmethod according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTMD 2726.

F. Asphalt Content and Gradation. Testing agency will take sample of uncompacted pavingmixtures at a minimum frequency of every 1,000 tons according to Colorado Procedure –Laboratory CPL-5120 and Colorado Procedure CP-31.

G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurementsindicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. Conforming to the specifiedrequirements will be in according with Subsection 105.03 of the CDOT Specifications.



3.15 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from project site andlegally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.



CONCRETE PAVING32 1313-1

SECTION 32 1313CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes constructing exterior concrete paving on prepared subgrade or basecourse in accordance with these specifications. This work shall be in conformity with the lines,grades, thicknesses and typical cross-sections shown on the plans for the following:

1. Driveways and roadways.2. Parking lots.3. Curbs and gutters.4. Sidewalks, steps, ramps.5. Base material for unit paver.6. Dumpster and loading dock pads.7. As detailed on the plans.



2. Divisions 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbasecourse.

3. Division 32 Section “Pavement Marking” for pavement striping and symbols.4. Division 32 Section “Concrete Pavement Joint Sealants” for expansion and contraction

joints.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. University of Colorado Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

B. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and BridgeConstruction, current edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blendedhydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulatedblast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation.

C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Roadand Bridge Construction, current edition.



D. ADA Handbook: Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design, U.S.Department of Justice.

E. ANSI A117.1: Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, American NationalStandard Institute.

F. Refer to ACI 301: (American Concrete Institute – Standard Specifications for StructuralConcrete), for additional definitions.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix, and includes alternate mix designs whencharacteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstanceswarrant adjustments.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test resultsfor compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testingof current materials:

1. Aggregates.2. Cement.3. Admixtures.

D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materialsused in the project complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.3. Admixtures.4. Curing compounds.5. Applied finish materials.6. Bonding agent or adhesive.7. Joint fillers.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Pavement Joint Layout Plan: Plan to show joint locations and typical dimensions for reviewand approval by engineer.

G. Traffic Control Plan: For work in the public right-of-way.

H. LEED Submittals






A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar inmaterial, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted inconstruction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying withASTM C 94/C 94 M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix ConcreteAssociation's (NRMCA) Plant Certification Program.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C1077and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field TestingTechnician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand fromthe same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unlessmodified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Concrete Testing Service: The Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency toperform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at project site as directed by Owner’sRepresentative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, whichmay also be included in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”

H. Regulatory Requirements:

I. Comply with University of Colorado standards for sidewalks, curbs, ramps, gutters, anddriveway approaches or aprons, including standard dimensions, profiles, thicknesses,reinforcing, and compressive strength. In the event of conflict between the ContractDocuments and the standards, the more stringent requirements will apply.

1. Comply with applicable requirements of ADA Handbook, ANSI A117.1, and local andState codes and ordinances regarding walks, steps, ramps and curb ramps.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for otherconstruction activities, and where required by the Traffic Control Plan.

B. Coordination and Scheduling: Coordinate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoiddamage to other work including grading, site utilities and piping, asphalt paving, landscapingand irrigation systems.

C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions and existing conditions shown on the drawings bytaking field measurements prior to start of work. Report discrepancies to the Owner’s



Representative for clarification and make minor adjustments in layout as required by fieldconditions and as approved by the Owner’s Representative, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Environmental Requirements: Perform work only under suitable weather conditions. Complywith the environmental requirements of Section 3.6 for concrete placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply toproduct selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of themanufacturers specified.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-typematerials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments ofconcrete surfaces.


A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Reinforcement Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. Cutbars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60.Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

D. Tie Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, andfastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture barsupports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precastconcrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and asfollows:



1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will notsupport chair legs.

2.4 COLORED ADMIXTURE

Colored Admixture: L.M. Scofield Co. “Chromix” or Rockwood Industries “Davis Colors”,color as selected by Owner’s Representative. Use for colored concrete where indicated on thedrawings.

2.5 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER

A. Sealed Joints: Preformed, compressible fiber or cork filler material complying with ASTMD1751 or D1752, Type II, guaranteed compatible with expansion joint sealant materials, ½”thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide high-impact polystyrene removable “void cap” tocreate ½” deep reveal for installation of sealant.

B. Self-Sealing Joints: Preformed, compressible asphalt fiber joint filler complying with ASTMD994, ½” thick unless otherwise indicated. Do not use asphalt fiber filler in joints to receiveelastomeric joint sealants.

2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use one of the following cementitious materials, of the same type,brand, and source throughout the Project:

1. Portland Cement: CDOT Section 701 and ASTM C 150, Type I.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: CDOT Section 703 and ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate, uniformlygraded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.3. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.

C. Water: CDOT Section 712 and ASTM C 94/C 94M potable.

2.7 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: CDOT Section 711 and ASTM C 260.

C. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible withother admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by massof cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.



2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E.5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS: CDOT SECTION 711

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighingapproximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq.m) dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for applicationto fresh concrete.

E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.

F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type II, Class B.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type andstrength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or fieldexperience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixdesigns for the trial batch method.

2. Do not use Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testingagency.

B. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,200 psi (29.0 MPa) (CDOT Class P mix).2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm).4. Minimum 564 lb. Cement per cubic yard. (CDOT Class P)

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point ofplacement having an air content of 4.0 to 7.0 percent.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 0.30 percent by weight ofcement.



E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture and plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete, asrequired, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, lowhumidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other thanportland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicalsas follows:

1. Fly Ash: 20 - 30 percent Class F Fly Ash CDOT Section 601.02, Class P Concrete.

G. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer’s writteninstructions.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according toASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in theWork..




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements fordimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tiredequipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limitvehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons.3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13

mm) require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earth Moving."

C. Subgrade shall be tested by Geotechnical Engineer and pass required tests prior to concretepavement placement.

D. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after non-conforming conditions have beencorrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement torequired lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work andso forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concretewithout damage.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement andwith recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supportingreinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position duringconcrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least onefull mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuouslaps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat andfree of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as requiredbefore placement. Set mats for a minimum 12-inch (300-mm) overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct/install construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true toline with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at rightangles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placedjoints, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Contractor to provide plan of joint placement for the Engineers approval.3. The distance between joints shall not exceed in feet, twice the pavement thickness in

inches. (i.e.: 6” PCC pavement to utilize maximum 12-foot joint spacing.)

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and atlocations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavementterminates at expansion joints.

1. Contractor may utilize preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms orbulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inchesinto concrete.



2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do notcontinue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys,

unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

C. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concretecurbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and whereindicated.

1. Locate expansion joints in pavement where indicated on plans.2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.3. Terminate joint filler no less than 1/2 inch or no more than 1 inch below finished surface

for joint sealant.4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together.5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on bothsides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas asindicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concretethickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishingeach edge of joint with groover tool to the indicated radius. Repeat grooving ofcontraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concretesurfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproofabrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete whencutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developingrandom contraction cracks.

3. Tied Contraction Joints: Install deformed bars and support assemblies at joints whereindicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcementsteel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of theirwork.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete.Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Donot place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finishelevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 304R requirements and recommendations for measuring,mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery to the project site.



F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

G. Do not add water to concrete surface during finishing operations.

H. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not pushor drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

I. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplementedby hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concreteaccording to recommendations in ACI 309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with aninternal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or sideforms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation.Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniformsurface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not furtherdisturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surfacetreatments.

L. Curbs and Gutters: Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish,and jointing as specified with expansion joints at intervals of approximately 100 feet andtooled contraction joints at 10-foot intervals When automatic machine placement is used forcurb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet orexceed requirements.

M. Walks: Minimum 4” thick, with expansion joints at intervals of approximately 100 feet andtooled contraction joints at intervals equal to width of walks or maximum 5-foot intervals.Tool edges to rounded profile and finish as noted herein or shown on the drawings. Contractormay utilize sawed contraction joints. Pitch walks ¼” per foot for drainage unless otherwiseindicated.

N. Ramps: Construct ramps similar to walks. Comply with applicable ADA Handbook, ANSIA117.1, and local and State codes, ordinances, and details including maximum allowable slopenot to exceed 1 foot vertical in 12 foot horizontal, with maximum rise not to exceed 30”between level landings.

O. Steps: Minimum 6” thick at intersection of treads and risers, reinforced as indicated. Slopetreads ¼” to nosing, and tool nosings to uniform ½” radius. Finish as specified below.

P. Paving: Minimum 6” thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide expansion joints as indicatedon the drawings, and contraction joints at a minimum 12’-0” EWW. Place concrete pavingover compacted subgrade as specified in Division 2 Section “Earth Moving”. Provideminimum 1% slope for drainage unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Driveway Approaches: Minimum 6” thick, unless otherwise indicated or required by localpublic works standards or building codes. Construct to radius of flare indicated, and taper orwarp into alignment with adjacent curbs, gutters, and walks. Place approaches over compactedsubgrade as specified in Division 2 section “Earth Moving.” Refer to drawing and details forany reinforcing requirements.



R. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revisedmix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement torequired thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.

Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of pavermachine during operations.

S. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment onconcrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

T. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work fromphysical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or lowtemperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heatwater and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not lessthan 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

U. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and asfollows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placementbelow 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Usingliquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceedambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keepsubgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

V. Wet-Weather Placement: Do not begin to place concrete while rain, sleet, or snow is fallingunless adequate protection is provided and, when required, acceptance of protection isobtained.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating withan edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surfacefinishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

C. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared andthe concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfacesto true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately touniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finishedconcrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.



3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hottemperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow the recommendations of ACI305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windyconditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishingoperations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding,and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concretesurface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curingcompound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with thefollowing materials:

a. Water.b. Continuous water-fog spray.c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes ortears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or rolleraccording to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfallwithin three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairdamage during curing period.

3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch.2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch.6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch.7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of

dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches.8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.




A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to samplematerials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according toASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 50 cu. yd. or fractionthereof of each concrete mix placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength testsfor each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomlyselected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each compositesample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix.Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite strength test,but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg Fand below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of composite strengthspecimens.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylindersfor each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall bemolded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimensare required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concreteclass exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., provide at least two tests for every 100cu.yd., (one set for each 50 cu. yd.). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and twospecimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing ifrequired.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall beprovided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strengthtest value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner’s Representative, concrete manufacturer, andContractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall containProject identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testingand inspecting agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, designcompressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breakingstrength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may bepermitted by Owner’s Representative, but will not be used as the sole basis for approval orrejection.

F. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test resultsindicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met,



as directed by Owner’s Representative. Testing agency may conduct tests to determineadequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods asdirected.

G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply withspecified requirements.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determinecompliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meetrequirements in this Section.

B. Drill test cores where directed by Owner’s Representative when necessary to determinemagnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areaswith portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days afterplacement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible byremoving surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for SubstantialCompletion inspections.



CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS32 1373 - 1

SECTION 32 1373CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement.2. Joints between cement concrete and buildings and structures.3. Surface preparation including primers.4. Joint backup material.



2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. University of Colorado Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

B. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and BridgeConstruction, current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by productmanufacturer.

C. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested forcompatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substratepreparation needed for adhesion.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualifiedtesting agency, for sealants.

E. Warranty: As required by Division 1 – Warranty Section: Contractor agrees to repair or replacejoint sealers (including labor, materials, and any necessary associated costs) which fail toperform as watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather



resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance or general durability; orappear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer’s dataas an inherent quality of material for exposure indicated. Provide warranty signed by Installerand Contractor.

F. LEED Submittals




A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Work under this section shall be subject to all applicableprovisions of federal, state and local rules and regulations.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in application of sealants with five (5) years minimumexperience and be acceptable to manufacturer. Manufacturer’s field representative shall visitsite and make suggestions.

C. Adhesion Tests: Prior to any sealant application, perform adhesion tests as directed by sealantmanufacturer’s technical representative.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a singlemanufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicatingmanufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, andmixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent theirdeterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or othercauses.


A. Install sealant materials in strict accordance with all safety and weather conditions recommendedby manufacturer, product literature, or Material Safety Data Sheets. Do not proceed withinstallation of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below orabove manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation. Proceed only when forecastedweather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high-early bond strength.Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealantsonly when temperatures are in lower third of manufacturer’s recommended installationtemperature range.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that arecompatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service andapplication, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: to match color of concrete paving.

2.2 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405 or D1190.

1. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 705.01 for joint and crack sealantmaterial requirements.

2. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 412.18 for joint and crack sealantinstallation requirements.

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are non-staining; are compatible with jointsubstrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicatedby joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameterand density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness andwidth required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fillremainder of joint opening under sealant.

D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and densityrequired to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion ofsealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from manufacturers recommendations.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance withrequirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants tocomply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing byjoint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or priorexperience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoiningsurfaces.

3.3 JOINT DESIGN

A. Sealant depth is measured at the center (thin) section of sealant bead.

B. Install sealants to depths and widths as recommended by sealant manufacturer and as shown onthe drawings. Also, conform to the following general limitations if not in conflict with sealantmanufacturer’s recommendations.

1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints subject to traffic and other abrasion andindentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but neither morethan 5/8 inch deep nor less than 3/8 inch deep.

2. For normal moving joints not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of jointwidth, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than ¼ inch deep.

3. Depth of sealant must not exceed width of joint.4. Sealant joints shall not be less than ¼ inch in width and ¼ inch in depth.5. Sealant joints shall not exceed 2 inches in width in a single application.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Preparation work shall result in clean surfaces in all areas where sealant is to be adhered. Suchsurfaces shall be free of any old sealant, contaminants and impurities which are deleterious tobonding or adhesion of primers or sealant.

B. Clean ferrous metals of all rust, mill scale and coatings by wire brush or grinding. Anyequipment used to remove rust shall be free of oil contaminants.

C. Wire brush masonry joint surfaces, then blow clean with oil free compressed air.

D. Apply primer per manufacturer’s recommendations. Allow primer to dry prior to applyingsealant.



E. Do not caulk joints until they are clean, dry, and free of dust, loose mortar, old sealant, foreignmatter or other bond inhibiting materials, and in compliance with requirements of manufacturerof materials, details shown on drawings, and specific requirements of other sections ofspecifications.

3.5 JOINT BACKING

A. Use joint backing to control depth of joint to specified thickness.

B. Select joint backing size to allow for 25% compression of backing when inserted into joint.

C. Where shown on drawings where depth of joint will not permit use of joint backing, or whereverrecommended by sealant manufacturer, install bond-breaker tape to prevent three-sidedadhesion.

D. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of joint backing units.

3.6 APPLICATION/INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT

A. Apply sealants neatly, in a good and workmanlike manner which meets following minimumrequirements or standards. Specific instructions of manufacturer must also be followed.

B. Apply sealant using a gun with proper size nozzles. Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids andjoints solid to backup material, with complete wetting of all joint bond surfaces.

C. Applied sealant shall form a full, smooth, uniform bead, free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, airpockets and embedded impurities.

D. After joint has been completely filled with sealant, neatly tool joint sealant to eliminate airpockets or voids, and to provide a smooth, slightly concave, neat appearing finish, with sealantsurface slightly below adjoining surfaces. Wetting of finished surface with not be allowed.

E. Where horizontal joints are located between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint toform a slight cove, so joint will not trap moisture and dirt.

F. Protect adjacent surfaces and systems from sealant material. Use masking tape where requiredto prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanentlystained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

G. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of jointsealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

H. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning orcuring begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniformbeads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion ofsealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

I. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions,unless otherwise indicated.



J. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locationsindicated.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methodsand with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products inwhich joints occur.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substancesand from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are withoutdeterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damageor deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediatelyand replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from theoriginal work.

3.9 JOB SITE CLEAN-UP

A. Sealant applicator must remove all excess materials from job site.

B. Leave all surrounding areas where joint sealant has been applied free of excess sealant, debrisand foreign substances.



PAVEMENT MARKINGS32 1723-1

SECTION 32 1723PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions, and Division 1 specification. Sections apply if provided, to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Furnish and install all painted lines, directional arrows,handicapped symbols, or similar markings on paved surfaces, as shown on the drawings orspecified herein, as required by jurisdiction having authority, and as required to complete thework.

B. Related Work:


2. Division 32 Section “Asphaltic Paving” for materials, installation and minimumrequirements.

3. Division 32 Section “Concrete Paving” for materials, installation and minimumrequirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein,except where more stringent requirements are described herein or otherwise required by theContract Documents.

B. University of Colorado Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition.

C. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and BridgeConstruction, current edition.

D. “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices” latest edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published descriptive literature and completespecifications for products specified herein.

B. LEED Submittals


2. Indicate location of manufacturing facility including name, address and distancebetween manufacturing facility and the proposed site. Provide manufacture’sdocumentation indicating location where the base materials were extracted, mined,



quarried, harvested, etc. and the distance between this location and the project site.Also include material costs, excluding cost of installation.


A. Qualifications: Pavement marking applicator shall be regularly engaged in this type of work,and shall provide adequate, experienced manpower and proper equipment to complete the work.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of Colorado State Department ofHighways Specification Sections 627, 708, and 713.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers, withlabels intact and legible.


A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply pavement marking when ambient air and pavementsurface temperature is below 40 F for paint and below 50 F for epoxy and thermoplasticmarking materials, or when moisture in any form is present on the pavement surface.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Traffic Marking Paint: Alkyd-based, lead and chromate free, ready-mixed, cold-applied trafficmarking paint complying with AASHTO M-248, Type N or F as determined by trafficrequirements, white or yellow color as designated on the plans for striping and lane markings,white and blue at international handicapped parking symbols. Acceptable products includeDevoe “Traffic Line” and Sherwin Williams “ProMar Traffic Marking Paint.”

B. Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Marking: Markings shall consist of a resilient white oryellow thermoplastic product with glass beads uniformly distributed. Capable of being affixedto bituminous pavement by heating and applied to concrete per manufacture recommendations.





3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Sectionwill be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Allow fresh pavement surfaces to weather at least 30 days prior toapplication of traffic marking paint.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Traffic Marking Paint: Unless otherwise indicated, apply traffic marking paint in nominal 4”wide stripes at the rate of 100 to 110 sf/gal.

B. Preformed Plastic Pavement Marking: Apply per manufacturers recommendations.

C. Patterns and Symbols:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, apply traffic markings in nominal 4” wide stripes withclear and sharp dimensions. See drawings for striping patterns, directional arrows andsymbols.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use yellow markings at lane striping and directionalsymbols, white markings at parking striping and white and blue markings atinternational handicapped symbols.

3. Comply with ANSI 117.1 and ADA requirements for graphic symbols, stall widths,and access aisles at handicapped parking spaces. Provide approved templates forsymbols and directional arrows.


PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review UNIT PAVING UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 1

SECTION 32 14 00 UNIT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Brick pavers set in sand setting beds. 2. Stone pavers set on crusher fines setting beds.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 09 Section "Brick Flooring" for brick flooring for interior applications. 2. Division 09 Section "Stone Flooring" for dimension stone paving. 3. Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving" for asphalt base under unit pavers. 4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for cast-in-place concrete curbs and gutters

serving as edge restraints for unit pavers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.

B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pavers. 2. Bituminous setting materials. 3. Edge restraints.

C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Each type of unit paver indicated. 2. Joint materials involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated. 2. Joint materials. 3. Exposed edge restraints.



A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

B. Mockups: Build mockups (4’x3’) to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store salvaged pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.

B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

C. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.

D. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.


A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BRICK PAVERS

A. Materials Reuse: Provide brick pavers that have been salvaged from the Project site.

B. Efflorescence: Brick shall be rated "not effloresced" when tested according to ASTM C 67.

C. Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a continuous film of a temporary protective coating that is compatible with brick, mortar, and grout products and can be removed without damaging grout or brick. Do not coat unexposed brick surfaces; handle brick to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does contact bonding surfaces of brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.


2.2 STONE PAVERS

A. Sandstone Pavers: Rectangular paving slabs and Random polygonal flagstones salvaged for material re-use from the Project site.

1. Color: Lyons Red 2. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum value of 8, based on testing according to

ASTM C 241 or ASTM C 1353. 3. Finish: Natural cleft. 4. Thickness: Not less than 2 inches. 5. Face Size: Random, 24” minimum dimension, unless otherwise noted on plan.

2.3 CURBS AND EDGE RESTRAINTS

A. Job-Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.

B. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.

2.5 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with [ASTM D 448 for Size No. 57] [ASTM D 2940, subbase material] [requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subbase material].

B. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with [ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8] [ASTM D 2940, base material] [requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for base course].

C. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.

D. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 10.

E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.

1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.

F. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications; made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:


1. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355.

G. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations, including areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and waterproofing protection is in place.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive base course for unit pavers.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work.

B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.

C. Handle protective-coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does contact bonding surfaces of brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.

D. Joint Pattern: Herringbone.

E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.


F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

1. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation.

2. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.4 AGGREGATE BASE AND SAND SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density.

B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Place separation geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches.

D. Place aggregate base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated. Special attention should be given to achieving compaction standards adjacent to edge restraints, catch basins and utility structures.

E. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and uniform until pavers are set and compacted.

F. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.

G. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.

1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit.

H. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Use vibrator with neoprene mat on face of plate or other means as needed to prevent cracking and chipping of pavers. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator.

1. Compact pavers when there is sufficient surface to accommodate operation of vibrator, leaving at least 36 inches of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges.

2. Before ending each day's work, compact installed concrete pavers except for 36-inch width of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges (laying faces).

3. As work progresses to perimeter of installation, compact installed pavers that are adjacent to permanent edges unless they are within 36 inches of laying face.

4. Before ending each day's work and when rain interrupts work, cover pavers that have not been compacted and cover leveling course on which pavers have not been placed with nonstaining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.


I. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.

J. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.

K. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.

3.5 LAYING OF SANDSTONE PAVERS ON SAND SETTING BED

A. Ensure that the Lyons Red Flagstone Pavers are free of foreign materials before installation.

B. The Lyons Red Flagstone Pavers shall be laid in such a manner that the desired pattern is maintained as per detail drawing and direction from Owner.

C. Joints between the pavers on average shall be 1/4 in. (tolerance +/- 1/16’’).

D. Ease edges of stone pavers and wall veneer with hand tools only.

E. The surface shall be true to elevation and shall not vary by more than 1/8" when tested with a 10' - 0" straight edge at any location on the surface. Surfaces shall interface flush with adjacent materials as shown.

F. Pattern for Flagstone pavers is informal and shall be similar all areas receiving sandstone paving treatment. Confirm pattern with Owner prior to laying the pavers. Contractor will be responsible to alter installation at his cost if prior approval has not been obtained and Owner requests adjustment.

G. Dry sweep joints with sand.

3.6 REPAIRING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: Remove excess sand and dirt and other debris from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.

1. Remove temporary protective coating as recommended by coating manufacturer and as acceptable to paver and grout manufacturers.

2. Do not allow protective coating to enter floor drains. Trap, collect, and remove coating material.


PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 00 - 1

SECTION 32 84 00

IRRIGATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED - Work of this Section generally includes provisions for the installation of an

underground landscape irrigation system including the following: A. Static pressure verification and coordination of irrigation system installation with landscape

material installation. B. Trenching, stockpiling excavation materials, refilling and compacting trenches. C. Complete irrigation system including but not limited to piping, valves, fittings, heads, controllers

and wiring, and final adjustments to insure complete coverage. D. Water connections. E. Replacement of unsatisfactory materials. F. Clean-up, Consultant Reviews, and Project Acceptance. G. Tests.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Examine all sections related to project work. 1.03 REFERENCES

A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 - General requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations.

B. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more stringent

requirements are shown or specified in Contract Documents. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods

specifically referenced in this Section. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Wires and Cables.


A. Installer Qualifications - Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat, orderly and responsible manner in accordance with recognized standards of workmanship. To demonstrate ability and experience necessary for this Project, and financial stability, submit if requested by Consultant, prior to contract award the following:


1. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this Project.

Description of projects shall include: a. Name of project. b. Location. c. Owner. d. Brief description of work and project budget.

B. Special Requirements:

1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping, backflow

preventer(s), and related work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation.

2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling, compaction, and repair of finish grade treatment.

3. Coordination with Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section.

4. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation system at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Pre-Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a conference to review in

detail quality control and construction requirements for equipment, materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties required to be in attendance shall be notified no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified representatives of each party concerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, including but not limited to Architect, Consultant, Contractor's Superintendent, and Installer. 1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all parties in

attendance within five days of conference. 1.05 SUBMITTALS - Prepare and make submittals in accordance with conditions of the Contract.

A. Materials List - Submit six copies of a complete materials list indicating manufacturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used. Show appropriate dimensions and adequate detail to accurately portray intent of construction.

B. Record Drawings (As-Builts):

1. At onset of irrigation installation secure Autocadd files of original irrigation design from

Owner. At the end of every day, revise as-built prints for work accomplished that day in red ink. As-built field prints shall be brought up-to-date at the close of the working day every Friday by a qualified draftsperson. A print of record plan(s) shall be available at Project Site. Indicate zoning changes on weekly as-built drawings. Indicate non-pressure piping changes on as-builds. Upon completion of Project, submit for review, prior to final acceptance, final set of as-built mylars and an Autocadd disk copy. Dimensions, from two permanent points of reference (building corners, sidewalk, road intersections or permanent structures), location of following items:

a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension maximum 100 feet along


routing). c. Sprinkler control valves. d. Quick coupling valves. e. Manual drains and stop and waste valves. f. Drip line blowout stubs. g. Control wire routing if not with pressure mainline. h. Gate valves. i. Control wire and communication cable splices j. Locations of all sleeving including size, quantity and depth of sleeve

2. Owner’s Representative will not certify any pay request submitted by the Contractor if

the as-built drawings are not current, and processing of pay request will not occur until as-builts are up-dated.

C. Operation Instructions - Submit 3 written operating instructions including winterization

procedures and start-up, with cut sheets of products, and coordinate controller/watering operation instruction with Owner maintenance personnel. 1. Controller Charts:

a. Do not prepare charts until Consultant has reviewed record (as-built) drawings. b. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed.

1) Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scale permits fitting of controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to retain full legibility.

2) Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as-built" system, showing area covered by that controller.

c. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly

different pastel color drawing over entire area of coverage. d. Following review of charts by Consultant, they shall be hermetically sealed

between two layers of 20-mm thick plastic sheet e. Charts shall be completed and reviewed prior to final review of irrigation

system. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging,

bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer's name, volume, quantity, contents, instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing, of PVC pipe. All PVC

pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be replaced with new piping.

1.07 JOBSITE CONDITIONS:

A. Protection of Property:


1. Preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner, and all injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner. All costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor.

2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, and other property from damage. Flare and barricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or other building material surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition.

B. Existing Trees:

1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low

branching deciduous material shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches.

2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inches or larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe of conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, wall of trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas.

C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines:

1. Request proper utility company to stake location (including depth) of all underground

electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. If damage does occur, Utility Owner shall repair all damage. Contractor shall pay all costs of such repairs unless other arrangements have been made.

2. Request Owner, in writing, to locate all private utilities (i.e., electrical service to outside lighting) before proceeding with excavation. If, after such request and necessary staking, private utilities that were not staked are encountered and damaged by Installer, Owner shall repair them at no cost to Installer. If Contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired by Utility Owner at Contractor's expense unless other arrangements have been made.

D. Replacement of Paving and Curbs - Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths,

curbing, etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to original condition.

1.08 WARRANTY/GUARANTY: - Manufacturer shall warrant materials against defects for a period of one

year from date of Substantial Completion. Installer(s) shall guaranty workmanship for similar period.

A. Settling of backfilled trenches that may occur during guaranty period shall be repaired at no expense to Owner, including complete restoration of damaged property.

B. Expenses due to vandalism before substantial completion shall be borne by Contractor. C. Owner will maintain turf and planting areas during warranty period, so as not to hamper proper

operation of irrigation system.


1.09 MAINTENANCE:

A. Furnish the following maintenance items to Owner prior to final Acceptance: 1. Two Sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling, and adjusting each type

of sprinkler head and valve supplied on this Project. 2. Two six foot valve keys for operation of gate valves. 3. Two quick coupler keys and two matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling

valve installed. 4. Two aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves.

B. Winterization - include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling

season (in which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner. System shall be voided of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Consultant. Reopen, operate, and adjust system malfunctions accordingly during April of following season within 3 days of notification by Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. General Piping:

1. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream of backflow prevention units) - Class 200 PVC BE

(1" - 2 1/2") and Class 200 PVC RT (3" and larger). 2. Non-pressure Lines - Class 200 PVC BE. 3. PVC Sleeving - Class 160 PVC. 4. Drip Tubing - Irritrol Dura-Pol EHD 1645 3/4" with .050 inch wall thickness. 5. Dripper Pipe - As shown in irrigation schedule (Inline emitter pipe).

B. Copper Pipe and Fittings:

1. Copper Pipe - Type K, hard tempered. 2. Fittings - Wrought copper, solder joint type. 3. Joints - Soldered with solder, 45% silver, 15% copper, 16% zinc, and 24% cadmium and

solidus at 1125~F and liquids at 1145~F. Canfiled Evergleem. C. Brass Pipe and Fittings:

1. Brass Pipe - 85% red brass, ANSI Schedule 40 screwed pipe. 2. Fittings - Medium brass, screwed 125-pound class.

D. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: 1. Identification Markings:

a. Identify all pipe with following indelible markings:

1) Manufacturer's name. 2) Nominal pipe size.


3) Schedule of class. 4) Pressure rating. 5) NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal of approval. 6) Date of extrusion.

2. Solvent Weld Pipe - Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 12454-B, Type 1, Grade 1.

a. Fittings - Standard Wright, Schedule 40, injection molder PVC; complying with

ASTM D1784 and D2466, cell classification 12454-B.

1) Threads - Injection molded type (where required). 2) Tees and ells - Side gated.

b. Threaded Nipples - ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads. c. Teflon Tape – All PVC male threaded fittings and nipples, excluding marlex

fittings, shall receive wrapping of Teflon tape applied to threaded surfaces per pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.

d. Joint Cement and Primer - Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings.

3. Gasketed End Pipe - Manufactured from virgin Polyvinyl Chloride compound in

accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 1254-B, Type 1,Grade 1.

a. Fittings and Services Tees (3" and larger) - Ductile iron, grade 70-55-05 in

accordance with ASTM A-536. Fittings shall have deep bell push-on joints with gaskets meeting ASTM F-477.

b. Gaskets - Factory installed in pipe and fittings, having a metal or plastic support within gasket or a plastic retainer ring for gasket.

c. Lubricant - As recommended by manufacturer of pipe fittings. E. Gate Valves:

1. Gate Valves for 3/4 inch through 2-1/2 Inch Pipe - Brass construction; solid wedge, IPS

threads, and non-rising stem with wheel operating handle. 2. Gate Valves for 3 Inch and Larger Pipe - Iron body, brass or bronze mounted AWWA

gate valves with a clear waterway equal to full nominal diameter of valve; rubber gasket or mechanical joint-type only. Valves shall be able to withstand a continuous working pressure of 200 psi and be equipped with a square operating nut and resilient wedge. Provide pipe restraints on gate valves 3 inches or larger as detailed

F. Quick Coupling Valves - Brass two-piece body designed for working pressure of 125 PSI;

operable with quick coupler. Equip quick coupler with locking rubber cover. G. Valve Boxes:

1. Gate Valves, Quick Coupling Valves, Drain Valves, Drip Line Blow-out Stubs, and Wire

Splice or Stub Box - Carson Brooks #910-10, box as detailed with purple lid. 2. 1 inch through 2 inch Control Valves, Master Valves and Communication Splice box -

Carson Brooks #1419-12 box as detailed with purple lid.


H. Electrical Control Wiring:

1. Low Voltage:

a. Electrical Control Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 14 direct burial copper wire or larger, if required to operate system as designed.

b. Electrical Common Wire - AWG UFUL approved No. 12 direct burial copper wire or larger, if required to operate system as designed.

c. Wire Colors:

1) Control Wires - Red. 2) Common Wires - White. 3) Master Valve Wires - Blue. 4) Spare Control Wires - Black. 5) Spare Common Wires - Yellow.

d. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Consultant.

e. Control Wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M DBY direct bury splice..

2. High Voltage - Type required by local codes and ordinances, of proper size to

accommodate needs of equipment serviced. I. Electric Control Valves - Size and type shown on Drawings having manual flow adjustment and

manual bleed nut. J. Sprinkler Heads - As indicated on Drawings. Fabricated riser units in accordance with details on

Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITIONS, LANDSCAPE PLAN REVIEW AND COORDINATION-Contractor will be held

responsible for coordination between landscape and irrigation system installation. Landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan shall take precedence over the irrigation system equipment locations. If irrigation equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan, the Contractor will be required to relocate the irrigation equipment, as necessary, at Contractor’s expense. B. Contractor is responsible to notify Consultant of any field conditions that vary from the conditions

shown on the Irrigation Construction Documents. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of these conditions, Contractor will be held responsible for all costs associated with system adjustments required due to the change in field conditions.

3.02 STATIC PRESSURE VERIFICATION - Contractor shall field verify the static pressure at the project site,

prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, and submit findings, in writing, to Consultant. If Contractor fails to verify static water pressure prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, Contractor shall assume responsibility for all costs required to make system operational and the costs required to replace any damaged landscape material. Damage shall include all required material costs,


design costs and plant replacement costs. 3.03 INSPECTION: - Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be performed. Do

not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

A. Grading operations, with the exception of final grading, shall be completed and approved by Owner before staking or installation of any irrigation system begins.

B. Underground Utilities shall be installed prior to installation of irrigation system. If irrigation

installation takes place prior to utility installation, Contractor shall notify Owner of this condition in writing prior to commencement of irrigation installation.

3.04 PREPARATION: A. Staking shall Occur as Follows:

1. Mark, with powdered lime, routing of pressure supply line and flag heads for first few

zones. Contact Consultant 48 hours in advance and request review of staking. Proposed locations of all trees shall be field staked by Contractor and approved by Owner/Landscape Architect prior to Consultant review of irrigation staking. Consultant will advise installer as to the amount of staking to be prepared. Consultant will review staking and direct changes if required. Review does not relieve installer from coverage problems due to improper placement of heads after staking.

2. Contractor shall contact Consultant if field spacing varies by +/- 10% of the spacing shown on the irrigation plans. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of variances exceeding 10%, Contractor assumes full responsibility for the costs associated with any required system modifications deemed necessary by the Consultant or Owner.

3. If Project has significant topography, freeform planting beds, or other amenities, which could require alteration of irrigation equipment layout as deemed necessary by Consultant, do not install irrigation equipment in these areas until Consultant has reviewed equipment staking.

B. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving

operations, to accommodate piping and wiring. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within 2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with STM D1557.

C. Trenching - Trench excavation shall follow, as much as possible, layout shown on Drawing. Dig

trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trench bottom shall be clean and smooth with all rock and organic debris removed. 1. Clearances:

a. Piping 3 Inches and Larger - Make trenches of sufficient width (14 inches minimum) to properly assemble and position pipe in trench. Minimum clearance of piping 3 inches or larger shall be 5 inches horizontally on both sides of the trench.

b. Piping Smaller than 3 Inches - Trenches shall have a minimum width of 7 inches.

c. Line Clearance - Provide not less than 6 inches of clearance between each line and not less than 12 inches of clearance between lines of other trades.

2. Pipe and Wire Depth:


a. Pressure Supply Piping - 24 inches from top of pipe. b. PVC Sleeving - 18 inches from top of pipe. c. Non-pressure Piping (pop-up) - 12 inches from top of pipe. d. Control Wiring/Communication Cable - Side of pressure main or at 18 inch

depth if installed in a separate trench with no mainline piping with locator tape installed at 10’’ from bottom of trench.

3. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be

removed. In backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use sleeves of suitable diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves. Observe same precautions as though pipe were installed in open trench.

3.05 INSTALLATION - Locate other equipment as near as possible to locations designated. Consultant shall

review deviations prior to installation.

A. PVC Piping - Snake pipe in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not install pipe when air temperature is below 40~F. Place manual drain valves at low points and dead ends of pressure supply piping to insure complete drainage of system. When pipe installation is not in progress, or at end of each day, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap. Perform Work in accordance with good practices prevailing in piping trades. 1. Solvent Weld PVC Pipe - Lay pipe and make all plastic to plastic joints in accordance

with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Gasketed End Pipes:

a. Lay pipe and make pipe to fitting or pipe to pipe joint, following OR70 recommendations (Johns-Manville Guide for Installation of Ring-Tite Pipe), or pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

b. Construct concrete thrust blocks behind all gasketed fittings, tees, bends, reducers, line valves, and caps in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Contact Consultant prior to placing thrust blocks, for observation of thrust block excavation and initial placement. Thrust block bearing surface shall be calculated based on tables below. All bearing surfaces shall be undisturbed soil:

THRUST BLOCK SIZING GUIDE: Thrust developed per 100 PSI pressure (lbs. force) for various fitting configurations. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Pipe Fitting Fitting Valves, Tees Size 90 deg. Elbow 45 deg. Elbow Dead Ends ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 1,000 600 800 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Approximate bearing strength of typical soils. ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Soil Type Lbs/ft 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Mulch, Peat, etc. 0 Soft Clay 500 Sand 1,000


Sand and Gravel 1,500 Sand and Gravel with Clay 2,000 Sand and Gravel Cemented with Clay 4,000 Hard Pan 5,000 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Example Calculation: 6 inch 90 degree elbow in sand and gravel soil Bearing Surface Area (square feet) = 4,000 lbs / 1,500 lbs/ ft 2 = 2.67 square feet bearing surface area on undisturbed soil

B. Control Wiring:

1. Low Voltage Wiring:

a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pressure supply line trenches, strung as close as possible to main pipe lines with such wires to be consistently located below and to one side of pipe, or in separate trenches.

b. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals and lay with pressure supply line pipe to one side of the trench.

c. Provide an expansion loop at every pressure pipe angle fitting, every electric control valve location (in valve box), and every 500 feet. Form expansion loop by wrapping wire at least 8 times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe.

d. Make all splices and E.C.V. connections using Rain Bird Pentite, DBY connectors or similar dry splice method.

e. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice valve box.

f. Install one control wire for each control valve. g. Run two spare (Black) #14 AWG UFUL control wires and one common wire

from controller pedestal to the end of each and every leg of mainline. Label spare wires at controller and wire stub box.

C. Electric Control Valves - Install cross-handle four inches below finished grade where shown on

Drawings as detailed. When grouped together, allow at least 12 inches between valve box sides. Install each remote control valve in a separate valve box. Install individual valve box flush with grade.

D. Quick Coupling Valves - Install quick couplers on swing-joint assemblies as indicated on

construction details; plumb and flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45 degrees and no less than 10 degrees.

E. Drain Valves - Install one manual drain valve on pressure supply line directly downstream of

backflow preventer as detailed. Provide a three cubic foot drainage sump for drain valve as detailed. Field locate at low points of pipe. Estimate one per 300’ of mainline pipe or as required by final elevations.

F. Valve Boxes:

1. Install one valve box for each type of valve installed as detailed. Valve box extensions

are not acceptable except for master valves and flow sensors. Install gravel sump after compaction of all trenches. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box after valve box is backfilled and compacted.


2. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each valve box. Letter and number size shall be no smaller than 1 inch and no greater in size than 1 1/2 inches. Depth of branding shall be no more than 1/8 inch into valve box lid. Coordinate final station numbering with central control operator.

G. Gate Valves - Install where shown on Drawings as detailed. H. Sprinkler Heads - Install sprinkler heads where designated on Drawings or where staked. Set to

finish as detailed. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on Drawing unless re-staked as directed by Consultant. In no case shall the spacing exceed maximum recommended by manufacturer. Install heads on swing joints or riser assemblies as detailed. Adjust part circle heads for proper coverage. Adjust heads to correct height after sod is installed. Plant placement shall not interfere with intended sprinkler head coverage, piping, or other equipment. Consultant may request nozzle changes or adjustments without additional cost to the Owner.

I. Backfilling - Do not begin backfilling operations until required system tests have been completed.

Backfill shall not be done in freezing weather except with review by Consultant. Leave trenches slightly mounded to allow for settlement after backfilling is completed. Trenches shall be finish graded prior to walk-through of system by Consultant. 1. Materials - Excavated material is generally considered satisfactory for backfill purposes.

Backfill material shall be free of rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 1 inch in maximum dimension. Do not mix subsoil with topsoil. Material not suitable for backfill shall be hauled away. Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable backfill if excavated material is unacceptable or not sufficient to meet backfill, compaction, and final grade requirements.

2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. Open excavations shall be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations.

3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density, determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 utilizing the following methods:

a. Mechanical tamping. b. Puddling or ponding. Puddling or ponding and/or jetting is prohibited within

20’-0" of building or foundation walls. J. Piping Under Paving:

1. Provide for a minimum cover of 18 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of

the aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving.

2. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be installed shall be bedded with sand (a layer 6" below pipe and 6" above pipe).

3. Compact backfill material in 6" lifts at 90% maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 using manual or mechanical tamping devices.

4. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all piping under paving, in presence of Owner prior to backfilling and paving operations.

5. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at no cost to Owner. Obtain permission to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner.

K. Water Supply and Point of Connection - Water supply shall be extended as shown from water

supply lines.



A. Flushing - After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush piping system under full head of water pressure from dead end fittings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers after flushing.

B. Testing - Conduct tests in presence of Consultant. Arrange for presence of Consultant 48 hours in

advance of testing. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves, fill pressure supply line with

water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours.

2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no loss of pressure is evident during the test period.

3. Leaks - Detect and repair leaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of test. 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of

48 hours. C. Walk-Through for Substantial Completion:

1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-

through. 3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through and additionally,

open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. 5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct all inadequacies of

coverage due to deviations from Contract Documents. 6. Supply Consultant with prints of irrigation as-builts prior to scheduling substantial

completion walk-through. D. Walk-Through for Final Completion:

1. Arrange for Consultant’s presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Show evidence to Consultant that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record

drawings, and equipment as required before Final Completion walk-through is scheduled. 3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through to insure

correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items deemed not acceptable by Consultant shall be reworked to complete satisfaction of

Consultant. 5. If after request to Consultant for walk-through for Final Completion of irrigation system,

Consultant finds items during walk-through which have not been properly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of incomplete items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk-throughs. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Consultant to conduct and document further walk-throughs as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents.


3.07 ADJUSTING - Upon completion of installation, "fine-tune" entire system by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and break-up arms, and setting pressure reducing valves at pro-per and similar pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure +/- 7%. A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper coverage, and improved water

distribution as determined by Consultant, contractor shall make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling.

B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise noted on

Construction Plans or directed by Consultant. C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or

poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 CLEANING - Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of work. Dispose of, off-site at

no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installation of irrigation system.



PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical Review LANDSCAPE GRADING 32 91 16 - 1

SECTION 32 91 16

LANDSCAPE GRADING PART 1—GENERAL 1. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

1. 2 SUMMARY


1. Examination, subgrade preparation and placement of topsoil, testing of topsoil, grading, herbicide treatment, cleaning and protection.

1. 3 REFERENCES

A. Section 311000, SITE CLEARING, 312000 EARTH MOVING. B. State Department of Highways, Division of Highways, State of Colorado, Standard Specifications

for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 207 of the latest edition. C. ANSI/ASTM D698—Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb. (2.49 Kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop. D. ANSI/ASTM D1556—Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. E. Association of Official Agricultural Chemists: Topsoil Analysis.

1. 4 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Includes, but not limited to, Goatheads, Bindweed, Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Knapweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Weed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Broom Grass.

1. 5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Division One. All submittals must be accepted by the Owner Representative in writing before work commences.

B. Topsoil testing:

1. Obtain test samples from two (2) locations in the topsoil stockpile or topsoiled site as designated by the Owner’s Representative.

2. Each location submission shall include:

a. 1 pint representative sample in airtight container.


b. Agricultural analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods

established by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Test shall include available nutrients, soil pH, soil texture, sodium evaluation, conductivity, and percentage organic matter, carbon to nitrogen ratio, and recommended fertilization and amendment rates for plant material types specified.

c. Identify any toxins that may inhibit plant growth.

3. Deliver copies of all test reports and samples to Owner Representative.

C. Certificates: Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities.

1. 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with Division One. B. Qualifications:

1. Installer: Company with minimum five (5) years’ successful experience in the placing on topsoil similar in scope and size to this project.

2. Testing Agency: Certified soils laboratory with capability to analyze materials for

conformance to specification requirements (where applicable).

3. The contractor’s on site Supervisor to be certified by the Associated Landscape Contractors of America (ALCa) as a Certified Landscape Technician (CLT) or Colorado equivalent.

4. Dividing the landscape, irrigation, and maintenance scopes of work is prohibited. All

work performed in this section shall be completed by the same contractor who performs all other landscape, irrigation, and maintenance work.

1. 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Topsoil: Protect materials from erosion, wind, rodents, deterioration and contamination during installation and site storage.

1. 8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of referenced standards for environmental conditions before, during, and after installation. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards.

2. Moisture Content: Topsoil and other materials shall not be placed, spread, or worked

while in a wet or saturated condition. Moisture content shall not be so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor so low that dust will form in the air or that clods will not bread readily. Apply water if necessary to bring soil to optimum moisture content for tilling.


3. Do not work soil when muddy or frozen.

B. Existing conditions:

1. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities including irrigation system and privately owned services. Perform work in a manner to avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required.

2. Excavation: Maintain grade stakes set by others until parties concerned mutually agree

upon removal. When conditions detrimental to Work are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, noxious materials or obstructions, notify Owner Representative before proceeding.

1. 9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate with construction of utilities on site. Do not begin working topsoil until underground work is completed in the area.

2. Coordinate with seeding, sodding and Landscape Contractor(s) approved schedule. Limit

construction access to areas where topsoil has been placed. 3. Coordinate with Contractors’ work requiring access to site over topsoil areas. 4. Coordinate with installation of underground irrigation system.

1. 10 MAINTENANCE

A. Protect newly installed topsoil areas from erosion and traffic. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and disturbed areas to specified tolerances until landscape operations commence.

PART 2—PRODUCTS 2. 1 TOPSOIL:

A. Onsite Topsoil: Provide stockpiled topsoil free from stones, lumps, stolons, plants, roots, sticks and seeds, high salt content, and other materials/attributes harmful to plant life. Remove all particles greater than 1-1/2 inches. Submit test report to the Owner Representative identifying pH, salts content, organic matter, cation exchange ratio, and nutrients.

B. Refer to Sections 329200 and 329300 for topsoil amendment requirements.

2. 2 WATER

A. Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of plants. 2. 3 HERBICIDE

A. Weed Herbicide: Submit selected herbicide (see paragraph 3.2, D, this section).


PART 3—EXECUTION 3. 1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the Work of this Section

will be performed. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Owner Representative. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.

1. Verify that during grading, the ground surface was cleaned of materials that might hinder

final operations.

3. 2 GRADE PREPARATION

A. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted and is free of contaminated material. (See Section 311000, SITE CLEARING, 312000 EARTH MOVING.)

B. Review weeds growth in all areas with the Owner Representative prior to proceeding with weed

eradication. C. Perform the Herbicide Treatment as outlined below in all areas to be landscaped.

D. Herbicide Treatment: Precise timing is the key to controlling bindweed with herbicides. To be effective, the herbicide must move throughout the root and rhizome network, killing the root buds as well as the top growth. Movement of herbicides to the root system is greatest at the early flowering to full bloom stage of growth, when root reserves are at their lowest and new sugars produced by the leaves are being moved downward. Earlier or later treatments usually destroy only the leafy top growth without being carried to the roots. Too much herbicide is not effective either. It may kill the top growth too quickly and prevent the herbicide from being moved down to the roots and rhizomes.

Herbicides which provide good control of field bindweed when applied at the proper stage of growth include glyphosate (e.g. ROUND-UP, TOUCHDOWN), dicamba (e.g. BANVEL), and 2,4-D. Apply at the bud to full bloom stage, which usually occurs in late June or July. Bindweed can also be effectively controlled by spraying in late August or early September when the plants have resumed vigorous growth and started to flower. Suppression of field bindweed can be achieved by post emergence applications of contact herbicides such as glufosinate ammonium (LIBERTY, IGNITE), bentazon (BASAGRAN), or acifluorfen (BLAZER).

Herbicide treatment is to be performed over the entire area to be landscaped. Allow sufficient time to successfully complete the entire herbicide treatment process before continuing with the landscape installation. Repeat this procedure whenever weed growth becomes evident throughout the duration of the construction.

1. Herbicide treatment must be completed during the growing season. 2. Water surface 1/2" per week for two weeks prior to application if natural precipitation

does not supply this amount to encourage weed seed germination. 3. Treat site with selected herbicide in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.


4. Two days after application water surface 1/2" per week if natural precipitation does not

supply this amount to encourage weed seed germination. 5. Ten (10) days after the first herbicide application, review surface for evidence of plant

growth. 6. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4, and 5, up to two (2) applications, until there is no evidence of plant

growth after a 10-day period. 7. Obtain Owner Representative’s approval of surface conditions ten (10) days after last

herbicide application.

8. Herbicide treatments beyond the two applications shall be considered additional to the contract and will be performed at the directed of the Owner Representative after the Owner has approved the cost. Additional herbicide treatments required for imported topsoil shall be borne solely by the Contractor.

E. Remove plant debris from treated area. F. Rip entire subgrade to receive topsoil to a depth of 8”. Rip subgrade thoroughly, two passes

minimum in opposite directions. G. Prepare grade to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain lines, levels, profiles, and

contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. Maintain a minimum 2% slope away from adjacent building foundations.

H. Remove foreign materials, stones exceeding 4 inches, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. I. When repairing previously topsoiled areas or when importing new topsoil, scarify subgrade to a

depth of 8 inches by disking or tilling where topsoil is to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil. Rip subsoil to additional depth as necessary to eliminate compaction due to construction.

3. 3 TOPSOIL INSTALLATION

A. Stockpiled topsoil: Spread the topsoil to a minimum compacted depth of 6” throughout the site or as indicated on the drawings. Herbicide treatment may be split by conducting one treatment of the subgrade and one treatment to the topsoil after spreading as determined by the Owner Representative. Additional treatments necessary after the initial two applications will be performed at no additional cost to the owner.

3. 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Reviews: Contact Owner Representative 72 hours in advance to review the site after each Herbicide Treatment. Do not proceed with additional landscape work until the results are approved and accepted by the Owner Representative.

3. 5 ADJUSTING


A. Reconditioning compacted areas: When subsequent construction operations or adverse weather disturbs completed topsoil areas, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction.

3. 6 GRADE APPROVAL

A. Owner Representative will review the completed grading with respect to finish appearance. Contractor maintains responsible for positive drainage and adjustment of grades should the Owner Representative deem it necessary, to bring landforms into a condition judged esthetically appropriate.

3. 7 CLEANUP

A. During landscape installation:

1. All areas shall be clean at the end of each workday. Sidewalks and other paved areas shall be swept or washed down as needed. Keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

2. Contractor shall make a reasonable effort to clean up the project on a daily basis to maintain a neat and orderly site.

B. Project completion:

1. All debris, soil and trash resulting from landscape operations shall be removed from the site. Burning of waste material is prohibited. All paved areas shall be swept clean.

2. Restore all areas outside the Contract limits, which have been disturbed to their original

condition at no cost to the Owner.

3. 8 PROTECTION

A. Protect topsoil grade from unreasonable damage due to landscape operations. Prohibit traffic from other contractors, trades, and trespassers.

B. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace damaged

landscape work as directed. Scarify hard packed areas to 8-inches deep and regrade to finish surface.


PR 002650 University of Colorado at Boulder January 19, 2010 JILA Laboratory Addition – Design Development Technical ReviewPLANTS PLANTS 32 93 00 - 1

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Plants. 2. Planting soils. 3. Tree stabilization. 4. Landscape edgings.


1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work.

2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and plantings, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing.

3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials.

4. Division 32 Section “Landscape Irrigation” for drip irrigation system 5. Division 32 Section “Landscape Grading” for subgrade preparation and placement of topsoil,

testing of topsoil, grading, herbicide treatment, cleaning and protection 6. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved areas, and

wall perimeters.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices."

1. Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances. 2. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change Orders.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than sizes indicated with diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and


size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than sizes indicated and diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

D. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

E. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

F. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

G. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown in-ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant.

H. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

I. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

J. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

K. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

L. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

M. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

N. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

O. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

P. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

Q. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.


R. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

S. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.

1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions

specific to the Project. 3. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size

of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. Trees and Shrubs: Will be tagged at nursery by Owner’s Representative and/or Owner prior to delivery to site. Tags shall remain on all plant materials until planting and removed immediately thereafter. Plant materials damaged prior to Final Acceptance will be replaced by contractor at no additional expense to the Owner.

2. Organic and Compost Mulch: 1-quart volume of each organic and compost mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

3. Mineral Mulch: 1-quart volume of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on the site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material.

4. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches. 5. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected. 6. Tree Grates, Frames, and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size delivered to the site for

review, to verify design and color selected. 7. Root Barrier: Width of panel by 12 inches.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following:

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by

the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.


E. Material Test Reports: For standardized ASTM D 5268 topsoil, existing native surface topsoil, existing in-place surface soil and imported or manufactured topsoil.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods.

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.

2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor and personnel assigned to the Work shall have certification in all of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:

a. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation and maintenance irrigation specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior.

b. Certified Landscape Technician - Interior, designated CLT-Interior. c. Certified Ornamental Landscape Professional, designated COLP.

5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil.

1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. 2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling; with depth, location, and number of

samples to be taken per instructions from Owner’s Representative. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes.

3. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.

a. Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.


D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

1. Selection of plants purchased under allowances will be made by Owner’s Representative, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.

E. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.

1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes.

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

F. Plant Material Observation: Owner’s Representative may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Owner’s Representative retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Owner’s Representative of sources of planting materials a minimum of seven business days in advance of delivery to site.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime (if required), and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.

C. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.

D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

E. Handle planting stock by root ball.


F. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.

G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in dry condition in water for two hours. Reject dried-out plants.

2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material.

3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water

as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet condition.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities (including agricultural ditches): Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of each service or utility.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without Owner's written permission.

C. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Spring Planting: April 1 through June 15. 2. Fall Planting: September 1 through October 15. 3. Or as approved by Owner.

D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

E. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.

1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization, edgings and tree grates. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion:

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. c. Annuals: Two months.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

c. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below.

1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting completion.

B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below.

1. Maintenance Period: Six months from date of planting completion.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

1.11 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All workmanship, products, materials and methods shall meet the current City of Boulder Design and Construction Standards. Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining the most current version of these standards and notifying Owner’s Representative and Owner of and discrepancies with these specifications prior to commencing work related to this project.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected.

2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Owner’s Representative, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting, requiring hand excavation, refer to planting details.

D. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings

E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting.

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve.

2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve.

3. Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone, calcitic limestone or mollusk shells.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.


F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve.

G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.

I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Fully-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 4.3 to 7.5; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch sieve; soluble salt content of not exceeding a maximum of 4.0 mmhos/cm; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-

separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

B. Mountain Peat: Not to be used on this project.

C. Sphagnum Peat: Not to be used on this project.

D. Muck Peat: Not to be used on this project.

E. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

1. In lieu of decomposed wood derivatives, mix partially decomposed wood derivatives with ammonium nitrate at a minimum rate of 0.15 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark, or with ammonium sulfate at a minimum rate of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark.

F. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.4 FERTILIZERS

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:


1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports

from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

E. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: 5-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by

weight plus micronutrients.

F. Chelated Iron: Commercial-grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial-grade FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots.

2.5 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soil: Existing, in-place surface soil. Verify suitability of existing surface soil to produce viable planting soil. Remove stones, roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Stockpile material on-site for future use in appropriate quantity. Mix surface soil with soil amendments and fertilizers as per soil testing recommendations to produce planting soil:

1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Surface Soil by Volume: 4 cubic yards per 1,000 SF minimum. 2. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 10 lbs. 3. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer (20-10-5) per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 10 lbs. 4. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft.: <Insert weight>.

B. Planting Soil: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

1. Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil: Screened and free of stones 2 inch or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes, grubs, other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease-causing plant pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Continuous, air-filled, pore-space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15 percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis.

2. Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with soil amendments and fertilizers as per soil testing recommendations to produce planting soil.


2.6 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Western Red Cedar Mulch. 2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum. 3. Color: Western Red Cedar.

2.7 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

2.8 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS

A. Stakes and Guys:

1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Standard 8-foot high wood stakes. 2. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand, twisted,

0.106 inch in diameter. 3. Tree-Tie Webbing: 2-inch wide (minimum) UV-resistant nylon/cotton blend webbing with heat

sealed ends, tensile strength of 1000 pounds minimum, and brass grommets. 4. Guy Cables: 12-guage minimum galvanized steel with PVC sleeve completely covering area

between guy stake and tree-tie webbing.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2, with waterborne preservative for soil and freshwater use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic; including ammoniacal copper arsenate, ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate, and chromated copper arsenate.

B. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable.

D. Planter Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them.

E. Crusher Fines:


1. ¼” minus 2. Color Wyoming Red (or approved Equal) 3. Applied to 3” depth

F. Wrapping: tree-wrap tape not less than 4 inches wide, designed to prevent borer damage and winter freezing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture

until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Owner’s Representative and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Owner’s Representative's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Owner’s Representative. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.

E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.


F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.

3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments

and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.

a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

3. Spread planting soil to required depth not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Spread approximately one-half the thickness of planting soil over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

C. Before planting, obtain Owner’s Representative's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

1. Excavate approximately two times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped and container-grown stock.

2. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.

3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball.

4. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.

5. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements.

6. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 7. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected overnight, after working hours or when

unattended by Installer's personnel.


B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil as part of the backfill mixture.

C. Obstructions: Notify Owner’s Representative if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material.

D. Drainage: Notify Owner’s Representative if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.

3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND PERENNIAL PLANTING

A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with original root flare 1 inch to 2 inches above adjacent finish grades.

1. Use planting soil for portion of backfill mixture. 2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap,

rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

3.6 TREE, SHRUB, AND PERENNIAL PRUNING

A. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and perennials according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Owner’s Representative, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character.

B. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.


3.7 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of three stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to the location of branching shown on Drawings above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.

2. Orient stakes located along walkways so that guying wire is parallel to the direction of travel. 3. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at

contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

B. Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet in height and more than 3 inches in caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade.

1. Site-Fabricated Staking-and-Guying Method: a. Support trees with strands of cable or multiple strands of tie wire, connected to the brass

grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to stake. Twist wire for slight tension.. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

b. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade.

3.8 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil for backfill.

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.

E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.9 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Trees and Tree-like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-4 inch (after settlement) average thickness, with 24-inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of trunks or stems.


2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-4 inch (after settlement) average thickness of organic mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

3. Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch Insert dimension average thickness of mineral mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.

3.10 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

3.11 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades.

Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

C. Immediately after installation remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

3.13 DISPOSAL

A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING33 1100-1

SECTION 33 1100WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply if available, to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning water distribution systems may be found on the CivilDrawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, themore stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Excavation, trenching, exploratory excavation (pothole), backfill, bedding, soilstabilization, ground water removal, connection to existing mains, and installation of pipe, firehydrants, taps, valves, fittings, valve boxes, and all necessary appurtenances. Also includesremoval and replacement of existing paving or concrete where required, haul and import ofadequate backfill material to meet compaction requirements and removal of existing thrust blockswhere necessary.




3. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading.4. Division 31 Section Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion and

sediment mitigation.5. Division 31 Section “Trenching and Backfilling” for excavating and backfilling of utilities.6. Division 32 Section “Asphalt Paving” for asphalt pavement removal, replacement, materials

and testing.7. Division 32 Section “Concrete Paving” for concrete pavement removal, replacement,

materials and testing.

C. Permits and Fees: Contractor to obtain and pay for all permits required for work in this Section.Pay all fees for inspections by local authorities and utility agency for work specified in thisSection.


A. Submittals


2. Indicate location of manufacturing facility including name, address and distance betweenmanufacturing facility and the proposed site. Provide manufacture’s documentation


WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING33 1100-2

indicating location where the base materials were extracted, mined, quarried, harvested,etc. and the distance between this location and the project site. Also include materialcosts, excluding cost of installation.

B. Product Requirements:

1. Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed thatretains material integrity.

2. Preference shall be given to materials that are manufactured, harvested, extracted,mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.

1.4 REFERENCE TO UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO STANDARDS ANDSPECIFICATIONS

All work of this section shall be performed in conformance to the current published University ofColorado Design and Construction Standards, Latest Edition and as subsequently revised, which areincorporated into these specifications by reference. Supplementary requirements may be developed bythe Engineer to address project-specific conditions, which may supersede the above-referencedspecification.



SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING33 3100-1

SECTION 33 3100SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provision of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditionsand Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if available, to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning the sanitary sewer distribution systems may be found on theCivil Drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein,the more stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Excavation, trenching, removal of existing manholes and piping, backfill,compaction, bedding, soil stabilization, groundwater removal, connection to existing manholes,and installation of pipe, manholes, aggregate base course and gravel where required, servicewyes, service lines, asphalt removal and replacement, and all necessary appurtenances and safetyprecautions. Also includes removal and replacement of existing paving, concrete, topsoil andlandscaping where required.





4. Division 31 Section Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion andsediment mitigation.


6. Division 32 Section “Asphalt Paving” for asphalt pavement removal, replacement,materials and testing.

7. Division 32 Section “Concrete Paving” for concrete pavement removal, replacement,materials and testing.

C. Permits and Fees: Contractor to obtain and pay for all permits required for work in thisSection. Pay all fees for inspections by local authorities and utility agency for work specified inthis Section.


A. Submittals



SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING33 3100-2





1.4 REFERENCE TO CITY OF BOULDER STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

All work of this section shall be performed in conformance to the current published City of BoulderDesign and Construction Standards effective November 16, 2000 and as subsequently revised, whichare incorporated into these specifications by reference. Supplementary requirements may be developedby the Engineer to address project-specific conditions, which may supersede the above-referencedspecification.



STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING33 4100-1

SECTION 33 4100STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provision of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditionsand Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if available, to this Section.

B. Additional information concerning storm water distribution systems may be found on the CivilDrawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, themore stringent requirements shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Excavation, trenching, removal of existing manholes and piping, backfill,compaction, bedding, soil stabilization, ground water removal, connection to existing manholes,and installation of pipe, manholes, inlets, outfalls, aggregate base course and gravel whererequired, asphalt removal and replacement, and all necessary appurtenances and safetyprecautions. Also includes removal and replacement of existing paving, concrete, topsoil andlandscaping where required.





4. Division 31 Section Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control” for erosion andsediment mitigation.


6. Division 32 Section “Asphalt Paving” for asphalt pavement removal, replacement,materials and testing.

7. Division 32 Section “Concrete Paving” for concrete pavement removal, replacement,materials and testing.

C. Permits and Fees: Contractor to obtain and pay for all permits required for work in thisSection. Pay all fees for inspections by local authorities and utility agency for work specified inthis Section.


A. Submittals



STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING33 4100-2





1.4 REFERENCE TO UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO STANDARDS ANDSPECIFICATIONS

All work of this section shall be performed in conformance to the current published University ofColorado Design and Construction Standards, latest edition and as subsequently revised, which areincorporated into these specifications by reference. Supplementary requirements may be developed bythe Engineer to address project-specific conditions, which may supersede the above-referencedspecification.
